Delta Ia-Hmi Dopsoft Um en 20151116
Delta Ia-Hmi Dopsoft Um en 20151116
Asia
Delta Electronics (Jiangsu) Ltd.
Wujiang Plant 3
1688 Jiangxing East Road,
Wujiang Economic Development Zone
Wujiang City, Jiang Su Province, P.R.C. 215200
TEL: 86-512-6340-3008 / FAX: 86-769-6340-7290
Delta Greentech (China) Co., Ltd.
238 Min-Xia Road, Pudong District,
ShangHai, P.R.C. 201209
TEL: 86-21-58635678 / FAX: 86-21-58630003
Delta Electronics (Japan), Inc.
Tokyo Office
2-1-14 Minato-ku Shibadaimon,
Tokyo 105-0012, Japan
TEL: 81-3-5733-1111 / FAX: 81-3-5733-1211
Delta Electronics (Korea), Inc.
1511, Byucksan Digital Valley 6-cha, Gasan-dong,
Geumcheon-gu, Seoul, Korea, 153-704
TEL: 82-2-515-5303 / FAX: 82-2-515-5302
Americas
Delta Products Corporation (USA)
Raleigh Office
P.O. Box 12173,5101 Davis Drive,
Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, U.S.A.
TEL: 1-919-767-3800 / FAX: 1-919-767-8080
Delta Greentech (Brasil) S.A.
Sao Paulo Office
Rua Itapeva, 26 - 3 andar Edificio Itapeva One-Bela Vista
01332-000-So Paulo-SP-Brazil
TEL: 55 11 3568-3855 / FAX: 55 11 3568-3865
Europe
Deltronics (The Netherlands) B.V.
Eindhoven Office
De Witbogt 20, 5652 AG Eindhoven, The Netherlands
TEL: 31-40-2592850 / FAX: 31-40-2592851
*We reserve the right to change the information in this catalogue without prior notice.
2015-10-01
www.deltaww.com
Version
Revised
Page(s)
Revision Contents
N/A
First release.
2012/07/17 DOPSoft-001
2014/03/01 DOPSoft-002
Release
Date
Version
Revised Page(s)
Revision Contents
2014/03/01
DOPSoft-002
ii
Release
Date
Version
Revised Page(s)
Revision Contents
33. Add macro command as below.
33. CH24
2014/03/01 DOPSoft-002
ArrayCopy(P.80)
SPRINTF(P.100)
IPON(P.189)
IPOFF(P.191)
FileSlotRead(P.199)
FileSlotWrite(P.200)
FileSlotRemove(P.203)
FileSlotGetLength(P.204)
FileSlotExport(P.205)
FileSlotImport(P.207)
EXHISTORY(P.231)
EXALARM(P.236)
GetCircleCenter(P.246)
ECAM(P.249)
ArrayCopy
SPRINTF
IPON
IPOFF
FileSlotRead
FileSlotWrite
FileSlotRemove
FileSlotGetLength
FileSlotExport
FileSlotImport
EXHISTORY
EXALARM
GetCircleCenter
ECAM
iii
Release
Date
Version
Revised Page(s)
1.
CH02 P.7
2.
CH02 P.50
3.
CH02 P.107
4.
CH02 P.123
5.
CH02
P.134~P.135
6.
CH02 P.151
7.
CH02 P.151
8.
CH02 P.154
9.
CH02 P.172
10.
CH02 P.189
P.192
11.
CH02
P.199~P.200
P.319~P.320
2015/11/09
12.
CH02 P.203
13.
CH02 P.213
15.
CH02 P.274
16.
CH02 P.277
17.
CH02 P.299
18.
CH03 P.12
19.
CH04 P.12
20.
CH04 P.24~26
P.39~P.41
iv
21.
CH05 P.113
22.
CH08 P.18~P.19
23.
CH11 P.51
24.
CH12 P.22
25.
CH13 P.35P.54
26.
CH14 P.14P.35
27.
CH14 P.21P.41
28.
CH14 P.54~55
29.
CH15 P.49
30.
CH15 P.67
Revision Contents
1. Add CDC driver installation.
2. Add Make Exe of Screen Download Data function.
3. Add Paste the Specified Screen function.
4. Add how to delete screen saver.
5. Add Show Border function.
6. Add Download Boot Screen.
7. Add Reset Default Logo.
8. Add Monitor I/O function.
9. Add Dont show password input window when low
grade function.
10. Add Power on Screen and Speed up HMI page
changing.
11. Add USB Download Mode, Brightness, TP Force
and TP Delay option.
12. Add Multilanguage to 32.
13. Add Time Zone.
14. Add Mark and Space Parity.
15. Add HMI Identifier Setting.
16. Add Global Keypad Setting.
17. Add Device Table.
18. Add EMS_STATUS, LSWITCH_STATUS and
HANDWHEEL_COUNTER of Internal Parameter.
19. Add how to use B10VS511 to connect with DMV.
20. Add Enhance recipe control flag of Control area.
21. Add Cancel Act. Address.
22. Add Variable Color of Pipe (6) and Pipe (7).
23. Add Invisible address of Prestored Message.
24. Add Invisible address of Static Graphic.
25. Add Support EASCII.
26. Add Projection of Trend Graph and X-Y Chart.
27. Add transparent style of Trend Graph and X-Y
Chart.
28. Add Line width, Dot width and Non-current screen
background processing permit.
29. Add Save as Multi of Sampling History data.
30. Add Scale width.
Release
Date
Version
Revised Page(s)
Revision Contents
31. Add draw vertical line and draw horizontal line of
Historical data table.
32. Add show title of Historical data table.
2015/11/09
31.
CH15 P.83~P.84
32.
CH15 P.93
33.
CH15 P.32P.108
34.
CH16 P.28~P.29
35.
CH16 P.37~P.38
36.
CH16 P.47~P.48
37.
CH16 P.55
38.
CH17.P.6P.18
P.28
39.
CH19 P.31
40.
CH19 P.59
P.69P.76
43.
CH22 P.15
44.
CH24 P.89
P.193P.202
45.
CH26 P.19
46.
CH28
47.
CH29
48.
Appendix A P.14
49.
Appendix A P.22.
50.
Appendix A
P.47P.52~P.53
51.
Appendix D
52.
Appendix E
keypad.
Mode.
51. Add description for Write and Read offset
address.
52. Add description of DirectLink.
Contents
1-1
1-1
Specifications
Pentium 4.1Hz and above
RAM
1G MB and above
Disk Space
Display
Printer
Operating System
1-2
Contents
2-1
Installation of DOPSoft............................................................................................4
2-1-1
2-1-2
2-2
2-1
2-2-5-5
Full Screen...................................................................................111
2-2-5-6
I/O Screen....................................................................................112
2-2-5-7
Grid Setting..................................................................................113
2-2-5-8
Cross Reference Table.................................................................115
2-2-5-9
Element Part list...........................................................................116
2-2-5-10
Memory List..................................................................................117
2-2-6
Screen........................................................................................................119
2-2-6-1
New Screen..................................................................................119
2-2-6-2
Open Screen................................................................................120
2-2-6-3
Screen Saver Screen...................................................................121
2-2-6-4
Cut Screen...................................................................................123
2-2-6-5
Copy Screen................................................................................124
2-2-6-6
Paste Screen...............................................................................124
2-2-6-7
Delete Screen..............................................................................124
2-2-6-8
Export..........................................................................................124
2-2-6-9
Import..........................................................................................127
2-2-6-10
Clear Import Data........................................................................127
Screen Open Macro....................................................................128
2-2-6-11
2-2-6-12
Screen Close Macro....................................................................128
2-2-6-13
Screen Cycle Macro....................................................................129
2-2-6-14
Auxiliary Key................................................................................130
2-2-6-15
Screen Properties........................................................................132
2-2-7
Tools...........................................................................................................141
2-2-7-1
Compile........................................................................................142
2-2-7-2
Rebuild All....................................................................................142
2-2-7-3
Download All Data........................................................................144
2-2-7-4
Upload All Data.............................................................................145
2-2-7-5
Download Screen Data.................................................................148
2-2-7-6
Upload Recipe..............................................................................148
2-2-7-7
Download Recipe.........................................................................149
2-2-7-8
Download Logic Data...................................................................149
2-2-7-9
Upload Logic Data........................................................................149
2-2-7-10
Download Boot Screen.................................................................150
2-2-7-11
Reset default logo.........................................................................150
2-2-7-12
On-line Simulation.........................................................................151
Off Line Simulation........................................................................161
2-2-7-13
2-2-7-14
Edit Logic Data..............................................................................161
2-2-7-15
Update Firmware..........................................................................161
2-2-7-16
Get Firmware Information.............................................................162
2-2-7-17
Reset HMI.....................................................................................163
2-2
2-2-8
Options.......................................................................................................164
2-2-8-1
Configuration................................................................................165
2-2-8-2
Communication Setting................................................................212
2-2-8-3
Password Setting.........................................................................229
2-2-8-4
Tag Table......................................................................................231
2-2-8-5
Print Typesetting...........................................................................236
2-2-8-6
Sound Setting...............................................................................238
2-2-8-7
Real Time Clock Setting...............................................................262
2-2-8-8
HMI Identifier Setting....................................................................271
2-2-8-9
Global Keypad Setting..................................................................274
2-2-8-10
File Manage..................................................................................285
2-2-8-11
Device Table.................................................................................296
2-2-8-12
Picture Bank.................................................................................302
2-2-8-13
Text Bank......................................................................................308
2-2-8-14
Environment..................................................................................314
2-2-9
Window........................................................................................................331
2-2-9-1
Close Window...............................................................................331
Close All Windows........................................................................331
2-2-9-2
2-2-9-3
Next Window.................................................................................332
2-2-9-4
Previous Window..........................................................................333
2-2-9-5
Cascade........................................................................................333
2-2-9-6
Title Horizontally............................................................................334
2-2-9-7
Title Vertically................................................................................337
2-2-10 Help.............................................................................................................339
2-2-11 How to Create a Project..............................................................................340
2-2-11-1
Flowchart of Creating Project.......................................................340
2-3
2-1-1
Upon obtaining DOPSoft from the website of Delta, open you PC and log into Windows XP,
followed by running DOPSoft. Once DOPSoft is opened, please follow the following
instructions to conduct the installation:
To install DOPSoft to other storage locations, please press [Browse]; if the default path
is selected, please click [Next].
2-4
Please check if the DOPSoft component is checked, as shown in Figure 2-1-3 below,
followed by clicking [Install].
2-5
2-6
Once the installation is confirmed, the system will display the status bar that shows the
progress of software installation.
Then, it will show Completed once the installation is complete. And your PC will
inform you to install the device driver. Please click [Next] for installation.
2-7
2-8
Please click on [Install] to execute the installation of device driver. Your PC screen will
show The drivers are now installing.
It will show Installation Complete in the screen. Click on [Finish] to close the screen of
device driver installation. Then, click on [Close] to close the installation screen of
DOPSoft software.
2-9
2-10
Figure 2-1-10 Execute DOPSoft from the installation path in Windows XP.
2-1-2
Once acquiring DOPSoft from the website of Delta, open your PC and log into Windows 7.
Please first go to [Control Panel] [User Accounts][Change User Account Settings] to
set the level of user control to [Do Not Notify], as shown in Figure 2-1-11 and 2-1-12.
2-11
Upon completion of setting the user account control, please execute DOPSoft and follow
the instructions below for installation:
Please select [Language], where the three languages Traditional Chinese, Simplified
Chinese, and English are available. Upon completion of selection, please press [OK].
2-12
To install DOPSoft to other storage locations, please press [Browse]; if the default path
is selected, please click [Next].
Please check if the DOPSoft device is checked, as shown in Figure 2-1-15 below,
followed by clicking [Install].
2-13
2-14
Once the installation is confirmed, the system will display the status bar that shows the
progress of software installation.
The Windows Security Authentication will pop up during installation, please select
[Continue the Installation of this Driver], as shown in Figure 2-1-17.
2-15
2-16
Then, it will show Completed once the installation is complete. And your PC will
inform you to install the device driver. Please click [Next] for installation.
2-17
Please click on [Install] to execute the installation of device driver. Your PC screen will
show The drivers are now installing.
It will show Installation Completein the screen. Click on [Finish] to close the screen of
device driver installation. Then, click on [Close] to close the installation screen of
DOPSoft software.
2-19
2-2-1
Execute DOPSoft
Once the software is executed, a screen with no new project will show up, as shown in
Figure 2-2-2.
2-20
2-21
Please click
Configuration Wizard of DOPSoft will pop up, which allows the user to select the model
number of HMI unit or printer and edit project and screen names.Upon completion of the
basic configuration of the project, please click [Next]to configure the communication
protocol.
No.
Item to Note
Description
System
Message
Language
HMI Rotation
2-22
Regarding the communication setting, the user can set the model number of controller,
select COM Port or Ethernet as the communication port, and communicationParameter
between the HMI and controller, as shown in Figure 2-2-1-2.
Tag
Item to Note
Description
Up and Down
Arrows
Multi-Drop
2-23
If the communication is through Ethernet, please directly click the [Ethernet] icon to enter
the configuration of network controller. Click
Ethernet Link, configure parameters such as the model number of the associated controller,
controller IP address, communication delay time, Timeout, and Retry Count, as shown in
Figure 2-2-1-3.
2-24
One can also switch to the [Localhost] page to configure the IP address and enable network
applications for the LocalHost of HMI, as shown in Figure 2-2-1-4.
Item to Note
Description
HMI Localhost
2-25
Upon completion of all configurations, please click [Finish]to open the Project Edit Page in
DOPSoft.
2-26
If the software editing window already contains a modified project, when another existing
file is opened, the software will notify the changes and ask whether to save the file, as
shown in Figure 2-2-1-7.
Figure 2-2-1-7 Window that prompts whether to save the existing file with changes.
2-27
Once the user chooses whether to save the changes, whether the decision is [Yes]that will
save the file or [No]that will not save the file, the existing project file will be directly opened
afterwards, as shown in Figure 2-2-1-8.
The file extension of DOPSoft is .dps. However, one can also open the .dpb files (Screen
Editor 2.00.xx) and .dop files (Screen Editor 1.05.xx) edited by Screen Editor. To open
the .dpb files, one simply copies the old screen data into DOPSoft for editing, where no
changes are made. If one opens the .dop files, DOPSoft will convert all the data in series
A HMI into series B HMI for scree editing. In this case, a window for HMIconversion will
pop up to ask the user which series of HMI to use, as shown in Figs. 2-2-1-9 and
2-2-1-10.
2-28
2-29
NOTE:
When an old version of the HMIproject is opened, such as the .dpb or .dop file edited in
Screen Editor, if it has been edited by DOPSoft and the original file overwritten in file
saving, the old version of Screen Editor wont be able to open this file again. Therefore,
please save an additional copy of the original file as the backup for future uses.
2-30
2-2-1-1-1 Save
To save the file, one can follow [File] [Save]to save the current project file, or do it
through the
icon in the toolbar, or use the hotkey Ctrl+S provided by the software.
All these methods can save the file. When the above three actions are executed, the
software will check if the project file to save is a new project or an existing one and
make decisions accordingly. If a new project is to be saved, a window for saving as a
new file will pop up for the user to save the current project, as shown in Figure 2-2-1-12.
On the contrary, if the file to be saved is an existing project, no window will pop up
when the file is saved. The current project will simply be saved.
2-31
2-2-1-1-2 Save As
To save a file as a new file means saving the screen data currently being edited to the
system hard drive disk with a different filename. This action can only be executed
through choosing [File] [Save As]. In addition, this function will not consider whether
the current project is a new file or an old one. Once this function is executed, a window
for saving as new file will pop up, as shown in Figure 2-2-1-13. Once Save is clicked,
the path to save the project will be designated to that selected in the Save as new file
action.
2-32
2-33
2-2-2
The editing window of DOPSoft consists of eight areas, including Menu, Toolbar, Element
Tool (Element list and Element bank), Property, Output, Screen Manager, Edit Area, and
Status Bar. The layout of these eight areas is shown in Figure 2-2-2-1.
The toolbar contains all standard Windows programs, which can be rearranged as the
toolbar in Windows. For example, the device toolbar can be moved to the left side of the
screen. The user can click and drag to place the toolbar to wherever is preferred, as shown
in Figure 2-2-2-2.
2-34
Menu
DOPSoft offers nine major items in its Menu.
Toolbar
DOPSoftoffers eight major toolbars.
Standard bar
Text bar
Bitmap bar
Element bar
Layout bar
Zoom bar
Language Selection list
Drawing toolbar
2-35
Element Tool
The Element Tool includes the element list and element bank, which provides the list of
available elements and the bank to store the edited elements. The user can store the
edited elements into the Element Bank and only needs to drag them to the screen
editing window the next time they are to be used.
Figure 2-2-2-5 Description on how to create the Element Bank. (1) Please first click the
Element Bank page. (2) Please click
create an element. (4) Please click
2-36
2-37
Property
2-38
Output
The Output records the editing actions of the user and the output messages after
screen editing. When the editing function is executed, DOPSoft will conduct program
compiling and the output field will generate the corresponding messages in case of
errors. When the user clicks the error message, the system will jump to the screen
where the device with error is located for debugging, as shown in Figure 2-2-2-7.
2-39
Screen Manager
If the user creates several screens, he/she can use the function of Screen Manager to
preview the content, which allows the user to learn what types of devices are located in
the screen without having to switch to the particular screen. One can also double click
the screen of interest in the window to quickly switch to this particular screen.
Status Bar
The status bar will display the current editing status, as shown in Figure 2-2-2-9.
2-40
Edit Area
Proper editing range is provided according to the type of HMI selected by the user.
2-41
2-2-3
File
The [File]in the Menu provides functions that include Make Ext. Memory Data, Open Ext.
Memory Data, and Password Protect.
2-42
2-43
2-44
2-45
When the update filed is created, one folder of HMI_AutoUP will be stored in external
device.
NOTE
If both USB Disk and SD Card have the folder of HMI_AutoUP and need to update
firmware and screen data, HMI will update the data in USB Disk first, then SD Card.
Operating procedure of other functions are identical, users insert SD card or USB into HMI.
When HMI is activated, enter System SettingFile Manager to Copy File, update
F/W and Multi Screen File. These three functions will be elaborated in Appendix A.
2-46
Once the screen data file is selected, the software will ask the user whether to rename and
save the opened file, as shown in Figure 2-2-3-9
2-47
2-48
Select the output folder and the name of executable file. Users can change the output folder.
See figure 2-2-3-11.
Figure2-2-3-11 Directory for saving the made screen download .exe file
Press the Make button and start to make download screen program.
2-49
2-50
In output folder, you will find DownloadScreen.exe (executable file). It can be executed by
directly double clicking on it. This enables users to download the screen program to HMI
when not installing DOPSoft software.
Click on DownloadScreen.exe and the screen will show as below:
2-51
The user can click again on [File] [Password Protect]to check if this function is enabled in
the current project file. If so, the result will be as shown in Figure 2-2-3-17.
Once the feature of Password Protect is enabled, the user can change the password. The
password can be changed by modifying the default password 12345678 through
[Options] [Configuration].
2-52
After the password is set, please close and save the project. When the project is opened
the next time, the system will ask the user to enter password to open the file protected by
password.
If the entered password is incorrect, the software will display the window with the message
of incorrect password to notify the user.
2-53
Press [Retry]to enter the password again. Click [Cancel]to exit the window for password
entry.
If the entered password is correct, the associated project can be opened.
To cancel password protect, one must click [File] [Password protect]to disable this
function. Similarly, the software will also notify the user that password protect is disabled.
The user can also click [File] [Password protect]again to check if password protect is
disabled on the current project file. If so, the result is as shown in Figure 2-2-3-22, where
the option of Password Protect is unchecked.
After cancelling Password Protect, please close and save the project. The next time when
the project is opened, the user will not need to enter the password to open the project.
Password Protect can be executed with Creating Screen Data File. Users can decide
whether to enter password and determine if Password Protect is needed when copying the
file from external device to HMI. Please the descriptions below:
Password Protect
Table 2-2-3-1 Example of Password Protect
Check Password
Protect
2-54
Password Protect
Table 2-2-3-1 Example of Password Protect
Creating Screen
Data File
2-55
Password Protect
Table 2-2-3-1 Example of Password Protect
Result
2-56
2-2-4
Edit
The [Edit]in Menu offers the following functions for the user to utilize.
2-2-4-1 Duplicate
The function of Duplication allows one to execute Duplicate by directly selecting a certain
device followed by clicking the right button of mouse. Or one can select a certain device
and automatically increase or decrease address according to need to reduce the time for
manual device address duplication. Click [File] [Duplicate] can also execute this function.
Once this function is clicked, the result is as shown in Figure 2-2-4-2.
2-57
The following table describes the details in Duplicate, including Number of Copies, Spacing
(Pixels), and Offset.
Columns
Number of
Copies
Rows
the
selections
to
enable
or
disable
the
corresponding duplication.
Spacing
(Pixels)
Horizontal
Vertical
X-Direction
Offset
Y-Direction
X-Direction
Y-Direction
Please refer to the table below for the example of how to configure Duplicate.
2-58
Example of Duplicate
Table 2-2-4-2 Example of Duplicate
Word
Bit
$0
$0.0
Word
Bit
Element Address
Number of
Copies
Spacing (Pixels)
Offset
Result of
Execution
2-59
freeform, donut, No symbol, arc, and pie are created, as shown in Table 2-2-4-3.
Before Edit Endpoint
Freeform
Donut
No Symbol
Arc
Pie
The user can adjust the shapes by editing the endpoints, which highlights the flexibility of
this function, as shown in Table 2-2-4-4.
After Edit Endpoint
Freeform
Donut
No Symbol
Arc
Pie
2-60
2-2-4-3 Find
To find the designated texts and addresses, one can click [Edit] [Find]or use the hotkey
CTRL + F provided by the system. This function can enable the user to quickly find the
results. Once the Find function is clicked, please first enter the content to find, followed by
choosing to searchthe current screen or All Screen in the find selections. The find type can
beused to find the text, Read Address, Write Address, or All Address of the element, as
shown in Figure 2-2-4-3.
Once the method of Find is verified, click Find and the system will start searching for the
content that matches the entry. Once the matched content is located, the associated
element will be output to the options in the output field. When one clicks the options in the
output field, the cursor will automatically lock in this particular element, as shown in Figure
2-2-4-4.
2-61
The detailed configuration screen of the Find function will be described below.
Find
Table2-2-4-5 Description of Find Function
Find
What
Current
Screen
Options
The find will cover All Screen and compare all elements in All
Screen. Those that match the find content will be displayed in
the window of output field. Similarly, the user can double click in
the Output to find the elements that are found.
AllScreen
Type
2-62
Text
Element
Read
Find
Table2-2-4-5 Description of Find Function
Address
Element
Write
Address
Check
box
2-2-4-4 Replace
To replace a certain designated text or address, one can use [Edit] [Replace]or use the
hotkey CTRL + R provided by the system. Enter the content of Find What, followed by
choosing Current Screen or All Screen in Options. The replacement type can be text, read
address, or write address. The item for the Data Type is only available when the
replacement type is Read Address or write address, with options of BIT, WORD, or
DWORD, as shown in Figure 2-2-4-5.
2-63
The detailed configuration screen of the Replace function will be described below.
Replace
Table2-2-4-6 Example of Replace
Find What
Replacement
Content
Current Screen
All Screen
Options
Text
Replacement
Type
Read Address
Write Address
Bit
WORD
Data Type
DWORD
Filtering
Condition
The filtering condition is only enabled when the replacement type is read
address or write address, with available options of element, macro,
Control State, History, alarm, recipe, sound, and Screen print setup.
Example
(1) Set the Write Address for the add and minus buttons to be $555
(2) Execute the replacement function and enter the find content of [$555]
and replacement content of [$999]. Since the address of the add and
minus buttons are set to be the memory to write in, the replacement
type is therefore selected to be [Write Address]. When the Data Type
of the add and minus buttons is Word, [Word]must be selected.
(3) Upon configuration, click [Replace All]to show the screen with No. (3).
(4) Click [Yes]in screen No. (3) and the $555 of the add and minus
buttons will be changed to $999.
2-64
Replace
Table2-2-4-6 Example of Replace
2-65
Find Station
Value
Replace
Enter the data content that replaces the existing data
Station Value
The Link Name for replacement can be determined based on the Base
Port created by the user, as shown in the figure below.
Link Name
There are eight categories in the replacement type available for the user to
select from, which are listed in the figure below:
Replacement
type
2-66
Example
2-67
2-2-4-6 Group
To utilize the Group function, please first select at least two elements before the Group
action can be conducted. One can directly click [Edit] [Group]or click the group icon
in the Layout bar
, or use the
2-68
To edit the grouped elements as a single element, one only needs to click the grouped
element and select the single element to edit, followed by double clicking the selected
element to start editing.
NOTE:
Regardless of how many single elements are selected originally, once they are
grouped, they will be treated as one single element by the software. For example,
moving one element will move all the elements that are grouped together. Similarly,
resizing one element will resize all the elements that are grouped together.
Group
Table 2-2-4-8 Example of Group function
Before
grouping
Move
Resize
After
grouping
After grouping, the two elements
move together
After grouping, the two elements are
resized together
2-69
2-2-4-7 Ungroup
To use the ungroup function, please select grouped elements first. One can click directly
[Edit] [Ungroup] or click the
the right button of the mouse. The ungrouped elements will no longer be treated as one
element and can only be processed individually.
2-70
2-2-4-8 Order
The function Order includes the options of [Bring to Front], [Send to Bottom], [Bring
Forward], and [Send Backward]. Once the order within the element is configured, the
associated element order will vary with the sequence by which the elements are created,
which will affect the order the elements are blocked by each other. The user can directly
select [Edit] [Order] or click the
Icon
Item
Content
The figure below contains three elements and No. (3) is
selected for [Bring to Front]in this example.
Before
Bring to
Front
After the process, No. (3) has been brought to the very top
level of the three elements.
After
2-71
Order
Table2-2-4-9 Example of the function of order
Before
Send to
Bottom
After the process, No. (3) has been sent to the very bottom
level of the three elements.
After
2-72
Order
Table2-2-4-9 Example of the function of order
Before
Bring
Forward
After
Send
Backward
Before
2-73
Order
Table2-2-4-9 Example of the function of order
After the process, No. (3) has been sent back by one level
and located at the last level among the three elements.
After
2-74
2-2-4-9 Align
The align functions allows the user to conduct actions such as [Align Left], [Align Right],
[Align Top], [Align Bottom], [Centered], [Middle Centered], [TransverseUniform Spacing],
and [LongitudinalUniform Spacing]. This function enables the user to align the coordinates
of the elements. To execute this function, please directly select [Edit] [Align]or click the
icon in the Layout Bar.
NOTE:
The reference element is the one that is selected first. If multiple elements are
selected, the one enclosed by the green frame is the reference element.
[Align Left], [Align Right], [Align Top],and [Align Bottom]can only be executed when at
least two elements are selected. This is because that the alignment needs to be done
by using the left, right, top, and bottom coordinates of the reference element as the
new coordinates of all elements.
[Centered]and [Middle Centered]can be used on a single element, which will
automatically align the center coordinate of the element according to the settings.
[Transverse Uniform Spacing]and [Longitudinal Uniform Spacing]can only work when
at least three elements are selected. To execute the horizontal uniform spacing, the
software will calculate the horizontal spacing between adjacent elements and make it
uniform through rearrangement. In the case of longitudinal uniform spacing, the
software will calculate the height between adjacent elements and make it uniform
through rearrangement.
2-75
Align
Table 2-2-4-10 Example of the Align function
Icon
Item
Content
At least two elements need to be selected to
execute Align Left.
Before
Align Left
After
2-76
Align
Table 2-2-4-10 Example of the Align function
Before
Align Right
After
2-77
Align
Table 2-2-4-10 Example of the Align function
Before
Align Top
After
Align Bottom
2-78
Before
Align
Table 2-2-4-10 Example of the Align function
After
Before
Centered
After
2-79
Align
Table 2-2-4-10 Example of the Align function
Before
Middle
Centered
After
Transverse
Uniform
Spacing
2-80
Before
Align
Table 2-2-4-10 Example of the Align function
Longitudinal
Uniform
Spacing
Before
2-81
Align
Table 2-2-4-10 Example of the Align function
After
2-82
NOTE:
The reference element is the one that is selected first. If multiple elements are
selected, the one enclosed by the green frame is the reference element.
To execute the Make Same Size function, please select at least two elements. The
software will be based on the selected reference element to conduct uniform width,
uniform height, or uniform size.
2-83
Item
Content
Uniform Width is conducted with the element on the left
as reference.
Before
Uniform
Width
After
2-84
Before
Uniform
Height
After
2-85
Before
Make Same
Size
After
2-86
Text Process
Table 2-2-4-11 Example of Text Process
Icon
Item
Content
Before
Align Text to
Left
After
Before
Text Center
Horizontally
After
2-87
Text Process
Table 2-2-4-11 Example of Text Process
Before
Align Text to
Right
After
Before
Align Text to
Top
After
Before
Text Center
Vertically
After
2-88
Text Process
Table 2-2-4-11 Example of Text Process
Before
Align Text to
Bottom
After
The function of Text Process further enables the user to link to the Text Bankto import
existing texts into the selected element, as shown in the figure below.
When Text Bank is used to create the text, the user can choose whether to use the fonts
therein. If so, after text import, the fonts of texts in the corresponding elements will also be
changed accordingly.
2-89
Figure 2-2-4-8 Use the font from the Text Bank on the imported texts.
In addition, if the user has created multiple languages, the associated text data can also be
edited in advance in the Text Bank, as shown in Figure 2-2-4-9.
Execute [Text Process] [Import Text] and check [Import Selected All Languages], then the
edited data of multiple languages in the Text Bankwill be imported into the selected
element.
2-90
Figure 2-2-4-10 After import of multiple languages data from the Text Bank.
.
After importing the text from Text Bank, users can modify the text in Text Bank again. Then,
click close. A message will pop up to ask if users are going to update the message. Choose
Yes, the text will be updated immediately; chooseNo, the text will remain the same.
2-91
Figure 2-2-4-11 Synchronization of the content in text bank and the display text
Please see 2-2-8-13 Introduction of Text Bank for details of how to create and utilize the
Text Bank
2-2-4-12 Bitmap
This function can process the state of the element graph, such as Align Left, Align Right,
and Centered, etc. The user can use [Edit] [Bitmap]or click the Bitmap Bar
.
Bitmap
Table 2-2-4-12 Example of bitmap
Icon
Item
Content
Make
Element
Transparent
orange part on the broom. The software will change the orange
2-92
Bitmap
Table 2-2-4-12 Example of bitmap
Before
After
Process All
States
Graph Mode
Switch
If the user checks to process graphs with all states, it means that
the element has various state values and the associated graph
does no expand over the entire area. All graphs therein can be
processed by checking this function, which avoids individual
configurations and renders time-saving editing.
Expand over
all the area
All area
Expand with
maintained
aspect
ration
Maintained Aspect
Ratio
Actual Size
Graph will be
expanded by the
original aspect ratio,
2-93
Bitmap
Table 2-2-4-12 Example of bitmap
Actual Size
Before
AlignGraph
to Left
After
Before
Graph
Center
Horizontally
After
2-94
Bitmap
Table 2-2-4-12 Example of bitmap
Before
AlignGraph
To Right
After
Before
Align Graph
to Top
After
2-95
Bitmap
Table 2-2-4-12 Example of bitmap
Before
Graph
Center
Vertically
After
Before
Align Graph
to Bottom
After
2-96
After the user exports multi-languages text, the software will ask the user whether to save
the exported file.
2-97
Upon completion of saving, please open the associated file at the path where it is saved.
One can find that the file will display the text data in multiple languages located in the
current project, as shown in the figure below.
2-98
2-99
2-100
When the user imports Multi-Language Text, the software will ask the user to select which
file to import.
2-101
Once the text in multiple languages is imported, the user can check if the edited data has
been completely imported.
2-102
Chinese
English
Chinese
English
Before
Import
After
Import
Please see Chapter 25 for complete details on how to use the multi-languages.
2-103
2-2-5
View
The [View]in the function menu provides the following functions for the user to utilize.
Details of [Screen Manager], [Zoom In], [Zoom Out], [Actual Size], [Full Screen],
[I/OScreen], [Grid Setup], [Cross Reference Table], [Element Part List], and [Memory List].
2-104
In the Screen Manager, one can click the right button of mouse to execute certain actions
involving the screen, as shown in the figure below.
2-105
New
Screen
Edit
Cut
Copy
Paste
Delete
This function is the same as [Screen] [New Screen]. Both can create a new
screen. Please see 2-2-6-1 New Screen for details of configuration.
The user can directly click on a certain screen in the Screen Manager and
press edit to go to the editing window of the selected screen.
The functions of cut, copy, paste and delete screens are the same as those
through [Screen] [Cut]/ [Copy]/ [Paste]/ [Delete]. Please see 2-2-6-4 Cut
Screen,2-2-6-5 Copy Screen,2-2-6-6 Paste Screen, and 2-2-6-7 Delete
Screen for details of configuration.
With this function, users can paste the copied screen to the specified screen
ID. It is also allowed to copy batch screen. Users can copy multiple screens,
specifying the start screen ID to be pasted and the system will assign the
number in sequence automatically.
Paste the
Specified
Screen
NOTE:
If the specified screen No. exists, a new screen number will automatically
be generated (exists number +1).
Export
Rename
2-106
Set
Default
Screen
Auxiliary
Key
Screen
Save
Screen
The Auxiliary Key only supports the HMI models equipped with this feature,
such as B07S201 and B07S211. If the HMI model in use does not have
Auxiliary Key, this function will be disabled. Please see 2-2-6-14 Auxiliary Key
for details.
The screen protection has the same function as [Screen] [Screen Save
Screen]. Please see 2-2-6-3 Screen Save Protection for details.
One can click the screen properties function to configure the features of
screen. These include configuring whether the screen is the sub-screen and
Screen
Properties the name of the sub-screen, width and height of screen, and X-Y coordinates,
etc. Please see 2-2-6-15 Screen Properties for details.
Table 2-2-5-1 Settings of Screen Manager
2-2-5-2 Zoom In
The user can use the function of Zoom In to enlarge the screen for the convenience of
editing. The user can also directly click the
2-107
Screen
size is
75% of
window
size
before
zoom in
Screen
size is
100% of
window
size
after
zoom in
2-108
icon in the Zoom toolbar to shrink the screen. Please Table 2-2-5-3 below for
details.
2-109
100%, which is scaled with respect to the screen size of the HMI. The user can also directly
click
icon in the Zoom toolbar to restore the screen back to 100%. Please see Table
2-110
2-111
2-112
Show
Grid is
not
checked
2-113
Show
Grid is
checked
Grid
Setting
Spacing
2-114
To use the Cross Reference Table, please first select a certain element. It is
noteworthy that the address listed in the cross reference table is the address that does
not include the memory address of the current element.
2-115
Categorize by address
ROM
The default storage location in case of power outage is static random access
memory (SRAM).
When the project file edited by the user contains data such as history and
alarm, they can be used to check the usage.
Non-Vola
tile Area
SDRAM
It displays the SRADM space required for the operation of each screen,
where the usage is calculated by page. If the project has two pages, SDRAM
will displaydata of two screens.
2-117
This feature refers to the space used by external storage. When the location
of non-volatile area is set as an external device such as USB disk or SD card,
the data blocks originally stored in the non-volatile area (SRAM) will be
moved to the external storage.
Non-volatile storage
External
Storage
2-118
2-2-6
Screen
The [Screen]in the function menu offers the following features for the user to utilize.
2-119
2-120
Step1
First, select the screen for screen saveron the left. Next, click and hold the
left button of the mouse, a green arrow will appear that allows the user to
drag the selected screen.
Step2
Step3
Once the screen greenarrow appears, one can start dragging the screen.
The figure below shows screen with No. 2 has been dragged into screen
saver.
2-121
If desire to delete the screen saver screen, long press the screen that you
wish to delete and the screen will be shown as below. See the part that
marked by red frame.
Step4
Step5
2-122
Click and hold the left button of the mouse. Drag the screen to the left area. A
big black X symbol will appear. Release the button to delete the screen.
2-123
2-2-6-8 Export
To save the screen data currently being edited to the hard drive disk in graphic format
(.bmp file), one can click [Screen] [Export] or the
icon in the standard toolbar. One
can use the system hotkey [Shift + E].
Once the export action is done, the system will ask the user whether to show the frames on
the exported screen.
2-124
When one clicks Yes, the default filename is HMI with the format of .bmp.
2-125
If the option of show frame is checked, the picture will be framed by bold black borders.
2-126
2-2-6-9 Import
This feature involves loading any of the available pictures as the background figure of the
associated screen. The formats available for import include BMP,JPG,GIF,ICO, and PNG.
One can select [Screen] [Import] or use the system hotkey [Shift + I].
NOTE:
Import base screen is different from selecting the base screen. The imported picture
data will not be treated as element. After the base picture is edited, however, it will be
saved in the associated screen as element.
Please see 2-2-6-15 Screen Properties for the definition and method of use for the
base screen.
2-127
2-128
2-129
The Auxiliary Key has Global and Local settings available for selection. After pressing
2-130
[Auxiliary Key], the user can click on the Auxiliary Key to show the options of Local and
Global.
NOTE:
If both Local and Global settings are being configured, the software will choose to
operate by the Local settings.
Global
When the user configure key F1 to be [System Menu]and set it to [Global], it means that if
there are ten screens, no matter which screen the user switches to, [System Menu]will
always be executed whenever F1 is pressed.
Local
When the user configure key F1 to be [System Menu]and set it to [Global]in the first screen,
it means that [System Menu]will only be executed when F1 is pressed in the first screen.
2-131
2-132
Please refer to Table 2-2-6-2 below for details on how to configure the screen properties.
Item
Content of Description
Screen No.
Screen
Applications
General View
Use as the general view screen.
Screen
Apply Print
Screen
Screen
Check
Settings of
Sub-screen
NOTE:
Screen Width Set the width of screen, with the unit of Pixel.
Screen Height Set the height of screen, with unit of Pixel.
2-133
Item
Content of Description
The sub-screen can be set automatically [Place at Screen
Center] when opened or the user can specify the location.
Please directly enter the coordinates or click
to enter
modify preview to resize or move the location, as shown in
the figure below:
Display
Location of
Sub-screen
Settings of
Sub-screen
Enable this function means the sub screen will show border.
Disable it will not show border on sub screen. See the figure
below.
Show Border
2-134
Item
Content of Description
The user can decide as preferred whether to display the title
bar and can also select the associated languages. The size,
font, and color of text can also be changed.
Display Title
Bar
HardCopy
Region
Settings
Top-left
Define the area to be printed through hard copy, with the unit
Right-Bottom of Pixel.
2-135
Item
Content of Description
IfScreen selectas sub-screen, the need base screen option is
unavailable for selection.
Check Need
Base Screen
Base
Every screen can designate any screen as its base screen.
Screen Once the base screen is configured, it will be placed at the
very bottom in the editing area as the background image.
2-136
Item
Content of Description
Single
The user can go to any screen and use other screens as the
base screen. Single means that only one screen is used as
the base screen.
Multiple
2-137
Item
Content of Description
Users can use this bit to lock the screen. When the setting
value is 1, the screen is locked. Users can only select the
element on current screen. If the setting value is 0, the
screen is unlocked. All elements on HMI can be chose. Users
can use constant or memory address to control the screen
locked bit.
Type
Internal
Variables
Screen Locked Bit
Memory
PLC
Register
Constant
Create the
sub-screen
Screen Locked Bit
Create
maintained
button
Maintained button
Write to
Memory
address
Create a
button to
change the
screen
2-138
Screen 1
$100.0
Screen 2
$100.1
$100.2
Item
Content of Description
Lock screen 2
Open screen 2
Result
Cannot be pressed
Can be
pressed
Open screen 2
Can be
pressed
2-139
Item
Content of Description
NOTE
2-140
2-2-7
Tools
The [Tools]in the function menu offers the following features for the user to utilize.
NOTE
Edit Logic Data and Download Logic Data is only support at HMC Model.
If select non-HMC model, the above two options will disable.
2-141
2-2-7-1 Compile
To provide the user with more convenient operation and use of DOPSoft, the function of
page compiling is made available. This compiling function is different from Rebuild All. For
example, if several screens are created but the user only edits one of them, the user only
needs to execute [Compile]instead of [Rebuild All], which can save the compiling time,
unlike the time-consuming process with Rebuild All.
link to the elements where error occurs. The user can click [Tools] [Rebuild All] or click
the
Both Compile and Rebuild All are provided to ensure there is no error in the edited screen.
The compiling message will be displayed in the output field. In case of errors after
compiling, the associated error information will also be shown as a reminder to the user.
The user can click on the message generated and displayed in the output field to link to the
elements where the error occurs.
2-143
use the system hotkey [Ctrl+F8]. When the user executes Download All Data, the software
will check if HMI is connected to PC. If the communication between them is not established,
an error message window will pop up during download as a warning to the user.
Normal transmission
Abnormal transmission
Check USB
channel
Check Model
2-144
Upon entering the new password, the software will ask the user to save the screen to be
uploaded, as shown in Figure 2-2-7-6.
Revision June, 2015
2-145
Upon configuring the file to be saved and the associated path, the upload of screen data
will start until 100% complete. One can also click Cancel to stop the upload.
In addition to uploading the data to the PC end, the user can also check through
[Options] [Environmental]to determine whether to send the graph data in upload.
2-146
2-147
2-148
2-149
If the boot screen function is not enabled, an error will occur which shown as below.
If no boot screen is selected, an error will occur when downloading the screen which shown
as below.
2-150
hotkey [Ctrl+F4].
2-151
After the user executes On-line Simulation, the software will ask the user to set the number
of the communication port at the PC end that corresponds to HMI, as shown in the figure
below.
When all the settings are correct, the On-line Simulation can represent the communication
between HMI and PLC.
The Com Port Setting window contains the [Ask on every time] option, which allows the
user to determine whether the Com Port Setting window pops up everytime On-line
Simulation is executed. If [Ask on every time] is unchecked, please click the right button of
2-152
mouse in the On-line Simulation screen to select [Com Setting] to show the window in
Figure 2-2-7-17 again.
Figure 2-2-7-17 Click the right button of mouse to enter Com Setting
On-line Simulation also provides Monitor IO function, which can monitor the content of I/O
device.
Right click the mouse in the screen of On-line Simulation and select [Monitor IO]. A window
which shown as figure 2-2-7-18 will pop up so that users can set up and monitor I/O device.
2-153
New item
New blank
Delete item
Start
Monitor
Stop
Monitor
2-154
Device Addr.
Device
Value
Value
Format
It sets the value format, which has four can be selected, namely
signed decimal, unsigned decimal, hexadecimal andbit.
2-155
Step1: Create two numeric entry elements and set the write-in
memory address to $500 and {Link2}2@D100.
Create
numeric
entry
elements
Enter
Monitor IO
2-156
Example of Monitor IO
Table 2-2-7-3 Example of Monitor IO
2-157
Example of Monitor IO
Table 2-2-7-3 Example of Monitor IO
Setup
monitoring
address
2-158
Example of Monitor IO
Table 2-2-7-3 Example of Monitor IO
2-159
Example of Monitor IO
Table 2-2-7-3 Example of Monitor IO
Monitor IO can timely monitor the set address. Users can monitor the
content of {Link2}2@D100 and $500 in the field of Device Value. It
also allows users to change the device content in Monitor IO screen.
Start
Monitor
Result
2-160
[Ctrl+F5].
After Off Line Simulation, the software will also conduct compiling first and then enter the
olline simulation screen, same as shown in Figure 2-2-7-16.
2-161
2-162
When [Yes] is selected, the HMI will immediately execute the Recovery action.
NOTE:
2-163
2-2-8
Options
The [Options]in the function menu provides the following features for the user to utilize.
2-164
2-2-8-1 Configuration
Configuration contains five pages: Main, Control Block, Print, Default, Others and Network
App.
The content configurations of [Main], [Print], [Default], [Others] and [Network App] will be
described below. Please see Chapter 4, Control Area and Status Area, for details of Control
command.
[Configuration] [Main]
Table 2-2-8-1 Configuration-Main
HMI Type
[Configuration] [Main]
Table 2-2-8-1 Configuration-Main
add new Ethernet link. Models without Auxiliary Key cannot utilize the
associated function.
HMI Rotation
Angle
to save the data with available storage locations being HMI, USB disk
and SD.
The user can click [Setting] to enter the non-volatile data location for
the configurations of alarm, recipe, and History.
Non-volatile
Data Location
The size of
writing USB
cache
2-166
The data written by HMI into USB disk will be temporarily stored in the
cache. However, the size of writing USB cache applies only when the
data size in cache is below this value. Data will not be actually written
Revision June, 2015
[Configuration] [Main]
Table 2-2-8-1 Configuration-Main
into the USB disk. This measure can avoid damaging the USB disk
due to constant writing in.
If the data size the user plans to save is smaller than the buffer
capacity or three is an unexpected outage, it may lead to data loss. To
avoid such incidence, regular forced triggering the associated flag top
write the data into the USB disk can be done to ensure the data exist.
The security password is the one with the highest security level in
HMI, which is level 8. The default security password is [12345678],
which is used to control upload and download of screen data and
recipe (Password Authentication must be checked first), Password
Protect, execution of system formatting, system file encryption, and
copy file (Enable USB updating check must be checked first). The
format for the password text is 0~F by hexadecimal unit.
The Starting Level must be used along with the user security level of
each individual element properties.
The Starting Level is the authorization level when HMI starts, which
Security
password
Starting Level
2-167
[Configuration] [Main]
Table 2-2-8-1 Configuration-Main
Step1
Set
Starting
Level to 5
Step2
2-168
Set the
user
security
level of
Goto
Screen to
6
[Configuration] [Main]
Table 2-2-8-1 Configuration-Main
Step3
Insufficient
Password
Level
Reminder
Execute
Goto
Screenup
on
download
ing it to
HMI
If the user security level of an element is higher than the Starting Level
and the user also checks this option, the
2-169
[Configuration] [Main]
Table 2-2-8-1 Configuration-Main
Step1
Insufficie
nt
password
level
reminder
when Set
Starting
Level is
5
Dont show
password
input window
when low
grade
2-170
Step2
Set the
User
Security
Level of
Goto
Screen
button to
6
Step3
When you check Dont show password input window when low
grade, screen that requires users to enter the password will not pup
up when you have no authority to access the system.
[Configuration] [Main]
Table 2-2-8-1 Configuration-Main
2-171
[Configuration] [Main]
Table 2-2-8-1 Configuration-Main
Enable /
disable
buzzer
If this option is checked, one must first download this setting to HMI
before executing the download of screen data and recipe for the
second time. The software will then ask the user to enter the
Password.
Sound ON
Download
Password
It is only when the password is entered successfully can the screen data
be downloaded to HMI. If unsuccessfully, a warning window will pop up to
notify the user that download cannot be conducted due to incorrect
password.
Enable USB
updating
check
Enable USB updating check mainly involves file encryption and file
duplication. As a result, the user can encrypt the screen data and
meanwhile configure the limit of times of duplication, which provides
the user with safe and flexible file protection. Please see the
description below for details:
Step1
2-172
[Configuration] [Main]
Table 2-2-8-1 Configuration-Main
Step2
2-173
[Configuration] [Main]
Table 2-2-8-1 Configuration-Main
Step3
Step4
Encrypt]icon
please click [
2-174
cannot be found in
[File Manager],
[Configuration] [Main]
Table 2-2-8-1 Configuration-Main
Step5
Step6
2-175
[Configuration] [Main]
Table 2-2-8-1 Configuration-Main
Set the limit of times for file duplication. When the Copy
Counter reaches 0, the associated screen file cannot be
duplicated any more.
Step7
Step8
Step9
2-176
[Configuration] [Main]
Table 2-2-8-1 Configuration-Main
Step10
Step11
2-177
[Configuration] [Main]
Table 2-2-8-1 Configuration-Main
Step12
Step13
2-178
[Configuration] [Main]
Table 2-2-8-1 Configuration-Main
Step14
Step15
2-179
[Configuration] [Main]
Table 2-2-8-1 Configuration-Main
This function works when users download the screen into HMI and
then upload all data, DOPSoft will display the following message to
inform users that the data is unable to be uploaded.
The non-volatile data location for alarm, History, and recipe can be
USB disk or SD card. As a result, when the read/write in the external
disk fails, one can use this option to decide whether to show the
associated warning.
The disk read/write failure means that if the non-volatile data location
for history is USB disk but it cannot be detected by HMI and the data
cannot be written.
Therefore, if [Show disk access error message] is unchecked, when
HMI cannot detect the USB Disk and is unable to write the data into it,
no error message will appear to notify the user.
Prevent
Upload
Show disk
access error
message
Startup Delay Time is set to wait for the controller to start, with a range
of 0~ 255 seconds.
If the Startup Delay Time is set to 3 seconds, once the file is
downloaded to HMI, the system will countdown from 3 seconds to 0
second to start HMI, as shown in the figure below.
Startup Delay
Time
2-180
[Configuration] [Main]
Table 2-2-8-1 Configuration-Main
Clock Marco
Delay Time
Clock Marco
Priority
Clock Marco Delay Time has a range of 50 ms ~ 65535 ms. This time
refers to the length of delay after each execution of Clock macro.
Clock Marco Priority has three levels: low, medium, and high.
This function determines the priority for Clock macro execution. Higher
priority can ensure more precise Clock macro delay time.
Background
marco update
cycle
System
Message
Language
Shown below is the System Menu screen messages, which are set to
Traditional Chinese, Spanish, Simplified Chinese, and English,
Revision June, 2015
2-181
[Configuration] [Main]
Table 2-2-8-1 Configuration-Main
respectively.
Traditional
Chinese
Spanish
Simplified
Chinese
2-182
[Configuration] [Main]
Table 2-2-8-1 Configuration-Main
English
2-183
[Configuration] [Print]
Table 2-2-8-2 Configuration-Print
Print includes Screen Print and Hard Copy. Please see Chapter 26, Print Setting, for details
of Print.
The user can choose what type and model of printer to use. DOPSoft
offers printer with the following brands for the user to choose.
The paper type will differ according to the printer model. In general,
available options are A4, Letter, Report, and CUSTOM.
The user can define the top, bottom, left, and right margins that are
reserved in printing, namely, the regions to be left blank.
The margin is measured by the unit of mm, with the range of 0 mm ~
Printer
Paper
Quality
Margin
2-184
[Configuration] [Print]
Table 2-2-8-2 Configuration-Print
550 mm.
Print Size is only effective to set the width and height of printing when
Paper is set to CUSTOM.
Width and height of Print Size are measured by the unit of mm.
Print Size
Interface
Width and height of Print Size can be set. It can be magnified to 400%
and minimized to 10%. Its default is 100%.
When the scaling ratio of width and height is set to high, a warning
message will pop up after compiling.
The printer interface includes USB and COM Port, which are available
for selection depending on the printer selected to be used.
When COM Port is selected as the interface, the associated
communication port, interface, data bit, parity, and Baud rate must be
2-185
[Configuration] [Print]
Table 2-2-8-2 Configuration-Print
Vertical
Direction
Horizontal
Auto Next
Page
2-186
Auto Next Page means that the printer will automatically back the
paper and put on a new page to print. When the first page finishes
printing, the printer will automatically change to the next page and
continue printing. If unchecked, when the current page finishes
printing, it will be backed and the user is asked to manually change the
page.
[Configuration] [Default]
Table 2-2-8-3 Configuration-Default
Start up
Screen
System
Default
The initial screen when HMI starts. The user can choose
other screens as preferred as the Start up screen, which is
by default screen No. 1.
The initial screen when HMI power on. Users can set the
selected figure as the power on screen.
Power on
Screen
2-187
[Configuration] [Default]
Table 2-2-8-3 Configuration-Default
[Configuration] [Default]
Table 2-2-8-3 Configuration-Default
and PNG.
Default Screen
Background
Default Format
System Error
Display Time
NOTE
Disabled
Check
Password
Uncheck
Password
System Key
Use Mode
System Key
Password
System
Default Font
Revision June, 2015
2-189
[Configuration] [Default]
Table 2-2-8-3 Configuration-Default
Speed up HMI
page changing
This refers to the default element font, font size, and text
color in creating an element. The default element font is
Arial, the default font size is 12, and the default text color
is black.
Element Font
Size/Text
Color
2-190
[Configuration] [Default]
Table 2-2-8-3 Configuration-Default
Scroll Size
Blink Time
Sequence of
updating value
while changing
[Configuration] [Default]
Table 2-2-8-3 Configuration-Default
Multistate.
CurveTrend Graph.
AnalogSlider.
Updating
values,
then
communic
ation
Updating
values
after
communic
ation
2-192
[Configuration] [Default]
Table 2-2-8-3 Configuration-Default
2-193
[Configuration] [Others]
Table 2-2-8-4Configuration-Others
Enable
touch
cursor
2-194
HMI provides the same cursor as in the Windows system. When the HMI
screen is touched, the cursor icon will appear.
HMI support wireless mouse with Unifying receiver.
Blue LED mode has four modes: [Disable], [COM], [Access Data], and
[Ethernet].
When the Blue LED mode is set to be COM, Access Data, or Ethernet,
the system will show that Blue LED is blinking when the COM port is in
communication, access data is in process, or Ethernet is in use, as shown
in the figure below.
It will
display
initial
screen at
start
Blue LED
mode
Disable
COM
Access Data
2-195
Ethernet
Normal
Disk
USB
Download
CDC
Brightness
TP Delay
2-196
TP Force
It sets the sensitivity to forcewhen touching the HMI panel. Left move the
bar to for higher the sensitivity; right move the bar to lower the sensitivity.
Check
Enable
Screen
Saver
Uncheck
Screen
Saver
Setup
Screen
Saver
Time
Transiti
on time
After
screen
saver
progra
m ends
If [Enable Screen Saver] is checked, the user can set the time
HMI is idle before the screen saver starts. The range is 1 min. ~
100 min. with the default time of 10 min.
Return to
original
Choose
screen
2-197
2-198
The user can trigger the Enable Screen Saver screen by checking [Read
Controller Address]. If the memory address being read is 0, the screen
saver will end. Otherwise, Enable Screen Saver is active.
If [Read Controller Address] is not checked to control the Enable Screen
Saver screen, screen saver will be activated by the wait time. In addition
to setting it in software, the user can also set the wait time by entering the
system screen [System Setting] [MISC.]to configure [Screen Saver
Time(Min.)].
NOTE
If would like to trigger read controller address to start screen saver, users
should create screen saver screen at first like as below.
Read
Controller
Address
Language
2-199
Add
Multi-La
nguage
Setup
Delete
2-200
Language
Name
Change
Detail
Setup
Enable
The user can decide whether to enable the newly added other
languages. As shown in the figure below, the newly added
language No.2 "English is enabled.
2-201
If users choose to apply font name or font size, it will only take
effect to the newly created elements after applying.
If users choose to apply both, font name and font size, the
effect will be taken to the original and newly created elements.
Default
Font
Style
NOTE
2-202
Elements that applied with font name and font size are the one
that users can enter text.
ConfigurationNetwork APP
Table 2-2-8-5 Configuration-Network APP
LocalHost
The user can define the HMI name as preferred, which can be used to
identify HMI. When remote monitoring or data logging is used over the
network, the HMI name can be used to quickly identify the HMI being used.
HMI
Upload/
Downloa
d port
Modbus
TCP
Server
Port
2-203
ConfigurationNetwork APP
Table 2-2-8-5 Configuration-Network APP
Users can determine the communication port number. Please make sure
the setting of both has to be the same.
If HMI connect with Modbus software of PC, please change this Modbus
TCP Server Port.
Network Application
Enable
2-204
ConfigurationNetwork APP
Table 2-2-8-5 Configuration-Network APP
Password
Scan Time
Scan Time is the interval between each scan by eServer and eRemote.
The available range is 100 ms ~ 5000 ms and default is 100 ms.
Port
Show
warning in
disconnectio
n
2-205
ConfigurationNetwork APP
Table 2-2-8-5 Configuration-Network APP
Close
warning
window when
the
connection is
ok
SMTP
SMTP stands for Simple Mail Transport Protocol, which is used to transmit the mail to
be sent out. SMTP is a protocol that regulates the mail transmission from the source
address to the destination address and controls how the mails are transferred.
DOPSoft offers the SMTP service for the user to receive the alarm by email in case of
emergency.
Once SMTP parameters are set, the user must enter [Options] [Alarm Setup] [Mail
sever] to enter receivers email address and related warning information.
The setup steps are as follows:
Enter the [Options] [Communication Setting] [Ethernet]page and set up SMTP.
I.
2-206
ConfigurationNetwork APP
Table 2-2-8-5 Configuration-Network APP
II.
2-207
ConfigurationNetwork APP
Table 2-2-8-5 Configuration-Network APP
III. Enter the users to receive mails and check whether to send the alarm screen.
2-208
ConfigurationNetwork APP
Table 2-2-8-5 Configuration-Network APP
If the user wants to enable SMTP, please first check [Enable Mail Host] before setting
the host IP address, host port, account, and password security authentication.
Enable
Mail
IP address of
Mail Host
ConfigurationNetwork APP
Table 2-2-8-5 Configuration-Network APP
Host
ready.
Mail Host Port
From Address
Before enabling account security authentication, [Enable Mail Host] must first be
checked before setting up the associated account and password.
Account
Enable
Security
Authenti
cation
Time
Zone
2-210
Password
This function enables users to select the local time zone to avoid the trouble
caused by time difference in each area and the time it sends alarm
reminder will be more accurate.
ConfigurationNetwork APP
Table 2-2-8-5 Configuration-Network APP
2-211
Details of communication parameters of COM ports, controller setting, and the associated
Ethernet parameter setting will be given below.
2-212
[Communication Setting]
Table 2-2-8-6 Communication Setting
Connection
2-213
[Communication Setting]
Table 2-2-8-6 Communication Setting
2-214
If the user wants to cancel using Link2 on COM 2, there are three options:
Revision June, 2015
[Communication Setting]
Table 2-2-8-6 Communication Setting
A.
Add new controller on COM 1 or COM 3 and select to the same controller.
I. Add another Link on COM 3 or COM 1. Then, select the same
controller. Click OK to complete the setting. (This example is to add
COM 3.)
II. Cancel the connected selection on COM 2. A delete failed message
will pop up. Click OK to convert the Link address. Select the
converting Link name (Link3), then click convert.
B.
2-215
[Communication Setting]
Table 2-2-8-6 Communication Setting
C.
Use the feature of Move arrow to select COM Port on the upper left to
move Link2 to COM 1. Once Link2 is moved, the user can go to COM 2 to
check that Link Name has been changed to Link 1. As a result, this arrow
is used to more Link directly to other communication ports.
Please see the following steps for details.
Step1
Step2
2-216
[Communication Setting]
Table 2-2-8-6 Communication Setting
Step3
NOTE:
[Communication Setting]
Table 2-2-8-6 Communication Setting
HMI Station
Communica
tion
Parameter
Interface
RS232
RS422
2-218
COM 1
COM 2
COM 3
[Communication Setting]
Table 2-2-8-6 Communication Setting
RS485
The available Data Bits for the user to choose from are
7 Bits and8 Bits.
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Baud Rate
Parity
Controller
PLC Station
2-219
[Communication Setting]
Table 2-2-8-6 Communication Setting
Password
Communication
Delay Time
(ms)
Timeout (ms)
Retry Count
Optimize
Comm.
Interrupt
2-220
[Communication Setting]
Table 2-2-8-6 Communication Setting
2-221
[Communication Setting]
Table 2-2-8-6 Communication Setting
Device
2-222
Click the
[Communication Setting]
Table 2-2-8-6 Communication Setting
Ethernet device only support two protocol, for example Delta DVP TCP/IP
and S7 300 (ISO TCP). If add third protocol, it will display as below
message to inform.
Once the new network device is added, only two Protocols can be included.
For example, they can be Delta DVP TCP/IP and S7 300 (ISO TCP), with
each Protocol having up to 16 links. If any Protocol has more than 16 links,
the software will pop up the warning message to notify the user that too
many controllers are added, which exceeds the allowable number.
2-223
[Communication Setting]
Table 2-2-8-6 Communication Setting
HMI Station
Communic
ation
Parameter
Controller IP
Port
PLC Station
Controller
Password
Comm.
Delay Time
Timeout (ms)
2-224
[Communication Setting]
Table 2-2-8-6 Communication Setting
Retry Count
Optimize
Local Host
LocalHost
Overwrite IP
[Communication Setting]
Table 2-2-8-6 Communication Setting
2-226
[Communication Setting]
Table 2-2-8-6 Communication Setting
Obtain an IP
address
automatically
HMI IP address
IP Level
Class A
Subnet Mask
IP Address
1.x.x.x~126.x.x.x
Class B 128.0.x.x~191.255.x.x
Subnet
Mask
255.0.0.0
255.255.0.0
[Communication Setting]
Table 2-2-8-6 Communication Setting
Gateway IP
2-228
Permission
Level 0
Permission
Levels 1 ~ 7
Permission
Level 8
This is password for the highest permission level and is higher than
those for levels 1 ~ 7. Meanwhile, this password is the protection
password once a project is saved and is also used for Check password
when download program and system file formatting.
Table 2-2-8-7 Table of permission levels.
When the user wants to change the password in each level, this can be done by
changing the password entry through [Options] [Password Setting]. The entered
password can have up to8 digits, which consist of numbers of 0 ~ 9 and alphabets of A ~
F regardless of capitalization or lower-case. The user can choose the digits and
characters of the password as preferred with flexibility.
Revision June, 2015
2-229
The user can also change the password through theSet up Password button element.
2-230
2-231
Tag Table
Table 2-2-8-8 Tag Table
The use can open the existing tag file or the CSV file in Tag Table.
Open
2-232
Tag Table
Table 2-2-8-8 Tag Table
The user can save the edited tag file as a new file in the format of CSV file.
To Add new tag data, the user only has to click the Add icon to create the
new data.
Save
As
Add
2-233
Tag Table
Table 2-2-8-8 Tag Table
Insert means to insert the new data above the existing data.
Insert
Delete
Yes
2-234
After the user makes changes or deletion, the Yes button must be
Revision June, 2015
Tag Table
Table 2-2-8-8 Tag Table
2-235
The screen selected for Goto Screen cannot be the Print screen.
Cannot change to the print screen via goto screen or control area command.
Print Screen cannot be the default screen.
Print Screen cannot be the Base Screen.
Print Screen cannot be the sub-screen.
Print screen cannot be one used for screen saver.
2-236
[Custom Print] refers to the user defines the screen to be printed. Therefore, the read
address of screen, height and width, X coordinate (Left), and Y coordinate (Top) can be
changed. This function can work with flags in Control Block to output the Report button.
Read
Address of
Screen
Left
Top
Width
Height
2-237
Sound Setting can be described with three major items: I, Sound File Setting, II, Control List
and III, Play List.
Sound File Setting involves add, delete, export, and where to save the sound files.
2-238
Control List manages how the sound file is played, ended, and triggered.
Play List decides if the sound file is to be played through reading Bit or Word.
Revision June, 2015
2-239
[Sound File Setting], [Control List], and [Play List].Are described in the details below.
2-240
Once the Add icon is clicked, the system will ask the user to select the
sound file to be played.
The user can add up to 1000 (0 ~ 999) sound effect files.
Add
Delete
2-241
mouse or Ctrl + left button of mouse to select multiple file. Once the
selection is done, one can click the Delete icon to execute deletion of
sound files.
Play
2-242
The user can use this feature in Sound File Setting to play the selected
sound files and check if the associated sound file can be played correctly.
Stop
The user can use this feature to stop playing the current sound file in
play.
When a sound file is being exported, the software will ask the user to
select which device to save the file. Please note that the root directory
must be selected as the storage location. Namely, do not save the sound
file in any file folder.
After the sound file is exported, one can see that the software is
executing the export.
Export
2-243
Save to
USB
2-244
Upon completion of export, the software will notify the user with a
message that the sound file has been exported.
The function of saving sound files to USB or SD allows the user to more
quickly change the storage location of multiple sound files. A single
sound file can change its storage devices by using these two buttons.
Selection of multiple sound files is the same as that for deleting files.
Save to
SD
Number
Number is a major reference value in playing sound files. When the user
uses Address Read in the Play List, the software will decide which sound
file to play according to the preset memory addresses.
2-245
The filename of the sound file added to the list will be displayed as
Sound, with the first sound file starting at 001 and the following files go by
Sound001,Sound002, and Sound003.
Available Data Locations are USB and SD. The user can change the
Data Location as preferred with the default as USB.
Source refers to the path and address of the sound file after being added.
After adding the sound file, the user can change the source file, namely,
replace other sound files.
Name
Data
Location
Source
2-246
Length
2-247
Control List
Table 2-2-8-11 Control List
Control List includes read address, play mode, end mode, and trigger method.
Control List can contain up to 512 pieces of data.
Read Address can only be set as Bit to trigger a certain sound file and start
playing it.
Read
Addres
s
Mode
2-248
Play Mode
End Mode
Control List
Table 2-2-8-11 Control List
If End Mode is selected to Stop after playing, the sound file will
finish playing and stop.
End
Mode: St
op
End
Mode: Sto
p after
playing
End
Mode: Sto
p
2-249
Control List
Table 2-2-8-11 Control List
End
Mode: Sto
p after
playing
Play Mode:
Repeat
End
Mode: Sto
p
End
Mode: Sto
p after
playing
Trigger methods include ON and OFF status, which means the user needs
to select to trigger the playing of sound file when the button is ON or OFF.
Trigger
Metho
d
2-250
Play List
Table 2-2-8-12 Play List
Play List includes Add play item and Remove play item.
Every trigger address in Play List can support up to 100 sound files.
How the Play List is read depends on the sound files added to be played.
The read methods include [File] and [Address].
2-251
Play List
Table 2-2-8-12 Play List
When Add play item is selected, the software will ask the user to
select the sound files to be added to Play List.
For the sound files already added to Play List, the user can delete
unwanted files as needed.
Add
play
item
Remov
e play
item
2-252
Play List
Table 2-2-8-12 Play List
Mode
Name
Source
2-253
Create anmaintained button in the software edit screen of DOPSoft and set
the write address to $100.0.
Enter [Options] [Sound Setting] [Sound File Setting] and click the Add
Step
1
icon
Step
2
2-254
Example of Sound
Table 2-2-8-13 Example of Sound
Afterwards, please select the sound files to be added into the Sound File
List.
Step
3
2-255
Example of Sound
Table 2-2-8-13 Example of Sound
After adding the sound files, please select the data location to be [USB] and
press [Yes].
Click Export
Step
4
to save data to USB disk. Please note that all sound files
must be saved in the root directory and cannot be placed in any file folders.
Step
5
Step
6
2-256
Example of Sound
Table 2-2-8-13 Example of Sound
Set Read Address to $100.0 inControl List (this is the Write Address of the
maintained button set up in Step1).
Upon setting up Read Address, set the Play Mode to [Play],End Mode to
[Stop], and trigger method to [ON].
Step
7
2-257
Example of Sound
Table 2-2-8-13 Example of Sound
Step
8
Step
9
File
When the Use mode is File, the system will directly read the sound
files set up in Play List to play.
To delete the sound file, please click it first and select [Remove play
item] to remove the sound file.
After the Sound Setting has been changed, when the X on Sound
Setting window is clicked to exit the setting, the system will ask the
user whether to update with the new sound file data. If [Yes]is
clicked, the changes will be saved. When [No]is clicked, all
changes will be canceled.
2-258
Example of Sound
Table 2-2-8-13 Example of Sound
Please first insert the external storage device such as USB into
HMI and download the screen data into HMI and trigger $100.0
maintained button. The playback of the sound file is complete.
Enter [Options] [Sound Setting] [Play List] and click [Add play
item]to add multiple sound files to Play List.
Addres
s
2-259
Example of Sound
Table 2-2-8-13 Example of Sound
2-260
Once Add play item is done, set Mode to Address and Read
Address to $200. The user can use $200 to enter numbers in the
associated sound file list.
Example of Sound
Table 2-2-8-13 Example of Sound
To delete the sound file, please click the file first and click [Remove
play item] to remove the selected file.
After the Sound Setting has been changed, when the X on Sound
Setting window is clicked to exit the setting, the system will ask the
user whether to update with the new sound file data. If [Yes]is
clicked, the changes will be saved. When [No]is clicked, all
changes will be canceled.
Please first insert the external storage device such as USB into
HMI and download the screen data into HMI. Set $200 for selection
of sound and trigger $100.0 maintained button. The playback of the
sound file is complete.
2-261
2-262
Users have to checkEnable RTC Updatesbefore update the calendar setting, which
includes PLC connection setting and time setting.
NOTE:
When users choose Deltas PLC as the controller, time setting is no need. DOPSoft will
automatically disable the function of time setting and HMI will automatically set the time
field to the perpetual calendar (D1319~D1313) from Deltas PLC.
Some old models of Deltas PLC (ES/SS/EC) do not support the function of RTC
Update.
2-263
Enable
RTC
Updates
Connection
Name
Station
Number
2-264
There are two modes for users:Synchronize the HMI RTC time to
PLCorSynchronize PLC RTC time to HMI.
If selectTimer, users can setup the cycle that system updates the
Update
Setting
Triggering
Method
2-265
Start
Address
Length
2-266
Setting
Steps of
RTC
update
2-267
2-268
Step1: Create one maintained button and set its written memory
address as $11.0.
Create
Maintained
Button
State 0
State 1
Create
Numeric
Entry
Element
PLC address
System Parameters
2-269
Please compile the elements and download them into HMI after all
are created. When triggering maintained button (BIT ON) of RTC, the
system will set RTC time of PLC to HMI. Thus, the system parameter
inside HMI, TIME_YEAR, TIME_MONTH, TIME_DAY, TIME_HOUR,
TIME_MINUTE and TIME_SECOND will be synchronized with PLC
RTC.
BIT OFF
Result
BIT ON
2-270
2-271
Enable
Protection
Password
Download
HMI
Identifier
NOTE:
Check to enable HMI identifier protection and set the password. When selecting
[Download all] without executing [Download HMI Identifier], it will only download the
identifier for the screen.
When only HMI is set with an identifier, a message of [Check HMI Machine ID Fail 1]
2-272
When only screen is set with an identifier, a message of [Check HMI Machine ID Fail 2]
will pop up.
When both HMI and screen are set with identifiers, but the identifier does not match,a
message of [Check HMI Machine ID Fail 3] will pop up.
If you forget the set identifier, you can clear the set one from [Tool] [Restore the
default value] and set the new one. However, the screen file will all be deleted.
2-273
Global keypad setting in DOP-B series HMI does not allow users to define the keypad
setting.
2-274
System
Keypad
Decimal
Keypad
Apply
Settings
Apply None
Apply to all
Apply to new
System
Keypad
Binary
Keypad
Apply
Settings
Apply to new
2-276
Apply None
Apply to all
Hexadecimal System
Keypad Keypad
Apply
Settings
Apply None
Apply to all
Apply to new
ASCII
Keypad
System
Keypad
2-277
Apply
Settings
Apply None
Apply to all
Apply to new
2-278
Decimal
Keypad
Steps of
Global
Keypad
Setting
Binary
Keypad
Hexadecimal
Keypad
2-279
ASCII
Keypad
Numeric Entry
Element
Create
the
element
Numeric Entry
Element
Numeric Entry
Element
Character Entry
Element
2-280
2-281
Apply
settings
NOTE:
2-282
When you select [Apply to all], the following message will pop up.
Please press [OK] to complete the setting.
Unsigned
Decimal
Result
Hexadeci
mal
Binary
2-283
ASCII
2-284
Download FileSlot into HMI. The ROM will reserve the memory space which is required
byFileSlot.
FileSlot 1
FileSlot 2
FileSlot 3
FileSlot 4
FileSlot (n-1)
FileSlot n
Screen
Base on the consideration of HMI efficiency and data storage, when downloading the
programmed FileSlot, HMI can only reserve the memory space. It is unable to create the file.
Users have to use macro (FileSlotWrite, ImportFileSlot) to create the file.
When HMI has FileSlot file, to download the screen will not change the content of FileSlot. To
copy the Screen Data File created by DopSoft and Auto Update File to FileSlot file through
Copy Filein HMI system will not change the content, either.
It is suggested that before re-programming the screen and FileSlot size, executeFormat
HMIorReset.
Function of Copy File can export the FileSlot file. The exporting file is stored in
HMI-000\FILESLOT. Through this method, other FileSlot files can be imported into other HMI.
If other HMI has FileSlot file, then the data will be covered.
B03S210, B04S211, B05S100, B05S101, B07S201, B07S211 and B07S410 models do not
2-285
2-286
Total Number
of FileSlot
Update
2-287
The Max Size of FileSlot can be setup in batch. Enter Start ID,
End IDandNew Max Size, then clickBatch Settingto specify
the setting of New Max Size to FileSlot ID. See as below. The start ID
is set to 3, end ID is 6 and the New Max Size is 8. The Max Size of
FileSlot between ID3 and ID6 will be changed to 8. The rest will be
remained as 4, the default value.
Max Size in
Batch Setting
2-288
Delete
Before
After
2-289
Each FileSlot can setup the Max Size individually. The maximum
value of Max Size is 102400KB and the minimum value is 4 KB and 64
KB, which varies withdifferent models. See the following table:
B03S211
B03E211
B07S411
B07S401K
B07S411K
B07S415
B07E415
Max Size
B07S515
4KB
B07E515
B08S515
B08E515
B10S411
B10S511
B10E515
B10S615
B10E615
HMC07-N500H52
2-290
HMC08-N500S52
B05S111
64KB
B07PS415
B07PS515
OK
The file will not be saved if click Cancel. The function is the same
Cancel
as click
2-291
EnterOptionFile Management
Set the total number of FileSlot as 5. ClickUpdateand the FileSlot
number will show. Users can setup the Max. Size of each FileSlot.
When the setting is complete, clickOKto exit.
New
FileSlot
Create the
button of
executing
macro
command
2-292
Create the numeric entry element which can read the content of
FileSlot on the screen. Its address is between $1000 and $1047. See
as below:
Create the
numeric
entry
element
2-293
When elements are all created, please compile them and download
the screen into HMI.
Use macro FileSlotWrite to write the data into the specified file of
FileSlot. The following example writes 10 words from data area into
FileSlot which named 1 as its ID. Then, users can read the data via
button of FileSlotRead.
Result
2-294
2-295
2-296
Device Table
Table 2-2-8-21 Description of Device Table
Device table displays $M non-volatile data, range from $M0 to $M1023. Users can
define the displayed data type and data format.
Display
Option
WORD
DWORD
2-297
Device Table
Table 2-2-8-21 Description of Device Table
Decimal
Show Grid
Hexadecimal
2-298
Device Table
Table 2-2-8-21 Description of Device Table
Upload from
HMI
Action
Download to
HMI
Import
2-299
Device Table
Table 2-2-8-21 Description of Device Table
Export
When
downloadin
g all data
2-300
When you check [Include device table], it means users can download
$M non-volatile data to HMI via the function of Download All Data.
Device Table
Table 2-2-8-21 Description of Device Table
2-301
], [Open/Install
Picture Bank
], [Remove Picture Bank
], [Update Picture Bank Content ],
[Import Picture Data
], [Export Picture Bank Content to File ], [Delete ],
[Inverse
], [Grayscale256 ], [Horizontal Mirror
], and [Vertical Mirror
].
Once this button is clicked, the software will ask the user to enter the
name of Picture Bank.
Add Picture
Bank
2-302
Once a new Picture Bank is added, the user can click [Import Picture
Revision June, 2015
Picture Bank
Table 2-2-8-22 Picture Bank
The feature of Open/Install Picture Bank allows the user to install the
Picture Bank created in other projects using this button for future
use. The user must choose where to save the old Picture Bank.
When Remove Picture Bank is selected, the system will display the
message that asks if the user is sure to remove the selected Picture
Bank.
Open/Install
Picture Bank
Remove
Picture Bank
Update
Picture
BankConten
t
2-303
Picture Bank
Table 2-2-8-22 Picture Bank
Vertical Mirror. Click Picture Bank Content again to enable the effect
to be made on the selected picture.
Import
Picture Data
2-304
Once a new Picture Bank is added, the user can click this button to
load the picture data into Picture Bank.
Picture Bank
Table 2-2-8-22 Picture Bank
Export
Picture Bank
Content to
File
2-305
Picture Bank
Table 2-2-8-22 Picture Bank
Delete
Before Inverse
After Inverse
Inverse
Grayscale
256
2-306
Grayscale 256 will display colors in the original picture with 256
levels of grayscale.
Before Grayscale 256
Picture Bank
Table 2-2-8-22 Picture Bank
Horizontal
Mirror
Vertical
Mirror
2-307
If multiple languages have been created by the user, the associated text data can also be
edited in advance in Text Bank.
2-308
Text Bank
Table 2-2-8-23 Text Bank
If multiple languages have been created by the user, the corresponding language
pages will be added accordingly.
2-309
Text Bank
Table 2-2-8-23 Text Bank
When the Add button is pressed, a new line of data is added for the user
to fill in the content.
To delete the data line, please click the data to be removed first and click
the Delete button.
Add
Delete
2-310
Text Bank
Table 2-2-8-23 Text Bank
The user can use this feature directly on the created text file (.txt) to
import data.
The figure below shows the created text file.
Open
2-311
Text Bank
Table 2-2-8-23 Text Bank
Save
2-312
Once the text tile is opened, Text Bank will load the data therein.
Save allows the user to export the content of Text Bank and save it as
text file.
Text Bank
Table 2-2-8-23 Text Bank
Close
2-313
2-2-8-14 Environment
Environment allows the user to set up the environment parameters related to the HMI,
including display of software language interface and download mode, which will be
described individually below.
Environment
Table 2-2-8-24 Environment
System path and output path can be checked in Environment. Display of system
environment parameters such as toolbar, window, upload/download setup, and
USB driver can also be set here.
2-314
Environment
Table 2-2-8-24 Environment
This refers to the path to save file when the software executes files,
including some reference data and dynamic-link library files (*.DLL),
which will be saved in this path altogether. This item cannot be
changed by the user as preferred.
This refers to the output path for the CIN file after screen editing, to
which some functions such as On-line Simulation, Off Line
Simulation File Upload/Download will reference. As a result, unless
necessary or there is no change in software version, please do not
modify this path to avoid program execution error orfailure to locate
files.
System Path
Output Path
Text Bar
Bitmap Bar
Zoom Bar
Options
Layout Bar
Property
Table
Output Bar
Traditiona
l Chinese
Language
English
Turkish
2-315
Environment
Table 2-2-8-24 Environment
Simplified
Chinese
Upload/Dow
nload Setup
USB
Environment
Table 2-2-8-24 Environment
Ethernet
HMI end:
Enter [Options] [Communication Setting]
CustomIP [Ethernet] and set the customized IP address.
The user can also enter the system screen
[System Setting] [Network]to set the IP
Revision June, 2015
2-317
Environment
Table 2-2-8-24 Environment
address.
The figure below shows the interface set up by
software:
Computer end:
SelectControl Panel in the Start Menu in
Windows and select Network Connections
. Then choose Local Area Network
and select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
in LAN settings.
2-318
Environment
Table 2-2-8-24 Environment
2-319
Environment
Table 2-2-8-24 Environment
HMI end:
Obtain an IP address automatically means no
setup of IP address is required. Instead, the IP
is assigned to HMI by DHCP. The user can still
enter the system screen [System Setting]
[Network]to set DHCP to be ON.
The figure below shows the interface set up by
Obtain an
software:
IP
address
automati
cally
Environment
Table 2-2-8-24 Environment
Computer end:
Control Panel in the Start Menu in Windows
and select Network Connections
and
2-321
Environment
Table 2-2-8-24 Environment
2-322
Environment
Table 2-2-8-24 Environment
PC Port
To check the number, one can click the right button of the
mouse on My Computer to enter [Manage] and check
[Ports] to obtain the COM number at the computer end.
2-323
Environment
Table 2-2-8-24 Environment
The software allows the user to choose how often the software
saves the projects being edited. The minimum length is 0 Min.,
meaning this option is not selected. If selected, the minimum default
value is 3 Min., and the maximum is 120 Min.
Auto
SaceTime
Intervcal
2-324
Environment
Table 2-2-8-24 Environment
Auto Open
Last File
when
starting
ScrEditor
Center
Drawing
Area
When [Auto Open Last File when starting ScrEditor] is checked and
as the user closes a project, the screen displayed next time when
DOPSoft starts is the project being edited previously.
2-325
Environment
Table 2-2-8-24 Environment
If the project being edited contains picture data but this option is not
checked, all the associated picture data will not be uploaded when
uploading screen data to HMI.
Original
Screen
Data
Include
Picture Data
When
Uploading
Screen
Data after
Upload
Auto
Convert
Input
Address To
Tag Name
Step1
Step2
2-326
Environment
Table 2-2-8-24 Environment
After entering the address, one will find out that the
memory address has been automatically converted to
numeric code and displayed as TINA.
Step3
2-327
Environment
Table 2-2-8-24 Environment
Auto reboot
after
firmware
upgrading
Reinstall
HMI USB
Driver
Uninstall
HMI USB
Driver
When this option is checked, it means that HMI will restart after
firmware upgrading and will not display the window with message
[Update Firmware Succeed!!!] to notify the user.
After executing [Reinstall HMI USB Driver], the system will install the
HMI USB driver again.
After executing [Uninstall HMI USB Driver], the system will uninstall
the HMI USB driver.
These two features mainly address the issue that happens when
upload/download fails using USB transmission, the user can restore
the USB transmission between HMI and software to render normal
upload/download through uninstallation and reinstallation of HMI
USB driver.
This function is only suitable for USB download mode is Normal or
CDC.
Recipe CSV
Separator
2-328
Environment
Table 2-2-8-24 Environment
TAB
SPACE
Users can open the Notepad to make sure the displayed delimiter in
CSV is correct.
2-329
Environment
Table 2-2-8-24 Environment
2-330
2-2-9
Window
The function of Window mainly enables the user to manage the order and display of
windows more effectively.
This feature executes the action of closing all windows, meaning all windows in the current
project will be closed and end with no editing window.
2-331
Before
After
2-332
Before
After
2-2-9-5 Cascade
When Cascade is selected, all windows on the screen will be displayed in the Editing
window by cascade.
2-333
Tile horizontally will determine the order to tile according to the current screen the user
is working on.
2-334
Before
After
2-335
Before
After
2-336
Same as Tile Horizontally, Tile Vertically will also determine the order to tile according
to the current screen the user is working on.
Before
After
2-337
Before
After
2-338
2-2-10 Help
The Help part mainly provides the user with information such as the current software
version and firmware version through this toolbar.
2-339
2-340
In the last section, the process has been described through the flowchart starting from how
to create a new project to end the project. In the following, the operation and setup of each
step in the flowchart will be described below.
2-341
Open DOPSoft
1.
2.
Once DOPSoft is started successfully, the following window will appear. Please click
the Add Project icon
2-342
2-343
After the new project is created, the Project Wizard will appear to guide the user
through the selections of HMI model, controller, and communication format. In the
following example, modelB10E615is selected and the associated project is named
test.
5.
Next, please select COM port, controller, and communication format. The user can use
the Up/Down arrows on the upper-left corner to move COM 1, COM 2, or COM 3 for
use. Please see 2-2-8-2 Communication Setting for details. In the following example,
COM 2 is selected and controller isDelta DVP Q-Link.
2-344
Create Element
6.
Once the Project Wizard is completed, a new project is created. Now one can start
screen editing and element creation.
2-345
Menu
2-346
Element Toolbar
Element Window
2-347
2-348
7.
In the example, Menu is used to create properties of the button element in Set ON, Set
Off, Momentary, Maintained, and Multistate Indicator of the Indicator element. Once
the element is created, the associated memory address needs to be entered to enable
the element actions. In order for the user to understand the functions of the element,
the corresponding texts and memory addresses of all created elements are entered.
Please see Table 2-2-11-2 below for the steps of creating elements.
Description of Steps of Creating Elements
Table 2-2-11-2 Steps of Creating Elements
Step1
2-349
2-350
2-351
After double clicking on the element, enter the corresponding texts in the
Content tab. The [Set ON] button is set to input Set ON (1@M0) for both
State0 and State1; the [Set OFF]button is set to input Set OFF (1@M0) for
both State0 and State1; the [Maintained]button is set to input Maintained
(1@M10)for both State0 and State1; the [Momentary] button is set to
input Momentary (1@M20)State0 and State1.
2-352
Once the Set ON, Set OFF, Maintained, and Momentary elements are
created, the figure below will be displayed.
NOTE:
Set ON, Set OFF, Maintained, Momentary all have states 0 and 1, on
which the user can double click to enter the setup of State 0 and State 1
or check if it's State 0 or State 1 using the upper-right corner of the
Revision June, 2015
2-353
Property Window.
Step2
2-354
After double clicking the element, enter the corresponding texts in the
[Content] tab.
1.
Enter Multistate Indicator (1@M0) OFF for State0 and Multistate Indicator
State 0
State 1
2-355
State 0
State 1
State 0
2-356
State 1
Please double click the three Multistate Indicator elements and enter [Main]
tab to change the [Foreground Color] for State1 to Red to differentiate
between State0and State1.
NOTE:
The state value of Multistate Indicator will vary with the total number of
states. Two states are available for Set ON, Set OFF, Maintained, and
Momentary (State0 and State1). The user can double click the element
Revision June, 2015
2-357
Step3
2-358
Compile
8.
To complete the creation of all elements, please compile the elements on the screen to
check for any errors. Compile is used to check if the correct memory format is used
and correct address is entered. Two options are available for compiling as shown
below:
Compiling can be done through [Tools] [Rebuild All].
After compiling, the output message will be displayed, as shown in Figure 2-2-11-10 below.
2-359
When compiling is successful, it means the screen layout created by the user is free of
error. Now user can execute Download Screen Data to HMI. There are three ways to
download screen data as described below:
One way is through [Tools] [Download All Data]in Menu.
2-360
Before executing downloading screen data, please verify that HMI has been connected with
the computer through a USB cable and the PLC cable is connected to COM 2.
2-361
Upon verification, the screen data can be downloaded to HMI. And the software will display
the download progress, as shown in the figure below.
10. After screen data download is completed, one can check the screen at the HMI end to
see if it is the same as that being edited at the computer end and if there is any error.
11. Description of execution.
Operation
Table 2-2-11-3 Description of Actions
Touch
Button
Result
Touch Set ON button and one will find that when Set ON is pressed,
Multistate Indicator1@M0 will display ON.
Set ON
Set OFF
Momentary
2-362
Maintained
2-363
in Standard bar
.
After the project is saved, the software will pop up a window that asks the user to choose
where to save the project and enter the filename. However, [test] is already entered as the
project name with the assistance of Project Wizard. When Save is clicked, the filename
displayed is test. The user can still change the filename without affecting the project
operation.
2-364
13. After the project is saved, the user can go to the path where the file is saved to check if
the associated project is there. To open the project again, one can double-click the file
by mouse, or directly execute DOPSoft, or through [File] [Open], as shown in the
figure below.
2-365
The existing file can also be opened by using the Open icon
in Standard bar
2-366
Contents
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-1
The internal register is the memory in the human-machine available for free reading and
supporting different configurations, such as the element communication address. As the
internal register does not support the non-volatile function, when the human-machine is
disconnected from the power supply, data in the register cannot be maintained. The
human-machine provides a total of 65536 internal registers, each 16-bit.
3-2
Access Type
Element Type
Access Range
Word
$n
$0 - $65535
Bit
$n.b
$0.0 - $65535.15
Access Type
Element Type
Access Range
Word
$Mn
$0 - $1023
Bit
$Mn.b
$0.0 - $1023.15
The indirect addressing register does not provide the non-volatile function. When the
human-machine is disconnected from the power supply, data in the register cannot be
maintained.
Access Type
Element Type
Access Range
Word
*$n
$0 - $65535
After obtaining the value from $n, the indirect addressing register *$n will use this value as
the new address and access the value in this new address. For example, when $10 = 101
and $101 = 55, *$10 = 55, as shown in Figure 3-3-1.
3-3
Function Element
Indirect
Addressing
Registers
3-4
Step
Actions
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Run compilation
and download to the
human-machine. Input 101 in element $10. Next, input
Revision June, 2015
Apart from six types of internal memories (the internal register ($), the non-volatile internal
register ($M), indirect addressing register (*$), recipe register (RCP), recipe number
register (RCPNO), and recipe group register (RCPG)), the human-machine provides the
internal parameter function. This function allows users to understand the values of the
human-machines internal system status, including the system time value, the external
storage device status, the touch X/Y coordinate, the touch status, the remaining battery
voltage, and the network parameter.
NOTE:
The internal parameter function is available only for Word elements. Users creating bit
element will be unable to select this function.
When setting the memory address with the Word element, users can directly select the
Internal Parameter from the pull-down menu of the Link Name to select the 24 types of
internal parameters available from the human-machine.
3-5
3-6
Internal Parameters
Table 3-4-1 Internal Parameters
TP_STATUS
Status
Value
Results
Panel is touched: 1
TP_X
Coordinate
Value
Results
X
TP_Y
TIME_YEAR
TIME_MONTH
TIME_YEAR
(yyyy)
TIME_DAY
TIME_MONTH
(mm)
TIME_HOUR
TIME_DAY
(dd)
Results
TIME_HOUR
(tt)
TIME_MINUTE
TIME_MINUTE
(mm)
TIME_SECOND
TIME_SECOND
(ss)
BATTER_VOLTA
GE
NET_IP1
NET_IP2
Revision June, 2015
3-7
NET_IP
NET_IP3
Results
NET_IP1
NET_IP2
NET_IP4
NET_IP3
NET_IP4
SUBMASK_IP1
SUBMASK_IP2
Results
SUBMASK_IP1
SUBMASK _IP2
SUBMASK_IP3
SUBMASK _IP3
SUBMASK_IP4
GWAY_IP1
SUBMASK _IP4
GWAY_IP2
Results
GWAY _IP1
GWAY_IP3
GWAY _IP2
GWAY _IP3
GWAY_IP4
GWAY _IP4
SD_STATUS
Status
Value
Results
No external SD: 0
USB_STATUS
3-8
Status
Value
Results
No external USB: 0
FW_VERSION1
3-9
FW_VERSION2
3-10
ALARM_COUNT
NET_STATUS1 /
NET_STATUS2
3-11
EMS_STATUS
LSWITCH_STAT
US
only.
This parameter is used to display the status of enabling switch.
Value
Result
0
If the enabling switch is not pressed, it displays 0.
1
If the enabling switch is pressed, it displays 1.
HANDWHEEL_C
OUNTER
3-12
Contents
4-1
4-2
4-1
4-2
4-3
With a layout different from that of conventional screen editors, the DOPSoft allows users to
customize their control and status blocks by selecting the required features. Take the
control block for example, by selecting the [Screen No] and [Recipe Group Number]
features, the layout of the control block will be automatically sorted by continuous address
and will open and change the applications of the screen and recipe group number features,
as shown in Figure 4-1-3.
4-4
If another feature is selected, such as the [General Control], the address will be sorted in
ascending order to form the continuous memory layout as shown in Figure 4-1-4.
Sample Time
This feature allows users to flexibly control the sampling time. The default is 300ms.
This means the system will take a sample at every 300ms. The sample time range is
200ms-1000ms.
4-5
Memory Format
Memory Format provides Unsigned Decimal and BCD format.
4-6
4-7
Register
(D)
Internal Memory
Demo Register
Address
($)
Demo
Address
Screen No.
Dn
D0
$n
$15
General Control
Dn+1
D1
$n+1
$16
Curve Control
Dn+2
D2
$n+2
$17
Dn+3
D3
$n+3
$18
Dn+4
D4
$n+4
$19
Recipe Control
Dn+5
D5
$n+5
$20
Dn+6
D6
$n+6
$21
System Control
Dn+7
D7
$n+7
$22
Dn+8
D8
$n+8
$23
Dn+9
D9
$n+9
$24
4-8
Write the designated screen number to the register, and the HMI will
immediately jump to that screen.
As shown in the following example, by inputting the device number D0 and
the value 1 (D0=1), the HMI will jump to page 1.
Screen
Nos. b0
to b15.
b0:
Enable/disable
Revision June, 2015
communication
Communication
enable/disable
flag
OFF
ON
OFF
b2
Enable/disable
buzzer
b3
Clear alarm
buffer
Clears data in the HMI alarm buffer. If the flag is ON, the data in the
alarm buffer will be cleared. Users must set the flag to OFF to
reactive buffer before reusing it.
b4
Clear alarm
counter
Clears data in the HMI alarm counter. If the flag is ON, the data in
the alarm counter will be cleared. Users must set the flag to OFF to
reactive buffer before reusing it.
To quickly update data in the HMI cache to the USB disk. If the alarm,
history or recipe is activated, and the USB disk is held, the HMI will
update the cache data to the USB disk concurrently. Users must set
the flag to OFF to reactive buffer before reusing it.
The HMI will first store in the cache the data written to the USB
b5 USB Disk
disk. When the data do not reach the default volume (as shown in
Quick Write
the figure below), data in the cache will not be written to the USB
disk, in order to prevent USB disk damage as a result of continuous
writing. Part of the data will be lost when the data volume is smaller
than the buffer capacity or there is an unexpected power
interruption. To prevent this, users can force the system to activate
this flag to write data to the USB disk to maintain data existence.
4-11
b6
Lock
Remote Control
NOTE
b7 HMI <->
VGA
Mode
(B10VS511)
4-12
23
3 )
4-13
4-14
Flag Control
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
Security Level 0
Security Level 1
Security Level 2
Security Level 3
Security Level 4
Security Level 5
Security Level 6
Security Level 7
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
System Sampling 4
System Sampling 3
System Sampling 2
System Sampling 1
System reserved
Curve Clear Flag 1
Curve Clear Flag 2
Curve Clear Flag 3
Curve Clear Flag 4
System reserved
b8 ~ b11
Revision June, 2015
Curve Clearing
Flags (1 ~ 4)
4-16
include the general curve and X-Y curve. The curve clearing
action is controlled by the curve sampling flags.
If these flags are ON, the corresponding curve elements will
clear the curve on the elements. Turn these flags OFF and
reactivate them to use this function repeatedly.
The sampling flag 1 of the curve element should correspond
to the curve clearing flag 1, sampling flag 2 of the curve
element to the curve clearing flag 2, etc.
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
History
Sampling Flag
1
History
Sampling Flag
2
History
Sampling Flag
3
History
Sampling Flag
4
History
Sampling Flag
5
History
Sampling Flag
6
History
Sampling Flag
7
History
Sampling Flag
8
History
Sampling Flag
9
History Sampling
Flag 10
History Sampling
Flag 11
History Sampling
Flag 12
System Reserved
It can record up to 12 sets of history data, and each set of history data
corresponds to a history sampling flag. History can be activated by the
[Timer] or [PLC]; i.e. it is activated by the history sampling flag.
b0 ~
b11
History
Samplin
g Flags
(1~12)
Users can determine the sampling time by activating the history sampling
flag. When the history sampling flag is ON, data are sampled once. Turn
these flags off and reactivate them to use this function repeatedly.
4-17
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
History
Clearing Flag
1
History
Clearing Flag
2
History
Clearing Flag
3
History
Clearing Flag 4
History
Clearing Flag
5
History
Clearing Flag
6
History
Clearing Flag
7
History
Clearing Flag
8
History
Clearing Flag
9
History
Clearing Flag
10
History
Clearing Flag
History 11
Clearing Flag
12
System Reserved
b0 ~ b11
History
Clearing Flags
(1~12)
4-18
Users can clear history data by activating the history clearing flag.
When the history clearing flag is ON, history data are cleared. Turn
these flags off and reactivate them to use this function repeatedly.
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Recipe Group
Change Flag
Recipe Read Flag
(PLC -> HMI)
Recipe Write Flag
(HMI -> PLC)
Recipe Group
Number Change
Flag
System reserved
b0 Recipe Group
Number Change
Flag
b1 Recipe Read
Flag (PLC HMI)
Revision June, 2015
repeatedly.
b2 Recipe Write
Flag (HMI PLC)
When the recipe write flag is ON, the HMI will write the
selected data in toe controller register. Turn the flag off and
reactivate it to use this function repeatedly.
For use on 32-bit recipes.
Users can call or change a recipe group in two ways:
(1) Change directly from the RCPG of the HMIs internal
register.
b3 Recipe Group
Change Flag
b8 ~ b15 Define
the number of the
recipe groups to be
changed
4-20
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Users can define the number of the recipe group to be changed from
b0 ~ b15
the recipe group control register. By activating the recipe group
Define Recipe
change flag (Table 4-1-7 Recipe Control Register b0), the HMI will
Group
automatically change the RCPNO in the internal register, thus
changing the recipe group.
4-21
b9
b8
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Multi-Language Setup
Print Flag
b8 Print Flag
4-22
Printer Action
Process
Start
No
Read printer
status
OFF
Yes
Print flag
ON
Layout printing or
general printing
End
When the print next page flag is ON, the printer will automatically eject
paper and turn to the next page. When the flag is OFF, the printer is
idled.
b9 Print Next
Page Flag
OFF
End
4-23
b0 Enhanced Recipe
Group Change Flag
b1 Enhanced Recipe
Read Flag (PLC HMI)
4-24
b2 Enhanced Recipe
Write Flag (HMI
PLC)
b3 Enhanced Recipe
Group Change Flag
4-25
b0 ~ b15
Define
Enhanced
Recipe Group
4-26
Status Block
The status block planned for the HMI allows users to define the address of the controllers or
internal registers of the HMI. By configuring the status block, users can view the present
status of the HMI, such as present screen number, present user security level, curves and
history status, and the status of recipe control, multi-language, printing, etc. The status
block is also a world-based continuous data block.
NOTE:
If no control block is configured, the status block will be inactive. Also, the addresses in
the control block and the status block cannot be the same.
Controller Register
Status Block Register Types
Register
(D)
Internal Memory
Demo Register
Address
($)
Demo
Address
Dn
D10
$n
$25
Dn+1
D11
$n+1
$26
Dn+2
D12
$n+2
$27
Dn+3
D13
$n+3
$28
Dn+4
D14
$n+4
$29
Dn+5
D15
$n+5
$30
Dn+6
D16
$n+6
$31
Dn+7
D17
$n+7
$32
Dn+8
D18
$n+8
$33
Dn+9
D19
$n+9
$34
4-27
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Screen Change
Status
System Reserved
Alarm Buffer Clear Flag
Alarm Counter Clear Flag
USB Disk Quick Write Flag
System Reserved
Set User Security Level
Set User Security Level
Set User Security Level
System Reserved
Screen change
complete
b0 Screen
Changing
Status
ON
OFF
b3 Clear
Alarm Buffer
ON
OFF
b4 Clear
Alarm Counter
4-28
OFF
ON
This flag is ON when HMI cache data are updating to the USB disk.
This flag is OFF when data update is completed.
Cache data
update
complete
b5 USB Disk
Quick Write
ON
OFF
From Bits 8-10, we can find out the security level of present HMI
operators.
Security Level
b8 ~ b10 Set
User Security
Level
Flag Control
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
Security Level 0
Security Level 1
Security Level 2
Security Level 3
Security Level 4
Security Level 5
Security Level 6
Security Level 7
4-29
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Screen Number
Users can check the number of the last opened screen with
this status register.
b0 ~ b15 Screen
Number Status
b14
b13
b12
b10
b11
b9
b8
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Curve Sampling
Flag 1
Curve Sampling Flag 2
Curve Sampling Flag 3
Curve Sampling Flag 4
System Reserved
Curve Clearing Flag 1
Curve Clearing Flag 2
Curve Clearing Flag 3
Curve Clearing Flag 4
System Reserved
4-30
ON
OFF
b8 ~ b11
Curve Clearing
Status Flags
(1~4)
4-31
ON
Graphic Clearing
Complete
OFF
4-32
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
History
Sampling Flag
1
History
Sampling Flag 2
History Sampling Flag 3
History Sampling Flag 4
History Sampling Flag 5
History Sampling Flag 6
History Sampling Flag 7
History Sampling Flag 8
History Sampling Flag 9
History Sampling Flag 10
History Sampling Flag 11
History Sampling Flag 12
System Reserved
History Data
Sampling in
Progress
ON
History Data
Sampling
Complete
OFF
4-33
b9
b8
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
History Clearing
Flag 1
History Clearing Flag
2
History Clearing Flag 3
History Clearing Flag 4
History Clearing Flag 5
History Clearing Flag 6
History Clearing Flag 7
History Clearing Flag 8
History Clearing Flag 9
History Clearing Flag 10
History Clearing Flag 11
History Clearing Flag 12
System Reserved
b0 ~ b11 History
Clearing Status
Flags (1 ~ 12)
ON
History Data
Clearing
Complete
OFF
4-34
b9
b8
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Recipe Group
Change Flag
Recipe Read Flag
( PLC -> HMI )
Recipe Write Flag
( HMI -> PLC )
System Reserved
When the control recipe group in the status block changes, the recipe
group change status flag is ON. The flag is immediately OFF after
changing the recipe group and updating the RCPNO.
b0 Recipe
Number
Change Status
Flag
ON
OFF
RCPG Change
Flag
When the HMI reads the data of a recipe group from the control block,
the recipe read status flag is ON. The flag is OFF immediately after the
data are read and saved.
b1 Recipe
Read Status
Flag
ON
OFF
Recipe Read
Flag
b2 Recipe
Revision June, 2015
When the HMI sends the data of a recipe group to the control block,
4-35
Write Status
Flag
the recipe write status flag is ON. The flag is OFF immediately after
data are written to the control block.
HMI writes data
to PLC
Recipe Write
Complete
OFF
ON
Recipe Write
Flag
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0 ~ b15 Recipe Whether it is changing the value of the recipe number (RCPNO)
Number Definition
register from the control block or HMI, as long as the value is
Status
changed, the value in the RCPNO register is updated to enable
the control block to obtain the up-to-date recipe number from this
register.
This RCPNO definition flag must be used along with the RCPNO
change flag. Please refer to Table 4-2-7 Recipe Control Stratus
Register b0.
4-36
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Multi-Language
Setup
Print Flag
b0 ~ b7
Multi-Language
Setup
b8 Print Status
Flag
When the flag is ON, the printer is printing the display screen or
edited screen of the HMI. When the flag is OFF, the printer is
idled.
b9 Print Next
Page Status Flag
When the flag is ON, the printer is ejecting paper to turn to the
next page. When the flag is OFF, the printer is idled.
4-37
When HMI reads the recipe data from control block, the
enhanced recipe read status flag is On. Then, this flag will be
Off as soon as the enhanced recipe data area read and
saved.
b2 Enhanced
Recipe
Write
b0 Enhanced
Recipe
Group
Change
Status
Flag
b1 Enhanced
Recipe
Read
Status Flag
4-38
Status Flag
the enhanced recipe write status flag is On. And the flag will
be Off as soon as the enhanced recipe is written to the
control block.
4-39
b0 ~ b15 Enhanced
Recipe Group Definition
Status
4-40
Chapter 5 Buttons
Contents
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-1
Chapter 5 Buttons
Chapter 5 Buttons
This chapter mainly describes the button meter elements provided in the DOPSoft and how
they are operated and configured.
Button Element Classification
Button
Set
Reset
Momentary
Maintained
Multistate
Set Value
Set Constant
Increment
Decrement
Goto Screen
Previous Page
System Date Time
Password Table Setup
Enter Password
Contrast Brightness
Low Security
System Menu
Report List
Screen Capture
Remove Storage
Import/Export Recipe
Calibration
Language Change
Import / Export FileSlot
Table 5-1-1 Button Element Classification
5-2
Chapter 5 Buttons
Multistate
Set Value
Set Constant
Increment
Decrement
Interlock Address
Maintained
Invisible Address
Momentary
Write Offset
Memory
Read Offset
Memory
Reset
ON
Before
execute
After
execute
OFF
Before
execute
After
execute
ON
OFF
Before
execute
After
execute
ON
OFF
Before
execute
After
execute
Before
execute
After
execute
Before
execute
After
execute
Before
execute
After
execute
Before
execute
After
execute
Before
execute
After
Write Memory
Set
Macro
Read Memory
Button
Element
Picture
Text
(Picture Bank
(Input
Name/Picture
Text/ Interlock
Blink
Name/Transparent Font/
State
Effect/Transparent Size/
Color)
Color)
5-3
Chapter 5 Buttons
Invisible Address
Interlock Address
5-4
Write Offset
Memory
Read Offset
Memory
execute
Before
execute
Goto Screen
After
execute
Before
execute
Previous Page
After
execute
Before
System Date execute
Time
After
execute
Before
execute
Password
Table Setup
After
execute
Before
execute
Enter
Password
After
execute
Before
execute
Contrast
Brightness
After
execute
Before
execute
Low Security
After
execute
Before
execute
System Menu
After
execute
Before
execute
Report List
After
execute
Before
execute
Screen
Capture
After
execute
Remove
Before
Write Memory
Macro
Read Memory
Button
Element
Picture
Text
(Picture Bank
(Input
Name/Picture
Text/ Interlock
Blink
Name/Transparent Font/
State
Effect/Transparent Size/
Color)
Color)
Chapter 5 Buttons
Import/Export
FileSlot
Interlock Address
Language
Change
Invisible Address
Calibration
Write Offset
Memory
Read Offset
Memory
Import/Export
Recipe
execute
After
execute
Before
execute
After
execute
Before
execute
After
execute
Before
execute
After
execute
Before
execute
After
execute
Write Memory
Storage
Macro
Read Memory
Button
Element
Picture
Text
(Picture Bank
(Input
Name/Picture
Text/ Interlock
Blink
Name/Transparent Font/
State
Effect/Transparent Size/
Color)
Color)
5-5
Chapter 5 Buttons
5-6
Set
Reset
Chapter 5 Buttons
Momentary
Maintained
The DOPSoft also provides convenient composing tools for users to edit the properties of
all elements by double-clicking the element, in order to easily edit the application screens.
5-7
Chapter 5 Buttons
Double-click the Set / Reset / Momentary / Maintained to call out the Set / Reset /
Momentary / Maintained Properties screen as shown below.
Details
Macro
Coordinates
Content Description
Views State 0 and State 1 and supports Multi-Language data
display.
Sets Write Address, Read Address, Write Offset Address, Read
Offset Address, Style, Foreground Color, and Blink.
Sets the content, font, font size, font color, bold/italic/underline of
font, scaling, and alignment of the text to be displayed.
Sets Picture Bank Name, Alignment, Picture Stretch Mode, and
Transparent Color.
Set / Reset / Maintained
Sets Interlock Address, Interlock State, Invisible Address, User
Security Level, Set Low Security, Push Time, and Enable
Confirmation Box.
Momentary
Sets Interlock Address, Interlock State, Invisible Address, User
Security Level, Set Low Security, Push Time, Enable Confirmation
Box, and Enable OFF Prompt Tone.
Sets Edit Set (ON) Macro, Edit Reset (OFF) Macro, Before execute
Macro, and After execute Macro.
Sets the X-Y coordinate, width, and height of elements.
Table 5-1-4 Set/Reset/Momentary/Maintained Function Page
5-8
Chapter 5 Buttons
Main
(1)
(2)
(5)
(6)
(8)
(3)
(7)
(4)
(9)
5-9
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
(1)
Write
Address
Function
Users can select the address of internal memory or controller
register. If only Write Memory Address is selected and Read
Memory Address is not selected, HMI will automatically read the
data in Write Memory Address.
Users can select the link for different communication devices from
Link Name. The quantity of the selected links will be displayed in
this item. If there are many connection devices, users can select
the required links from the pull-down. As shown below, there are
Link 1, Link 2, Internal Memory, and Internal Parameter.
(2)
(3)
(4)
5-10
Read
Address
Write
Offset
Address
Read Offset
Address
After selecting links and style and inputting the correct addresses,
press the OK button, and the corresponding data will be recorded
in the selected elements.
Users can select the address of internal memory or controller
register. Others are the same as the Write Memory Address.
Please refer to Appendix D Write and Read Offset Address.
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
(5)
Style
Function
There are four style, including Standard, Raised, Round, and
Invisible. Users can change the element appearance with style.
Standard
Raised
Round
Invisible
(6)
Foreground
Color
Uses can set blink prompt of elements when setting state change
of buttons. The blink color is the opposite color of the foreground
color.
(7)
Blink
(8)
State
5-11
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
(9)
Language
5-12
Function
When language data are defined, users can edit the properties of
text display from Language.
Chapter 5 Buttons
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
Property
(1)
Text
(2)
(3)
Function
Users can input the text to be displayed in the text box.
5-13
Chapter 5 Buttons
Picture
(1)
(2)
(3)
5-14
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
(1)
Picture
Bank Name
Function
The default value for Picture Bank Name is None. Users wishing
to select a display picture can select the desired picture in the
built-in picture bank from the pull-down menu.
5-15
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
Function
Users can align pictures alignment with the alignment options.
Alignment
Stretch modes include: Fill, Keep Aspect Ratio, and Actual Size.
Fill
In the Fill mode,
the selected picture
will fill up the entire
display area.
(2)
Actual Size
In the Actual Size
mode, the picture
will be displayed in
its original size in
the display area.
Stretch
Mode
5-16
Transparent
Color
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
Function
5-17
Chapter 5 Buttons
Details
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
5-18
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
Function
Interlock Address allows users to operate an element from this
particular address. It must be used along with Interlock State. If
Interlock State is OFF, this means the interlock address is
operable when the interlock state is OFF. In contrast, when
Interlock State is ON, this means the interlock address is
operable when the interlock state is ON.
Interlock State
Examples of interlock address application are as follows:
1. First, create a button and set its address as $8.0. Next, set
the original interlock address ($99.0) to $8.0.
2. To make Button $99.0 operable, users must press Button
$8.0 first.
(1)
Interlock
Address
(2)
Invisible
Address
5-19
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
User Security
Level
Function
Sets the user security level of element activities. Only users with
equal or higher security level corresponding to the element can
activate the element.
After setting the user security level, when users activate the
element, the password box will pop up and request users to
input the password (the password can be changed from the
password setup element, please see 5-7 Password Table).
(3)
Set Low
Security
(4)
5-20
Push Time
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
Function
(5)
Enable
Confirmation
Box
5-21
Chapter 5 Buttons
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
5-22
Function
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
Sets element width and height.
Chapter 5 Buttons
Macro
5-23
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
Function
ON Macro Process
(1)
(2)
5-24
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
Function
Before execute
Macro
After execute
Macro
When users touch the button element, HMI will first run the
commands in the corresponding macro pre-action of the
button action. If the button state is not changed by means of
touching button (using external controller commands or
other macros), HMI will not run the corresponding macro
commands.
After users touch the button element, HMI will first run the
button action pre-action the commands in the corresponding
macro. If the button state is not changed by means of
touching button (using external controller commands or
other macros), HMI will not run the corresponding macro
commands.
5-25
Chapter 5 Buttons
5-2 Multistate
Multistate
Multistate can be used to display different state pictures or state values. By setting the
memory address of Multistate as D100, Data Type as Word, Total State Count as 4,
HMI will change states according to the sequence defined by users. Please refer to Table
5-2-1 Example of Multistate below.
Example of Multistate
Table 5-2-1 Example of Multistate
Write Memory
Address
Data Type
Change Sequence
State Counts
D100
Word
Next Sequence
4
Execution Results
5-26
Chapter 5 Buttons
The Multistate Button Element supports four data types as shown in Table 5-2-2 below.
Users wishing to add or remove total state count simply need to add or reduce state
counts from State Counts in properties.
Multistate Button
Table 5-2-2 Example of Multistate Data Type
Data
Type
State Counts
Memory Address
Word
LSB /
LSB
(Support
0 State) If users wish to display State 0, please
select LSB (Support State 0).
5-27
Chapter 5 Buttons
The examples in the following table show how state value is determined with the
lowest non-zero element after converting from a decimal value into a binary
value. There are also examples demonstrating how the DOPSoft determines the
state value displayed with the lowest bit when the decimal values are 3 and 7.
Decimal
Binary
State Value
State=0 when all bits are 0
0
0000000000000000
[LSB (Support State 0) must be selected]
1
0000000000000001
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State=1
2
0000000000000010
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 1, State=2
3
0000000000000011 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State=1
4
0000000000000100
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 2, State=3
7
0000000000000111 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State=1
8
0000000000001000
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 3, State=4
16
0000000000010000
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 4, State=5
32
0000000000100000
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 5, State=6
64
0000000001000000
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 6, State=7
128
0000000010000000
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 7, State=8
256
0000000100000000
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 8, State=9
512
0000001000000000
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 9, State=10
1024
0000010000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 10, State=11
2048
0000100000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 11, State=12
4096
0001000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 12, State=13
8192
0010000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 13, State=14
16384 0100000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 14, State=15
32768 1000000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 15, State=16
If data type is Bit, only 2 states are
If data type is Bit, Bit is data type of
available.
memory address.
Bit
5-28
Chapter 5 Buttons
Multistate
Function Page
Preview
Main
Text
Picture
Details
Macro
Coordinates
Content Description
Views multistate data and Multi-Language data.
Sets Write Address, Read Address, Write Offset Address, Read
Offset Address, Style, Foreground Color, and Blink.
Sets the Data Type, Data Format, State Counts, and Change
Sequence of Multistate.
Sets the content, font, font size, font color, bold/italic/underline of
font, scaling, and alignment of the text to be displayed.
Sets Picture Bank Name, Alignment, Picture Stretch Mode, and
Transparent Color.
Sets Interlock Address, Interlock State, Invisible Address, User
Security Level, Set Low Security, and Enable Confirmation Box.
Sets Before Execute Macro and After Execute Macro.
Sets the X-Y coordinate, width, and height of elements.
Table 5-2-3 Multistate Function Page
5-29
Chapter 5 Buttons
Main
(1)
(3)
(4)
(10)
(5)
(6)
(2)
(11)
(7)
(8)
(9)
No.
Property
Write Address
(1)
Read Address
Function
Selects the address of internal memory or controller register.
Memory type change is subject to the selected data type,
including Word, LSB, and Bit, as shown in Table 5-2-2. If Write
Memory Address is selected without selecting Read Memory
Address, HMI will automatically read the data in the Write
Memory Address.
Selects link name or style. Please refer to 5-1 Buttons of
Chapter 05 for details.
Write Offset
Address
(2)
Read Offset
Address
(3)
5-30
Data Type
Four options: Bit, Word, LSB, and LSB (Support State 0).
Please refer to Table 5-2-2 for details.
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
(4)
Data Format
(5)
State Counts
(6)
Sequence
(7)
Style
(8)
Foreground
Color
Function
Data format can only be selected when data type is Word.
These formats include BCD, Signed Decimal, Unsigned
Decimal, and Hexadecimal.
5-31
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
Function
(9)
Blink
(10)
5-32
State
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
(11)
Function
When language data are defined, users can edit the properties
of text display from Language.
Language
5-33
Chapter 5 Buttons
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
5-34
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
(3)
Function
Users can input the text to be displayed in the text box.
Text
Sets text properties, including font type, font size, font color,
scaling, text alignment, and bold/italic/underline of font. Please
Text Properties
refer to the above figure for details about the results of text
properties.
Users can add Multi-Language text data from the
Multi-Language
Multi-Language Text Page. As shown in the Text Properties
Text Data
Figure, users can input English text in the English field.
5-35
Chapter 5 Buttons
Picture
(1)
(2)
(3)
5-36
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
(1)
Picture
Bank
Name
Function
The default value for Picture Bank Name is None. Users wishing
to select a display picture can select the desired picture in the
built-in picture bank from the pull-down menu.
5-37
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
Function
Users can align pictures alignment with the alignment options.
Alignment
(2)
Stretch modes include: Fill, Keep Aspect Ratio, and Actual Size.
Fill
Keep Aspect Ratio
Actual Size
In the Fill mode,
In the Keep Aspect In the Actual Size
the selected picture Ratio mode, the
mode, the picture
will fill up the entire selected picture will will be displayed in
display area.
fit in the display
its original size in
area proportionally the display area.
according to the
picture ratio.
Stretch
Mode
If Process all state pictures is selected, the system assumes that
each element has multiple entries of state data, and some pictures
may be unable to fill the entire display area. By selecting this item,
users will not need to set individual pictures to save time editing.
Users can set a color in the picture to transparent. In this case, by
clicking the Transparent Color icon
and then the orange part of
the loom, the DOPSoft will omit all orange parts in the picture and
turn them transparent; thus turning the foreground color
transparent.
(3)
5-38
Transparen
t Color
Chapter 5 Buttons
Details
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
No.
Property
Function
Interlock Address allows users to operate an element from this
particular address. It must be used along with Interlock State. If
Interlock State is OFF, this means the interlock address is
Interlock State
operable when the interlock state is OFF. In contrast, when
Interlock State is ON, this means the interlock address is
operable when the interlock state is ON.
Examples of the interlock address application are as follows:
1. First, create a button and set its address as $8.0. Next, set
the original interlock address ($99.0) to $8.0.
2. To make Button $99.0 operable, users must press Button
$8.0 first.
(1)
Interlock
Address
5-39
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
(2)
Invisible
Address
(3)
User Security
Level
5-40
Function
When Invisible Address is ON, the button element is hidden,
and the corresponding function is disabled.
Sets the user security level of element activities. Only users with
equal or higher security level corresponding to the element can
activate the element.
After setting the user security level, when users activate the
element, the password box will pop up and request users to
input the password (the password can be changed from the
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
Function
password setup element, please see 5-7 Password Table).
Set Low
Security
(4)
Enable
Confirmation
Box
5-41
Chapter 5 Buttons
Coordiates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
5-42
Function
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
Sets element width and height.
Chapter 5 Buttons
Macro
5-43
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
Function
The before execute macro and after execute macro processes are diagrammed
below:
(1)
Before
execute
Macro
After execute
Macro
5-44
When users touch the button element, HMI will first run the
commands in the corresponding macro pre-action of the button
action. If the button state is not changed by means of touching
button (using external controller commands or other macros),
HMI will not run the corresponding macro commands.
After users touch the button element, HMI will first run the
button action pre-action the commands in the corresponding
macro. If the button state is not changed by means of touching
button (using external controller commands or other macros),
HMI will not run the corresponding macro commands.
Chapter 5 Buttons
Write
Address
Read Address of
Numeric Display Value
D50
Execution
Results
5-45
Chapter 5 Buttons
Double-click Set Value to call out the Set Value Properties screen as shown below.
Set Value
Function Page
Preview
Main
Text
Picture
Details
Macro
Coordinates
Content Description
Views Multi-Language data and does not support multistate data.
Sets Write Address, Write Offset Address, Style, and Foreground
Color.
Sets the Data Type and Data Format of Set Value elements;
Keyboard Style, Maximum / Minimum Values, Integer Digit, and
Decimal Place.
Sets the content, font, font size, font color, bold/italic/underline of
font, scaling, and alignment of the text to be displayed.
Sets Picture Bank Name, Alignment, Picture Stretch Mode, and
Transparent Color.
Sets Interlock Address, Interlock State, Activation Methods,
Activation, Invisible Address, User Security Level, Set Low Security,
Hide Character, Enable Confirmation Box, and Exceed Limit
Reminder.
Sets Before execute Macro and After execute Macro.
Sets the X-Y coordinate, width, and height of elements.
Table 5-3-2 Set Value Function Page
5-46
Chapter 5 Buttons
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(6)
(4)
(8)
(5)
(7)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
Function
Selects the address of internal memory or controller register.
Addresses must be in Word format.
Selects link name or style. Please refer to 5-1 Buttons of Chapter
05 for details.
Write
Address
Write Offset
Address
Data Type
5-47
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
(3)
Property
Data Format
Function
Word data type supports the following data formats:
Word
(4)
Minimum /
Maximum
Double
Word
(5)
5-48
Integer Digit
/ Fractional
Data Format
BCD
Signed BCD
Signed Decimal
Unsigned Decimal
Hex
Binary
BCD
Signed BCD
Signed Decimal
Unsigned Decimal
Hex
Binary
Floating
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
(6)
Function
There are four Styles, including Standard, Raised, Round, and
Invisible. Users can change the element appearance with style.
Standard
Raised
Round
Invisible
Style
(7)
Foreground
Color
(8)
When language data are defined, users can edit the properties of
text display from Language.
Language
5-49
Chapter 5 Buttons
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
(1)
5-50
Property
Text
Function
Users can input the text to be displayed in the text box.
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
(2)
Text
Properties
(3)
Multi-Langua
ge Text Data
Function
Sets text properties, including font type, font size, font color,
scaling, text alignment, and bold/italic/underline of font. Please
refer to the above figure for details about the results of text
properties.
Users can add Multi-Language text data from the Multi-Language
Text Page. As shown in the Text Properties Figure, users can
input English text in the English field.
5-51
Chapter 5 Buttons
Picture
(1)
(2)
(3)
5-52
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
(1)
Picture Bank
Name
Function
The default value for Picture Bank Name is None. Users
wishing to select a display picture can select the desired picture
in the built-in picture bank from the pull-down menu.
5-53
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
Function
Users can align pictures alignment with the alignment options.
Alignment
Stretch modes include: Fill, Keep Aspect Ratio, and Actual Size.
Fill
Keep Aspect Ratio
Actual Size
In the Fill mode,
In the Keep Aspect In the Actual Size
the selected picture Ratio mode, the
mode, the picture
will fill up the entire selected picture will will be displayed in
display area.
fit in the display
its original size in
area proportionally the display area.
according to the
picture ratio.
(2)
Stretch
Mode
(3)
5-54
Transparent
Color
Chapter 5 Buttons
Details
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
No.
Property
Interlock State
(1)
Interlock
Address
Function
5-55
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
Trigger type
Function
(2)
Trigger
5-56
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
(3)
Invisible
Address
(4)
User Security
Level
Function
When Invisible Address is ON, the button element is hidden,
and the corresponding function is disabled.
Sets the user security level of element activities. Only users with
equal or higher security level corresponding to the element can
activate the element.
After setting the user security level, when users activate the
element, the password box will pop up and request users to
input the password (the password can be changed from the
5-57
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
Function
password setup element, please see 5-7 Password Table).
Set Low
Security
(5)
Display
Asterisk
(6)
Enable
Confirmation
Box
5-58
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
Function
(7)
Exceed Limit
Reminder
5-59
Chapter 5 Buttons
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
5-60
Function
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
Sets element width and height.
Chapter 5 Buttons
Macro
5-61
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
Function
The before execute macro and after execute macro processes are diagrammed
below:
(1)
Before
Execute
Macro
After Execute
Macro
5-62
When users touch the button element, HMI will first run the
commands in the corresponding macro pre-action of the button
action. If the button state is not changed by means of touching
button (using external controller commands or other macros),
HMI will not run the corresponding macro commands.
After users touch the button element, HMI will first run the button
action pre-action the commands in the corresponding macro. If
the button state is not changed by means of touching button
(using external controller commands or other macros), HMI will
not run the corresponding macro commands.
Chapter 5 Buttons
Set
Constant
Element
Address
Value of Set
Constant
Element
Memory
Address of
Numeric
Display
Element
Data Type
Word
Execution
Results
5-63
Chapter 5 Buttons
Double-click Set Constant to call out the Set Constant Properties screen as shown below.
Set Constant
Function Page
Preview
Main
Text
Picture
Details
Macro
Coordinates
Content Description
Views Multi-Language data and does not support multistate data.
Sets Write Address, Write Offset Address, Style, and Foreground Color.
Sets the Data Type, Data Format, and Value of Set Constant elements.
Sets the content, font, font size, font color, bold/italic/underline of font,
scaling, and alignment of the text to be displayed.
Sets Picture Bank Name, Alignment, Picture Stretch Mode, and
Transparent Color.
Sets Interlock Address, Interlock State, Activation Methods, Activation,
Invisible Address, User Security Level, Set Low Security, and Enable
Confirmation Box.
Sets Before execute Macro and After execute Macro.
Sets the X-Y coordinate, width, and height of button elements.
Table 5-4-2 Set Constant Function Page
5-64
Chapter 5 Buttons
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(7)
(5)
(6)
No.
(1)
Property
Write
Address
Write Offset
Address
Function
Selects the address of internal memory or controller register.
Addresses must be in Word format.
Selects link name or style. Please refer to 5-1 Buttons of Chapter
05 for details.
Please refer to Appendix D Write and Read Offset Address.
Data types include Word and Double Word.
(2)
Data Type
5-65
Chapter 5 Buttons
(3)
Data Format
Double Word data type supports the following data formats:
(4)
Detail
(5)
Style
(6)
Foreground
Color
5-66
Chapter 5 Buttons
When language data are defined, users can edit the properties of
text display from Language.
(7)
Language
5-67
Chapter 5 Buttons
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
(1)
5-68
Property
Text
Function
Users can input the text to be displayed in the text box.
Chapter 5 Buttons
(2)
(3)
Sets text properties, including font type, font size, font color, scaling,
text alignment, and bold/italic/underline of font. Please refer to the
above figure for details about the results of text properties.
Users can add Multi-Language text data from the Multi-Language Text
Multi-Language
Page. As shown in the Text Properties Figure, users can input English
Text Data
text in the English field.
Text Properties
5-69
Chapter 5 Buttons
Picture
(1)
(2)
(3)
5-70
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
(1)
Function
The default value for Picture Bank Name is None. Users
wishing to select a display picture can select the desired
picture in the built-in picture bank from the pull-down menu.
Picture
Bank
Name
5-71
Chapter 5 Buttons
Alignme
nt
(2)
Stretch
Mode
(3)
5-72
Transpa
rent
Color
Chapter 5 Buttons
Details
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
No.
Property
Interlock State
Function
Interlock Address allows users to operate an element from this
particular address. It must be used along with Interlock State. If
Interlock State is OFF, this means the interlock address is
operable when the interlock state is OFF. In contrast, when
Interlock State is ON, this means the interlock address is
operable when the interlock state is ON.
Examples of interlock address application are as follows:
1. First, create a button and set its address as $8.0. Next, set
the original interlock address ($99.0) to $8.0.
2. To make Button $99.0 operable, users must press Button
$8.0 first.
(1)
Interlock
Address
Trigger type
(2)
Trigger
Chapter 5 Buttons
5-74
Chapter 5 Buttons
(3)
(4)
Invisible
Address
User Security
Level
Sets the user security level of element activities. Only users with
equal or higher security level corresponding to the element can
activate the element.
After setting the user security level, when users activate the
element, the password box will pop up and request users to
input the password (the password can be changed from the
password setup element, please see 5-7 Password Table).
Set Low
Security
5-75
Chapter 5 Buttons
(5)
5-76
Enable
Confirmation
Box
Chapter 5 Buttons
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
(1)
(2)
Property
Function
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
X-value and Y-value
elements.
Width and Height
Sets element width and height.
5-77
Chapter 5 Buttons
Macro
5-78
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
Function
The before execute macro and after execute macro processes are diagrammed
below:
(1)
Before
Execute
Macro
After Execute
Macro
When users touch the button element, HMI will first run the
commands in the corresponding macro pre-action of the button
action. If the button state is not changed by means of touching
button (using external controller commands or other macros),
HMI will not run the corresponding macro commands.
After users touch the button element, HMI will first run the button
action to pre-action the commands in the corresponding macro.
If the button state is not changed by means of touching button
(using external controller commands or other macros), HMI will
not run the corresponding macro commands.
5-79
Chapter 5 Buttons
Memory
Address
Write Address of
Increment
$555
Increment
Write Address of
Decrement
$555
Read Address of
Numeric Display
$555
Decrement
Increment
/
Decremen
t Values
Increment
Execution
Results
Decrement
5-80
Chapter 5 Buttons
Double-click Increment / Decrement to call out the Increment / Decrement Properties screen
as shown below.
Increment / Decrement
Function Page
Preview
Main
Text
Picture
Details
Macro
Coordinates
Content Description
Views Multi-Language data and does not support multistate data.
Sets Write Address, Read Address, Write Offset Address, Read Offset
Address, Style, and Foreground Color.
Sets the Data Type, Data Format, Increment / Decrement Value, and
Upper/Lower Exceed Limit of Momentary / Decrement elements.
Sets the content, font, font size, font color, bold/italic/underline of font,
scaling, and alignment of the text to be displayed.
Sets Picture Bank Name, Alignment, Picture Stretch Mode, and
Transparent.
Sets Interlock Address, Interlock State, Activation Methods, Activation,
Invisible Address, User Security Level, Set Low Security, and Enable
Confirmation Box.
Sets Before execute Macro and After execute Macro.
Sets the X-Y coordinate, width, and height of button elements.
Table 5-5-2 Set Constant Function Page
5-81
Chapter 5 Buttons
Main
(1)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(2)
(8)
(6)
(7)
5-82
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
Write Address
(1)
Read Address
Write Address
(2)
Function
Selects the address of internal memory or controller register.
Addresses must be in Word format.
Selects link name or style. Please refer to 5-1 Buttons of Chapter
05 for details.
Read Address
Data types include Word and Double Word.
(3)
Data Type
(4)
Data Format
5-83
Chapter 5 Buttons
Increment /
Decrement
Value
(5)
Upper/Lower
Limit
(6)
Style
(7)
5-84
Foreground
Color
Chapter 5 Buttons
(8)
When language data are defined, users can edit the properties of
text display from Language.
Language
5-85
Chapter 5 Buttons
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
(3)
5-86
Function
Users can input the text to be displayed in the text box.
Text
Sets text properties, including font type, font size, font color,
scaling, text alignment, and bold/italic/underline of font. Please
Text Properties
refer to the above figure for details about the results of text
properties.
Users can add Multi-Language text data from the
Multi-Language
Multi-Language Text Page. As shown in the Text Properties
Text Data
Figure, users can input English text in the English field.
Chapter 5 Buttons
Picture
(1)
(2)
(3)
5-87
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
5-88
Function
The default value for Picture Bank Name is None.
Users wishing to select a display picture can select the
desired picture in the built-in picture bank from the
pull-down menu.
Picture
Bank
Name
Alignment
Chapter 5 Buttons
Fill
In the Fill mode,
the selected
picture will fill up
the entire display
area.
Actual Size
In the Actual Size
mode, the picture
will be displayed in
its original size in
the display area.
Stretch
Mode
(3)
Transpare
nt Color
5-89
Chapter 5 Buttons
Details
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
No.
Property
Function Description
Interlock Address allows users to operate an element from this
particular address. It m
Ust be used along with Interlock State. If Interlock State is OFF,
this means the interlock address is operable when the interlock
state is OFF. In contrast, when Interlock State is ON, this
means the interlock address is operable when the interlock state
Interlock State
is ON.
Examples of interlock address application are as follows:
1. First, create a button and set its address as $8.0. Next, set
the original interlock address ($99.0) to $8.0.
2. To make Button $99.0 operable, users must press Button
$8.0 first.
(1)
Interlock
Address
5-90
Chapter 5 Buttons
After writing
Values are changed
before the activation bit
is ON.
Users can create a button element, set its memory address, and
select Pre-writing activation or Post-writing activation to activate
the controller Bit address to ON.
As the activation function only sets the activation address to ON,
users must set the activation address of OFF before
re-activation.
Before writing:
After writing:
(2)
Trigger
5-91
Chapter 5 Buttons
(3)
(4)
Invisible
Address
User Security
Level
Set Low
Security
5-92
Sets the user security level of element activities. Only users with
equal or higher security level corresponding to the element can
activate the element.
After setting the user security level, when users activate the
element, the password box will pop up and request users to
input the password (the password can be changed from the
password setup element, please see 5-7 Password Table).
Chapter 5 Buttons
(5)
Enable
Confirmation
Box
5-93
Chapter 5 Buttons
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
5-94
Function
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
Sets element width and height.
Chapter 5 Buttons
Macro
5-95
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
Function
The before execute macro and after execute macro processes are diagrammed
below:
(1)
Before
Execute
Macro
After Execute
Macro
5-96
When users touch the button element, HMI will first run the
commands in the corresponding macro pre-action of the button
action. If the button state is not changed by means of touching
button (using external controller commands or other macros),
HMI will not run the corresponding macro commands.
After users touch the button element, HMI will first run the button
action pre-action for the commands in the corresponding macro.
If the button state is not changed by means of touching button
(using external controller commands or other macros), HMI will
not run the corresponding macro commands.
Chapter 5 Buttons
The [Back] button options are found in the Goto Screen and Previous Page properties
pages. Users can select [Goto Screen], [Previous Page], and [Back] in the properties page.
5-97
Chapter 5 Buttons
The Goto
Screen item in
the Goto
Screen
element
Execution
Results
5-98
Chapter 5 Buttons
When activating the Back button, HMI will record the previous Goto
Screen sequence, such as Screen 1 Screen 2 Screen 3. Next,
HMI will run the Back button function. In this case, the screen
change sequence is Screen 3 Screen 2 Screen 1
5-99
Chapter 5 Buttons
Double-click Goto Screen / Previous Page to call out the Goto Screen / Previous Page
Properties screen as shown below.
Goto
Screen
Previous
Page
5-100
Chapter 5 Buttons
Details
Macro
Coordinates
Content Description
Views Multi-Language data and does not support multistate data.
Set Style and Foreground Color.
Sets the Change Screen, Close Window, and Low Security after
Goto Screen features of Goto Screen elements.
Sets the content, font, font size, font color, bold/italic/underline of
font, scaling, and alignment of the text to be displayed.
Sets Picture Bank Name, Alignment, Picture Stretch Mode, and
Transparent Color.
Goto Screen
Sets Interlock Address, Interlock State, Activation Methods,
Activation, Invisible Address, User Security Level, Confirm Window
and Cancel Action Address.
Previous Page
Sets Interlock Address, Interlock State, Activation Methods,
Activation, Invisible Address, User Security Level, Set Low Security,
and Confirm Window.
Sets Before execute Macro and After execute Macro.
Sets the X-Y coordinate, width, and height of button elements.
Table 5-6-2 Goto Screen / Previous Page Function Page
5-101
Chapter 5 Buttons
Main
(3)
(4)
Goto
Screen
(5)
(1)
(2)
Previous
Page
Figure 5-6-3 Goto Screen / Previous Page Element Main Properties Page
5-102
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
(1)
Style
Function
There are four Styles, including Standard, Raised, Round, and
Invisible. Users can change the element appearance with style.
Standard
Raised
Round
Invisible
(2)
Foreground
Color
Click the button shown in the above red frame. The Select Screen
window will pop up. Select the screen to be changed as shown
below:
(3)
Change
Screen
5-103
Chapter 5 Buttons
Close
Window
The Close Window item will only be enabled after a Goto Screen
button is created for a window. When the Goto Screen button is
activated, the screen will be changed and the present window will
be closed.
Forces to set user security level to the lowest after pressing the
button to prevent the unintended uses of buttons.
(4)
Goto Screen
after Low
Security
(5)
5-104
When language data are defined, users can edit the properties of
text display from Language.
Language
Chapter 5 Buttons
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
Figure 5-6-4 Goto Screen / Previous Page Element Text Properties Page
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
(3)
Function
Users can input the text to be displayed in the text box.
Text
Sets text properties, including font type, font size, font color, scaling,
text alignment, and bold/italic/underline of font. Please refer to the
above figure for details about the results of text properties.
Users can add Multi-Language text data from the Multi-Language
Multi-Langua
Text Page. As shown in the Text Properties Figure, users can input
ge Text Data
English text in the English field.
Text
Properties
5-105
Chapter 5 Buttons
Picture
(1)
(2)
(3)
Figure 5-6-5 Goto Screen / Previous Page Element Picture Properties Page
5-106
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
(1)
Picture Bank
Name
Function
The default value for Picture Bank Name is None. Users wishing to
select a display picture can select the desired picture in the built-in
picture bank from the pull-down menu.
5-107
Chapter 5 Buttons
Alignment
Stretch modes include: Fill, Keep Aspect Ratio, and Actual Size.
Fill
Keep Aspect Ratio
Actual Size
In the Fill mode, the In the Keep Aspect
In the Actual Size
selected picture will
Ratio mode, the
mode, the picture will
fill up the entire
selected picture will
be displayed in its
display area.
fit in the display area original size in the
proportionally
display area.
according to the
picture ratio.
(2)
Stretch Mode
(3)
Transparent
Color
5-108
Chapter 5 Buttons
Details
(1)
(2)
(3)
Goto
Screen
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1)
(2)
Previous
Page
(3)
(4)
(5)
Figure 5-6-6 Goto Screen / Previous Page Element Details Properties Page
5-109
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
Interlock State
Function
Interlock Address allows users to operate an element from this
particular address. It must be used along with Interlock State. If
Interlock State is OFF, this means the interlock address is
operable when the interlock state is OFF. In contrast, when
Interlock State is ON, this means the interlock address is
operable when the interlock state is ON.
Examples of interlock address application are as follows:
1. First, create a button and set its address as $8.0. Next, set
the original interlock address ($99.0) to $8.0.
2. To make Button $99.0 operable, users must press Button
$8.0 first.
(1)
Interlock
Address
Trigger type
(2)
Trigger
5-110
Chapter 5 Buttons
(3)
Invisible
Address
5-111
Chapter 5 Buttons
User Security
Level
Sets the user security level of element activities. Only users with
equal or higher security level corresponding to the element can
activate the element.
After setting the user security level, when users activate the
element, the password box will pop up and request users to
input the password (the password can be changed from the
password setup element, please see 5-7 Password Table).
(4)
Set Low
Security
(5)
Confirm
Window
(6)
Cancel Act.
Address
5-112
Chapter 5 Buttons
NOTE
Function of Go to Screen is only available when Interlock
Address is actiavated. Cancel Act. Address allows users to
cacnel the action. If Cancel Act. Address is on, users will be
unable to change the screen even when the Interlock Address
is on.
5-113
Chapter 5 Buttons
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
Figure 5-6-7 Goto Screen / Previous Page Element Coordinates Properties Page
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
5-114
Function
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
Sets element width and height.
Chapter 5 Buttons
Macro
Figure 5-6-8 Goto Screen / Previous Page Element Macro Properties Page
5-115
Chapter 5 Buttons
No.
Property
Function
The before execute macro and after execute macro processes are diagrammed
below:
(1)
Before
Execute
Macro
After Execute
Macro
5-116
When users touch the button element, HMI will first run the
commands in the corresponding macro pre-action the button
action. If the button state is not changed by means of touching
button (using external controller commands or other macros),
HMI will not run the corresponding macro commands.
After users touch the button element, HMI will first run the button
action pre-action the commands in the corresponding macro. If
the button state is not changed by means of touching button
(using external controller commands or other macros), HMI will
not run the corresponding macro commands.
Chapter 5 Buttons
5-7-1
Icon
Name
System
Date
Time
Properties
Illustration
5-117
Chapter 5 Buttons
5-7-2
Icon
5-118
Name
Properties
Password
Table
Setup
Illustration
Superior Password
Security Level = 4.
Chapter 5 Buttons
5-7-3
Icon
Enter Password
Name
Properties
Enter
Password
5-7-4
Icon
Name
Contr
ast
Bright
ness
Contrast Brightness
Properties
Changes HMI contrast and
brightness. Touch the Contrast
Brightness button, the LCD
Modulate window will pop up
for users to adjust HMI contrast
and brightness.
B05S100 / B05S101 / B07S201
/ B07S211 support Gamma
Adjust and Brightness Adjust. In
later models, such as
B07S(E)415 / B07S(E)515 /
B08S(E)515 / B10S(E)615,
users can only adjust
brightness.
5-7-5
Icon
Illustration
Low Security
Name
Low
Security
Illustration
Properties
Touch the Low Security button will set the
User Security Level to the lowest. Users can
set User Security Level in all software
elements, in order to prevent system
parameters from interpolation or random
access, which will result in system errors.
Illustration
5-119
Chapter 5 Buttons
5-7-6
Icon
Icon
Name
Properties
System
Menu
5-7-7
Report List
Name
Report
List
5-120
System Menu
Properties
The Report List button provides 3
storage options: USB Disk, Printer,
and SD.
Users can select the device
according to the desired storage.
Touch the Report List button to
output data to the selected storage.
Illustration
Illustration
Chapter 5 Buttons
5-7-8
Icon
Screen Capture
Name
Screen
Capture
Properties
Screen Capture
(1)
allows users to
capture and store the
present HMI screen to
an external storage
device. Storage types
include USB Disk and
(2)
SD as shown in
Figure (1) on the right.
Touch the Screen
Capture button. The
Save Screen
message box will pop
up, informing users
screen capture data
are saved in the
selected storage as
shown in Figure (2)
on the right.
After storing the
captured screens in
the selected storage,
users can check the
corresponding files
from the external
storage. File folders
are named by date
and files are named
by the time
(HH:mm:ss) when the
files are saved.
Illustration
(3)
(4)
5-121
Chapter 5 Buttons
5-7-9
Icon
Remove Storage
Name
Properties
Remove
Storage
Illustration
(1)
(2)
Icon
Name
Import/
Export
Recipe
Properties
Users must first edit and
open a recipe before
running Import/Export
Recipe. Otherwise, the
button is disabled.
Users can define the
function of the
Import/Export Recipe to
import or export as
shown in Figure (1) on
the right.
Illustration
(1)
(2)
Chapter 5 Buttons
Recipe button, a
message box informing
users that import or
export is in progress will
pop up as shown in
Figure (3) on the right.
All recipes are exported
in CSV files and stored
in default folder HMI-000
in HMI.
5-7-11 Calibration
Icon
Name
Calibration
Properties
Illustration
5-123
Chapter 5 Buttons
Icon
Name
Properties
Illustration
(1)
Language Change
allows users to quickly
change the display
language.
Language
Change
(2)
5-124
Chapter 5 Buttons
Icon
Name
Import /
Export
FileSlot
Properties
If desire to use the button of
Import/Export FileSlot, users have
to set up the number and size of
FileSlot first to make it valid.
The import/Export FileSlot button
can be set as Import or Export
when you press the button. See
figure (1) on the right.
Users have to specify FileSlot ID
when setting the import/Export
FileSlot button. See figure (2) on
(2)
(3)
Illustration
(1)
Memory Usage
Internal
PLC
Memory Register
Const
ant
5-125
Chapter 5 Buttons
Function
Page
Property
Style
Function
There are four Styles, including Standard, Raised, Round,
and Invisible. Users can change the element appearance
with style.
Standard Raised
Round Invisible
Main
Foreground
Color
Text
Text
Text
Properties
Multi-Langua
ge Text Data
5-126
Users can set text properties, including font type, font size,
and font color, scaling, text alignment, and
bold/italic/underline of font.
Users can add Multi-Language text data from the
Multi-Language Text Page. As shown in the Text Properties
Revision June, 2015
Chapter 5 Buttons
Picture Bank
Name
Picture
Alignment
5-127
Chapter 5 Buttons
Actual Size
In the Actual
Size mode, the
picture will be
displayed in its
original size in the
display area.
Stretch Mode
5-128
Chapter 5 Buttons
Interlock
State
Interlock
Address
Details
Invisible
Address
5-129
Chapter 5 Buttons
User Security
Level
Enable
Confirmation
Box
Coordinat
es
Macro
5-130
Chapter 5 Buttons
When users touch the button element, HMI will first run the
commands in the corresponding macro pre-action of the
Before
button action. If the button state is not changed by means
Execute
of touching button (using external controller commands or
Macro
other macros), HMI will not run the corresponding macro
commands.
After users touch the button element, HMI will first run the
button action pre-action the commands in the
After Execute
corresponding macro. If the button state is not changed by
Macro
means of touching button (using external controller
commands or other macros), HMI will not run the
corresponding macro commands.
5-131
Chapter 6 Meter
Contents
6-1
6-1
Chapter 6 Meter
Chapter 06 Meter
This chapter mainly describes the meter elements provided in the DOPSoft and how they
are operated and configured.
Meter Element Classification:
Meter (1)
Meter
Meter (2)
Meter (3)
Table 6-1-1 Meter Element Classification
Meter
Read
Element Address
Read
Offset
Address
Enable
Write Target Range
Address Value Numeric
Entry
Target Value
and
Higher/Lower
Limits as
Variable
(Mark
Settings
Count/Secondary
(Data
Mark Count/Hand
Type/Data
Color/Mark Color/
Format/
Value
Entry /
Maximum
Style/ Foreground
Value
Color/ Background
Entry)
Color)
Meter (1)
Meter (2)
Meter (3)
6-2
Chapter 6 Meter
Meter (1)
Meter (2)
Meter (3)
The DOPSoft provides users with 3 types of meters to display the quantitative value of the
memory addresses they have configured, and if these values exceed the upper and lower
limits. Users can define the memory address of the target value, higher limit value, and
lower limit value of the meter, in order to enhance the flexibility of meter functions and meet
user demands. Users can also define different colors for the lower limit, higher limit and
target values, in order to clearly identity these values in the meter. Please refer to the
example in Table 6-1-3 for details.
6-3
Chapter 6 Meter
$1000
Read Address
Properties
Enable Range
Numeric Entry
Data Type
Word
Data Format
Unsigned
Decimal
Minimum
Maximum
1000
Screen Cycle
Macro
Meter Element
Legend
Execution
Results
6-4
By downloading the edited screen to the HMI, the HMI will run the
programs in the screen cycle macro and display the results in the
corresponding memory addresses defined in the meter elements in
the accumulation process.
Chapter 6 Meter
Double-click the Meter Element item to call out the following Element Properties page.
Main
Text
Coordinates
Content Description
Supports only multi-language display of data and does not support
multi-state display.
Sets read memory address, Style, foreground color, and
background color.
Sets mark count, secondary mark count, hand color, mark color,
scale color, border color, lower limit range color, and higher limit
range color.
Sets element Data Type, Data Format, Minimum Value Entry, and
Maximum Value Entry.
Sets show/hide target value and target value color; enables range
Numeric Entry, target value and higher/lower values as variable,
integer digits, and decimal places.
Sets text content to be displayed and text properties, including font
type, font size, font color, display format, scaling, text alignment,
and bold/italic/underline of font.
Sets the X-Y coordinate, width, and height of button elements.
Figure 6-1-4 Meter Function Page
6-5
Chapter 6 Meter
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(10)
(5)
(9)
(8)
(7)
(6)
No.
(1)
Property
Read
Address
Function
Selects the address of internal memory or controller register. The
memory type should be Word only.
Selects Link Name or Style. Please refer to 5-1 Button of Chapter 05
for details.
Read Offset
Please refer to Appendix D Write and Read Offset Address.
Address
Two options: Word and Double Word.
(2)
Data Type
(3)
Data
Format
6-6
Chapter 6 Meter
No.
Property
Function
(4)
Minimum/M
aximum
Word
BCD
0~9999
Signed BCD
-999 ~ 9999
Signed Decimal
-32768~32767
Double
Word
BCD
0~99999999
Signed BCD
-9999999 ~ 99999999
Signed Decimal
-2147483648~2147483647
6-7
Chapter 6 Meter
No.
Property
(5)
Display
Format
(6)
Foreground
and
Background
Colors
Function
If the Target Value and Higher/Lower Limit
Values as Variable item is not selected, users
Target Display
can only input a constant value to restrict the
target display value of meters. Users can also
set the display color.
Enable Range Numeric Entry includes the
value of the lower and higher limits. Like the
case in Target Display, if the Target Value and
Enable Range
Higher/Lower Limit Values as Variable item is
Numeric Entry
not selected, users can only input a constant
value in the lower and higher limits to restrict
the value of the lower and higher limits of
meters.
Target Value and By selecting this item, users can define the
Higher/Lower
display value of the target value, lower higher
limit value, and higher limit value dynamically
Limit Values as
Variable
controlled by memory address.
Integer Digits
Users can define the number of digits for
integers and the places of decimals to be
Decimal Places
displayed in meters.
Sets the foreground and background colors of elements.
Styles include Standard, Raised, and Sunken. Users can change the
appearance display of elements.
Standard
Raised
Sunken
(7)
Style
(8)
Numeric
Display
6-8
Chapter 6 Meter
No.
Property
Function
Set
Numeric
Display to Yes
Set
Numeric
Display to No
(9)
Type
Mark Count
Secondary
Mark Count
Hand Color
Mark Color
Scale Color
Border Color
Lower Limit
Range Color
Higher Limit
Range Color
From 1 to 10 marks.
From 0 to 99 marks.
Users can define the color of the hand.
Users can define the color of the mark.
Users can define the color of the scale.
Users can define the color of the border.
Users can define the color of the lower limit range.
Users can define the color of the higher limit range.
6-9
Chapter 6 Meter
No.
Property
(10)
Language
6-10
Function
When text data are defined, users can edit the text properties to be
displayed in the Language of the element.
Chapter 6 Meter
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
Property
(1)
Text
(2)
Text Properties
(3)
Multi-Language
Text Data
Functions
Users can input the text to be displayed in the text box.
Sets text properties, including font type, font size, font color,
scaling, text alignment, and bold/italic/underline of font. Please
refer to the above figure for details about the results of text
properties.
Users can add Multi-Language text data from the
Multi-Language Text Page. As shown in the Text Properties
Figure, users can input English text in the English field.
6-11
Chapter 6 Meter
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
6-12
Function
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
Sets element width and height.
Chapter 7 Bar
Contents
7-1
7-2
Normal ...................................................................................................................... 3
Differential ............................................................................................................... 15
7-1
Chapter 7 Bar
Chapter 07 Bar
This chapter mainly describes the Bar elements provided in the DOPSoft and how they are
operated and configured.
Bar Element Classification
Bar
Normal
Differential
Table 7-1-1 Bar Element Classification
Normal
Differential
Settings
(Data
Type/Data
Format/
Minimum/
Maximum)
(No
lower/higher
limit range
colors
7-2
Chapter 7 Bar
7-1 Normal
Normal
Normal display on the HMI the register values of the corresponding read memory
addresses in ascending order. Like the meter elements, users can define the memory
address of the target value, higher limit value, and lower limit value in the Normal, in order
to enhance the flexibility of Normal functions and meet user demands. Users can also
define different colors for the lower limit, higher limit and target values, in order to clearly
identify these values in the Normal. Please refer to Table 7-1-3 below for details.
7-3
Chapter 7 Bar
Identify the lower and higher limit ranges of a Normal with different colors.
(1)
(2)
(3)
7-4
Chapter 7 Bar
Examples of Normal
Table 7-1-4 Normal Element Examples
Read Address
$1000
Data Type
Properties
Target Numeric
Display
Enable Range
Numeric Entry
Word
Data Format
Unsigned
Decimal
Target Value
Color
Minimum
Maximum
1000
Target Value
500
Screen Cycle
Macro
Legend of Normal
Charge Elements
By downloading the edited screen to the HMI, the HMI will run the
programs in the screen cycle macro and display the results in the
corresponding memory addresses defined in the Normal
elements in the accumulation process.
Execution Results
7-5
Chapter 7 Bar
Double-click the Normal Element item to call out the following Normal Element Properties
page.
7-6
Chapter 7 Bar
Normal
Function page
Content Description
Preview
Main
Sets read address, read offset address, Style, foreground color, and
background color.
Sets display format, frame color, lower limit range color, and higher
limit range color.
Sets element Data Type, Data Format, Minimum Value Entry,
Maximum Value Entry and variable minimum and maximum limits.
Sets show/hide target value and target value color; enables range
Numeric Entry; and enables target value and higher/lower limit
values as variables.
Text
Coordinates
7-7
Chapter 7 Bar
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(9)
(8)
(5)
(7)
(6)
No.
(1)
(2)
(3)
7-8
Property
Read
Address
Read Offset
Address
Function
Selects the address of internal memory or controller
register. The memory type should be Word only.
Please refer to Appendix D Write and Read Offset
Address.
Two options: Word and Double Word.
Data Type
Data Format
Chapter 7 Bar
Minimum/
Maximum
(4)
Variable
Minimum/M
aximum
limits
7-9
Chapter 7 Bar
7-10
(5)
Display
Format
(6)
Foreground
and
Background
Colors
Chapter 7 Bar
(7)
Style
Left
Right
Top
Bottom
Display Format
(8)
Style
(9)
Language
7-11
Chapter 7 Bar
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
Property
(1)
Text
(2)
7-12
Text Properties
Function
Users can input the text to be displayed in the text box.
Sets text properties, including font type, font size, font color,
scaling, text alignment, and bold/italic/underline of font. Please
refer to the above figure for details about the results of text
Revision June, 2015
Chapter 7 Bar
No.
(3)
Property
Function
properties.
Users can add Multi-Language text data from the
Multi-Language
Multi-Language Text Page. As shown in the Text Properties
Text Data
Figure, users can input English text in the English field.
7-13
Chapter 7 Bar
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
7-14
Function
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
Sets element width and height.
Chapter 7 Bar
7-2 Differential
Differential
Differential display on the HMI the deviation value obtained by subtracting the values in the
read memory address and the target value defined. Like the case of Normal elements,
users can define the memory address of the target value, higher limit value, and lower limit
value, in order to enhance the flexibility of Differential functions and meet the user demands
as shown in Table 7-2-1 below.
7-15
Chapter 7 Bar
Identify the lower and higher limit ranges of a Differential with different colors.
(1)
(2)
(3)
7-16
Chapter 7 Bar
Differential Element
Read Address
$444
Write Address
$444
Read Address
Properties
Target Display
Data Type
Data Format
Minimum
Maximum
Word
Unsigned
Decimal
100
Deviation Color
Deviation Value
Target Value
25
50
Legend of
Differential
Execution
Results
Brown red
when the
deviation is
25.
The
foreground is
blue when
the deviation
outranges
25.
7-17
Chapter 7 Bar
Double-click the Differential Element item to call out the following Differential Element
Properties page.
7-18
Chapter 7 Bar
Differential
Function page
Content Description
Preview
Main
Text
Coordinates
7-19
Chapter 7 Bar
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(9)
(5)
(8)
(7)
(6)
No.
Property
Function
Selects the address of internal memory or
controller register. The memory type should be
Word only.
Please refer to Appendix D Write and Read Offset
Address.
Two options: Word and Double Word.
Read Address
(1)
Read Offset
Address
7-20
(2)
Data Type
(3)
Data Format
Chapter 7 Bar
No.
Property
Function
(4)
7-21
Chapter 7 Bar
No.
Property
(5)
Display
Deviation
(6)
Foreground
and
Background
Colors
Function
(7)
7-22
Style
Chapter 7 Bar
No.
Property
Standard
Function
Raised
Horizontal
(8)
Style
Sunken
Vertical
Display Format
Border Color
Users can define the border color.
When text data are defined, users can edit the
text properties to be displayed in the Language of
the element.
(9)
Language
7-23
Chapter 7 Bar
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
7-24
Chapter 7 Bar
No.
Property
Function
Users can input the text to be displayed in the text box.
(1)
Text
(2)
Text
Properties
(3)
Multi-Langua
ge Text Data
Sets text properties, including font type, font size, font color,
scaling, text alignment, and bold/italic/underline of font. Please
refer to the above figure for details about the results of text
properties.
Users can add Multi-Language text data from the
Multi-Language Text Page. As shown in the Text Properties
Figure, users can input English text in the English field.
7-25
Chapter 7 Bar
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
7-26
Function
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
Sets element width and height.
Chapter 08 Pipe
Contents
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-1
Chapter 08 Pipe
Chapter 08 Pipe
This chapter mainly describes the Pipe elements provided in the DOPSoft and how they are
operated and configured.
Pipe Element Classification
Pipe (1)
Pipe (2)
Pipe (3)
Pipe (4)
Pipe (5)
Pipe (6)
Pipe (7)
Pipe
Variable Color
Pipe Diameter
Settings
(Data
Type/Data
Format/
Minimum
Numeric
Entry/
Maximum
Numeric
Entry)
Flowing
Cursor
Color
(Element Type
Only)
(Element Type
Only)
Pipe (4)
Pipe (5)
Pipe (6)
Pipe (7)
Target Display
Target Value
Write Address
Pipe (1)
Pipe (2)
Pipe (3)
Read Address
Pipe
Element
Target
Enable Value and
Range Higher/
Numeric Lower
Entry Limits as
Variable
Style
(Level
Color/Cylinder
Color/Lower
Limit Range
Color/ Higher
Limit Range
Color/ Element
Type)
8-2
Chapter 08 Pipe
Pipe (1)
Pipe (2)
Shape is the only difference between Pipe (1) and Pipe (2), and all other functions are the
same. The following introduces Pipe (1). The value of the register corresponding to the
read memory of the Pipe will be displayed on the Pipe according to the target value, lower
limit value and higher limit value defined by users. The elements of Pipe (1) are the same
as that of the bar chart. Users can define the memory address of the target value, higher
limit value, and lower limit value of the Pipe, in order to enhance the flexibility of Pipe
functions and meet user demands as shown in Table 8-1-3 below. Users can also define
different colors for the lower limit, higher limit and target values, in order to clearly identity
these values in the Pipe.
Identify the lower and higher limit ranges of a Pipe with different colors.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Table 8-1-3 Pipe (1)/Pipe (2) Identification of Low/High Limit Ranges by Color
8-3
Chapter 08 Pipe
Read Address
Data Type
Properties
Data Format
Unsigned
Decimal
Word
Numeric Entry
Element
Write
Memory
Address
Enable Range
Numeric Entry
Maximum
100
Numeric Entry
Element
{Link2}1
@D50
Write
Memory
Address
Target Numeric
Display
Minimum
{Link2}1
@D55
Lower Limit
Range Value
Execution Results
{Link2}1
@D65
{Link2}1@D55
Target Value
Write
Memory
Address
Target Value
{Link2}1@D50
Numeric Entry
Element
Higher Limit
Range Value
{Link2}1@D65
High Limit Value
8-4
Chapter 08 Pipe
Double-click the Pipe (1) Element item to call out the following Pipe (1) Element
Properties page.
8-5
Chapter 08 Pipe
Pipe (1)
Function
Page
Preview
Main
Text
Coordinates
Content Description
Supports only multilingual display of data and does not support
multi-state display.
Sets read address, read offset address and element type.
Sets level color, cylinder color, lower limit range color, and higher limit
range color.
Sets element Data Type, Data Format, minimum Numeric Entry,
maximum Numeric Entry and variable minimum and maximum limits.
Sets show/hide target value and target value color; enables the range
Numeric Entry; and enables target value and higher/lower limit values
as variable.
Sets text content to be displayed and text properties, including font
type, font size, font color, bold/italic/underline of font, scaling, and text
alignment.
Sets the X-Y coordinate, width, and height of elements.
Table 8-1-4 Pipe (1) Function Page
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(8)
(5)
(7)
(6)
8-6
Chapter 08 Pipe
No.
Property
Read Address
(1)
Read Offset
Address
Function
Selects the address of internal memory or controller register.
The memory type should be Word only.
Please refer to Appendix D Write and Read Offset Address.
Two options: Word and Double Word.
(2)
Data Type
(3)
Data Format
(4)
Minimum/
Maximum
Word
Double
Word
Data Format
BCD
Signed BCD
Signed Decimal
Unsigned Decimal
Hexadecimal
BCD
Signed BCD
Chapter 08 Pipe
No.
Property
Function
Enable this option then user could custom the minimum and
maximum address and input wanted value to decide the
minimum and maximum value.
Variable
Minimum/Maxi
mum limits
(5)
Display
Format
(6)
Element Type
8-8
Chapter 08 Pipe
No.
Property
(7)
Style
(8)
Language
Function
Level Color
8-9
Chapter 08 Pipe
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
Property
(1)
Text
8-10
Functions
Users can input the text to be displayed in the text box.
Chapter 08 Pipe
No.
Property
(2)
Text
Properties
(3)
Edit
Multilingual
Text Data
Functions
Sets text properties, including font type, font size, font color,
scaling, text alignment, and bold/italic/underline of font. Please
refer to the above figure for details about the results of the text
properties.
Allows users to add multilingual text data. As shown in the Text
Properties Figure, users can input English text in the English
field.
8-11
Chapter 08 Pipe
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
(1)
(2)
8-12
Property
X-value and
Y-value
Width and Height
Function
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
Sets element width and height.
Chapter 08 Pipe
Pipe (3)
Pipe (4)
Pipe (5)
Pipe (3) / Pipe (4) / Pipe (5) are for connecting with Pipe (1) / Pipe (2) / Pipe (6) / Pipe (7).
Therefore, these three Pipes do not have parameters including write/read memory
addresses and values. Users can only define their pipe diameter and turning angle.
Pipe (3) / Pipe (4) / Pipe (5)
Function
page
Content Description
These three Pipes are for connecting with other Pipes and do not
support multi-state or multilingual data editing.
Main
Sets pipe diameter and element type.
Coordinates Sets the X-Y coordinate of elements.
Preview
Table 8-2-1 Pipe (3) /Pipe (4) /Pipe (5) Function Page
8-13
Chapter 08 Pipe
Main
Pipe (3) / Pipe (4) / Pipe (5) Main Properties Page
Table 8-2-2 Pipe (3) / Pipe (4) / Pipe (5) Display Style
Pipe (3)
Standard
Rotation 90
Rotation 180
Rotation 270
Pipe (4)
8-14
Chapter 08 Pipe
Rotation 90
Rotation 180
Rotation 270
Pipe (5)
8-15
Chapter 08 Pipe
Coordinates
(1)
Figure 8-2-1 Pipe (3) /Pipe (4) /Pipe (5) Element Coordinates Properties Page
No.
Property
(1)
8-16
Function
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
Chapter 08 Pipe
Pipe (6)
Pipe (7)
Pipe (6) and Pipe (7) are Pipe icons and can show water flow. Users can define the flow
direction and color of these Pipes. Therefore, their read memory addresses can be defined.
Pipe (6) / Pipe (7)
Function
page
Content Description
Pipe (6) and Pipe (7) are for controlling water flow direction and do not
support multi-state or multilingual data editing.
Sets read memory address, pipe diameter, variable color and flow cursor
Main
color.
Coordinates Sets the X-Y coordinate of elements.
Preview
8-17
Chapter 08 Pipe
Main
Pipe(6) / Pipe(7) Main Properties Page
Table 8-3-2 Pipe (6) / Pipe (7) Display Style
Sets read memory address for defining water flow effect and direction.
Pipe (6)
Flow
Direction
Pipe (6)
Pipe(7)
Pipe(7)
Flow
Direction
Right Left
Left Right
Variable
Color: YES
8-18
Chapter 08 Pipe
Variable
Color: NO
8-19
Chapter 08 Pipe
Coordinates
(1)
Figure 8-3-1 Pipe (6) / Pipe (7) Element Coordinates Properties Page
No.
(1)
8-20
Property
X-value and
Y-value
Function
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
Chapter 09 Pie
Contents
9-1
9-1
Chapter 09 Pie
Chapter 09 Pie
This chapter mainly describes the pie elements provided in the DOPSoft and how they are
operated and configured.
Pie Element Classification
Pie (1)
Pie (2)
Pie (3)
Pie (4)
Pie
Table 9-1-1 Pie Element Classification
Pie (1)
Pie (2)
Pie (3)
Pie (4)
9-2
Chapter 09 Pie
Pie (1)
Pie (2)
Pie (3)
Pie (4)
Shape is the only difference among Pie (1), Pie (2), Pie (3) and Pie (4), and all other
functions are the same. The following introduces the elements of Pie (1). The value of the
register corresponding to the read memory of the pie will be displayed on the pie according
to the target value, lower limit value and higher limit value defined by users. The elements
of Pie (1) are the same as that of the meter. Users can define the memory address of the
target value, higher limit value, and lower limit value of the pie, in order to enhance the
flexibility of pie functions and meet user demands. Users can also define different colors for
the lower limit, higher limit and target values, in order to clearly identity these values in the
pie as shown in Table 9-1-3 below.
9-3
Chapter 09 Pie
Identify the lower and higher limit ranges of a pie with different colors.
(1)
(2)
(3)
9-4
Chapter 09 Pie
Read Address
Data Type
Properties
Data Format
Unsigned
Decimal
Word
Numeric Entry
Element
Write
Memory
Address
Maximum
100
Numeric Entry
Element
{Link2}
1@D50
Write
Memory
Address
Target Value
Color
Target Display
Minimum
{Link2}
1@D55
Numeric Entry
Element
Write
Memory
Address
{Link2}
1@D65
Target Value
{Link2}1@D50
Higher Limit Value
Properties
Lower Limit
Range Color
Lower Limit
Range Value
Higher Limit
Range Color
{Link2}1@D55
Higher Limit
Range Value
{Link2}1@D65
Target Value
Execution Results
9-5
Chapter 09 Pie
Lower
Limit
Value
Higher
Limit
Value
9-6
Chapter 09 Pie
Double-click the Pie (1) Element item to call out the following Pie (1) Element Properties
page.
Function Page
Preview
Main
Text
Coordinates
Pie (1)
Content Description
Supports only multilingual display of data and does not support
multi-state display.
Sets read memory address, read offset address, Style, Foreground
color, and Background color.
Sets border color, lower limit range color, and higher limit range
color.
Sets element Data Type, Memory Format, Minimum Value Entry,
Maximum Value Entry and variable minimum and maximum limits.
Sets show/hide target value and target value color; enables range
Numeric Entry; and enables target value and higher/lower limit
values as variable.
Sets text content to be displayed and text properties, including font
type, font size, font color, bold/italic/underline of font, scaling, and
text alignment.
Sets the X-Y coordinate, width, and height of elements.
Table 9-1-5 Pie (1) Function Page
9-7
Chapter 09 Pie
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(9)
(5)
(8)
(7)
(6)
No.
Property
Function
Selects the address of internal memory or
controller register. The memory type should be
Word only.
Please refer to Appendix D Write and Read Offset
Address.
Two options: Word and Double Word.
Read Address
(1)
Read Offset
Address
(2)
(3)
9-8
Data Type
Memory
Format
Chapter 09 Pie
No.
Property
Function
Double Word supports the following Data
Formats:
Data Type
(4)
Data Format
Value Valid Range
BCD
0~9999
Signed BCD
-999 ~ 9999
Signed Decimal
-32768~32767
Word
Minimum/
Unsigned
0~65535
Maximum
Decimal
Hexadecimal
0~0xFFFF
BCD
0~99999999
Signed BCD
-9999999 ~ 99999999
-2147483648~2147483
Double Signed Decimal
647
Word
Unsigned
0~4294967295
Decimal
Hexadecimal
0~0xFFFFFFFF
Enable this option then user could custom the
Variable
minimum and maximum address and input
Minimum/Maxi
wanted value to decide the minimum and
mum limits
maximum value.
9-9
Chapter 09 Pie
No.
Property
Function
Target
Display
(5)
Enable
Range
Numeric
Entry
Display
Format
Target Value
and
Higher/Lowe
r Limit
Values as
Variable
(6)
9-10
Foreground
Color and
Background
Color
Chapter 09 Pie
No.
Property
Function
(7)
Style of
Element
(8)
Style
(9)
Language
9-11
Chapter 09 Pie
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
Property
(1)
Text
9-12
Function
Users can input the text to be displayed in the text box.
Chapter 09 Pie
No.
Property
(2)
Text Properties
(3)
Edit
Multi-Language
Text Data
Function
Sets text properties, including font type, font size, font color,
scaling, text alignment, and bold/italic/underline of font.
Please refer to the above figure for details about the results
of text properties.
Allows users to add Multi-Language text data. As shown in
the Text Properties Figure, users can input English text in the
English field.
9-13
Chapter 09 Pie
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
9-14
Function
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
Sets element width and height.
Chapter 10 Indicators
Contents
10-1 Multistate Indicators .................................................................................................. 3
10-2 Range Indicators ..................................................................................................... 20
10-3 Simple Indicators..................................................................................................... 34
10-1
Chapter 10 Indicators
Chapter 10 Indicators
This chapter mainly describes the indicator elements provided in the DOPSoft and how
they are operated and configured.
Indicator Element Classification:
Multistate Indicator
Value Range Indicator
Simple Indicator
Indicators
Indicator.
Value
Range
Indicator
Simple
Indicator
Table 10-1-2 Indicator Element Shared Properties
10-2
Chapter 10 Indicators
Multistate
Indicator
The function of a Multistate Indicator is to indicate the state of a particular memory address.
Whether the Data Type is Bit, LSB, or Word, the indicator will remind users of the state
changes of its corresponding memory address when it is read. Therefore, when users wish
to display an important state or important message with an indicator, they can configure the
indicator to alert the state value changes and even more messages with such changes.
This way, users can finish the corresponding task the first time.
Indicator display can be ON or OFF:
Please refer to Table 10-1-3 below for the example of Multistate Indicators.
10-3
Chapter 10 Indicators
Data Type
Properties
Word
State 0
State 1
Data Format
Unsigned
Decimal
State 2
State Counts
5
State 3
State 4
Element
Foreground
Color
Double-click the element to view the picture of individual states. In
this example, there are five states, with value ranging from 0 to 4 as
shown inside the red frame below.
Multistate
Indicator
Legend
10-4
Users can switch state from the box on the upper right corner in the
Properties window of the element.
Chapter 10 Indicators
Execution
Results
Multistate Indicator 0
Value = 0
Value = 1
Value = 2
Value = 3
Value = 4
10-5
Chapter 10 Indicators
The Multistate Indicator supports four types of Data Types as described in Table 10-1-4. If
users wish to add or remove State Counts, simply add or reduce the State Counts value in
the Properties.
Multistate Indicator
Table 10-1-4 Description of Multistate Indicator Data Types
Data
Type
State Counts
Memory Address
Word
LSB /
LSB
(Suppor
t0
State)
If users wish to use State 0, select
LSB (Support State 0).
10-6
Chapter 10 Indicators
The examples in the following table show how the stated value is determined
with the lowest non-zero bit after converting from a decimal value into a binary
value. There are also examples demonstrating how the DOPSoft determines the
state Numeric Displayed with the lowest bit when the decimal values are 3 and
7.
Decimal
Binary
State Value
State=0 when all bits are 0
0
0000000000000000
[LSB (Support State 0) must be
selected]
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0,
1
0000000000000001
State=1.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 1,
2
0000000000000010
State=2.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0,
3
0000000000000011
State=1.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 2,
4
0000000000000100
State=3.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0,
7
0000000000000111
State=1.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 3,
8
0000000000001000
State=4.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 4,
16
0000000000010000
State=5.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 5,
32
0000000000100000
State=6.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 6,
64
0000000001000000
State=7.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 7,
128
0000000010000000
State=8.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 8,
256
0000000100000000
State=9.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 9,
512
0000001000000000
State=10.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 10,
1024
0000010000000000
State=11.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 11,
2048
0000100000000000
State=12.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 12,
4096
0001000000000000
State=13.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 13,
8192
0010000000000000
State=14.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 14,
16384 0100000000000000
State=15.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 15,
32768 1000000000000000
State=16.
Revision June, 2015
10-7
Chapter 10 Indicators
Bit
10-8
Chapter 10 Indicators
Double-click the Multistate Indicator item to call out the following Multistate Indicator
Properties page.
Multistate Indicator
Function
Page
Preview
Main
Text
Picture
Details
Coordinates
Content Description
Views the multistate value and multilingual data to be indicated.
Sets read address, read offset address, element type, foreground
color, and blink.
Sets the Data Type, Data Format and value count of Multistate
Indicators.
Sets text content to be displayed and text properties, including font
type, font size, font color, bold/italic/underline of font, scaling, and text
alignment.
Sets picture bank name, alignment, picture stretch mode, and
transparent color.
Sets invisible address.
Sets the X-Y coordinate, width, and height of the element.
Table 10-1-5 Multistate Indicator Function Page
10-9
Chapter 10 Indicators
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(8)
(5)
(9)
(7)
(6)
No.
(1)
Property
Read
Address
Read Offset
Address
Function
Selects the address of internal memory or controller register.
The memory type changes based on the selected Data Type,
including Word, LSB and Bit, as shown in Table 10-1-4.
Selects link name or element type. Please refer to 5-1 Buttons of
Chapter 05 for the details.
Please refer to Appendix D Write and Read Offset Address.
(2)
Data Type
Four options: Bit, Word, LSB, and LSB (Support State 0). Please
refer to Table 10-1-4 for the details.
(3)
Data Format
Data format can only be selected when the Data Type is Word.
These formats include BCD, Signed Decimal, Unsigned
Decimal, and Hexadecimal.
10-10
Chapter 10 Indicators
No.
(4)
(5)
Property
Function
Element
Type
(6)
Element
Foreground
Color
(7)
Blink
(8)
State
10-11
Chapter 10 Indicators
No.
Property
Function
When text data are defined, users can edit the text properties to
be displayed from Language of the element.
(9)
10-12
Language
Chapter 10 Indicators
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
(1)
Property
Text
Functions
Users can input the text to be displayed in the text box.
10-13
Chapter 10 Indicators
No.
Property
(2)
Text
Properties
(3)
Multilingual
Text Data
10-14
Functions
Sets text properties, including font type, font size, font color,
scaling, text alignment, and bold/italic/underline of font. Please
refer to the above figure for details about the results of text
properties.
Allows users to add multilingual text data. As shown in the Text
Properties Figure, users can input English text in the English field.
Chapter 10 Indicators
Picture
(1)
(2)
(3)
10-15
Chapter 10 Indicators
No.
Property
(1)
Picture
Bank Name
Function
The default setting of the Picture Bank Name item is None. Users
can select the picture to be displayed from the built-in picture bank
from the pull-down menu.
(2)
10-16
Alignment
Chapter 10 Indicators
No.
Property
Function
Stretch modes include: Fill, Keep Aspect Ratio, and Actual Size.
Fill
Keep Aspect Ratio
Actual Size
In the Fill mode,
In the Keep Aspect
In the Actual Size,
the selected picture Ratio mode, the
the picture will be
will fill up the entire
selected picture will fit displayed in its
display area.
in the display area
original size in the
proportionally
display area.
according to the
original aspect ratio.
Stretch
Mode
(3)
Transparen
t Color
10-17
Chapter 10 Indicators
Details
(1)
No.
Property
Function
When the Invisible Item is On, button elements are hidden, and
the corresponding button functions are disabled.
(1)
10-18
Invisible
Address
Chapter 10 Indicators
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
Function
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
Sets element width and height.
10-19
Chapter 10 Indicators
Range Indicator
Like the case of the Multistate Indicator, the range indicator indicates the state of an
address. Based on the value and its range in the read memory address, the HMI displays
different states for different value ranges. Please refer to Table 10-2-1 below for the details
about the range indicators.
10-20
Chapter 10 Indicators
Range Indicator
Read Address
$666
Read
Address
Data Type
Properties
Word
Data Format
Unsigned
Decimal
State Counts
5
Range
Input Text
Message
10-21
Chapter 10 Indicators
State 0
Foreground
Color
State 1
State 2
State 3
State 4
State 5
State 4
State 3
State 2
State 1
41~50
31~40
21~30
11~20
1~10
Sets the element foreground color of individual states.
State 0
State 1
State 2
State 3
State 4
Input macro commands from [Screen]][ Screen Cycle Macro]
Screen
Cycle
Macro
Value
Range
Indicator
Legend
Users can switch state from the box on the upper right corner in the
Properties window of the element.
10-22
Chapter 10 Indicators
Execution
Results
Compile the screens and download them to the HMI. The range
indicator will display the state value of individual states in the range
indicator according to the value and range defined read from the
corresponding memory address.
The display result of individual states after execution.
State 0
State 1
State 2
State 3
State 4
10-23
Chapter 10 Indicators
Double-click the Range Indicator item to call out the following Range Properties page.
Range Indicator
Function
Page
Preview
Main
Text
Picture
Coordinates
Content Description
Views the multistate value and multilingual data of elements.
Sets read address, read offset address, element type, foreground
color, and blink.
Sets the Data Type, Data Format, value count, and value range
(constant and variable) of value range indicators.
Sets text content to be displayed and text properties, including font
type, font size, font color, bold/italic/underline of font, scaling, and text
alignment.
Sets picture bank name, alignment, picture stretch mode, and
transparent color.
Sets the X-Y coordinate, width, and height of button elements.
Table 10-2-2 Range Indictor Function Page
10-24
Chapter 10 Indicators
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(9)
(6)
(10)
(7)
(5)
(8)
No.
Property
Read
Address
(1)
(2)
Function
Selects the address of internal memory or controller register.
Selects link name or element type. Please refer to 5-1 Buttons of
Chapter 05 for the details.
Read
Offset
Address
State
Counts
Sets the total State Counts of range indicators. If the Data Type is
Word or Double Word, users can set 1-256 states.
Two options: Word and Double Word.
(3)
Data Type
10-25
Chapter 10 Indicators
No.
Property
(4)
Memory
Format
Function
Both Word and Double Word units include BCD, Signed BCD,
Signed Decimal, and Unsigned Decimal formats.
(5)
Range
(6)
Element
Type
(7)
Element
Foregroun
d Color
10-26
Chapter 10 Indicators
No.
Property
Function
(8)
Blink
(9)
State
(10)
Language
When text data are defined, users can edit the text properties to be
displayed from Language of the element.
10-27
Chapter 10 Indicators
No.
10-28
Property
Function
Chapter 10 Indicators
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
Property
(1)
Text
Functions
Users can input the text to be displayed in the text box.
10-29
Chapter 10 Indicators
No.
Property
Functions
Sets text properties, including font type, font size, font color,
scaling, text alignment, and bold/italic/underline of font. Please
refer to the above figure for details about the results of text
properties.
Allows users to add multilingual text data. As shown in the Text
Properties Figure, users can input English text in the English
field.
(2)
Text
Properties
(3)
Multilingual
Text Data
Picture
(1)
(2)
(3)
10-30
Chapter 10 Indicators
No.
Property
(1)
Picture
Bank Name
Function
The default setting of the Picture Bank Name item is None. Users
can select the picture to be displayed from the built-in picture bank
from the pull-down.
(2)
Alignment
10-31
Chapter 10 Indicators
No.
Property
Function
Stretch modes include: Fill, Keep Aspect Ratio, and Actual Size.
Fill
Keep Aspect Ratio
Actual Size
In the Fill mode,
In the Keep Aspect
In the Actual
the selected picture Ratio mode, the
Size, the picture
will fill up the entire
selected picture will fit will be displayed
display area.
in the display area
in its original size
proportionally
in the display
according to the
area.
original aspect ratio.
Stretch
Mode
(3)
10-32
Transparen
t Color
Chapter 10 Indicators
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
Function
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
Sets element width and height.
10-33
Chapter 10 Indicators
Simple Indicator
Simple indicators provide two states, ON and OFF, for users to change the XOR colors
according to the state switch. Users can use the simple indicator to indicate state switch
(ON/OFF) along with the button elements and identify the state with XOR colors. Please
see Table 9-3-1 below for details.
Example of Simple Indicators
Table 10-3-1 Example of Simple Indicators
ON/OFF Elements
Write Address
$555.0
Read
Address
XOR Color
Properties
Execution
Results
10-34
Redraw
NO
Compile the screens and download them to the HMI. The simple
indicator switches within ON/OFF according to the memory address
read. When users press the ON button, the simple indicator will
switch to State 1; when users press the OFF button, the simple
indicator will switch to State 0.
State 0
State 1
Chapter 10 Indicators
Double-click the Simple Indicator item to call out the following Simple Indicator Properties
page.
Simple Indicator
Function
Page
Preview
Main
Text
Coordinates
Content Description
Views the multistate value and multilingual data of elements.
Sets read address, read offset address, XOR color, and redraw.
Sets text content to be displayed and text properties, including font
type, font size, and font color, bold/italic/underline of font, scaling, and
text alignment.
Sets the X-Y coordinate, width, and height of button elements.
Table 10-3-2 Simple Indicator Function Page
10-35
Chapter 10 Indicators
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
Property
Read Address
(1)
Read Offset
Address
Function
Selects the address of internal memory or controller register.
Simple indicators support on the Bit Data Format.
Selects link name or element type. Please refer to 5-1 Buttons of
Chapter 05 for the details.
Please refer to Appendix D Write and Read Offset Address.
Sets background XOR color.
(2)
(3)
10-36
XOR Color
Redraw
Before XOR
After XOR
Chapter 10 Indicators
No.
Property
Function
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
No.
(1)
Property
Text
Functions
Users can input the text to be displayed in the text box.
10-37
Chapter 10 Indicators
No.
Property
(2)
Text
Properties
(3)
Language
(4)
State
10-38
Functions
Sets text properties, including font type, font size, font color,
scaling, text alignment, and bold/italic/underline of font. Please
refer to the above figure for details about the results of text
properties.
When text data are defined, users can edit the text properties to
be displayed from Language of the element.
State 0 and State 1 provided by simple indicator are for users to
enter text messages.
Chapter 10 Indicators
Details
(1)
No.
Property
Function
When the Invisible Item is On, button elements are hidden, and
the corresponding button functions are disabled.
(1)
Invisible
Address
10-39
Chapter 10 Indicators
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
10-40
Function
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
Sets element width and height.
Contents
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-1
Chapter 11 Display
This chapter mainly describes the display elements provided in the DOPSoft and how they
are operated and configured.
Display Element Classification
Numeric Display
Character Display
Date Display
Time Display
Day-of-week Display
Prestored Message display
Moving Sign
Display
Gain/Offset
Time Format
Date Format
Pad Left 0
Moving
Sign
String Length
Character
Display
Data
Display
Time
Display
Day-of
week
Display
Prestored
Message
display
Invisible Address
Read offset
Address
Write Address
Numeric
Display
Read Address
Display
Element
Properties Properties
(Display
(Data Type/
Direction/ Data Format/
Time
Integer digit/
Interval/
Decimal
Moving
Place/ State
Points)
Count)
(No state
count)
Style
(Element
Type/
Element
Background
Color/
Border
Color)
(No integer or
decimal)
(No integer or
decimal)
11-2
Numeric Display
The Numeric Display reads the value content of memory address and displays the value on
the element. Data Display also displays state response value of other elements, such as 0
or 1.
Example of Numeric Display
Table 11-1-3 Example of Numeric Display
Read
Address
Data Type
Properties
Word
Fractional
0
After creating elements, run Compile and download them to the HMI.
Next. Input 100 in Numeric Entry element and the Numeric Entry in
the Numeric Entry will be displayed in the Numeric Display element.
Execution
Results
11-3
The numeric display supports two data types: [Word] and [Double Word]. The valid range of
numeric display is as shown in Table 11-1-4 below.
Numeric Display
Table 11-1-4 Valid Range of Numeric Display
Data Format
Word
BCD
Signed BCD
Signed Decimal
Unsigned Decimal
Hex
Binary
Data Format
Double Word
11-4
BCD
Signed BCD
Signed Decimal
Unsigned
Decimal
Hex
Binary
Floating
Double click the Numeric Display to call out the Numeric Display Properties screen as
shown below.
Numeric Display
Function
Page
Preview
Main
Text
Details
Coordinates
Content Description
The Numeric Display element does not support multistate and
multilingual data display.
Sets read address, read offset address, element type, element
background color, and element Border Color.
Sets data type, data format, integer digit, decimal place, gain, gain,
and offset.
Sets the font type, font size, font color, alignment, and content of the
text to be displayed.
Pads left zero and invisible address.
Sets the X-Y coordinate, width, and height of elements.
Table 11-1-5 Numeric Display Function Page
11-5
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(6)
(5)
(7)
(8)
No.
Property
Read
Address
(1)
Read
Offset
Address
(2)
Data Type
(3)
Data
Format
11-6
Function
Selects the address of internal memory or controller register.
Selects link name or element type. Please refer to 5-1 Buttons of
Chapter 05.
Please refer to Appendix D Write and Read Offset Address.
Two options: Word and Double Word. Please refer to Table
11-1-4 for details.
No.
Property
Function
(4)
Integer
Digits /
Fractional
(5)
Gain/
Offset
11-7
No.
Property
Function
The numeric display element will add the offset value to the register
actual value before displaying the sum on the HMI screen. The
default offset is 0.0. If offset is 1.0, the Numeric Displayed in the
element is 11 when the register actual value is 10. By contrast, if
offset is -1.0, the Numeric Displayed in the element is 9 when the
register actual value is 10.
11-8
No.
Property
(6)
Element
Type
Function
There are four element types, including Standard, Raised, Sunken,
and Transparent. Users can change the element appearance.
Standard
Raised
Sunken
Transparent
(7)
Border
Color
(8)
Element
Backgroun
d Color
11-9
Text
(1)
No.
(1)
11-10
Property
Text
Properties
Function Description
Sets text properties, including font type, font size, font color, and text
alignment.
Details
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
Leading Zero
Function Description
Leading Zero is determined according to the number of digits of
an integer as show in the example below:
(2)
Invisible
Address
Invisible
Address
ON
11-11
No.
Property
Function Description
Invisible
Address
OFF
11-12
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
(1)
(2)
Property
X-value and
Y-value
Width and Height
Function Description
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
Sets element width and height.
11-13
Character
Display
The Character Display is for displaying text. Therefore, all data must be input in readable
ASCII code. The DOPSoft transfers the ASCII code into characters before displaying on the
Character Display. The Character Display is an element reading byte. As the default data
format of the Numeric Entry element is Word making up of double byte, one word
represents two bytes. However, it is necessary for the Character Display element to
exchange the high and low bytes before reading data and displaying the actual text data.
For example, if $0 is 4241 (Hex), after high/low byte exchange, it is AB in the Character
display.
The following table is the cross reference of data format and characters. The examples
below simply include A to G only, and the rest is composed according to the same theory.
Unsigned Decimal
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
Hexadecimal
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
Character
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
11-14
Read
Address
Properties
11-15
Double-click the Character Display to call out the Character Display Properties screen as
shown below.
Character Display
Function Page
Preview
Main
Text
Details
Coordinates
Content Description
The Character Display element does not support multistate or
multilingual data display.
Sets read address, read offset address, element style, background
color, and Border Color.
Sets string length.
Sets the font type, font size, font color, alignment, and content of
the text to be displayed.
Sets Invisible Address and Support EASCII.
Sets the X-Y coordinate, width, and height of elements.
Table 11-2-3 Character Display Function Page
11-16
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(5)
(4)
No.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Property
Read
Address
Read Offset
Address
String
Length
Element
Type
Function
Selects the address of internal memory or controller register.
Selects link name or element type. Please refer to 5-1 Buttons of
Chapter 05 for details.
Please refer to Appendix D Write and Read Offset Address.
The range of string length is 1~256.
There are four element types, including Standard, Raised,
Sunken, and Transparent. Users can change the element
appearance.
Standard
Raised
Sunken
Transparent
11-17
No.
Property
Function
(5)
11-18
Element
Background
Color
Text
(1)
No.
(1)
Property
Text
Properties
Function Description
Sets text properties, including font type, font size, font color, and
text alignment.
11-19
Details
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
Invisible
Address
Function Description
When the invisible address is on, the character display element
will be hidden and it will be unable to execute other functions.
Invisible
Address
ON
Invisible
Address
OFF
(2)
11-20
Support
EASCII
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
(1)
(2)
Property
X-value and
Y-value
Width and Height
Function Description
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
Sets element width and height.
11-21
Date Display
Time Display
Day-of-week
Display
The Date Display, Time Display, and Day-of-week Display show the date, time, and day of
the HMI. Users can define the format of Date Display and Time Display and edit
Day-of-week Display with multiple languages. Please refer to 11-3-1 Example of Date
Display / Time Display / Day-of-week Display for details.
Example of Date Display / Time Display / Day-of-week Display
Table 11-3-1 Example of Date Display / Time Display / Day-of-week Display
Time
Display
Date Format
Properties
mm/dd/yy
Day-of-wee
k Display
Execution
Results
11-22
Compile screens and download to the HMI, the display on the HMI is
shown below:
Date Display
Time Display
Day-of-week Display
Chinese
English
Date Display
Function
Page
Preview
Main
Text
Coordinates
Content Description
The Date Display displays the HMI system date and does not support
multistate and multilingual data display.
Sets element type, element Border Color, and element background
color.
Sets date display format.
Sets the font type, font size, font color, alignment, and content of the
text to be displayed.
Sets the X-Y coordinate, width, and height of elements.
Table 11-3-1-1 Date Display Function Page
11-23
Main
(1)
(4)
(2)
(3)
No.
Property
(1)
Element
Type
Function
There are four element types, including Standard, Raised,
Sunken, and Transparent. Users can change the element
appearance.
Standard
Raised
Sunken
Transparent
(2)
11-24
Border Color
No.
Property
(3)
Background
Color
Function
Sets element background color.
If element type is Transparent, background color is disabled.
(4)
Date Display
Format
11-25
Text
(1)
No.
(1)
11-26
Property
Text
Properties
Function Description
Sets text properties, including font type, font size, font color, and
text alignment.
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
(1)
(2)
Property
X-value and
Y-value
Width and Height
Function Description
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
Sets element width and height.
11-27
Time Display
Function
Page
Preview
Main
Text
Coordinates
Content Description
The Time Display displays the HMI system time and does not support
multistate and multilingual data display.
Sets element type, element Border Color, and element background
color.
Sets time display format.
Sets the font type, font size, font color, alignment, and content of the
text to be displayed.
Sets the X-Y coordinate, width, and height of elements.
Table 11-3-2-1 Time Display Function Page
11-28
Main
(1)
(4)
(2)
(3)
No.
Property
(1)
Element
Type
Function
There are four element types, including Standard, Raised,
Sunken, and Transparent. Users can change the element
appearance.
Standard
Raised
Sunken
Transparent
(2)
Border
Color
11-29
No.
Property
(3)
Background
Color
Function
Sets element background color.
If element type is Transparent, background color is disabled.
(4)
11-30
Time
Display
Format
Text
(1)
No.
(1)
Property
Text
Properties
Function Description
Sets text properties, including font type, font size, font color, and
text alignment.
11-31
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
(1)
(2)
11-32
Property
X-value and
Y-value
Width and Height
Function Description
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
Sets element width and height.
Day-of-week Display
Function Page
Preview
Main
Text
Coordinates
Content Description
Besides displaying the HMI system day, Day-of-week Display also
supports multistate and multilingual data display.
Sets element type, element Border Color, and element background
color.
Sets the content, font type, font size, font color, bold/italic/underline
of font, scaling, and alignment of the text to be displayed.
Edits text in Day-of-week Display. If multi-language is established,
users can edit the data in other languages.
Sets the X-Y coordinate, width, and height of elements.
Table 11-3-3-1 Day-of-week Display Function Page
11-33
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
No.
Property
(1)
Element
Type
Function
There are four element types, including Standard, Raised, Sunken,
and Transparent. Users can change the element appearance.
Standard
Raised
Sunken
Transparent
(2)
11-34
Border
Color
No.
Property
(3)
Background
Color
(4)
State
(5)
Language
Function
Sets element background color.
If element type is Transparent, background color is disabled.
When text data are defined, users can edit the text properties to
be displayed from Language of the element.
11-35
No.
11-36
Property
Function
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
(1)
Property
Text
Function Description
Users can input the text to be displayed in the text box.
11-37
No.
Property
(2)
Text
Properties
(3)
Edit
Multilingual
Text Data
11-38
Function Description
Sets text properties, including font type, font size, font color, scaling,
text alignment, and bold/italic/underline of font. Please refer to the
above figure for details about the results of text properties.
If multilingual text data are created, users can edit multilingual text
data here. As shown in the Text Properties Figure, users can input
English text in the English field.
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
(1)
(2)
Property
X-value and
Y-value
Width and Height
Function Description
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
Sets element width and height.
11-39
11-40
Read
Address
$13
Propertie
s
Double-click the Prestored Message Display to enter [Text] and edit the text
message to be displayed.
State
Display
Text
After creating the element, run Compile and download the element to the
HMI. Next, input orderly 0, 1, and 2 with the numeric entry element. Then,
the Prestored Message Display element will display the corresponding state
text.
Execution
Results
Input
0
from the
numeric
entry
element
.
Input
1
from the
numeric
entry
element
.
11-41
Input
2
from the
numeric
entry
element
.
11-42
Prestored Message Display supports four data types as shown in Table 11-4-2 below.
Users wishing to add or remove state count simply need to add or reduce the state count in
the properties.
Prestored Message Display
Table 11-4-2 Prestored Message Display Data Types
Data
Type
State Counts
Memory Address
If data type is Word, users can select If data type is Word, Word is the
1-256 states.
data type of memory address.
Word
LSB /
LSB
(Support
State 0)
If users wish to display State 0,
please select LSB (Support State 0).
11-43
The examples in the following table show how state value is determined with
the lowest non-zero bit after converting from a decimal value into a binary
value. There are also examples demonstrating how the DOPSoft determines
the state Numeric Displayed with the lowest bit when the decimal values are 3
and 7.
Decimal
Binary
0000000000000000
1
2
3
4
7
8
16
32
64
128
256
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
32768
0000000000000001
0000000000000010
0000000000000011
0000000000000100
0000000000000111
0000000000001000
0000000000010000
0000000000100000
0000000001000000
0000000010000000
0000000100000000
0000001000000000
0000010000000000
0000100000000000
0001000000000000
0010000000000000
0100000000000000
1000000000000000
State Value
State=0 when all bits are 0
[LSB (Support State 0) must be selected]
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State=1.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 1, State=2.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State=1.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 2, State=3.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State=1.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 3, State=4.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 4, State=5.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 5, State=6.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 6, State=7.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 7, State=8.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 8, State=9.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 9, State=10.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 10, State=11.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 11, State=12.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 12, State=13.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 13, State=14.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 14, State=15.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 15, State=16.
Bit
11-44
Double-click the Prestored Message Display to call out the following Prestored Message
Display Properties screen as shown below.
Text
Details
Coordinates
Content Description
Views the multistate value and multilingual data to be displayed.
Sets read address, read offset address, element type, background
color, and Border Color.
Sets data type, data format, and state count.
Sets text content to be displayed and text properties, including font
type, font size, font color, bold/italic/underline of font, scaling, and text
alignment.
Set invisible address.
Sets the X-Y coordinate, width, and height of the element.
Table 11-4-3 Prestored Message Display Function Page
11-45
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(8)
(5)
(6)
(9)
(7)
No.
Property
Read
Address
(1)
Read
Offset
Address
(2)
(3)
11-46
Data Type
Data
Format
Function
Selects the address of internal memory or controller
register. The memory type changes based on the
selected data type, including Word, LSB and Bit, as
shown in Table 11-4-2.
Selects link name or element type. Please refer to 5-1
Buttons of Chapter 05for details.
No.
Property
Function
(4)
State
Count
(5)
Element
Type
(6)
(7)
Border
Color
Foregroun
d Color
11-47
No.
Property
(8)
State
(9)
11-48
Function
Previews or changes the state parameters of button
elements by switching states.
When text data are defined, users can edit the text
properties to be displayed from the Language of the
element.
Language
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
(1)
Property
Text
Functions
Users can input the text message to be displayed in the text box.
11-49
No.
(2)
(3)
11-50
Property
Functions
Sets text properties, including font type, font size, font color,
scaling, text alignment, and bold/italic/underline of font. Please
refer to the above figure for details about the results of text
properties.
Edit
If multilingual text data are created, users can edit multilingual text
Multilingual
data here. As shown in the Text Properties Figure, users can input
Text Data
English text in the English field.
Text
Properties
Details
(1)
No.
Property
(1)
Function
When the Invisible Item is On, button elements are hidden,
and the corresponding button functions are disabled.
Invisible
Address
11-51
No.
11-52
Property
Function
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
(1)
(2)
Property
X-value and
Y-value
Width and Height
Function
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
Sets element width and height.
11-53
Moving Sign
Besides displaying the text message to be switched with the Prestored Message Display,
users can display text messages with the Moving Sign. Also, users can adjust the direction,
moving points, and time interval of Character Display. Please refer to Table 11-5-1 Example
of Moving Sign below for details.
11-54
Read
Address
Maintained Element
Write Address
$55.0
Data Type
Bit
State
Display
Text
State
Count
2
Direction
Left
Moving
Points
1
Time
Interval
100 (ms)
After creating the element, run Compile and download the element to
the HMI. Next, switch State 0 and State 1 with the maintained
element. Then, the Moving Sign element will display the
corresponding state text.
Execution
Results
State 0
State 1
11-55
Moving Sign supports four data types as shown in Table 11-5-2. Users wishing to add or
remove state count simply need to add or reduce the state count in the properties.
Moving Sign
Table 11-5-2 Description of Moving Sign Data Types
Data
Type
State Count
Memory Address
If data type is Word, users can If data type is Word, Word is the data
select 1-256 states.
type of memory address.
Word
If the data type is LSB, the data in If the data type is LSB or LSB
the register are first converted into
(Support State 0), Word is also the
binary data. Next, the present object data type of memory address.
state is determined according to the
element with the lowest non-zero bit.
If the data type is LSB, users can
select 1-16 states, except State 0.
LSB /
LSB
(Support
State 0)
If users wish to display State 0,
please select LSB (Support State 0).
11-56
Moving Sign
Table 11-5-2 Description of Moving Sign Data Types
The examples in the following table show how state value is determined with
the lowest non-zero bit after converting from a decimal value into a binary
value. There are also examples demonstrating how the DOPSoft determines
the state Numeric Displayed with the lowest bit when the decimal values are 3
and 7.
Decimal
Binary
State Value
State=0 when all bits are 0
0
0000000000000000
[LSB (Support State 0) must be
selected]
1
0000000000000001 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State=1.
2
0000000000000010 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 1, State=2.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0,
3
0000000000000011
State=1.
4
0000000000000100 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 2, State=3.
The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0,
7
0000000000000111
State=1.
8
0000000000001000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 3, State=4.
16
0000000000010000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 4, State=5.
32
0000000000100000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 5, State=6.
64
0000000001000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 6, State=7.
128
0000000010000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 7, State=8.
256
0000000100000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 8, State=9.
512
0000001000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 9, State=10.
1024
0000010000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 10, State=11.
2048
0000100000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 11, State=12.
4096
0001000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 12, State=13.
8192
0010000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 13, State=14.
16384
0100000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 14, State=15.
32768
1000000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 15, State=16.
If the data type is Bit, only 2 states If the data type is Bit, Bit is the data
are available.
type of memory address.
Bit
11-57
Double-click the Moving Sign to call out the following Moving Sign Properties screen as
shown below.
Moving Sign
Function
Page
Preview
Main
Text
Coordinates
Content Description
Views the multistate value and multilingual data to be displayed.
Sets read address, read offset address, element type, background
color, and Border Color.
Sets data type, data format, state count, display direction, time
interval (ms), and moving points.
Sets text content to be displayed and text properties, including font
type, font size, font color, bold/italic/underline of font, scaling, and text
alignment.
Sets the X-Y coordinate, width, and height of the element.
Table 11-5-3 Moving Sign Function Page
11-58
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(8)
(4)
(11)
(5)
(6)
(12)
(7)
(9)
(10)
No.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Property
Read
Address
Function
Selects the address of internal memory or controller register. The
memory type changes based on the selected data type, including
Word, LSB and Bit, as shown in Table 11-5-2.
Selects link name or element type. Please refer to 5-1 Buttons of
Chapter 05 for details.
Read Offset
Please refer to Appendix D Write and Read Offset Address.
Address
Four options: Bit, Word, LSB, and LSB (Support State 0). Please
Data Type
refer to Table 11-5-2 for details.
Data format can only be selected when the data type is Word.
These formats include BCD, Signed Decimal, Unsigned Decimal,
and Hexadecimal.
Data
Format
11-59
No.
Property
(4)
State
Counts
Function
Sets the total state count of Moving Sign. If the data type is Word,
users can select 1-256 states; if the data type is LSB, users can
select 16 states; if the data type is LSB (Support State 0), users
can select 17 states; and if the data type is Bit, users can select 2
states. Please refer to Table 11-5-2 for details.
Display directions include Left, Right, Up, and Down. Users can
define the direction of the text to be displayed.
From right to left.
Left
From left to right
Right
(5)
Display
Direction
(6)
Time
Interval
(ms)
(7)
Moving
Points
(8)
Element
Type
11-60
The greater the value, the greater the distance of each movement.
The range is 1-50, and the unit is pixel.
Element types include Standard, Raised, Round, and Transparent.
Users can change the element appearance.
Standard
Raised
Sunken
Transparent
No.
Property
(9)
Border
Color
Function
Sets element Border Color.
If element type is Transparent, the Border Color is disabled.
(10)
Element
Foreground
Color
(11)
State
11-61
No.
Property
(12)
Language
11-62
Function
When text data are defined, users can edit the text properties to be
displayed from Language of the element.
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
(1)
Property
Text
Functions
Users can input the text message to be displayed in the text box.
11-63
No.
(2)
(3)
11-64
Property
Functions
Sets text properties, including font type, font size, font color, scaling,
text alignment, and bold/italic/underline of font. Please refer to the
above figure for details about the results of text properties.
Edit
If multilingual text data are created, users can edit multilingual text
Multilingual
data here. As shown in the Text Properties Figure, users can input
Text Data
English text in the English field.
Text
Properties
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
Function
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
Sets element width and height.
11-65
Contents
12-1
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-6
12-1
Graph Display
Dynamic Line
Dynamic Rectangle
Dynamic Ellipse
Real Image
Color/
(Variable Position /
Transparent
point/ Variable
Color/Blink/Round
Radius)
Corner Radius)
Properties
Properties
State Counts)
Clear Picture
HMI Station/
Transmission/
Communication Port
Write Address
Element
Display
Read Address
Graph
(Foreground
Style
State
Graphic
(Supports only
Foreground Color
and Transparent
Color)
Animated
Graphic
Dynamic
Line
12-2
Format)
Color/
(Variable Position /
Transparent
point/ Variable
Color/Blink/Round
Radius)
Corner Radius)
Properties
Properties
State Counts)
Clear Picture
HMI Station/
Transmission/
Communication Port
Write Address
Element
Display
Read Address
Graph
(Foreground
Style
Round Corner
Radius, Blink,
Foreground Color,
Format)
and Transparent
Color)
Blink, Foreground
Color, and
Transparent Color)
Real
Image
Radius)
(Supports
only Data
Format)
(Supports only
Foreground Color)
12-3
State Graphic
Users can create various state pictures in State Graphic to read state data from the
selected address, in order to display the selected state pictures on the HMI.
Examples of the three applications are described below. Table 12-1-3 show Auto Picture
Change is NO. Table 12-1-4 shows Auto Graph Chang is YES. Table 12-1-5 shows Auto
Picture Change is Variation.
12-4
$326
Write Address
$326
Read
Address
State 1
State 2
Picture
Data Type
Data Format
State
Counts
Auto Picture
Change
Word
Unsigned
Decimal
No
After creating the element, run Compile and download it to the HMI.
Next, input a value in the Numeric Entry element. Then, State
Graphic will display the state pictures corresponding to the input
value.
Execution
Results
12-5
$326
Write Address
$326
Read
Address
State 1
State 2
Picture
Data Type
Data Format
State Counts
Auto Picture
Change
Word
Unsigned
Decimal
YES
After creating the element, run Compile and download it to the HMI.
Next, input a non-zero value in the Numeric Entry element. Then,
State Graphic will automatically change and display the selected
pictures according to the defined picture change time. If the input
value is 0, State Graphic will reset to the initial state without
executing any action.
Execution
Results
12-6
State Graphic
Element
Read Address
Numeric Entry
Element
Numeric Entry
Element
$327
Read
Address
State 1
State 2
Picture
Data Type
Data Format
State Counts
Auto Picture
Change
Word
Unsigned
Decimal
Variation
Execution
Results
12-7
12-8
State Graphic supports four data types as shown in Table 12-1-4 below. If users need to
add or remove state counts, simply add or reduce state counts from the State Counts in the
properties.
State Graphic
Table 12-1-4 State Graphic Data Type
Data
Type
State Counts
If data type is Word, users can
select 1-256 states.
Memory Address
If data type is Word, Word is data type
of memory address.
Word
If data type is LSB, the data in the If data type is LSB or LSB (Support State
register are first converted into
0), Word is also data type of memory
binary data. Next, the present object address.
state is determined according to the
element with the lowest non-zero bit.
If data type is LSB, users can
select 1-16 states, except State 0.
LSB /
LSB
(Support
State 0)
If users wish to display State 0,
please select LSB (Support State 0).
12-9
State Graphic
Table 12-1-4 State Graphic Data Type
The examples in the following table show how state value is determined with the
lowest non-zero element after converting from a decimal value into a binary
value. There are also examples demonstrating how the DOPSoft determines the
state value displayed with the lowest bit when the decimal values are 3 and 7.
12-10
Decimal
Binary
State Value
0000000000000000
0000000000000001
0000000000000010
0000000000000011
0000000000000100
0000000000000111
0000000000001000
16
0000000000010000
32
0000000000100000
64
0000000001000000
128
0000000010000000
256
0000000100000000
512
0000001000000000
1024
0000010000000000
2048
0000100000000000
4096
0001000000000000
8192
0010000000000000
16384
0100000000000000
32768
1000000000000000
State Graphic
Table 12-1-4 State Graphic Data Type
Bit
12-11
Double-click State Graphic to call out the State Graphic Properties screen as shown below.
State Graphic
Function
Page
Content Description
Preview
Views the multistate data but does not support multilingual data
display.
Main
Picture
Details
Coordinates
12-12
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(9)
(7)
(5)
(6)
(8)
No.
(1)
Property
Read
Address
Function
Selects the address of internal memory or controller register. The
memory type changes based on the selected data type, including
Word, LSB and Bit, as shown in Table 12-1-4.
Selects link name or element type. Please refer to 5-1 Buttons of
Chapter 05 for details.
Read Offset
Please refer to Appendix D Write and Read Offset Address.
Address
(2)
Data Type
Four options: Bit, Word, LSB, and LSB (Support State 0). Please
refer to Table 12-1-4 for details.
12-13
No.
Property
Function
Data format can only be selected when data type is Word.
These formats include BCD, Signed Decimal, Unsigned Decimal,
and Hexadecimal.
(3)
(4)
Data
Format
State
Counts
Sets the total state count of State Graphic elements. If data type is
Word, users can select 1-256 states; if data type is LSB, users
can select 16 states; if data type is LSB (Support State 0), users
can select 17 states; and if data type is Bit, users can select 2
states. Please refer to Table 12-1-4 for details.
There are 3 options for Auto Picture Change: Yes, No, and
Variation.
(5)
Auto
Change
(6)
12-14
Change
time
No.
Property
Function
Sets Foreground Color.
If Transparent Color is Yes, Foreground Color is disabled.
(7)
Foreground
Color
Users can select any color in the picture to become transparent with
(8)
Transparent
Color
By selecting Transparent Color for both the element and the picture,
the result is as shown below:
(9)
State
12-15
No.
12-16
Property
Function
Picture
(1)
(2)
(3)
12-17
No.
Property
Function Description
The default picture bank name is None. Users can select in the
built-in bank the picture to be displayed from the pull-down.
(1)
12-18
Picture
bank name
No.
Property
Function Description
Sets picture alignment with the alignment options.
Alignment
Stretch modes include: Fill, Keep Aspect Ratio, and Actual Size.
Fill
Keep Aspect Ratio
Actual Size
In the Fill mode,
In the Keep Aspect In the Actual Size
the selected picture Ratio mode, the
mode, the picture
will fill up the entire selected picture will will be displayed in
display area.
fit in the display
its original size in
area proportionally the display area.
according to the
picture ratio
(2)
Stretch
Mode
Select
Transpare
nt Color
12-19
No.
12-20
Property
Function Description
Details
(1)
12-21
No.
Property
(1)
12-22
Function
When the Invisible Item is On, button elements are hidden,
and the corresponding button functions are disabled.
Invisible
Address
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
X-value and
Y-value
(2)
Function
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
12-23
Animated
Graphic
Users can create multiple state pictures or import GIF image files with Animated Graphic.
The DOPSoft will automatically decompose this image file into consecutive pictures. Next,
the DOPSoft will correspond to the pictures changed by the element the data read from its
Read Address. Users can also control the Animated Graphic position. Please refer to Table
12-2-1 Example of Animated Graphic below.
12-24
$444
Read
Address
icon to
Create
Picture
Bank and
Import
Image files
Step 3: After importing the selected GIF file, the picture bank will
decompose it into 17 pictures as shown below:
12-25
Select
Pictures for
State
0-State 16
12-26
Step 2: Open the test picture bank, select the first picture to be
displayed in State 0, the second picture to be displayed in State 1,
and so on.
12-27
Edit Clock
Macro
Execution
12-28
Compile the screen and download it to the HMI. This little orange
Revision June, 2015
Results
12-29
Animated Graphic supports three data types as shown in Table 12-2-2 below. If users need
to add or remove state counts, simply add or reduce state counts from the State Counts in
the properties.
Animated Graphic
Table 12-2-2 Example of Animated Graphic Data Type
Data
Type
State Counts
Memory Address
Word
LSB /
LSB
(Suppor
t State
0)
If users wish to display State 0,
please select LSB (Support State 0).
12-30
Animated Graphic
Table 12-2-2 Example of Animated Graphic Data Type
The examples in the following table show how state value is determined with the
lowest non-zero element after converting from a decimal value into a binary
value. There are also examples demonstrating how the DOPSoft determines the
state value displayed with the lowest bit when the decimal values are 3 and 7.
Decimal
Binary
State Value
0000000000000000
0000000000000001
0000000000000010
0000000000000011
0000000000000100
0000000000000111
0000000000001000
16
0000000000010000
32
0000000000100000
64
0000000001000000
128
0000000010000000
256
0000000100000000
512
0000001000000000
1024
0000010000000000
2048
0000100000000000
4096
0001000000000000
8192
0010000000000000
16384
0100000000000000
32768
1000000000000000
12-31
Double-click Animated Graphic to call out the Animated Graphic Properties screen as
shown below.
Animated Graphic
Function
Page
Content Description
Preview
Views the multistate data but does not support multilingual data
display.
Main
Picture
Coordinates
Sets Read Address, Read Offset Address, data type, data format,
status counts, and clear picture.
Sets picture bank name, alignment, stretch mode, and picture
transparent color.
Sets the X-Y coordinate, width, and height of the element.
Table 12-2-3 Animated Graphic Function Page
12-32
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(6)
(5)
No.
Property
Read
Address
(1)
Read
Offset
Address
Function
Selects the address of internal memory or controller register.
The data of the Read Address are the reference for Animated Graphic
change.
[Read Address+1] is the X-position of Animated Graphic movements.
[Read Address+2] is the Y-position of Animated Graphic movements.
Selects link name or element type. Please refer to 5-1 Buttons of
Chapter 05 for details.
Please refer to Appendix D Write and Read Offset Address.
(2)
Data
Type
Three options: Word, LSB, and LSB (Support State 0). Please refer to
Table 12-2-2 for details.
(3)
Data
12-33
No.
(4)
(5)
Property
Function
Format
State
Counts
Sets the total state count of Animated Graphic elements. If data type
is Word, users can select 1-256 states; if data type is LSB, users
can select 16 states; and if data type is LSB (Support State 0), users
can select 17 states. Please refer to Table 12-2-2 for details.
Clear
Picture
(6)
12-34
State
Picture
(1)
(2)
(3)
12-35
No.
Property
Function Description
The default picture bank name is None. Users can select in the
built-in bank the picture to be displayed from the pull-down.
(1)
12-36
Picture
bank name
No.
Property
Function Description
Sets picture alignment with the alignment options.
Alignment
Stretch modes include: Fill, Keep Aspect Ratio, and Actual Size.
(2)
Fill
Actual Size
Stretch
Mode
(3)
Select
Transparen
t Color
12-37
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
12-38
Function
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
Dynamic Line
The Dynamic Line controls the position of line movements and the color changes of lines
and blink according to the Read Address defined by users. Please refer to Table 12-3-1
Example of Dynamic Line below
12-39
Crate
Dynamic
Line
Elements
Properties
Dynamic Line
Read Address
Position
Changeability
Line Type
Line Width
$999
Variable Color
Blink
Yes
Yes
Yes
Enter [Options] [Initial Macro] and edit the flowing macro commands.
These commands define the initial position of the X-Y coordinate of the
Dynamic Line.
Edit Initial
Macro
Enter [Screen] [Screen Cycle Macro] and edit the following macro
commands. These commands define the X-Y coordinate of the path, the
color change, and the blink state of the Dynamic Line.
Edit Screen
Cycle Macro
Execution
Results
12-40
Compile screens and download them to the HMI. The dynamic line will
be displayed on the HMI screen according to the X-Y path, color and
blink state defined in the Read Address.
Revision June, 2015
12-41
Double-click Dynamic Line to call out the Dynamic Line Properties screen as shown below.
Dynamic Line
Function
Page
Content Description
Preview
Main
Coordinates
Sets Read Address, Read Offset Address, line style, line size, line
color, and blink.
Sets data format, Variable Position, and Variable Color.
Sets the X-Y coordinate, width, and height of the element.
Table 12-3-2 Dynamic Line Function Page
12-42
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(7)
(6)
(8)
No.
Property
Function
Selects the address of internal memory or controller register.
If [Variable Position] is Yes, the data of the Read Address is the
X- coordinate of the dynamic lines start.
If [Variable Position] is Yes, the [Read Address+1] is the
Y-coordinate of the dynamic lines start.
(1)
Read
Address
12-43
No.
Property
Function
blink.
Selects link name or element type. Please refer to 5-1 Buttons of
Chapter 05 for details.
Read Offset
Address
(2)
Data Format
(3)
Variable
Position
When Yes is selected, this means the dynamic line position is
changeable. When No is selected, the dynamic line position is
unchangeable.
The options for Variable Color include Yes and No.
(4)
Variable
Color
When Yes is selected, this means the dynamic line color is
changeable. When No is selected, the dynamic line color is
unchangeable. The range is 0~65535.
(5)
12-44
Line Style
No.
Property
Function
(6)
Line Size
(7)
Line Color
12-45
No.
Property
Function
The options for Blink include Yes and No.
(8)
Blink
When Yes is selected, this means the dynamic line blinks on the
screen. When No is selected, the dynamic line does not blink on
the screen. If the value is greater than 1, the dynamic line blinks
at the blink state. If the value is 0, the dynamic line does not
blink.
12-46
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
X-value and
Y-value
(2)
Function
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
12-47
Dynamic
Rectangle
The Dynamic Rectangle controls the position of rectangle movements, and the color and
size change and blink of the rectangle according to the Read Address defined by users.
Please refer to Table 12-4-1 Example of Dynamic Rectangle below.
12-48
Create
Dynamic
Rectangle
Element
Dynamic Rectangle
Read Address
Properties
Line Width
$888
Variable
Position
Variable Color
Variable Size
Blink
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Enter [Screen] [Screen Cycle Macro] and edit the following macro
commands. These commands define the X-Y coordinate of the path,
the color and size changes, and the blink state of the Dynamic
Rectangle.
Edit Screen
Cycle
Macro
Result
12-49
12-50
Double-click Dynamic rectangle to call out the Dynamic rectangle Properties screen as
shown below.
Dynamic Rectangle
Function
page
Preview
Content Description
12-51
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(6)
(7)
(5)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
No.
Property
(1)
Read
Address
12-52
Function
Selects the address of internal memory or controller register.
If [Variable Position] is Yes, the data of the Read Address is the
X-coordinate of the dynamic rectangles upper left corner.
If [Variable Position] is Yes, [Read Address+1] is the
Y-coordinate of the dynamic rectangles upper left corner.
If [Variable Size] is Yes, [Read Address+2] is the X-coordinate
of the dynamic rectangles lower right corner.
If [Variable Size] is Yes, [Read Address+3] is the Y-coordinate
of the dynamic rectangles lower right corner.
If [Variable Color] is Yes, [Read Address+4] is the dynamic
rectangle color, and the range is 0-65535.
If [Blink] is Yes, [Read Address+5] is the blink state of the
dynamic rectangle. If the value is greater than 1, the dynamic
rectangle blinks at the blink state; if the value is 0, the dynamic
rectangle does not blink.
Selects link name or element type. Please refer to 5-1 Buttons of
Chapter 05 for details.
If [Position Changeability] is no, the corresponding memory
address will be replaced automatically.
Revision June, 2015
No.
Property
Read Offset
Address
Function
(2)
Data Format
(3)
Variable
Position
When Yes is selected, this means the dynamic rectangle
position is changeable. When No is selected, the dynamic
rectangle position is unchangeable. However, the rectangle size
is still changeable.
(4)
Variable
Color
No.
Property
Function
(5)
Variable
Size
When Yes is selected, this means users can change the
rectangle size by changing the lower right corner coordinate of
the dynamic rectangle. When No is selected, the rectangle size
is unchangeable.
Users can define the color of line display.
(6)
Line Color
(7)
Line Size
12-54
No.
Property
(8)
Round
Radius
(9)
Foreground
Color
Function
(10)
(11)
Blink
Transparent
Color
12-55
No.
Property
Function
12-56
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
Function
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
12-57
Dynamic Ellipse
The Dynamic Ellipse controls the position of oval movements, and the color and size
change and blink of the oval according to the Read Address defined by users. Please refer
to Table 12-5-1 Example of Dynamic Ellipse below.
12-58
Create
Dynamic
Ellipse
Element
Properties
Dynamic Ellipse
Line Width
Read Address
$111
Variable Color
Variable
Central point
Variable
Radius
Blink
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Enter [Options] [Initial Macro] and edit the flowing macro commands.
These commands define the initial position of the X-Y coordinate of the
Dynamic Ellipse.
Edit Initial
Macro
Enter [Screen] [Screen Cycle Macro] and edit the following macro
commands. These commands define the X-Y coordinate of the path, the
color and size changes, and the blink state of the Dynamic Ellipse.
Edit Screen
Cycle Macro
Execution
Compile screens and download them to the HMI. The Dynamic Ellipse
12-59
Results
12-60
will be displayed on the HMI screen according to the X-Y path, color,
size, and blink state defined in the Read Address.
Double-click Dynamic Line to call out the Dynamic Ellipse Properties screen as shown
below.
Dynamic Ellipse
Function
Page
Content Description
Preview
Main
Sets Read Address, Read Offset Address, line color, line size,
foreground color, blink, and transparent.
Sets data format, Variable color, Variable central point, and Variable
radius.
Coordinates
12-61
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(7)
(6)
(5)
(8)
(9)
(10)
No.
Property
(1)
Read
Address
12-62
Function
Selects the address of internal memory or controller register.
If [Variable Central point] is Yes, the data of the Read Address is
the X-coordinate of the Dynamic Ellipses center.
If [Variable Central point] is Yes, [Read Address+1] is the
Y-coordinate of the Dynamic Ellipses center.
If [Variable Radius] is Yes, [Read Address+2] is the horizontal
extension, also width, of the Dynamic Ellipse.
If [Variable Radius] is Yes, [Read Address+3] is the vertical
extension, also height, of the Dynamic Ellipse.
If [Variable Color] is Yes, [Read Address+4] is the Dynamic
Ellipse color, and the range is 0-65535.
If [Blink] is Yes, [Read Address+5] is the blink state of the
Dynamic Ellipse. If the value is greater than 1, the Dynamic
Ellipse blinks at the blink state; if the value is 0, the Dynamic
Ellipse does not blink.
Selects link name or element type. Please refer to 5-1 Buttons of
Chapter 05 for details.
If [Variable Central point] is No, the corresponding memory
address will be replaced automatically.
Revision June, 2015
No.
Property
Read Offset
Address
Function
(2)
Data Format
(3)
Variable
Color
When Yes is selected, this means the Dynamic Ellipse color is
changeable. When No is selected, the Dynamic Ellipse color is
unchangeable. The range is 0-65535.
(4)
Variable
The options for Variable Central point include Yes and No.
Central point
12-63
No.
Property
Function
(5)
Variable
Radius
12-64
Line Color
No.
Property
Function
(7)
Line Size
(8)
Foreground
Color
(9)
Blink
12-65
No.
Property
Function
(10)
Transparent
Color
If Transparent Color is Yes, the Foreground Color is disabled.
If Transparent Color is Yes, the color of the Dynamic Ellipse is
displayed only on the ovals frame, and the inside of the oval is
transparent.
12-66
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
X-value and
Y-value
(2)
Function
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
Sets element width and height.
12-67
Real Image
The Real Image allows users to program external applications with the ImgTrans.dll
provided by the DOPDSoft to upload pictures to the HMI. There are many Real Image
elements on the same editing screen. Software will dynamically allocate the available
memory size according to the Real Image elements created and the size of pictures to be
uploaded. Please refer to Table 12-6-1 Example of Real Image below.
1. Data Structure Definition:
typedef struct _ETHER_INFO
{
char
szIP[32];
WORD IPPort;
} ETHER_INFO;
,szIP is a string representing the IP address for Ethernet communication.
,IPPort is the for Ethernet communication port.
typedef struct _COMM_INFO
{
char
szCOM[10];
unsigned long dwStation
ETHER_INFO EtherInfo;
} COMM_INFO;
, szCOM is a string, the input value is COM1, COM2, COM3, ; if Ethernet is used, set
string to EHERNET.
, without station, set dwStation to -1 (set -1 for Ethernet); with station, set dwStation>0
function.
2. Function List:
(1) int hmOpen(const COMM_INFO* pCommInfo);
(2) int hmSendImageFromFile(LPCTSTR szFileName);
(3) int hmSendImageFromFileByStation(LPCTSTR szFileName, int nStation);
(4) HANDLE hmAsyncSendImageFromFile(LPCTSTR szFileName);
(5) HANDLE hmAsyncSendImageFromFileByStation(LPCTSTR szFileName, int
nStation);
(6) int hmSendImage(HBITMAP hbmp);
(7) int hmSendImageByStation(HBITMAP hbmp, int nStation);
(8) HANDLE hmAsyncSendImage(HBITMAP hbmp);
(9) HANDLE hmAsyncSendImageByStation(HBITMAP hbmp, int nStation);
(10) int hmAbortAction();
(11) int hmClose();
12-68
3.
Function Description
(1) Function: int hmOpen(const COMM_INFO* pCommInfo);
Input value: COMM_INFO structure
Respond value: 1: Success, 0: Failure
Description: When starting HMI communication, input COM Port string, e.g.
COM1, COM2, etc.
(2) Function: int SendImageFromFile(LPCTSTR szFileName);
Input value: Name of image files
Respond value: 1: Success, 0: Failure
Description: After converting the input graphic format into the element width,
element height and element bit of the HMI, start transmitting graphic
data to the HMI. This is a synchronous function which will only return
after data transmission is completed.
(3) Function: int SendImageFromFileByStation(LPCTSTR szFileName, int nStation);
Input value: Name of image files, HMI Station (must be >0)
Respond value: 1: Success, 0: Failure
Description: After converting the input graphic format into the element width,
element height and element bit of the HMI, start transmitting graphic
data to the selected HMI station. This is a synchronous function
which will only return after data transmission is completed.
(4) Function: HANDLE hmAsyncSendImageFromFile(LPCTSTR szFileName);
Input value: Name of image files
Respond value: 0: Failure, not 0 is thread handle
Description: After converting the input graphic format into the element width,
element height and element bit of the HMI, start transmitting graphic
data to the HMI. This is an asynchronous function. Users can obtain
the thread handle of the graphic data being transmitted to run the
relevant computing.
(5) Function: HANDLE hmAsyncSendImageFromFileByStation(LPCTSTR
szFileName, int nStation);
Input value: Name of image files, HMI Station (must be >0)
Respond value: 0: Failure, not 0 is thread handle
Description: After converting the input graphic format into the element width,
element height and element bit of the HMI, start transmitting graphic
data to the selected HMI station. This is an asynchronous function.
Users can obtain the thread handle of the graphic data being
12-69
12-71
Create Real
Image Element
Properties
Compile
12-72
This is the communication port between the HMI and PC. Default is
COM2, using RS232 interface.
HMI Station
Transmission
Communication Port
RS232
COM2
Create the real-tie graph display element and set its transmission and
communication port. Then, compile and download the screen to the
HMI.
Open
TestTransfer.ex
e
Open [My Computer] Enter the following path [C:\Program
Files\Delta Industrial Automation\DopSoft 1.00.xx\Utility\ImgTrans],
select [TestTransfer.exe]. Run this tool to select [COM9] as the COM
Port between the PC and HMI. Next, select the image file to be
uploaded. In the following example, the file is C:\DELTA.jpg as shown
below.
12-73
Execution
Results
Then, the Real Image element on the HMI will display the uploaded
image.
12-75
Double-click Real Image to bring out the Real Image Properties screen as shown below.
Real Image
Function
Page
Content Description
Preview
Main
Coordinates
12-76
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
No.
Property
Function
Sets the foreground color of the element.
(1)
Foreground
Color
(2)
HMI Station
(3)
Transmission
No.
Property
Function
(4)
12-78
Communication
Port
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
X-value and
Y-value
(2)
Function
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
Sets element width and height.
12-79
Load ImgTrans.dll
Data Structure Definition
typedef struct _COMM_INFO
{
char szCOM[8];
} COMM_INFO;
szCOM is a string, the input value is COM1, COM2, COM3, etc.
Function List
(12) int hmOpen(const COMM_INFO* pCommInfo);
(13) int hmSendImageFromFile(LPCTSTR szFileName);
(14) HANDLE hmAsyncSendImageFromFile(LPCTSTR
szFileName);
(15) int hmSendImage(HBITMAP hbmp);
(16) HANDLE hmAsyncSendImage(HBITMAP hbmp);
(17) int hmAbortAction();
(18) int hmClose();
Function Description:
Library
Description
Library
hmAsyncSendImageFromFile(LPCTSTR szFileName)
Input value: Name of image files
Respond value: 0: Failure, not 0 is thread handle
Description: After converting the input graphic format into
the element width, element height and
element bit of the HMI, start transmitting
graphic data to the HMI. This is an
asynchronous function. Users can obtain the
thread handle of the graphic data being
transmitted to run the relevant computing.
12-81
Chapter 13 Input
Contents
13-1 Numeric Entry ........................................................................................................... 4
13-1 Character Entry ....................................................................................................... 25
13-2 Barcode ................................................................................................................... 45
13-1
Chapter 13 Input
Chapter 13 Input
This chapter mainly describes the input elements provided in the DOPSoft and how they
are operated and configured.
NOTE
13-2
Numeric Entry, Character Entry and Barcode elements did not support custom
keyboard for DOP-B Series.
Chapter 13 Input
Input
Character Entry
Barcode
Table 13-1-1 Input Element Classification
Character
Entry
Barcode
User
Properties
Style
Security
Trigger
(Data Type/Data
(Style/
Level/Set
Info the
Input
type /
Input
Support Format/Integer
Background
Low
overrange
Element
Trigger
Methods
EASCII
Digit/Decimal
Color/Borde
Security/Dis
message
Address
Place/Minimum
r Color)
play
Value/Maximum)
Asterisk
Numeric
Entry
Character
Entry
Barcode
13-3
Chapter 13 Input
Numeric Entry
With the numeric keypad provided by the Numeric Entry element, users can input a value to
the selected write memory address. Next, after reading this value with the element read
memory, such as data display element, this value is displayed on the HMI. Please refer to
Table 13-1-3 Example of Numeric Entry below.
Example of Numeric Entry
Table 13-1-3 Example of Numeric Entry
Write Address
$555
$555
Data Type
Data Format
Integer Digit
Decimal Place
Word
Unsigned
Decimal
After creating the element, compile and download it to the HMI. Next,
input 100 with the Numeric Entry element, the data display element
will display this value.
Execution
Results
13-4
Chapter 13 Input
Numeric Entry supports two data types, Word and Double Word. The valid range of the
Numeric Entry data is described in Table 13-1-4 below.
Numeric Entry
Table 13-1-4 Numeric Entry Valid Range
Word
Data Format
BCD
0~9999
Signed BCD
-999 ~ 9999
Signed Decimal
-32768~32767
Unsigned Decimal
0~65535
Hex
0~0xFFFF
Binary
0~0xFFFF
Data Format
BCD
0~99999999
Signed BCD
-9999999 ~ 99999999
Unsigned
Decimal
0~4294697295
Hex
0~0xFFFFFFFF
Binary
0~0xFFFFFFFF
Floating
0~9999999
13-5
Chapter 13 Input
Double-click Numeric Entry to call out the Numeric Entry Properties screen as shown
below.
13-6
Chapter 13 Input
Numeric Entry
Function Page
Preview
Content Description
Supports neither multistate nor Multi-Language data display.
Main
Text
Sets the font type, font size, font color, and alignment of the text to
be displayed.
Details
Macro
Coordinates
13-7
Chapter 13 Input
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(9)
(6)
(10)
(7)
(11)
(8)
No.
(1)
(2)
Property
Write
Address
Read
Address
Write Offset
Address
Read Offset
Address
(3)
Data Type
(4)
Data
Format
13-8
Function
Selects the address of internal memory or controller register.
Selects link name or Style. Please refer to 5-1 Buttons of Chapter
5.
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
Function
Edit
Numeric
Keypad
13-9
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
Function
(5)
Minimum
Value /
Maximum
Value
Word
Double
Word
13-10
BCD
Signed BCD
0~9999
-999 ~ 9999
Signed Decimal
-32768~32767
Unsigned Decimal
Hex
0~65535
0~0xFFFF
Binary
0~0xFFFF
BCD
Signed BCD
0~99999999
-9999999 ~ 99999999
-2147483648~214748364
Signed Decimal
7
Unsigned Decimal
0~4294967295
Revision June, 2015
Chapter 13 Input
No.
(6)
Property
Integer
Digit
Decimal
Place
Function
0~0xFFFFFFFF
0~0xFFFFFFFF
Floating
0~9999999
(7)
Hex
Binary
Variable
minimum/m
aximum
limits
(8)
Gain
Offset
13-11
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
Function
(9)
13-12
Style
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
Function
Transparent. Users can change the element appearance.
Standard
Raised
Sunken
Transparent
(10)
Border
Color
(11)
Background
Color
13-13
Chapter 13 Input
Text
(1)
No.
Property
Function
(1)
Text Properties
Sets text properties, including font type, font size, font color, and
text alignment.
13-14
Chapter 13 Input
Details
(1)
(6)
(2)
(7)
(3)
(8)
(4)
(5)
(9)
No.
Property
Function
Pad Left Zero is determined according to the number of digits of an
integer as show in the example below.
(1)
Pad Left
Zero
(2)
Info the If YES is selected for Info the over range message, when the input
over
value exceeds this range defined, an error message will pop up to
range
remind users as shown below:
message
13-15
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
User
Security
Level
Function
Sets the user security level of element activities. Only users with
equal or higher security level corresponding to the element can
activate the element.
After setting the user security level, when users activate the element,
the password box will pop up and request users to input the password
(the password can be changed from the password setup element,
please see 5-7 Password Table).
(3)
Set Low
Security
If YES is selected for Set Low Security, HMI automatically sets the
security to the lowest level every time users input the password.
When users activate the element again, they will be requested to
input again the password corresponding to the element.
13-16
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
(4)
Display
Asterisk
Function
If YES is selected for Hide Character, all numbers input from the
numeric keypad will be displayed as ***, i.e. characters are hidden,
as shown below.
(5)
Show
###
when
over
range
When this selection is set to YES, if the value is not within the range,
then it will display ###.
Set the minimum value as 10 and the maximum value as 50. After
executing the command, since the default value is 0 and 0 is not
within the range, 10 ~ 60, it displays #.
(6)
Input
Mode
13-17
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
Function
No numeric keypad will pop up for both Active non-Popup and Touch
non-Popup. Users must create an additional keypad element to
operate the HMI.
Active non-Popup must be used along with Interlock Address. Set the
interlock address of the Numeric Entry element as $44.0, and create
a maintained element and set its write memory address as $44.0:
13-18
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
Interlock
State
(7)
Function
Interlock Address allows users to operate an element from this
particular address. It must be used along with Interlock State. If
Interlock State is OFF, this means the interlock address is operable
when the interlock state is OFF. In contrast, when Interlock State is
ON, this means the interlock address is operable when the interlock
state is ON.
The operations are as follows:
1. First, create a maintained button and set its write memory
address as $44.0. Next, set its write memory as $555 from the
Numeric Entry element and the interlock address of the
Character Entry element as $44.0.
2. To make Numeric Entry Element $555 operable, press the
maintained button $44.0 to enable $555.
Interlock
Address
13-19
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
Function
Trigger type include before writing and after writing.
Before writing
After writing
Trigger
Values are changed
The activation bit is ON
type
before the activation bit
before changing values.
is ON.
As the activation function only sets the trigger address to ON, users
must set the trigger address of OFF before re-activation.
Before writing:
After writing:
Trigger
type
(8)
Trigger
When Invisible Address is ON, the button element is hidden, and the
corresponding function is disabled.
(9)
13-20
Invisible
Address
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
Function
13-21
Chapter 13 Input
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
13-22
Function
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
Chapter 13 Input
Macro
13-23
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
Function
The before execute macro and after execute macro processes are diagrammed
below:
(1)
Before
execute
Macro
After execute
Macro
13-24
When users touch the button element, HMI will first run the
commands in the corresponding macro pre-action of the button
action. If the button state is not changed by means of touching
button (using external controller commands or other macros),
HMI will not run the corresponding macro commands.
After users touch the button element, HMI will first run the
button action pre-action the commands in the corresponding
macro. If the button state is not changed by means of touching
button (using external controller commands or other macros),
HMI will not run the corresponding macro commands.
Chapter 13 Input
Character Entry
Character Entry supports only the ASCII code. Therefore, only characters will be accepted
for both display and input. Users can switch to the ASCII input mode from the ALT key as
shown below.
13-25
Chapter 13 Input
The following table shows the data format and character cross reference. The table below
shows only characters from A to G, and the rest is in the same theory.
Unsigned Decimal
Hexadecimal
Character
65
41
66
42
67
43
68
44
69
45
70
46
71
47
As shown in Table 13-2-1, if users input the character A from the Character Entry element,
the code 65 (Unsigned Decimal) will be displayed on the Numeric Entry element.
Chapter 13 Input
Read
Address
$555
$555
10
Data Format
Integer Digits
Fractional
Word
Unsigned
Decimal
After creating the element, compile and download it to the HMI. Next,
input A from the Character Entry element, after displaying the
corresponding ASCII code (A), the value 65 (unsigned decimal) will
be displayed on the Numeric Entry element.
Execution
Results
13-27
Chapter 13 Input
Double-click Character Entry to call out the Character Entry Properties screen as shown
below.
Character Entry
Function Page
Preview
Content Description
Supports neither multistate nor Multi-Language data display.
Main
Text
Sets the font type, font size, font color, and alignment of the text to
be displayed.
Details
Macro
Coordinates
13-28
Chapter 13 Input
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
No.
Property
Function
Write Address
(1)
Read Address
(2)
Write Offset
Address
Read Offset
Address
System
Keypad
13-29
(3)
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
Function
String Length
(5)
(6)
13-30
Style
Border Color
Standard
Raised
Sunken
Transparent
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
Function
(7)
Background
Color
13-31
Chapter 13 Input
Text
(1)
No.
Property
Function
(1)
Text Properties
Sets text properties, including font type, font size, font color,
and text alignment.
13-32
Chapter 13 Input
Details
(4)
(1)
(5)
(2)
(6)
(3)
(7)
No.
Property
Function
User
Security
Level
(1)
Set Low
Security
Sets the user security level of element activities. Only users with
equal or higher security level corresponding to the element can
activate the element.
After setting the user security level, when users activate the
element, the password box will pop up and request users to input
the password (the password can be changed from the password
setup element, please see 5-7 Password Table).
13-33
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
Function
If YES is selected for Set Low Security, HMI automatically sets the
security to the lowest level every time users input the password.
When users activate the element again, they will be requested to
input again the password corresponding to the element.
(2)
13-34
Display
Asterisk
If YES is selected for Hide Character, all numbers input from the
numeric keypad will be displayed as ***, i.e. characters are hidden,
as shown below.
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
Function
EASCII Table
Extended ASCII has two types, one is defined by IBM and the
other is defined by ISO/IEC 8859-1. The version of EASCII is
different in each operating system. Most cases follow the rule
that defined by ISO/IEC 8859-1, so do Microsoft and Deltas
HMI.
See the supported extended characters below:
(3)
Support
EASCII
Character
13-35
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
Function
If Yes is selected, this function can work with Keypad. See the
followings for further descriptions.
Use Keypad Element
Set the Write Address as $100 and string length as
10.
Create
Character
Entry
Element
13-36
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
Function
Select any of the extended characters that
mentioned above and input them for keypad display.
Create
Keypad (2)
Element
Compile
and
Download
the Screen
to HMI
13-37
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
Function
(4)
Input
Mode
13-38
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
Function
(5)
Interlock
State
13-39
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
Function
address as $44.0. Next, set its write memory as $555 from
the Character Entry element and the interlock address of the
Character Entry element as $44.0.
2. To make Character Entry Element $555 operable, press the
maintained button $44.0 to enable $555.
Interlock
Address
Trigger
type
(6)
Trigger
(7)
13-40
Invisible
Address
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
Function
13-41
Chapter 13 Input
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
13-42
Function
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
Chapter 13 Input
Macro
13-43
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
Function
The before execute macro and after execute macro processes are diagrammed
below:
(1)
Before
execute
Macro
After execute
Macro
13-44
When users touch the button element, HMI will first run the
commands in the corresponding macro pre-action of the button
action. If the button state is not changed by means of touching
button (using external controller commands or other macros),
HMI will not run the corresponding macro commands.
After users touch the button element, HMI will first run the
button action pre-action the commands in the corresponding
macro. If the button state is not changed by means of touching
button (using external controller commands or other macros),
HMI will not run the corresponding macro commands.
Chapter 13 Input
13-3 Barcode
Barcode
Barcode supports only the ASCII 1D barcode. The display and input formats are the same
as that of Character Entry. The HMI supports all barcode readers requiring no additional
drivers.
Please refer to Table 13-3-1 Example of Barcode below.
13-45
Chapter 13 Input
Example of Barcode
Table 13-3-1 Example of Barcode
Barcode Element
Write Address
$555
Read Address
Properties
Barcode Element
String Length
10
13-46
Chapter 13 Input
Double-click Barcode to call out the Barcode Properties screen as shown below.
Barcode
Function Page
Content Description
Preview
Main
Text
Sets the font type, font size, font color, and alignment of the text to
be displayed.
Details
Macro
Coordinates
13-47
Chapter 13 Input
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
No.
Property
Write Address
(1)
Read Address
(2)
(3)
13-48
Write Offset
Address
Read Offset
Address
System
Keyboard
Function
Selects the address of internal memory or controller register.
Selects link name or Style. Please refer to 5-1 Buttons of
Chapter 05.
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
Function
String Length
(5)
(6)
Style
Border Color
Standard
Raised
Sunken
Transparent
13-49
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
Function
(7)
13-50
Background
Color
Chapter 13 Input
Text
(1)
No.
Property
Function
(1)
Text Properties
Sets text properties, including font type, font size, font color,
and text alignment.
13-51
Chapter 13 Input
Details
(4)
(1)
(5)
(2)
(6)
(3)
(7)
(8)
No.
Property
Function
User
Security
Level
(1)
Set Low
Security
13-52
Sets the user security level of element activities. Only users with
equal or higher security level corresponding to the element can
activate the element.
After setting the user security level, when users activate the
element, the password box will pop up and request users to input
the password (the password can be changed from the password
setup element, please see 5-7 Password Table).
Revision June, 2015
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
Function
If YES is selected for Set Low Security, HMI automatically sets the
security to the lowest level every time users input the password.
When users activate the element again, they will be requested to
input again the password corresponding to the element.
If YES is selected for Hide Character, all numbers input from the
numeric keypad will be displayed as ***, i.e. characters are hidden,
as shown below.
(2)
Display
Asterisk
(3)
Support
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
Function
EASCII
Swedish.
EASCII Table
Extended ASCII has two types, one is defined by IBM and the
other is defined by ISO/IEC 8859-1. The version of EASCII is
different in each operating system. Most cases follow the rule
that defined by ISO/IEC 8859-1, so do Microsoft and Deltas
HMI.
See the supported extended characters below:
Character
13-54
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
Function
If Yes is selected, this function can work with Keypad. See the
followings for further descriptions.
Use Keypad Element
Set the Write Address as $100 and String Length as
10.
Create
Barcode
Entry
Element
Create
Keypad (2)
Element
13-55
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
Function
Compile
and
Download
the Screen
to HMI
Screen
Input Mode include touch and active. Touch is the default input
method for Barcode elements.
(4)
Input
Mode
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
Function
blinks and scans the barcode or use keypad to input numeric. The
element will not be displayed until a barcode is scanned.
Active must be used along with Interlock Address. Set the interlock
address of the Barcode element as $44.0, and create a maintained
element and set its write memory address as $44.0. Also, set
Enable Input Methods to Active to directly input a barcode from a
barcode reader or additional keyboard.
Popup Bit
13-57
(5)
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
Interlock
State
(6)
Function
Set Popup bit of Barcode Element as $556.0. After touching the
Barcode element, activate Popup bit, and the ASCII keyboard
will pop up.
Interlock
Address
13-58
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
Trigger
type
Function
Trigger type include before writing and after writing.
Before writing
After writing
Trigger
Values are changed
The activation bit is ON
type
before the activation bit
before changing values.
is ON.
As the activation function only sets the activation address to ON,
users must set the activation address of OFF before re-activation.
Before writing:
After writing
(7)
Trigger
Invisible
Address
13-59
Chapter 13 Input
No.
13-60
Property
Function
Chapter 13 Input
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
Function
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
13-61
Chapter 13 Input
Macro
13-62
Chapter 13 Input
No.
Property
Function
The before execute macro and after execute macro processes are diagrammed
below:
(1)
Before
execute
Macro
After execute
Macro
When users touch the button element, HMI will first run the
commands in the corresponding macro pre-action of the button
action. If the button state is not changed by means of touching
button (using external controller commands or other macros),
HMI will not run the corresponding macro commands.
After users touch the button element, HMI will first run the
button action pre-action the commands in the corresponding
macro. If the button state is not changed by means of touching
button (using external controller commands or other macros),
HMI will not run the corresponding macro commands.
13-63
Chapter 14 Curve
Contents
14-1
14-2
14-3
14-4
14-1
Chapter 14 Curve
Chapter 14 Curve
This chapter mainly describes the curve elements provided in the DOPSoft and how they
are operated and configured.
Curve Element Classification
Trend Graph
Curve
X-Y Chart
X-Y Distribution
Curve Input
Table 14-1-1 Curve Element Classification
X-Y
Distribution
14-2
Projection Axis
Grid Line
X-Y Chart
Curve
Input
Curve Type
Read Address
Trend
Graph
Write Address
Curve
Element
Style
(Border Color/Grid
Horizontal
Line Color/Grid
Line
Number in/Element
Number/
Style/ Element
Vertical Line
Background
Number
Color/Curve Field
Total)
Minimum /
Maximum / Line
Size / Line Color
Chapter 14 Curve
H.
Min.
X/Y/Color/Connection/
Max.
/ H.
Sample
H. Read
X-Minimum
Sample
Curve
Max.
Number/
Control Address/V. Continuous Auto
Sample
/X-Maximum /
Number/
Element
/ V.
Data
Address Read
Address Clear
Y-Minimum
Sample
Min.
Format
Address
/Y-Maximum
Flag
/ V.
Max.
Trend
Graph
X-Y Chart
X-Y
Distribution
Curve
Input
14-3
Chapter 14 Curve
Trend Graph
The Trend Graph is drawn according to the read address selected by users. Users can also
define the curve count that is displayed. A Trend Graph element supports a total of 4 curves.
This element draws curves with the curve sampling flags under from [Options]
[Configuration] [Control Block] [Curve Control]. Curve Sampling Flags 1-4
correspond to Sampling Flag 1-4 in the Trend Graph element.
Please refer to 14-1-3 Example of Trend Graph below.
14-4
Chapter 14 Curve
Minimum
/Maximum
Line Size/Line
Color
Trend
Graph
Element
Numeric
Entry
Element
Set
Constant
Element
Five numeric entry elements are created because the sampling point
setting of Trend Graphs is 5. As it needs 5 sampling points for a curve
element to draw a curve, five addresses are read from Read Address
$2000 defined by the Trend Graph. These addresses are: $2000,
$2001, $2002, $2003, and $2004.
Numeric Entry Element
Write Memory Address $2000 $2001 $2002 $2003 $2004
Create the Set Constant Element and set its Write Memory Address as
D2. This address (D2) is used by the curve control flag in the control
block.
14-5
Chapter 14 Curve
14-6
Chapter 14 Curve
After creating elements, run Compile and download them to HMI. Next,
Execution
input a random value from the Numeric Entry Element, the Trend
Results
Graph Element will draw curves according to this value.
14-7
Chapter 14 Curve
14-8
Chapter 14 Curve
Double-click Trend Graph to call out the Trend Graph Properties screen as shown below.
Trend Graph
Function
page
Preview
Main
Coordinates
Content Description
Supports neither multistate data nor multilingual data display.
Sets Read Address, Sample Number, Max. Sample Number, Data
Format, Sample Flag, Minimum, Maximum, Line Size, Line Color and
Projection Axis.
Sets Border Color, Grid Line Color, Grid Number in, Element Style,
Element Background Color, and Curve Field Total.
Sets the X-Y coordinate, width, and height of elements.
Table 14-1-4 Trend Graph Function Page
14-9
Chapter 14 Curve
Main
(9)
(1)
(2)
(10)
(3)
(11)
(4)
(12)
(5)
(6)
(13)
(7)
(14)
(8)
No.
(1)
(2)
14-10
Property
Function
Selects the address of internal memory or controller register.
Read
Selects link name or element type. Please refer to 5-1 Buttons of
Address
Chapter 05.
The size of sample number is determined by element width and
element type. When element type Standard is selected in the Trend
Sample
Graph element and element width is 391, the maximum sample
Number/
numbers are 391. When element type Raise or Sunken is
Max. Sample
selected in the Trend Graph element (Border width is 7 points) and
Number
element width is 391, the maximum sample numbers are 377
(391-(7*2)=377).
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
Function
14-11
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
Function
(3)
Data Format
(4)
14-12
Sample Flag
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
Function
The valid range of minimum and maximum is subject to the data type
and data format.
(5)
Minimum /
Maximum
Data
Type
Word
Data Format
BCD
Signed BCD
0~9999
-999 ~ 9999
Signed Decimal
-32768~32767
(6)
Line Size
14-13
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
(7)
Line Color
(8)
Function
Users can define the color of line display.
Projection
Axis
14-14
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
Function
(1)
Create the numeric entry element $600 for entering the Sample
Number.
14-15
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
Function
Create one numeric entry element and set its address to D1.
14-16
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
Function
Y-axis projection.
Y-axis projection
(1)
Create the numeric entry element $600 for entering the Sample
Number.
14-17
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
Function
Create one numeric entry element and set its address to D1.
14-18
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
Function
NOTE:
When applying projection axis and using more than one curve, the
one with bigger number will cover the one with smaller number.
Users can define the Border Color of the Trend Graph element
(9)
Border Color
(10)
Grid Line
Color
Grid Color is the color of the grid line in the Trend Graph. The default
.
color is
14-19
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
Function
(11)
14-20
Grid Number
in
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
(12)
Property
Element
Style
Function
(13)
Element
Background
Color
(14)
Curve Field
Total
Select 12 curves. Users can also change the width and color of the
curve.
14-21
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
Function
14-22
Chapter 14 Curve
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
X-value and
Y-value
(2)
Function
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
Sets element width and height.
14-23
Chapter 14 Curve
X-Y Chart
The X-Y Chart is drawn according to the H. Read Address and V. Read Address selected
by users. Users can also define the curve count displayed, and if X and Y points are
connected. An X-Y Chart element supports a total of 4 curves. This element draws curves
with the curve sampling flags under from [Options] [Configuration] [Control Block]
[Curve Control]. Curve Sampling Flags 1-4 correspond to Sampling Flag 1-4 in the X-Y
Chart element.
Please refer to 14-2-1 Example of X-Y Chart below.
14-24
Chapter 14 Curve
H. Min. Value
H. Max. Value
V. Min. Value
V. Max. Value
Line Size
Line Color
X-Y Chart
Element
Numeric
Entry
Element
Set
Constant
Element
Write Address
$3000
$3001
$3002
$3003
$3004
Write Address
$4000
$4001
$4002
$4003
$4004
Create the Set Constant Element and set its Write Memory Address as
D2. This address (D2) is used by the curve control flag in the control block.
14-25
Chapter 14 Curve
Create another Set Constant Element. Also set D2 as the Write Memory
Address, and 256 the constant. 256 corresponds to Bit 8 Curve
Clearing Flag 1.
14-26
Chapter 14 Curve
After creating elements, run Compile and download them to HMI. Next,
Execution
input a random value for X-axis and Y-axis respectively from the Numeric
Results
Entry Element, the X-Y Chart Element will draw curves according to these
values.
14-27
Chapter 14 Curve
14-28
Chapter 14 Curve
Double-click X-Y Chart to call out the X-Y Chart Properties screen as shown below.
X-Y Chart
Function
Page
Preview
Main
Coordinates
Content Description
Supports neither multistate data nor multilingual data display.
Sets Horiz. Read Address, Vert. Read Address, Sample Number,
Max. Sample Number, Data Format, Sample Flag, Horiz. Min. Value,
Horiz. Max., Vert. Min. Value, Vert. Max., Line Size, Line Color and
Projection.
Sets Border Color, Grid Line Color, Horizontal Line Number, Vertical
Line Number, Connect Two Points, Element Style, Element
Background Color, and Curve Field Total.
Sets the X-Y coordinate, width, and height of elements.
Table 14-2-2 X-Y Chart Function Page
14-29
Chapter 14 Curve
Main
(10)
(11)
(1)
(2)
(12)
(3)
(4)
(13)
(5)
(14)
(6)
(15)
(7)
(16)
(8)
(9)
No.
Property
(1)
Sample
Number /
Max.
Sample
Number
14-30
Function
The size of sampling number is determined by element width and
element type. When element type Standard is selected in the X-Y
Chart element, and element width is 363 and minimum height is
231, the maximum sample number are 231 (based on the
minimum value of element width and height). When element type
Raise or Sunken is selected in the X-Y Chart element (Border
width is 7 points) and element width is 231, the maximum sample
number are 217 (231-(7*2)=217).
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
Function
14-31
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
Function
(2)
Data
Format
(3)
Horizontal
Read
Address
Vertical
Read
Address
(4)
Sample
Flag
14-32
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
Function
(5)
Horiz. Min.
/ Horiz.
Max.
Data Type
Word
Data Format
BCD
Signed BCD
Signed Decimal
Unsigned Decimal
Hex
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
(6)
Vert. Min. /
Vert. Max.
(7)
Line Size
Function
The valid range of minimum and maximum is subject to the data
type and data format.
Data Type
Data Format
Data Valid Range
BCD
0~9999
Signed BCD
-999 ~ 9999
Word
Signed Decimal
-32768~32767
Unsigned Decimal
0~65535
Hex
0~0xFFFF
There are eight levels of line width, ranging from 1-8.
(8)
14-34
Line Color
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
Function
The projection has three kinds, None, Projection onto X-axis and
Projection onto Y-axis.
(9)
Projection
(1)
(2)
(3)
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
14-36
Function
Please create the numeric entry element range from $100 to $104
and $110 to $104 with the data format of Unsigned Decimal.
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
Function
(1)
14-37
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
Function
14-38
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
Function
Users can define the Border Color of the X-Y Chart element
(10)
Border
Color
Grid Color is the color of the grid line in the X-Y Chart. The default
color is
.
(11)
Grid Line
Color
14-39
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
Function
(12)
Both Horizontal Line Number and Vertical Line Number support the
maximum of 99.
Horizontal Line Number refers to the number of curves on the
X-axis. Vertical Line Number refers to the number of curves on the
Y-axis. Default is 1.
Horizontal
Line
Number /
Vertical
Line
Number
(13)
Connect
Two Points
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
Function
Element
Style
Standard
Raised
Sunken
Transparent
(15)
Element
Backgroun
d Color
(16)
Curve
Field Total
Select 4 curves. Users can also change the line width and line color
of these curves.
14-41
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
Function
14-42
Chapter 14 Curve
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
X-value and
Y-value
(2)
Function
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
14-43
Chapter 14 Curve
X-Y Distribution
The X-Y Distribution allows users to use continuous addresses as the read address and
continuously sample points on the X-axis and Y-axis, and there is no upper limit for
sampling points. Although the X-Y Chart also uses continuous addresses, its sampling
points are determined by the element type, element width, and element height. If
Continuous Address is not selected, users can define the read address for both X and Y.
Users can also define Color and Connection as the read address or a constant. By contrast,
if Continuous Address is selected, both X and Y are continuous addresses, and the color
will automatically continue the address of X and Y. In this case, users can only change
Color into a constant without changing its address.
An X-Y Distribution element can sample the maximum of 4 points. This element is different
from the Trend Graph and X-Y Chart elements in a way that it does not need to draw curves
with the curve sampling flags under from [Options] [Configuration] [Control Block]
[Curve Control]. This is because it has its own control flag where Bit 0 is sampling and Bit 1
is clearing.
Please refer to Table 14-3-1 Example of X-Y Distribution below.
14-44
Chapter 14 Curve
Sample
Properties
X-Y
Distribution
Element
14-45
Chapter 14 Curve
Numeric
Entry
Element
As the sample size is 2, there are two conditions: Sample 0 and Sample
1.
Create numeric entry elements $20-$23 as the X, Y, color, and
connection of Sample 0.
Create numeric entry elements $30-$33 as the X, Y, color, and
connection of Sample 1.
Sampling Points
Color
Connection
Sample 0
$20
$21
$22
$23
Sample 1
$30
$31
$32
$33
Set
Constant
Element
After creating elements, run Compile and download them to HMI. Next,
input a random value for X-axis and Y-axis respectively from the Numeric
Entry Element, the X-Y Chart Element will draw curves according to
these values.
Execution
Results
14-46
Chapter 14 Curve
Double-click X-Y Distribution to call out the X-Y Distribution Properties screen as shown
below.
X-Y Distribution
Function
Page
Content Description
Preview
General
Sets Control Address, Auto Clear, Continuous Address, X-Y Color and
Connection, Read Address, X-Minimum, X-Maximum, Y-Minimum,
and Y-Maximum.
Sets Border Color, Grid Line Color, Horizontal Line Number, Vertical
Line Number, Element Style, Element Background Color, Sample,
Line Size and Dot Width.
Position
14-47
Chapter 14 Curve
Main
(9)
(8)
(1)
(2)
(10)
(3)
(11)
(4)
(5)
(12)
(6)
(13)
(7)
(14)
(15)
(16)
No.
Property
(1)
14-48
Control
Address
Function
Control Address is the independent curve control flag of the X-Y
Distribution. Users will not need to sample data with the curve
control flags in the control block. Users can select the internal
memory or controller register of this control address.
Selects link name or element type. Please refer to 5-1 Buttons of
Chapter 05.
Activate Bit 0 to draw the curve with sampling points and Bit 1 to
clear sampling points.
The curve control flag of the X-Y real-time curve draws the curve
only with the data of one point in every time of activation. Users
wishing to draw the curve with data of another sampling point must
set the flag to OFF and reactivate the flag. Users can select the
Auto clear for HMI to clear the flag automatically.
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
(2)
Continuous
Address
(3)
(4)
(5)
Color
Function
If Continuous Address is selected, the address of Y, Color and
Connection will continue the address selected for X. If X-address is
$1000, the address of Y, Color and Connection will be
$1001-$1003. Also, users wishing to change the read address of X
and Y can only change the X-address. Users wishing to change
the read address of Color or Connection can only change it into a
constant without changing its address.
If Continuous Address is not selected, the address of X, Y, Color,
and Connection are discontinuous. Users can define their read
address according to their preferences. Also, the read address of
Color and Connection can be changed into a read address or a
constant.
Selects the address of the internal memory or controller register of
X-coordinate.
Selects link name or element type. Please refer to 5-1 Buttons of
Chapter 05.
Selects the address of the internal memory or controller register of
Y-coordinate.
Selects link name or element type. Please refer to 5-1 Buttons of
Chapter 05.
Selects the address of the internal memory or controller register or
a constant of Color-coordinate.
Selects link name or element type. Please refer to5-1 Buttons of
Chapter 05.
Selects a constant as color to directly select the sampling point
color from Color.
14-49
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
Function
Users can also input the address number, ranging from 0 to 65535.
14-50
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
(6)
(7)
(8)
Property
Function
Border Color Users can define the Border Color of the X-Y Distribution element.
14-51
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
Function
Grid Line Color is the color of the grid line in the X-Y Distribution.
The default color is
.
(9)
Grid Line
Color
Users can change the grid color.
(10)
14-52
Both Horizontal Line Number and Vertical Line Number support the
Horizontal
maximum of 99.
Line Number
Horizontal Line Number refers to the number of curves on the
/ Vertical
X-axis. Vertical Line Number refers to the number of curves on the
Line Number
Y-axis. Default is 2.
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
(11)
Property
Element
Style
Function
(12)
Element
Background
Color
Sample size
14-53
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
Function
User wishing to use 4 sets of samples only need to set the X and Y
read addresses of Sample 0, Sample 1, Sample 2, and Sample 3
to run sampling.
(14)
Line size can be set between 1 and 8. The setting value cannot
be less than 1, or it will not show any line in the graph.
Line Size
Line size is
set to 1
14-54
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
Function
Line size is
set to 0
(15)
(16)
Dot width can be set from 1 to 8. When the dot width is set to 5,
the figure will be shown as below.
Dot Width
Non-current
screen
background
processing
permit
NOTE:
If [Auto Rest Flag] is not checked, please make sure to turn the
sampling flag off after the sampling is complete.
14-55
Chapter 14 Curve
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
Function
(1)
(2)
14-56
Chapter 14 Curve
Curve Input
Curve Input takes sample from continuous addresses and draw curves based on the read
address selected by users. Users can also touch the Curve Input element to move the
curve to the desired display position. Curve Input provides two types of graphs, broken line
and block graphs, each has different effects.
Please refer to Table 14-4-1 Example of Curve Input below.
14-57
Chapter 14 Curve
Curve
Input
Element
Numeric
Entry
Element
Read Address
$1058
Sampling Points
Graph Type
Broken Line
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Line Size
Line Color
Three numeric entry elements are created because the sampling point
setting is 3. As it needs 3 sampling points to draw a curve, 3
addresses are read orderly from Read Address $1058 defined by
Curve Input. These addresses are $1058, $1059, and $1060.
Numeric Entry Element
Write Memory
Address
14-58
$1058
$1059
$1060
Chapter 14 Curve
After creating elements, run Compile and download them to HMI. Next,
input a random value from the Numeric Entry Element, Curve Input will
draw curves according to these values. Users can also touch the
Curve Input element to move the curve to the desired display location.
Execution
Results
14-59
Chapter 14 Curve
Double-click Curve Input to call out the Curve Input Properties screen as shown below.
Curve Input
Function
Page
Preview
Main
Position
Content Description
Supports neither multistate data nor multilingual data display.
Sets Read Address, Sample Number, Data Format, Minimum,
Maximum, Line Size, and Line Color.
Sets Border Color, Grid Line Color, Curve Type, Grid Line, Element
Style, Element Background Color, and Grid Number in.
Sets the X-Y coordinate, width, and height of elements.
Table 14-4-2 Curve Input Function Page
14-60
Chapter 14 Curve
Main
(7)
(1)
(2)
(8)
(3)
(9)
(4)
(10)
(5)
(11)
(13)
(6)
(12)
No.
(1)
(2)
Property
Function
Address
Sample
Number
14-61
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
Function
(3)
Data
Format
Minimum /
Maximum
Word
14-62
Data Format
BCD
0~9999
Signed BCD
-999 ~ 9999
0~65535
Hex
0~0xFFFF
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
Function
There are eight levels of line width, ranging from 1-8.
(5)
Line Size
(6)
Line Color
Users can define the Border Color of the Curve Input element.
(7)
Border
Color
14-63
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
Function
Grid Color is the color of the grid line in the Curve Input. The default
color is
(8)
Grid Line
Color
Users can change the grid color.
(9)
14-64
Curve
Type
Broken
line
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
Function
Block
graphs
Yes
(10)
Grid Line
No
(11)
Element
Style
Raised
Sunken
14-65
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
Function
Users can set the background color of elements.
(12)
Element
Backgroun
d Color
(13)
14-66
Grid
Number in
Chapter 14 Curve
No.
Property
Function
14-67
Chapter 14 Curve
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
X-value and
Y-value
(2)
14-68
Function
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of
elements.
Sets element width and height.
Chapter 15 Sampling
Contents
15-1
15-2
15-3
15-4
15-5
15-1
Chapter 15 Sampling
Chapter 15 Sampling
This chapter describes the sampling components that the DOPSoft software provides and
how to operate History Setup.
Sampling
Buffer Number
Historical
Trend
Graph
Write Address
Read Address
Historical
Data
Table
(Only data
no.)
Historical
Event
Table
(Only data
no.)
Historical
Overview
Table
15-2
(Only Background
Color of TreeView
and Background
Color of View)
Chapter 15 Sampling
Min.
Data
Integer
History
Display High
History
Set Value/ Type/
Digits/
Buffer
value/Display
Elements
Scale Max.
Data Fractional
Setup
Low value
Value Format
Digits
Historical
Trend
Graph
Historical
Data
Table
Historical
Event
Table
Historical
Overview
Table
Column
Counts/
Column
Width/
Leading
Zero
State
15-3
Chapter 15 Sampling
Time/date data
Data type
Sample number
Sample number
15-4
Chapter 15 Sampling
Header
Time Name
(Time)
Date
Name
(Date)
2 Bytes
8 Bytes
2 Bytes
8 Bytes
Data
field
Name
(Data1)
Ends
2 Bytes
10 Bytes
4 Bytes
Data
field
Name
( 1)
Ends
2 Bytes
6 Bytes
4 Bytes
Total 36 Bytes
Header
Time Name
(Time)
Date
Name
(Date)
2 Bytes
4 Bytes
2 Bytes
4 Bytes
Total 24 Bytes
Revision June, 2015
15-5
Chapter 15 Sampling
Header
Time
Name
(Time)
2 Bytes
4 Bytes
Date
Name
(Date)
2 Bytes
4 Bytes
Data field
Name
(Data 1)
Data field
Name
(Data 2)
Ends
2 Bytes
6 Bytes
6 Bytes
4 Bytes
Total 30 Bytes
15-6
Chapter 15 Sampling
Data Fields
A1
Setting
value
CSV
Separator
B1
Setting
value
CSV
Separator
A2
Setting
value
123
Delta
abc
6 Bytes
2 Bytes
8 Bytes
2 Bytes
6Bytes
B2
CSV
Setting
Separator
value
QWE
2 Bytes
New
line
6 Bytes 4 Bytes
36 Bytes in total
15-7
Chapter 15 Sampling
Data rows
Time Format
(hh:mm:ss)
Date Format
(mm/dd/yyyy)
Integer
(5)
Fraction
(0)
Ends
16 Bytes
2 Bytes
20 Bytes
2 Bytes
10 Bytes
0 Bytes
4 Bytes
Total 54 Bytes
Time Format
(hh:mm)
Date Format
(mm.dd)
Integer
(4)
Fraction
(1)
Ends
10 Bytes
2 Bytes
10 Bytes
2 Bytes
8 Bytes
2 Bytes
4 Bytes
Total 38 Bytes
Time
Format
(N/A)
0 Bytes
Data1
Data2
Date
Format
(N/A)
Integer
(4)
Fraction
(1)
Integer
(3)
Fraction
(2)
Ends
2 Bytes
0 Bytes
2 Bytes
8 Bytes
8 Bytes
6 Bytes
4 Bytes
4 Bytes
Total 34 Bytes
Every data rows data size have to multiplied by sample number N(a).
15-8
Chapter 15 Sampling
The CSV file size is equal to topic rows plus data rows multiplied by sample number.
The formula is as below
(Topic row size Bytes + Data row size Bytes + Data field Bytes) N (a )
= CSV file size MBytes
1024 1024
Sample number
This chapter will introduce all history elements used function; it includes History buffer
setup, Historical Trend Graph, Historical data table, Historical Event table.
Please refer to as below table 15-1-3 History Buffer setup example.
15-9
Chapter 15 Sampling
History
Setup
steps
15-10
Chapter 15 Sampling
Set the address and whether to record the time and date. Set the
non-volatile data location to HMI, USB Disk or SD Card. Set whether
to output to CSV file and set the trigger to Timer or PLC.
15-11
Chapter 15 Sampling
15-12
Step 5: Create the element of historical trend graph and setup its
property, such as time/date display, integer digits and fractional and
whether to use global range. Then, go to details setting range to set
curve 1 as 1 to access the data.
Revision June, 2015
Chapter 15 Sampling
Chapter 15 Sampling
Execution
Results
15-14
Step 7: Create the Remove Storage button and set the Access Type
to USB Disk. This action ensures writing the data to the USB Disk
correctly. If the USB Disk is pulled out without executing the removal
action, the data may be read/written incorrectly leading to corruption
of the saved file.
After the setting of the History and the creation of the Historical Trend
Graph and Remove Storage components are completed, perform the
compilation and download the data to HMI. Since the retained area in
this example is set to USB Disk, H.had and TINA.dat will be
generated and stored in the USB Disk when HMI reads the screen.
The History function will then execute the action in the Screen Cycle
Macro to modify the data, and store on the USB Disk in CSV file
format. To stop the storage, press the Remove button and remove the
external device to ensure the correctness of the data.
Chapter 15 Sampling
The user can insert the USB Disk in the PC to read the CSV file and
make sure that the data and file name are correct. The file name in
this example is TINA. The path to save all CSV files is
HMI\HMI-000\CSV\xxxxxxxx.CSV.
15-15
Chapter 15 Sampling
Step 1: Create the Historical Trend Graph component. Double click this
component and [History Setup] to enter and set the parameter.
Add
Historical
Trend
Graph
Componen
t
15-16
Chapter 15 Sampling
15-17
Chapter 15 Sampling
Step 5: Then configure other settings of the Historical Trend Graph, such as
time/date display, integer and fractional and whether to use the global range.
Also, go to Details Setting to set 1 as activation of curvilineal data capturing.
Since you have already checked to use global range, it is unable to setup
minimum and maximum value for each curve.
15-18
Chapter 15 Sampling
Step 6: Enter [Screen] [Screen Cycle Macro]. Edit the action to modify
the data in the History and store it in the external storage device USB
Disk. Since two Words are read for the Data Type, two data locations are
available for access and, thus, there is a $3766 data address in the
macro in addition to the previously set $3765 address.
Step 7: Create the Remove Storage button and set the Access Type to
USB Disk. This action ensures writing the data to the USB Disk correctly.
If the USB Disk is pulled out without executing the removal action, the
data may be read/written incorrectly leading to corruption of the saved
file.
15-19
Chapter 15 Sampling
Execution
Results
15-20
Chapter 15 Sampling
Press the Remove button and the following message appears to inform
the user that the USB Disk has been removed.
The user can insert the USB Disk in the PC to read the CSV file and
make sure that the data and file name are correct. The file name in this
example is H0001. The path to save all CSV files is
HMI\HMI-000\CSV\filename.CSV.
15-21
Chapter 15 Sampling
15-22
Chapter 15 Sampling
Add
Historical
Data Table
Component
15-23
Chapter 15 Sampling
15-24
Chapter 15 Sampling
Step 4: Enter [Screen] [Screen Cycle Macro]. Edit the action to modify
the data in the History and store it in the external storage device USB
Disk. Since two Words are read for the Data Type and the Column
Counts is 2, the Historical Data Table will display two columns to read the
two data locations.
Step 5: Create the Remove Storage button and set the Access Type to
USB Disk. This action ensures writing the data to the USB Disk correctly.
If the USB Disk is pulled out without executing the removal action, the
data may be read/written incorrectly leading to corruption of the saved
file.
15-25
Chapter 15 Sampling
Press the Remove button and the following message appears to inform
the user that the USB Disk has been removed.
Execution
Results
15-26
Chapter 15 Sampling
15-27
Chapter 15 Sampling
Step 1: Create the Historical Event Table component. Double click this
component and click [History Setup] to create a new data buffer. Set the
Address to 1 and set the Data Type to $1. Then set the Non-volatile
Data Location to HMI.
Add
Historical
Event Table
Component
15-28
Chapter 15 Sampling
Step 3: Enter the [Text] page to edit the text message to be displayed.
15-29
Chapter 15 Sampling
Execution
Results
15-30
Step 4: Enter [Screen] [Screen Cycle Macro]. Edit the action to modify
the data in the History and display the user-customized text message in
Historical Event Table.
Chapter 15 Sampling
15-31
Chapter 15 Sampling
Add the
Historical
Overview
Table
Element
15-32
Chapter 15 Sampling
15-33
Chapter 15 Sampling
Go to [Details] setting page and set Enable column to 1 for setting the start
position of curve 1 and 2 as 0 and 1 respectively. Since the setting of
global range is enabled, it will be unable to set the minimum and maximum
value of each curve.
15-34
Chapter 15 Sampling
15-35
Chapter 15 Sampling
Execution
Result
15-36
Chapter 15 Sampling
15-37
Chapter 15 Sampling
When the set number in the sampling points field is reached or the
saving trigger bit is triggered, the file will be saved to
HMI\HMI-000\History under USB directory according to the file
storage setting of USB. It will create a new file to carry on the
sampling. Users can view the saved file via the Historical overview
table.
15-38
Chapter 15 Sampling
Click on USB Disk on the left and select the file that saved before.
Then, click [View] to see the historical trend graph.
Present all example of Sampling, the History Setup properties are described in detail below.
15-39
Chapter 15 Sampling
Add
[Add] can be used to create additional data buffers. This property supports
up to 12 buffers and the data in these buffers correspond individually to the
Sampling History Flag 1~12 and Clearing History Flag 1~12 in the Control
Block area.
Delete
15-40
Chapter 15 Sampling
Modify
15-41
Chapter 15 Sampling
Address
Data
Type
(Word)
15-42
Chapter 15 Sampling
Date
Date
format
Auto Stop
Hold
Data
Location
File
Name
Output to
CSV File
Data
Type
Format
Permissible Range
15-43
Chapter 15 Sampling
Type
Word
BCD
0~9999
Signed BCD
-999 ~ 9999
Signed Decimal
-32768~32767
Unsigned
Decimal
0~65535
Hex
0~0xFFFF
Char
2 words
Length is 2
Data
Type
DWord
15-44
Format
Permissible Range
BCD
0~99999999
Signed BCD
-9999999 ~ 99999999
Signed Decimal
-2147483648~2147483647
Unsigned
Decimal
0~4294697295
Hex
0~0xFFFFFFFF
Char
4 words
Floating
0~9999999
Chapter 15 Sampling
The user can input the file name to be displayed to the output
CSV file, including the time, date and data names. The sum of
the integer and decimal places can only support 5 digits,
because the length of the data type read is defined as Word.
Field
Name
Time
Name
15-45
Chapter 15 Sampling
Date
Name
Column /
Row
Name
Length
Data Start
15-46
Chapter 15 Sampling
Position
Integer
Set the integer digits and fractional for the format
place
you need.
Fractional
Two sample times are available when Timer is selected as the
trigger source:
Fixed sample time: Min. 100ms; max. 86400000ms.
Trigger
Source
Timer
Dynamic sample time: The user can change the sample time
dynamically using the specified memory address to trigger the
15-47
Chapter 15 Sampling
sampling action.
PLC
The file name is H0001 by default. The user can change the
file name as required. This function supports English and
cipher input with the length up to 8 characters or digits.
If you check Save as Multi, when the setting in the Sampling Points field
is reached or the saving trigger bit is triggered, it will save the current data
and do the sampling again.
The sampling data name is identical to the setting of file name, e.g.
HMI0001.dat. And the filename of Save as Multi will attach the saving date
and time, such as H0001_Date-2015-06-26_Time-12-02-30.dat.
The function of Auto Stop will be invalid when you check Save as Multi.
Click on OK in the property setting of buffer area, the following warning
message will pop up.
Save as Single
Save as
Multi
15-48
Chapter 15 Sampling
When setting the file date, users can determine the display
order by year, month, day or none (not to display).
When setting the file time, users can determine the display
order by hour, minute, second, or none (not to display).
If the settings of file time, date and name are set as below
and the reaching time of the setting in the Sampling Points
File Date
File Time
File Name
Saving
Trigger
15-49
Chapter 15 Sampling
15-50
Chapter 15 Sampling
Description
The State and Language are not available to the Historical Trend Graph.
Sets the buffer number, data format, integer digits and
Data
fractional digits.
Sets the scale setting, min. value/max. value, display
Global Range high value, display low value, high value color, low
value color.
Main
Sets the scale display, mark display, text size, text
Scale Setting color, scale color, main scale number, sub scale
number.
Curve fields, border color, Grid number in Horizontal,
Style
Grid line Color, foreground color, Background Color.
Sets the length of curve, start position, format, integer
Local Scope digits, fractional digits, line width, line color, min. value,
Details
max. value.
Display of
Sets the time display, number of time scale, time
Time/Date
format, date format, display color
Coordinates Sets the X-Y coordinate, width and height of the component.
Table 15-2-2 Historical Trend Graph function page
15-51
Chapter 15 Sampling
Main
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
Function
The buffer number corresponds to the data number in the History
Data Buffer. The History Setup function can add up to 12 history
data and, thus, the buffer number supports up to 12.
Buffer ID
Global
Scope
Data
Length
(Word)
NOTE
15-52
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
should over 2.
Memory
Format
Integer
Digits /
Fractional
Digits
Data Type
Min.
Value/Max.
Value
Word
Format
Permissible
Range
BCD
0~9999
Signed BCD
-999 ~ 9999
Signed Decimal
-32768~32767
DWord
Hex
0~0xFFFF
BCD
0~99999999
Signed BCD
-9999999 ~
99999999
Signed Decimal
-2147483648~2147
483647
0~0xFFFFFFFF
15-53
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Floating
Display
High Value
Display
Low Value
(3)
Type
Curve
Counts
15-54
0~9999999
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
The user can set the border color for the Historical
Trend Graph component.
Border
Color
Grid
Number in
Horizontal
15-55
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
The user can set the color of the gridline within the
Historical Trend Graph. It is
by default.
Backgroun
d Color
Grid line
Color
15-56
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Foreground
Color
15-57
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
(4)
Scale
Setting
Function
Unchecked
Checked
15-58
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Scale Display
No scale
display
Show scale on
left
Show scale on
right
Mark Display
15-59
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Unchecke
d
Checked
Text Size
15-60
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Text Color
Revision June, 2015
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Before change
15-62
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
After change
Scale Color
15-63
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Before change
After change
Main Scale
number
Sub Scale
number
15-64
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Scale Width
NOTE:
The scale width should be smaller than the element
width.
When the element width is dragged to be larger than
the scale width, the scale will not be shown on the
screen.
If the scale width is bigger than the element width,
the scale width will become smaller (the value will
be minus 1) automatically.
If you enter any non-numeric character, the software
will show [Unacceptable Character] on the screen.
15-65
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
15-66
Property
Function
Chapter 15 Sampling
Details
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
Property
(1)
Buffer ID
Function
The buffer number corresponds to the data number in the History
Data Buffer. The History Setup function can add up to 12 history data
and, thus, the buffer number supports up to 12.
15-67
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
(2)
Curve
Setting
Enable
Length
15-68
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
choose 2 as the curve length.
Start
Position
15-69
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Format
NOTE
15-70
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Word, one prompt message will pop and ask the users to
set it to 2 Words at least.
Integer
Digits /
Fractional
Line
Color
Line
Width
15-71
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Choose Global Range, it will be unable to setup the
curvilinear min. and max. value. However, if not choose
Global Range, the curvilinear min. and max. value will be
able to setup.
The permissible range of min. and max. value is based
on the selected data type and format.
Data Type
Min. /
Max.
Value
Word
Format
Permissible
Range
BCD
0~9999
Signed BCD
-999 ~ 9999
Signed Decimal
-32768~32767
DWord
Hex
0~0xFFFF
BCD
0~99999999
Signed BCD
-9999999 ~
99999999
Signed Decimal
-2147483648~2147
483647
(3)
15-72
Time /
Date
Hex
0~0xFFFFFFFF
Floating
0~9999999
Display
Time /
Date
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
It supports the following two formats:
Time
Format
Date
Format
default color is
Color
15-73
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
The user can set the line color as desired.
Line
Color
15-74
Chapter 15 Sampling
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
X-value and
Y-value
(2)
Width and
Height
Function
15-75
Chapter 15 Sampling
15-76
Chapter 15 Sampling
Description
The State and Language are not available to the Historical Data Table.
Sets the border color, Background Color, Data Field number, draw
Main
vertical line, draw horizontal line and grid line color.
Sets Buffer ID.
Sets time / date display.
Details
Sets length, start position, value format, integer digits, fractional digits,
color, field width and leading zero.
Text
Sets the text size of the value data to be displayed.
Coordinates Sets the X-Y coordinate, width and height of the component.
Figure 15-3-2 Historical Data Table function page
15-77
Chapter 15 Sampling
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
15-78
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
(1)
Border
Color
(2)
Background
Color
Function
The user can set the border color for the Historical Data Table.
The user can set the Background Color for the component.
15-79
Chapter 15 Sampling
(3)
15-80
Column
Counts
Chapter 15 Sampling
(4)
Show
vertical
separator
line
15-81
Chapter 15 Sampling
(5)
Show
horizontal
separator
line
(6)
Grid color
15-82
Users can define the displayed grid color. The default color is
black.
Chapter 15 Sampling
15-83
Chapter 15 Sampling
Details
(1)
(2)
(4)
(3)
No.
Property
(1)
Buffer ID
(2)
Item
Setting
15-84
Function
The buffer number corresponds to the data number in the History
Data Buffer. The History Setup function can add up to 12 history data
and, thus, the buffer number supports up to 12.
Length
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
15-85
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Start
Position
15-86
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Format
Data
Type
Word
Format
Permissible Range
BCD
0~9999
Signed BCD
-999 ~ 9999
Signed Decimal
-32768~32767
Unsigned
0~65535
15-87
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Decimal
Hex
0~0xFFFF
Char
2 words
Length is 2
Data
Type
DWord
Format
Permissible Range
BCD
0~99999999
Signed BCD
-9999999 ~
99999999
Signed Decimal
-2147483648~2147
483647
Unsigned
Decimal
0~4294697295
Hex
0~0xFFFFFFFF
Char
4 words
Floating
0~9999999
NOTE:
If Floating is selected as the data format, select an even
number from Data Location.
If Floating is selected as the data format and 1 Word is
set as the length of the data type, the software will
remind the user to set to at least 2-word
length.
Integer
digits/F
raction
al digits
Color
15-88
The user can set the digits of the integer and decimal
places to be displayed.
When it is set to global scope, this function is invalid.
The user can set the line color as desired.
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Colum
Width
Leading
Zero
Title
15-89
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Time
Format
(3)
Time /
Date
Date
Format
15-90
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Set the background color of the title bar.
Backgrou
nd Color
Text
Color
(4)
Show
Title
Time
Date
15-91
Chapter 15 Sampling
Text
(1)
No.
Property
Function
(1)
15-92
Text
Chapter 15 Sampling
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
X-value and
Y-value
(2)
Width and
Height
Function
15-93
Chapter 15 Sampling
15-94
Chapter 15 Sampling
Data
Type
State Counts
Memory Address
If data type is Word, Word is the data
type of memory address.
Word
If the data type is LSB, the data in If the data type is LSB or LSB (Support
the register are first converted into State 0), Word is the data type of
binary data. Next, the present object memory address.
state is determined according to the
element with the lowest non-zero bit.
If the data type is LSB, users can
select 1-16 states, except State 0.
The examples in the following table show how state value is determined with the
lowest non-zero bit after converting from a decimal value into a binary value.
There are also examples demonstrating how the DOPSoft determines the state
Numeric Displayed with the lowest bit when the decimal values are 3 and 7.
Decimal
Revision June, 2015
Binary
State Value
15-95
Chapter 15 Sampling
15-96
0000000000000000
0000000000000001
0000000000000010
0000000000000011
0000000000000100
0000000000000111
0000000000001000
16
0000000000010000
32
0000000000100000
64
0000000001000000
128
0000000010000000
256
0000000100000000
512
0000001000000000
1024
0000010000000000
2048
0000100000000000
4096
0001000000000000
8192
0010000000000000
16384
0100000000000000
32768
1000000000000000
Chapter 15 Sampling
Double click the Historical Event Table icon and the following property setting screen
appears
Description
Preview
The State and Language are available to the Historical Event Table.
Main
Text
Coordinates Sets the X-Y coordinate, width and height of the component.
Table 15-4-3 Historical Event Table function page
15-97
Chapter 15 Sampling
General
(8)
(1)
(2)
(9)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
No.
Property
(1)
Data Type
(2)
Data
Format
15-98
Function
The Data Type supports three formats: Word, LSB and LSB
(Support State 0).
The Data Format can be selected only when the data type is
Word.
The Data Format supports BCD, Signed Decimal, Unsigned
Decimal, and Hexadecimal formats.
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
(3)
State
Counts
(4)
Buffer
Number
(5)
Set the state counts for the Historical Event Table. The state
counts can be set between 1 and 256 with Word as the data type,
16 states can be set with LSB as the data type, and 17 states can
be set with LSB Support State 0 as the data type. Refer to 15-4-2
for more information.
The buffer number corresponds to the data number in the History
Data Buffer. The History Setup function can add up to 12 history
data and, thus, the buffer number supports up to 12.
Data No.
The data location indicates the length of the data type to be read
from the History Data Buffer. The Data No. is 0 when the data
length is 1; the Data No. is 0 or 1 when the data length is 2. When
30 Words are read, the Data No. is 0~29.
15-99
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
The Show Color option is used to change the display color of the
time and date. The color is
by default.
Time
Format
(6)
Date
Format
(7)
15-100
Show Color
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
(8)
(9)
Property
Function
The user can set the border color for the Historical Event Table.
Background
Color
The user can set the Background Color for the Historical Event
Table.
Border
Color
15-101
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
15-102
Property
Function
Chapter 15 Sampling
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
(1)
Property
Text
Function
Users can input the text to be displayed in the text box.
15-103
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
(2)
Text
Properties
(3)
Multilingual
Text Data
15-104
Sets text properties, including font type, font size, font color,
scaling, text alignment, and bold/italic/underline of font. Please
refer to the above figure for details about the results of text
properties.
Users can add multilingual text data from the Multi-Language
Text Page. As shown in the Text Properties Figure, users can
input English text in the English field.
Chapter 15 Sampling
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
X-value and
Y-value
(2)
Width and
Height
Function
15-105
Chapter 15 Sampling
15-106
Chapter 15 Sampling
Descriptions
The Historical overview table allows users to view the information of
multi-state and in multi-language.
Buffer ID
Global range
Scale setting
Style
Main
Text
It sets the displayed text / font / size / color / format / scaling / alignment
type.
Local range
Display of
time/date
Function
button
Details
Function
Button
Button style
15-107
Chapter 15 Sampling
Main
(1)
(2)
(4)
(3)
No.
Property
Function
(1)
(2)
15-108
Buffer ID
Global
Range
Data
Length
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
NOTE:
If you select 2 as the data length, the data type should
be set to 2 or above.
Data
format
Integer
digits
/Fractional
Data Type
Min. value
/ Max.
value
Word
Data Format
Valid setting
range
CD
0~9999
Signed BCD
-999 ~ 9999
Signed Decimal
-32768~32767
DWord
Hex
0~0xFFFF
BCD
0~99999999
Signed BCD
-9999999 ~
99999999
15-109
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Signed Decimal
-
147483648~2147
483647
(3)
Floating
0~9999999
Set Scale
15-110
0~0xFFFFFFFF
Display
High Value
Display
Low Value
Hex
You have to check Global range first before you set up the scale.
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Uncheck
Check
Display
Scale
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Not Display
Display on left
side
Display on right
side
Uncheck
Display
Mark
Check
Text Size
15-112
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
will be shown.
15-113
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Text Color
15-114
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Before
After
Scale color
15-115
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Before
15-116
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
After
Main Scale
Number
Sub-scale
Number
15-117
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Scale Width
15-118
NOTE:
The scale width should be smaller than the element
width.
When the element width is dragged to be larger than
the scale width, the scale will not be shown on the
screen.
If the scale width is bigger than the element width, the
scale width will become smaller (the value will be
minus 1) automatically.
If you enter any non-numeric character, a message
showing [Unacceptable Character] will pop up.
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
(4)
Property
Style
Function
Curve Field
15-119
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Background
Color of
Tree View
Grid
Number in
Horizontal
Direction
15-120
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Background
color of view
15-121
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Grid line
color
15-122
Chapter 15 Sampling
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
Property
(1)
Text
Function
15-123
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
(2)
Property
related
setting
(3)
15-124
Function
Edit the
text in
multiple
languages
The property setting includes text font, size, color, scale and
alignment. Users can determine if the text should be bold, italic or
underlined. Please refer to the above figure for text property
setting.
When adding the text in multiple languages, users can go to this
page to edit the text. See the figure above, users can enter the text
in English field.
Chapter 15 Sampling
Details
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
Property
Function
(1)
Buffer ID
15-125
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Activate
(2)
Curve
Setting
Data
length
15-126
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
range.
Data start
position
Format
15-127
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
NOTE:
When you select Floating as the data format, please
select 2 as the Length.
When you select Floating as the data format and select 1
as the Length, a prompt message will pop up and
reminds the users that it requires 2 as the Length.
Integer
digits
/Fraction
al
Line color
15-128
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Line
width
Min.
value /
Max.
value
Data Type
Word
Data Format
Valid Setting
Range
BCD
0~9999
Signed BCD
-999 ~ 9999
Signed Decimal
-32768~32767
Hex
0~0xFFFF
BCD
0~99999999
15-129
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Signed BCD
-9999999 ~
99999999
Signed Decimal
-2147483648~2147
483647
0~0xFFFFFFFF
Floating
0~9999999
Display
Timeline
(3)
Display
Time /
Date
Time /
Date
Format
15-130
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Displayed
Color
Function Button
(1)
(2)
(3)
15-131
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
After
Up
(1)
File
Browser
Function
Buttons
After
Down
After
Page Up
Page
15-132
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Down
After
View
NOTE:
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Before
Previous
After
(2)
Trend
Graph
Function
Buttons
Forward
15-134
Chapter 15 Sampling
Property
Function
After
Before
No.
Before
After
Page
Prev.
15-135
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
Press the [Page Fwd.] button, the scrollbar of trend graph
will move to the next page.
Before
After
Page
Fwd.
Expand
Switch
(3)
15-136
Button
Width
Chapter 15 Sampling
No.
Property
Function
The button
width is 60.
The button
width is 100.
If the button width exceeds the element width, then it will not be able to
show the complete button.
Button
Height
The button
height is
100.
15-137
Chapter 15 Sampling
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
X- and
Y-value
(2)
Width and
Height
15-138
Function
Chapter 16 Alarm
Contents
16-1
16-2
16-3
16-4
16-5
16-1
Chapter 16 Alarm
Chapter 16 Alarm
This chapter describes the alarm elements that the DOPSoft software provides and how to
operate Alarm Setup.
Alarm
Alarm
Style
Time
Show Display Time
(Background
Read
Write
Format/ Alarm Alarm
for
Interval/
Color/ Style/
Address Address
Date Number Release Count Moving
Border
Format
Items
0
Points
Color)
(Only
Background
Color)
(Only
Background
Color)
Alarm
Frequency
Table
(Only
Background
Color)
Alarm
Moving
Sign
History
Alarm
Table
Active
Alarm List
16-2
Chapter 16 Alarm
Time/date data
Alarm data
Sampling points
Alarm records
16-3
Chapter 16 Alarm
Step 2: Set the Read Address to $1600, Sample Time to 0.5 second and
max. records to 100. Select HMI as the Retained Area, activate the Alarm
Moving Sign and edit the alarm message content to be displayed. After
the settings are completed, click OK to leave the Alarm Setup. Refer to
the figure below.
Alarm
Setup
Steps
16-4
Chapter 16 Alarm
Create
Maintaine
d Button
Elements
Step 2: Edit the State 0/State 1 text of each maintained button to Alarm 1 ~
Alarm 5. Set the foreground color of State 1 to red indicate the ON state.
Stat
e0
Stat
e1
16-5
Chapter 16 Alarm
After creation of all elements, perform the compilation and download them
to HMI. When you activate the maintained buttons of Alarm 1 ~ Alarm 5,
the message of the Alarm Moving Sign will display on the top of the HMI
screen. It disappears when you deactivate the alarm.
Alarm ON
Execution
Results
Alarm
OFF
16-6
Chapter 16 Alarm
Alarm Setup
You can select the internal memory or controller register address. The
constraint is? When Bit is selected for the Read Address.
For selection of the connection name or style, refer to 5-1 Button of Chapter
05.
NOTE:
Read
Address
16-7
Chapter 16 Alarm
When the records are accumulated to the number as shown in the Max.
Records, the recording will start from the first data again and override the
previous data.
The Max. Records function supports up to 9999 records.
Scan Time
(second)
NOTE:
The max. records cannot be 0.
If you set the Max. Records as 0, a warning message will pop up which shown
as below.
Max.
Records
16-8
Chapter 16 Alarm
Hold
CSV Format
16-9
Chapter 16 Alarm
This function is set with the program of screen saver. The default setting is set
to activate.
Assume the user enables screen saver program and setup the screen of
screen saver. If the alarm occurs, HMI will not be in screen saver mode.
However, even when the user does not setup the screen for screen saver, HMI
will not be in Blue Led mode.
Disable the function of Exit Screen Saver when Alarm is Triggered. When
the alarm occurs for the first time, the system exits screen saver. After that, the
system enters screen saver program according to the setting time no matter
the alarm is cleared or not.
Example
Exit Screen
Saver when
Alarm is
triggered
Alarm Setup
16-10
Chapter 16 Alarm
Enable
Yes and No are selectable for the Start. If Yes is selected, the message of the
triggered alarm will be displayed at the specified location on the screen. If No is
selected, no alarm message will be displayed.
16-11
Chapter 16 Alarm
Top and Bottom are available to the Position. If Top is selected, the message of
the triggered alarm will be displayed at the top of the HMI screen. If Bottom is
selected, the message of the alarm will be displayed at the bottom of the HMI
screen.
Position
Top
16-12
Chapter 16 Alarm
Bottom
Direction
Left
Right
Up
Down
Moving
Points
The higher the moving points, the more the distance to which the text moves.
The setting range is 1~50 with Pixel as the unit.
16-13
Chapter 16 Alarm
The Interval defines the time (ms) between two message movements of the
Alarm Moving Sign. The moving distance is set up based on the setting of the
Moving Points.
This option provides the Background Color for the display of the Alarm Moving
Sign. Refer to the figure below.
Interval (ms)
Background
Color
16-14
This function determines if LED will glitter when the alarm is triggered.
In default setting, LED glitters when the alarm is triggered. Users can cancel
this function.
Chapter 16 Alarm
The user can define the alarm message content to be displayed in the
Message Content column.
The user may modify the message content directly in the column or click the
Number
Message
Content
16-15
Chapter 16 Alarm
Modify button.
NOTE:
If creating alarm elements with read addresses but not filling in the message
content, a warning message will pop up when compiling the screen. Please
see the figure below.
Text Color
The Text Color column defines the display color of the alarm message. It is
black by default.
ON and OFF are available for the Property.
When ON is selected, the Bit is On and the alarm is triggered. When OFF is
selected, the Bit is OFF and the alarm is triggered.
Property
This column defines whether any specified screen will be displayed upon
trigger of the alarm. If other screens are created, the user can show the screen
as desired by selecting the corresponding screen number from the dropdown
menu.
Go to
Screen
16-16
Chapter 16 Alarm
The Mail Information function can send an email to relevant personnel when an
alarm is triggered. It must be used in conjunction with the [Options] [Set
Configurations] [Network App] [SMTP] function.
When enabling the SMTP function, the user can enter mail messages in this
mail information column.
Mail
Information
To:
Cc:
Bcc:
Subject:
Revision June, 2015
Chapter 16 Alarm
This defines the size of the text for the alarm message to be displayed.
This defines the size of the window for the alarm message to be displayed. A
scale of 100% is set by default.
Size
Zooming
100%
16-18
Chapter 16 Alarm
150%
After the alarm message content is created, the user can select a message to
be deleted and click the Delete button to delete the selected message.
NOTE:
The user can enter a message in a blank field of the Message Content and
move the cursor to the next field for entering an additional message. If the user
deletes the first message using the Delete or Backspace key on the keyboard
instead of the Delete button on the screen, the blank alarm will be displayed at
the specified position when the user leaves the alarm setup screen and
download the screen to the HMI to trigger the alarm.
Delete
Modify
Press the Modify button to change the message content, text color and Goto
screen.
16-19
Chapter 16 Alarm
The user can also change the message, text color and Goto screen directly in
the corresponding field.
The user can press the Import button to import alarm information. It
supports .xls, .xlsx, .alm and .ini file formats.
Import
Export
16-20
The user can press the Export button to export edited alarm message. It
supports .xls and .xlsx file formats.
Chapter 16 Alarm
OK
Apart from the alarm setting, users also can set up the alarm mail content via
alarm parameters. Please see the figure below.
Press the OK button to leave the Alarm Setup window. This button functions
same as pressing the X mark at the upper right corner of the window. Where
any change is made, pressing OK or the X mark will save the change and
leave the window.
16-21
Chapter 16 Alarm
This example is described with reference to the alarm parameters in Table 16-1-3 Alarm
Setup Example.
16-22
Chapter 16 Alarm
Add
History
Alarm
Table
Element
16-23
Chapter 16 Alarm
After creation of the History Alarm Table element, perform the compilation
and download the element to HIMI, when Alarm 1 is triggered, the History
Alarm Table element will show the time and date of the alarm, its number,
trigger and release states.
Alarm
ON
Execution
Results
Alarm
OFF
Double click the History Alarm Table icon and the following property setting screen appears.
16-24
Chapter 16 Alarm
Content Description
Preview
The State and Language are not available to the History Alarm
Table.
Main
Sets the Background Color, time format, draw horizontal line, draw
vertical line, date format, display color, alarm number, Display for
unlock alarm item.
Coordinates
16-25
Chapter 16 Alarm
Main
(1)
(2)
(6)
(3)
(7)
(4)
(8)
(5)
(9)
No.
Property
(1)
16-26
Function
The following two time formats are supported:
Time
Format
Chapter 16 Alarm
No.
Property
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Function
The following seven date formats are supported:
Date
Format
The Display Color option is used to change the display color of the
time and date. The color is
by default.
Display
Color
Alarm
Number
Display for
unlock
alarm item
When this option is checked, the History Alarm Table will show the
alarm trigger and release state and information.
When this option is unchecked, the History Alarm Table will only
show the alarm trigger state and information.
16-27
Chapter 16 Alarm
No.
Property
(6)
Backgroun
d Color
(7)
Show the
vertical
separator
line
16-28
Function
The user can set the Background Color for the element.
Chapter 16 Alarm
No.
Property
Function
(8)
Show the
horizontal
rule
(9)
Users can define the grid color. The default color is black.
Grid color
16-29
Chapter 16 Alarm
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
X value, Y value
(2)
Width, Height
16-30
Function
Chapter 16 Alarm
This example is described with reference to the alarm parameters in Table 16-1-3 Alarm
Setup Example.
16-31
Chapter 16 Alarm
Step 2: Check [Time Format] and [Date Format] . These options are used
to display the time and date of the alarm. The Alarm Number is checked
by default.
Add
Active
Alarm List
Element
16-32
Chapter 16 Alarm
After creation of the Active Alarm List element, perform the compilation
and download the element to HMI. When Alarm 1 and Alarm 2 are
triggered, the Active Alarm List shows the time, date and numbering of the
alarms that occur currently. No items will be displayed on the Active Alarm
List when the alarms are released.
Alarm
ON
Execution
Results
Alarm
OFF
16-33
Chapter 16 Alarm
Double click the Active Alarm List icon and the following property setting screen appears.
Main
Coordinates
Content Description
The State and Language are not available to the Active Alarm
List.
Sets the Background Color, draw vertical line, draw horizontal
line, time format, Date format, Display color, Grid Line color,
Alarm number.
Sets the X-Y coordinates, width and height of the element.
Table 16-3-2 Active Alarm List function page
16-34
Chapter 16 Alarm
Main
(1)
(2)
(5)
(3)
(6)
(4)
(7)
(8)
No.
Property
Function
(1)
Time
Format
16-35
Chapter 16 Alarm
No.
(2)
Property
Function
The Display Color option is used to change the display color of the
Date
Format
(3)
Display
Color
(4)
16-36
by default.
Alarm
Number
Chapter 16 Alarm
No.
(5)
Property
Function
The user can set the Background Color for the element.
Backgroun
d Color
(6)
Show the
vertical
separator
line
(7)
Show the
horizontal
rule
16-37
Chapter 16 Alarm
No.
Property
Function
(8)
16-38
Users can define the grid color. The default color is black.
Grid color
Chapter 16 Alarm
Coordinates
No.
Property
(1)
X Value, Y Value
(2)
Width, Height
Function
16-39
Chapter 16 Alarm
This example is described with reference to the alarm parameters in Table 16-1-3
Alarm Setup Example.
16-40
Chapter 16 Alarm
Add Alarm
Frequency
Table
Element
16-41
Chapter 16 Alarm
Alarm
ON
Execution
Results
Alarm
OFF
16-42
Chapter 16 Alarm
Double click the Alarm Frequency Table icon and the following property setting screen
appears.
Main
Coordinates
Content Description
The State and Language are not available to the Alarm Frequency
Table.
Sets the Background Color, draw vertical line, draw horizontal line,
time format, date format, display color, alarm number, Display For
Counting Zero.
Sets the X-Y coordinates, width and height of the element.
Table 16-4-2 Alarm Frequency Table function page
16-43
Chapter 16 Alarm
Main
(1)
(2)
(6)
(3)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(4)
(5)
No.
Property
Function
(1)
16-44
Time
Format
Chapter 16 Alarm
No.
(2)
Property
Function
The Display Color option is used to change the display color of the
Date
Format
(3)
Display
Color
(4)
by default.
Alarm
Number
16-45
Chapter 16 Alarm
No.
Property
Function
Checked
(5)
Display for
Counting
Zero
Unchecked
(6)
16-46
Background
Color
The user can set the Background Color for the element.
Chapter 16 Alarm
No.
Property
Function
(7)
Show the
vertical
separator
line
(8)
Show the
horizontal
rule
16-47
Chapter 16 Alarm
No.
Property
Function
(9)
16-48
Users can define the grid color. The default color is black.
Grid color
Chapter 16 Alarm
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
X value, Y value
(2)
Width, Height
Function
16-49
Chapter 16 Alarm
This example is described with reference to the alarm parameters in Table 16-1-3
Alarm Setup Example.
16-50
Chapter 16 Alarm
Add
Alarm
Moving
Sign
Element
16-51
Chapter 16 Alarm
Execution
results
16-52
Chapter 16 Alarm
Alarm
ON
Alarm
OFF
16-53
Chapter 16 Alarm
Double click the Alarm Moving Sign icon and the following property setting screen appears.
Content Description
Preview
The State and Language are not available to the Alarm Moving Sign.
Main
Coordinates
16-54
Chapter 16 Alarm
Main
(1)
(8)
(2)
(9)
(3)
(4)
(10)
(5)
(6)
(7)
No.
Property
(1)
Function
Direction includes Left, Right, Up and Down.
Direction
Left
16-55
Chapter 16 Alarm
No.
Property
Function
Right
Up
Down
(2)
Interval
Time (ms)
(3)
Moving
Points
(4)
16-56
The higher the moving points, the more the distance to which the
text moves. The setting range is 1~50 with Pixel as the unit.
Time
Format
Chapter 16 Alarm
No.
Property
(5)
(6)
(7)
Function
The following seven date formats are supported:
Date
Format
The Display Color option is used to change the display color of the
time and date. The color is
by default.
The user can set the border color for the element.
Display
Color
Alarm
Number
(8)
Style
(9)
Border
16-57
Chapter 16 Alarm
No.
(10)
16-58
Property
Color
Function
When Transparent is selected as the style, the setting of the
border color is disabled.
The user can set the Background Color for the element.
Background
Color
Chapter 16 Alarm
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
X Value, Y Value
(2)
Width, Height
Function
16-59
Chapter 17 Keypad
Contents
17-1 Keypad (1)................................................................................................................. 3
17-2 Keypad (2)............................................................................................................... 14
17-3 Keypad (3)............................................................................................................... 24
17-1
Chapter 17 Keypad
Chapter 17 Keypad
This chapter describes the setting of the keypad elements that the DOPSoft software
provides. These three keypad elements are used in conjunction with the numerical element,
alphanumeric element and barcode element. For the numeric and alphanumeric entries,
the property of Active Non-Bounce or Touch Non-Bounce must be selected for Start Input,
while the property for Active Non-Bounce must be selected for Start Input in case of the
barcode entry. The interlock addresses of these three elements must be set up
simultaneously, and no interlock address is needed when Touch Non-Bounce is selected for
the Start Input. Refer to CH13 Input for more information.
Keypad
Keypad (2)
Keypad (3)
Table 17-1-1 Classification of keypad elements
Keypad
Style
(Foreground Color/
Style)
Display
Mode
(ESC/ ENT/ CLR/ DEL/ ASCII/
CHARACTER)
Keypad (1)
Keypad (2)
Keypad (3)
17-2
Chapter 17 Keypad
Grouped
17-3
Chapter 17 Keypad
Not
Grouped
Double click the Keypad (1) icon and the following property setting screen appears.
17-4
Chapter 17 Keypad
Keypad (1)
Function Page
Preview
Content Description
The State is not available to Keypad (1), but the user can edit
multi-language data.
Main
Text
Sets the content, font, font size, font color, font effects, scaling, and
alignment of the text to be displayed.
Picture
17-5
Chapter 17 Keypad
Main
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
Display
(2)
Mode
17-6
Function
When the user click a block on Keypad (1), the value of that block
will be displayed.
Chapter 17 Keypad
No.
Property
Function
[Right], [Up], [Down] and [ASCII] for users to define.
[ESC] means to cancel the text entry; if the keypad element is
placed on subscreen, the subscreen will be closed when you
press ESC.
[ENT] means to enter.
[CLR] means to clear the whole string.
[DEL] means to delete one character.
[BKSP] means to delete one character (backspace).
[Home] means the cursor will move to the beginning of the
row.
[End] means the cursor will move to the end of the row.
[Insert] is the toggle key of inserting and replacing characters.
[Page Up] means to go to the previous page.
[Page Down] means to go to the next page.
[Left] means the cursor will move to the left.
[Right] means the cursor will move to the right.
[Up] means the cursor will move to the previous row.
[Down] means the cursor will move to the next row.
[ASCII] means users can enter the specified character code.
The Style option provides Standard and Raised for selection. This
setting allows the user to change the appearance of the element.
Standard
(3)
Style
(4)
Raised
Foreground
Color
17-7
Chapter 17 Keypad
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
Property
(1)
Text
17-8
Function
Users can input the text to be displayed in the text box.
For any element that can be used to enter texts, the user needs
only to click the element on the screen and press the spacebar
on the keypad to edit the text. This is very convenient for the
user to enter texts.
Revision June, 2015
Chapter 17 Keypad
No.
Property
(2)
Text
Properties
(3)
Multi-Languag
e Text Data
Function
Sets text properties, including font type, font size, font color,
scaling, text alignment, and bold/italic/underline of font. Please
refer to the above figure for details about the results of text
properties.
Users can add Multi-Language text data from the
Multi-Language Text Page. As shown in the Text Properties
Figure, users can input English text in the English field.
17-9
Chapter 17 Keypad
Picture
(1)
(2)
(3)
17-10
Chapter 17 Keypad
No.
Property
(1)
Function
The default value for Picture Bank Name is None. Users wishing
to select a display picture can select the desired picture in the
built-in picture bank from the pull-down menu.
Picture
Bank Name
17-11
Chapter 17 Keypad
No.
Property
Function
Users can align pictures alignment with the alignment options.
Alignment
Stretch modes include: Fill, Keep Aspect Ratio, and Actual Size
Fill
Keep Aspect Ratio
Actual Size
In the Keep Aspect
Ratio mode, the In the Actual Size
In the Fill mode, the
selected picture will mode, the picture will
selected picture will
fit in the display area be displayed in its
fill up the entire
proportionally
original size in the
display area.
according to
the display area.
picture ratio.
(2)
Stretch
Mode
(3)
17-12
Transparent
Color
Chapter 17 Keypad
No.
Property
Function
17-13
Chapter 17 Keypad
Grouped
17-14
Chapter 17 Keypad
Not
Grouped
Double click the Keypad (2) icon and the following property setting screen appears.
17-15
Chapter 17 Keypad
Keypad (2)
Function Page
Preview
Main
Text
Picture
Content Description
The State is not available to Keypad (2), but the user can edit
multi-language data.
Sets the style. Foreground color, Display, Mode.
Sets the content, font, font size, font color, font effects, scaling,
and alignment of the text to be displayed.
Sets Picture Bank Name, Alignment, Picture Stretch Mode, and
Transparent Color.
Table 17-2-3 Keypad (2) function page
17-16
Chapter 17 Keypad
Main
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
Display
(2)
Function
When the user click a block on Keypad (2), the value of that block
will be displayed.
Mode
Chapter 17 Keypad
No.
Property
(3)
Style
(4)
17-18
Function
[ESC] means to cancel the text entry; if the keypad element is
placed on subscreen, the subscreen will be closed when you
press ESC.
[ENT] means to enter.
[CLR] means to clear the whole string.
[DEL] means to delete one character.
[BKSP] means to delete one character (backspace).
[Home] means the cursor will move to the beginning of the
row.
[End] means the cursor will move to the end of the row.
[Insert] is the toggle key of inserting and replacing characters.
[Page Up] means to go to the previous page.
[Page Down] means to go to the next page.
[Left] means the cursor will move to the left.
[Right] means the cursor will move to the right.
[Up] means the cursor will move to the previous row.
[Down] means the cursor will move to the next row.
[ASCII] means users can enter the specified character code.
The Style option provides Standard and Raised for selection. This
setting allows the user to change the appearance of the element.
Standard
Raised
Foreground
Color
Chapter 17 Keypad
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
Property
(1)
Function
Users can input the text to be displayed in the text box.
Text
For any element that can be used to enter texts, the user needs
only to click the element on the screen and press the spacebar
on the keypad to edit the text. This is very convenient for the
user to enter texts.
17-19
Chapter 17 Keypad
No.
Property
(2)
Text Properties
(3)
Multi-Language
Text Data
17-20
Function
Sets text properties, including font type, font size, font color,
scaling, text alignment, and bold/italic/underline of font. Please
refer to the above figure for details about the results of text
properties.
Users can add Multi-Language text data from the
Multi-Language Text Page. As shown in the Text Properties
Figure, users can input English text in the English field.
Chapter 17 Keypad
Picture
(1)
(2)
(3)
17-21
Chapter 17 Keypad
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
17-22
Function
The default value for Picture Bank Name is None. Users wishing
to select a display picture can select the desired picture in the
built-in picture bank from the pull-down menu.
Picture
Bank Name
Stretch modes include: Fill, Keep Aspect Ratio, and Actual Size
Fill
Keep Aspect Ratio
Actual Size
Alignment
Chapter 17 Keypad
No.
Property
Function
In the Keep Aspect
Ratio mode, the
In the Fill mode, the
selected picture will
selected picture will
fit in the display area
fill up the entire
proportionally
display area.
according to
the
picture ratio.
Stretch
Mode
(3)
Transparent
Color
17-23
Chapter 17 Keypad
Grouped
Not
Grouped
17-24
Chapter 17 Keypad
Double click the Keypad (3) icon and the following property setting screen appears.
Keypad (3)
Function Page
Preview
Main
Text
Picture
Content Description
The State is not available to Keypad (1), but the user can edit
multi-language data.
Sets the style. Foreground color, Display, Mode.
Sets the content, font, font size, font color, font effects, scaling, and
alignment of the text to be displayed.
Sets Picture Bank Name, Alignment, Picture Stretch Mode, and
Transparent Color.
Table 17-3-3 Keypad (3) function page
17-25
Chapter 17 Keypad
Main
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
Display
(2)
17-26
Function
When the user click a block on Keypad (3), the value of that block
will be displayed.
Mode
Chapter 17 Keypad
No.
Property
(3)
Style
(4)
Function
placed on subscreen, the subscreen will be closed when you
press ESC.
[ENT] means to enter.
[CLR] means to clear the whole string.
[DEL] means to delete one character.
[BKSP] means to delete one character (backspace).
[Home] means the cursor will move to the beginning of the
row.
[End] means the cursor will move to the end of the row.
[Insert] is the toggle key of inserting and replacing characters.
[Page Up] means to go to the previous page.
[Page Down] means to go to the next page.
[Left] means the cursor will move to the left.
[Right] means the cursor will move to the right.
[Up] means the cursor will move to the previous row.
[Down] means the cursor will move to the next row.
[ASCII] means users can enter the specified character code.
The Style option provides Standard and Raised for selection. This
setting allows the user to change the appearance of the element.
Standard
Raised
Foreground
Color
17-27
Chapter 17 Keypad
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
(1)
17-28
Property
Function
Users can input the text to be displayed in the text box.
For any element that can be used to enter texts, the user needs
Text
Chapter 17 Keypad
No.
Property
(2)
Text
Properties
(3)
Multi-Languag
e Text Data
Function
only to click the element on the screen and press the spacebar
on the keypad to edit the text. This is very convenient for the
user to enter texts.
Sets text properties, including font type, font size, font color,
scaling, text alignment, and bold/italic/underline of font. Please
refer to the above figure for details about the results of text
properties.
Users can add Multi-Language text data from the
Multi-Language Text Page. As shown in the Text Properties
Figure, users can input English text in the English field.
17-29
Chapter 17 Keypad
Picture
(1)
(2)
(3)
17-30
Chapter 17 Keypad
No.
Property
(1)
Function
The default value for Picture Bank Name is None. Users wishing
to select a display picture can select the desired picture in the
built-in picture bank from the pull-down menu.
Picture
Bank
Name
17-31
Chapter 17 Keypad
No.
Property
Function
Users can align pictures alignment with the alignment options.
Alignment
(2)
Stretch modes include: Fill, Keep Aspect Ratio, and Actual Size
Fill
Keep Aspect Ratio
Actual Size
In the Keep Aspect
Ratio mode, the In the Actual Size
In the Fill mode,
selected picture will mode, the picture
the selected picture
fit in the display will be displayed in
will fill up the entire
area proportionally its original size in
display area.
according to the the display area.
picture ratio.
Stretch
Mode
(3)
17-32
Transpare
nt Color
Chapter 17 Keypad
No.
Property
Function
17-33
Chapter 18 Analog
Contents
18-1
Slider ..................................................................................................................... 3
18-1
Chapter 18 Analog
Chapter 18 Analog
This chapter describes the settings of the analog elements that the DOPSoft software
provides.
Analog
Slider
Table 18-1-1 Classification of analog elements
Analog
Read Address
Write Address
Slider
Style
(Foreground
Slide Bar
Min.
Color/
Direction/Start Width/Slide
Data Data
Value/Max.
Foreground
Point
Button
Type Format
Value
Color/ Border
Length
Color)
18-2
Chapter 18 Analog
18-1 Slider
The Slider is used for easy drag and value adjustment.
Refer to the Slider example in Table 18-1-3.
18-3
Chapter 18 Analog
Slider Example
Table 18-1-3 Slider Example
Step 1: Create the Slider and set the Write Address to $1357. The min.
and max. values are set to 0~100.
Step 1: Create the data display element and set the Read Address to
$1357. Also set the increment/decrement value and upper/lower limit for
the element.
Create
Slider
Read Address
Create
Increment
and
Decrement
Button
Elements
Data
Display
Element
Setup
18-4
Chapter 18 Analog
Slider Example
Table 18-1-3 Slider Example
Execution
Results
18-5
Chapter 18 Analog
Double click the Slider icon and the following property setting screen appears.
Slider
Function Page
Content Description
Preview
The State is not available for Slider, but the user can edit
multi-language data.
Main
Text
Sets the content, font, font size, font color, font effects, scaling,
and alignment of the text to be displayed.
Picture
Coordinates
18-6
Chapter 18 Analog
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(12)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
No.
(1)
Property
Write
Address
Read
Address
Write Offset
Address
Read Offset
Address
Function
The user can select the internal memory or controller register
address. Only Word can be entered as the memory type.
Selects link name or style. Please refer to 5-1Buttons of Chapter 05
for details.
18-7
Chapter 18 Analog
No.
Property
(2)
(3)
(4)
Function
The Data Type option supports two formats: Word and Double Word.
Data Type
Data
Format
Min. Value/
Max. Value
When Word is selected as the data type, the following data formats
are supported.
When Double Word is selected as the data type, the following data
formats are supported.
The legal range of the min. and max. values is determined by the
settings of the data type, integer place and decimal place. In the
following example, no decimal is set.
Data
Data Format
Legal Range
Type
BCD
0~9999
Signed BCD
-999 ~ 9999
Word
Signed Decimal
-32768~32767
Chapter 18 Analog
No.
Property
(5)
Function
Word Signed BCD
-9999999 ~ 99999999
Signed Decimal -2147483648~2147483647
Unsigned Decimal 0~4294967295
Hex
0~0xFFFFFFFF
The Direction function provides Horizontal and Vertical options.
Direction
Horizontal
Vertical
(6)
Start Point
18-9
Chapter 18 Analog
No.
Property
Function
Horizontal
Left
Right
Vertical
Bottom
Top
(7)
18-10
Slide Bar
Width
The max. value of the slide bar width defines the height of the Slider.
Chapter 18 Analog
No.
(8)
(9)
(10)
Property
Function
The max. value of the slide button length defines the width of the
Slider.
The user can set the border color for the element.
Slide
Button Size
Border
Color
Foreground
Color
The user can set the foreground color for the element.
18-11
Chapter 18 Analog
No.
Property
Function
When language data are defined, users can edit the properties of text
display from Language.
Element
(11) Background
Color
(12)
18-12
Language
Chapter 18 Analog
No.
Property
Function
18-13
Chapter 18 Analog
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
(1)
18-14
Property
Text
Function
Users can input the text to be displayed in the text box.
Chapter 18 Analog
No.
Property
Function
(2)
Text
Properties
(3)
Multi-Langua
ge Text Data
18-15
Chapter 18 Analog
Picture
(1)
(2)
(3)
18-16
Chapter 18 Analog
No.
Property
(1)
Function
The default value for Picture Bank Name is None. Users wishing
to select a display picture can select the desired picture in the
built-in picture bank from the pull-down menu.
Picture
Bank
Name
18-17
Chapter 18 Analog
No.
Property
Function
Users can align pictures alignment with the alignment options.
Alignment
(2)
Stretch
Mode
(3)
18-18
Transpare
nt Color
Stretch modes include: Fill, Keep Aspect Ratio, and Actual Size
Fill
Keep Aspect Ratio
Actual Size
In the Keep Aspect
Ratio mode, the In the Actual Size
In the Fill mode,
selected picture will mode, the picture
the selected picture
fit in the display will be displayed in
will fill up the entire
area proportionally its original size in
display area.
according to the the display area.
picture ratio.
Chapter 18 Analog
No.
Property
Function
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
Function
18-19
Chapter 19 List
Contents
19-1
19-2
19-3
19-4
ComboBox ............................................................................................................. 3
ListBox ................................................................................................................. 22
GridBox ............................................................................................................... 40
Text List ............................................................................................................... 93
19-1
Chapter 19 List
Chapter 19 List
This chapter describes the setting of the List elements that the DOPSoftware software
provides.
List
GridBox
Text List
Table 19-1-1 Classification of List components
ComboBox
ListBox
Activation/Activation
Address
Read Address
Read Address
List
Min.
Value/
Max.
Value
(No border
color)
Style
Interlock
(Foreground
State/
Color/
Interlock
Foreground Address/
Color/ Border Invisible
Color)
Address
Data
User
Type/
Enable
Security
Data
Confirm
Level/
Format/
Window
Set Low
State
Security
Counts
19-2
Chapter 19 List
19-1 ComboBox
The ComboBox provides the user with multiple state display messages. The user can use
this function to select the items to be performed. The functions of the same type are
grouped in the same dropdown menu for the user. Since only the currently selected items
are displayed in the ComboBox, the elements occupy a relatively small space. Refer to
Table 19-1-3 for the example of the ComboBox.
Refer to the ComboBox example in Table 19-1-3.
19-3
Chapter 19 List
ComboBox Example
Table 19-1-3 ComboBox Example
Step 2: On the Text page, edit the text message to be displayed for
the 16 states. Complete the field with the numbers 1~16.
Step 1: Create the data display button. Set the Read Address to
$2468 and complete the setting of other parameters.
Create
ComboBox
Element
Create
Data
Display
Element
Increment
Write Address
Setup
19-4
Chapter 19 List
ComboBox Example
Table 19-1-3 ComboBox Example
Execution
Results
19-5
Chapter 19 List
The ComboBox supports four data types. Refer to Table 19-1-4 for more information. The
user only needs to increase or decrease the state counts in the property table to add or
delete the counts.
ComboBox
Table 19-1-4 Data Type of the ComboBox
Data
Type
State Counts
Memory Address
If data type is Word, Word is the
data type of memory address.
Word
Chapter 19 List
ComboBox
Table 19-1-4 Data Type of the ComboBox
The examples in the following table show how state value is determined with the
lowest non-zero bit after converting from a decimal value into a binary value.
There are also examples demonstrating how the DOPSoft determines the state
Numeric Displayed with the lowest bit when the decimal values are 3 and 7.
Decimal
Binary
State Value
State=0 when all bits are 0
0000000000000000
0000000000000001
0000000000000010
0000000000000011
0000000000000100
0000000000000111
0000000000001000
16
0000000000010000
32
0000000000100000
64
0000000001000000
128
0000000010000000
256
0000000100000000
512
0000001000000000
1024
0000010000000000
2048
0000100000000000
4096
0001000000000000
8192
0010000000000000
16384
0100000000000000
32768
1000000000000000
Bit
19-7
Chapter 19 List
ComboBox
Table 19-1-4 Data Type of the ComboBox
19-8
Chapter 19 List
Double click the ComboBox icon and the following property setting screen appears.
ComboBox
Function Page
Content Description
Preview
Multiple state values are available for the ComboBox. The user
can edit multi-language data.
Main
Sets the write address, read address, write offset address, read
offset address, data type, data format, state counts.
Sets border color, background color, foreground color.
Text
Sets the content, font, font size, font color, font effects, scaling,
and alignment of the text to be displayed.
Details
Macro
Coordinates
19-9
Chapter 19 List
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(7)
(5)
(6)
No.
(1)
(2)
(3)
19-10
Property
Write
Address
Read
Address
Write
Offset
Address
Read
Offset
Address
The Data Type supports 4 formats: Bit, Word, LSB and LSB
(Support State 0). Refer to Table 19-1-4 for more information.
The Data Format can be selected only when the data type is Word.
The Data Format supports BCD, Signed Decimal, Unsigned
Decimal and Hexadecimal.
Data Type
Data
Format
Function
The user can select the internal memory or controller register
address. The memory type entered changes depending on the data
type (Word, LSB or Bit). Refer to Table 19-1-4.
Selects link name or style. Please refer to 5-1 Button of Chapter 05
for details.
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
(4)
(5)
Set the state counts for the ComboBox. The state counts can be
set between 1 and 256 with Word as the data type, 16 states can
be set with LSB as the data type, 17 states can be set with LSB
Support State 0 as the data type and only 2 states can be set with
Bit as the data type. Refer to 19-1-4 for more information.
The user can set the border color.
The user can set the background color for the element.
When language data are defined, users can edit the properties of
text display from Language.
State
Counts
Border
Color
(6)
Backgroun
d Color
(7)
Language
19-11
Chapter 19 List
No.
19-12
Property
Function
Chapter 19 List
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
Property
(1)
Function
The user can input the text message to be displayed in the text
box.
Text
For any element that can be used to enter text, the user needs
only to click the element on the screen and press the spacebar
on the keypad to edit the text. This is very convenient for the
user to enter text.
19-13
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
(2)
Text
Properties
(3)
Multi-languag
e Text Data
19-14
Function
Sets text properties, including font type, font size, font color,
scaling, text alignment, and bold/italic/underline of font. Please
refer to the above figure for details about the results of text
properties.
Users can add Multi-Language text data from the
Multi-Language Text Page. As shown in the Text Properties
Figure, users can input English text in the English field.
Chapter 19 List
Details
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
No.
Property
Interlock
State
(1)
Function
Interlock Address allows users to operate an element from this
particular address. It must be used along with Interlock State. If
Interlock State is OFF, this means the interlock address is
operable when the interlock state is OFF. In contrast, when
Interlock State is ON, this means the interlock address is
operable when the interlock state is ON.
The behavior is described below:
1. Create a maintained button and set the Write Address to
$44.0. Then Set the Write Address and Interlock Address of
the ComboBox element to $555 and $44.0, respectively.
2. Press the maintained button $44.0 to activate the
ComboBox element $555 before it can be operated.
Interlock
Address
19-15
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
Trigger type include before writing and after writing.
Before writing
After writing
Values are changed
Trigger type The activation bit is ON
before changing
before the activation bit
values.
is ON.
As the activation function only sets the activation address to ON,
users must set the activation address of OFF before re-activation.
Before writing:
After writing:
Trigger type
(2)
Trigger
(3)
19-16
Invisible
Address
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
User
Security
Level
Function
Sets the user security level of element activities. Only users with
equal or higher security level corresponding to the element can
activate the element.
After setting the user security level, when users activate the
element, the password box will pop up and request users to input
the password (the password can be changed from the password
setup element, please see 5-7 Password Table of Chapter 05).
(4)
Set Low
Security
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
password. When users activate the element again, they will be
requested to input again the password corresponding to the
element.
(5)
19-18
Confirm
Window
Chapter 19 List
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
Function
19-19
Chapter 19 List
Macro
19-20
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
The before execute macro and after execute macro processes are diagrammed
below:
(1)
Before
execute
Macro
After execute
Macro
When users touch the button element, HMI will first run the
commands in the corresponding macro pre-action of the button
action. If the button state is not changed by means of touching
button (using external controller commands or other macros),
HMI will not run the corresponding macro commands.
After users touch the button element, HMI will first run the
button action pre-action the commands in the corresponding
macro. If the button state is not changed by means of touching
button (using external controller commands or other macros),
HMI will not run the corresponding macro commands.
19-21
Chapter 19 List
19-2 ListBox
Like the ComboBox, the ListBox provides the user with multiple state display messages. It
allows the user to view and select the item in a more intuitive way. Refer to Table 19-2-1 for
the example of the ListBox.
19-22
Chapter 19 List
ListBox Example
Table 19-2-1 ListBox Example
Step 1: Create the ListBox element. Set the Write Address to $2468.
Select Word as the data type and set the State Counts to 16.
Step 2: On the Text page, edit the text message to be displayed for the 16
states. Complete the field with the characters A~P.
Step 1: Create the data display button. Set the Write Address to $2468
and complete the setting of other parameters.
Create
ListBox
Element
Create
Data
Display
Element
Data
Display
Element
Read Address
19-23
Chapter 19 List
ListBox Example
Table 19-2-1 ListBox Example
Setup
After creation of all elements, perform the compilation and download them
to HMI. When you select an item from the ListBox, the data display
element will show the state value corresponding to the selected ListBox
item.
Execution
Results
19-24
Chapter 19 List
The ListBox supports four data types. Refer to Table 19-2-2 for more information. The user
only needs to increase or decrease the state counts in the property table to add or delete
the counts.
ListBox
Table 19-2-2 Data Type of the ListBox
Data
Type
State Counts
Memory Address
If data type is Word, Word is the
data type of memory address.
Word
19-25
Chapter 19 List
ListBox
Table 19-2-2 Data Type of the ListBox
The examples in the following table show how state value is determined with the
lowest non-zero bit after converting from a decimal value into a binary value.
There are also examples demonstrating how the DOPSoft determines the state
Numeric Displayed with the lowest bit when the decimal values are 3 and 7.
Decimal
Binary
State Value
19-26
0000000000000000
0000000000000011
0000000000000111
16
32
64
128
256
512
0000001000000000
1024
0000010000000000
2048
0000100000000000
4096
0001000000000000
8192
0010000000000000
16384
0100000000000000
32768
1000000000000000
Chapter 19 List
ListBox
Table 19-2-2 Data Type of the ListBox
State=16
If the data type is Bit, Bit is the data
type of memory address.
If the data type is Bit, only 2 states
are available.
Bit
19-27
Chapter 19 List
Double click the ListBox icon and the following property setting screen appears.
ListBox
Function Page
Content Description
Preview
Multiple state values are available for the ListBox. The user can
edit multi-language data.
Main
Sets the write address, read address, write offset address, read
offset address, data type, data format, state counts.
Sets background color, foreground color.
Text
Sets the content, font, font size, font color, font effects, scaling,
and alignment of the text to be displayed.
Details
Macro
Coordinates
19-28
Chapter 19 List
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(8)
(5)
(6)
(7)
No.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Property
Write
Address
Read
Address
Write
Offset
Address
Read
Offset
Address
The Data Type supports 4 formats: Bit, Word, LSB and LSB
(Support State 0). Refer to Table 19-2-2 for more information.
The Data Format can be selected only when the data type is Word.
The Data Format supports BCD, Signed Decimal, Unsigned
Decimal, and Hexadecimal.
Data Type
Data
Format
Function
The user can select the internal memory or controller register
address. The memory type entered changes depending on the data
type (Word, LSB or Bit). Refer to Table 19-2-2.
Selects link name or style. Please refer to 5-1 Button of Chapter 05
for details.
19-29
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
(4)
(5)
The user can set the background color for the element.
Users can determine whether to show the frame of the list or not.
State
Counts
Foregroun
d Color
(6)
Backgroun
d Color
(7)
Show
Frame
19-30
Set the state counts for the ListBox. The state counts can be set
between 1 and 256 with Word as the data type, 16 states can be
set with LSB as the data type, 17 states can be set with LSB
Support State 0 as the data type and only 2 states can be set with
Bit as the data type. Refer to 19-2-2 for more information.
The user can set the foreground color for the element.
Show Frame: NO
Revision June, 2015
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
(8)
When language data are defined, users can edit the properties of
text display from Language.
Language
19-31
Chapter 19 List
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
Property
(1)
Text
(2)
Text
Properties
(3)
Multi-Languag
e Text Data
19-32
Function
Users can input the text to be displayed in the text box.
Chapter 19 List
Details
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
No.
Property
Function
Interlock
Address
19-33
Interlock
State
(1)
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
Trigger
type
After writing
Values are changed
before the activation
bit is ON.
(2)
Trigger
19-34
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
When Invisible Address is ON, the button element is hidden,
and the corresponding function is disabled.
(3)
Invisible
Address
User
Security
Level
(4)
Set Low
Security
Sets the user security level of element activities. Only users with
equal or higher security level corresponding to the element can
activate the element.
After setting the user security level, when users activate the
element, the password box will pop up and request users to input
the password (the password can be changed from the password
setup element, please see 5-7 Password Table of Chapter 05).
19-35
Chapter 19 List
No.
(5)
19-36
Property
Function
Confirm
Window
Chapter 19 List
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
Function
19-37
Chapter 19 List
Macro
19-38
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
The before execute macro and after execute macro processes are diagrammed
below:
(1)
Before
execute
Macro
After execute
Macro
When users touch the button element, HMI will first run the
commands in the corresponding macro pre-action of the button
action. If the button state is not changed by means of touching
button (using external controller commands or other macros),
HMI will not run the corresponding macro commands.
After users touch the button element, HMI will first run the
button action pre-action the commands in the corresponding
macro. If the button state is not changed by means of touching
button (using external controller commands or other macros),
HMI will not run the corresponding macro commands.
19-39
Chapter 19 List
19-3 GridBox
Display the data set by users by Gridbox and provides a convenient and easy-to-operate
interface for users, functions including built-in auto-change page, insert, delete, copy and
paste.
19-40
Chapter 19 List
Description of GridBox
Table 19-3-1 Description of GridBox
Create
GridBox
Element
19-41
Chapter 19 List
Description of GridBox
Table 19-3-1 Description of GridBox
19-42
Chapter 19 List
Description of GridBox
Table 19-3-1 Description of GridBox
Step 7: The data address starts from $3000 and the interval offset is
15 Words, which means each data length is 5 Words.
19-43
Chapter 19 List
Description of GridBox
Table 19-3-1 Description of GridBox
Create the
numeric
entry
element
and
character
entry
element
Step 1: Create two numeric entry elements with the address of $500
and $506 respectively on the screen. And create one character
entry element with the address of $501. These three elements are
the temporary memory. Users can write the data saved in temporary
memory into the Grid Box through the operating bit.
Step 2: Create one character entry element with the address of
$4000 on the screen. This element is the editing area that can
define the address. Users can write the data in the editing area into
the Grid box through the macro.
Create the
element of
momentary
button
19-44
Chapter 19 List
Description of GridBox
Table 19-3-1 Description of GridBox
Create
numeric
entry
elements
from $100
to 106 and
maintained
button
elements
from
$110.0 to
$110.12
19-45
Chapter 19 List
Description of GridBox
Table 19-3-1 Description of GridBox
Step 1: Create two buttons for screen changing on the screen. Open
screen 2 and 3 to view the actual contents in GridBox.
Create the
button for
screen
changing
Create
numeric
entry
element
($1000~$1
169)
19-46
Chapter 19 List
Description of GridBox
Table 19-3-1 Description of GridBox
Create
numeric
entry
element
($3000~$3
254)
Result
19-47
Chapter 19 List
Description of GridBox
Table 19-3-1 Description of GridBox
Press data moving button and it will show the change on elements.
Result
19-48
Chapter 19 List
Description of GridBox
Table 19-3-1 Description of GridBox
Set $1018 (hidden item) in screen 2 to 1. Then, this item will not be
displayed and the actual item number will be more than the
displayed number.
19-49
Chapter 19 List
Description of GridBox
Table 19-3-1 Description of GridBox
Set SelItem Set Addr to 6 and click SelItem Trig Addr. The
item will jump to the 6th one.
19-50
Chapter 19 List
Description of GridBox
Table 19-3-1 Description of GridBox
Select the second item and click on [Copy Trig Addr]. Then, select
the fourth item and click on [Replace Trig Addr]. Contents of the
second item will be pasted to the fourth item.
19-51
Chapter 19 List
Description of GridBox
Table 19-3-1 Description of GridBox
19-52
Chapter 19 List
Description of GridBox
Table 19-3-1 Description of GridBox
19-53
Chapter 19 List
19-54
Chapter 19 List
GridBox
Function
Description
Main
Details
Details-2
19-55
Chapter 19 List
Main
(1)
6
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(16)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(7)
(14)
(8)
(15)
(9)
(17)
(18)
No.
Property
(1)
Column
Count
(2)
Function
Initial Item
Count
(3)
Item Per
Page
(4)
Start
address
19-56
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
(5)
Item
Offset
(6)
(7)
(8)
Function
Address
Preview
Current
Column
Column
Type
19-57
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
(9)
Column
Count
Function
Column count will be shown only when selecting State in
Column Type.
It can set up to 256 states to display state type. This would influence
the displayed number ofCurrent State. If state count is set to 3,
then the number in current state would be 0, 1, 2.
(10)
Column
Width
(11)
Align
(12)
Average
Column
Width
(13)
(14)
19-58
Enable
Hide Item
Enable
Hide
Value
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
(15)
Hide
Vertical
Line
Function
Enable this function. The vertical line in the right side will be hidden
in the table.
(16)
Across to
Left
(17)
17~32
Columns
(18)
Column
Data
Check [1732 columns], two addresses are provided for the hide
value. The first address corresponds to column 1 ~ 16 and the
second one corresponds to column 17 ~ 32.
19-59
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
Setting
19-60
Text related setting: It includes the setting of text font, text size, text
color, text format and the displayed text, bold, italic or underline.
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
It means the
element displayed
area will fill with the
picture.
Stretch 1:1
Actual Size
It means regardless
the size of the
It means the picture
element, the picture
will be shown
will be shown in
according to the
actual size in
aspect ratio.
element displayed
area.
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
With this function, users can specify one color of the picture and turn
it into transparent. It means if check the icon
orange part of the broom, the orange part will become transparent,
which means the color will be identical with the foreground color.
19-62
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
19-63
Chapter 19 List
Details
(1)
(10)
(2)
(11)
(3)
(12)
(13)
(4)
(14)
(5)
(15)
(6)
(16)
(17)
(7)
(18)
(8)
(19)
(20)
(9)
(21)
(22)
No.
Property
(1)
Selected
Items
19-64
Function
Chapter 19 List
No.
(2)
Property
Function
Item
Count
19-65
Chapter 19 List
No.
(3)
(4)
19-66
Property
Function
The visible item count is the deduction of item count from hide item
count.
Visible
Item
Count
Current
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
Page
(5)
Total
Page
19-67
Chapter 19 List
No.
(6)
Property
When the bit of update data is On, the displayed content will be
updated.
Auto
Update
Data
(7)
Update
Data
(8)
Custom
19-68
Function
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Data
Function
(9)
(10)
(11)
Max item
count
Users can customize another data block and the data will be
changed accompanies elements editing.
Data start address: It supports controller address (Word) and the
address of internal register (Word).
Max. item count is used to set up the newly added items in Grid Box.
The maximum value of Max. item count is 1000.
When the invisible address is On, the Grid Box will be hidden.
Invisible
Address
Page Up
19-69
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
Triggering
Address
19-70
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
(12)
Page
Down
Triggering
Address
19-71
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
(13)
19-72
Previous
Item
Triggering
Address
Chapter 19 List
No.
(14)
Property
Function
When the bit of triggering address of next item is on, it goes to the
next item and the bit is off.
When the bit of triggering address of next item is not on, item 3 is
displayed as the selected item. When it is on, the selected item
would be item 4.
Next Item
Triggering
Address
19-73
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
19-74
Chapter 19 List
No.
(15)
Property
Function
When the bit of copy triggering address is on, it copies the current
item and the bit is off.
When the bit of paste triggering address is on, it pastes the current
item and the bit is off.
Copy
Triggering
Address
Before
(16)
After
Paste
Triggering
Address
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
When Replace Trig Addr is On, the selected item will be replaced by
the copied item. And the flag will be off automatically.
Before the item is replaced
(17)
Replace
Trig Addr
(18)
19-76
Insert
Triggering
Address
When the bit of insert triggering address is on, it inserts the blank
item and the bit is off.
Before
After
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
When the bit of delete triggering address is on, it deletes the current
item and the bit is off.
Before
(19)
After
Delete
Triggering
Address
19-77
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
(20)
Touch
Protect
Address
Selected
Item Set
Address
(21)
Selected
Item
Triggering
Address
19-78
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
Visible
Count
Address
(22)
Visible
Item
Trigger
19-79
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
19-80
Chapter 19 List
Details-2
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
No.
Property
Function
(1)
Buffer
start
Address
It is the start address for temporarily saving the element. Users can
insert, add and write the data that saved in temporary memory
(buffer) to the selected item. Or users can read the data from the
selected item to temporary memory (buffer).
It supports controller address (Word) and the address of internal
register (Word).
19-81
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
(2)
Insert
Address
When this bit is On, the element will insert the [Selected item]
starting from [Buffer start address] according to the [Item offset]
address. And the [Actual item number] will increase 1.
If the [Actual item number] has reached the value of [Max. item
count], users will be unable to insert the selected item.
Before inserting the item
19-82
Chapter 19 List
No.
(3)
Property
Add
Address
Function
When this bit is On, the element will add one item locates after the
[Selected item] starting from [Buffer start address] according to the
[Item offset] address. And the [Actual item number] will increase 1.
19-83
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
If the [Actual item number] reaches the value of [Max. item count],
users will be unable to add the selected item.
Before
19-84
After
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
When this bit is On, the element will be added to the last item starting
from [Buffer start address] according to the [Item offset] address.
And the [Actual item number] will increase 1.
If the [Actual item number] reaches the value of [Max. item count],
users will be unable to add the selected item.
Before
(4)
After
Add to
last
Address
19-85
Chapter 19 List
No.
(5)
19-86
Property
Function
When this bit is On, contents in the [Selected item] will be saved to
[Buffer start address]. This will not change the content.
Read
Address
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
When this bit is On, the element will be wrote to the [Selected item]
starting from [Buffer start address] according to the [Item offset]
address.
Before
(6)
After
Write
Address
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
register (Bit).
19-88
Chapter 19 List
Appearance
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
Function
(1)
Field
Setting
This is for setting Enable auto number, Field width, Font size and
Text color.
Users can determine whether to show the auto number or not and
set its field width, font size and text color.
To show auto number:
To not show the auto
number
19-89
Chapter 19 List
Field width: Users can define the field width of auto number, 65535 is
the maximum.
It can be divided into grid line color, background color, selected color
and determine if users are going to show grid line.
It can be used to select the element displayed color and grid line
setting.
Grid line color:
Background color:
Selected color:
(2)
19-90
Style
Chapter 19 List
19-91
Chapter 19 List
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
(1)
(2)
19-92
Property
Function
Value of X and Y
Width, Height
Chapter 19 List
NOTE
Text list only supports ASCII characters. If there is any non-ASCII character in the file,
the [Action status address] setting of text list will show 15.
Text list supports up to 4096 lines. When the line number exceeds the limit (4096), the
[Action status address] setting of text list will show 10. And it will be unable to execute
the command of [Insert address] and [Add address]. If the command of [Save file
trigger address] is executed, it only saves 4096 lines that displayed in the text list.
Others that exceed line 4096 will be discarded.
Text list supports up to 128 characters. When executing [Open file trigger address], if
the character number in any line exceeds the limit, the [Action status address] setting
of text list will show 11. When executing [Save file trigger address], up to 128
characters of each line will be saved. Others that exceed the limit will be discarded.
When writing the text to the text list by triggering [Write address], the write-in character
number will be 128.
Only support for DOP-H series.
19-93
Chapter 19 List
Text List
Table 19-4-1 Example of Text List
element on screen 1.
Step 2: See the general setting below.
New
FileSlot
Create
Text List
Element
19-94
Chapter 19 List
Text List
Table 19-4-1 Example of Text List
19-95
Chapter 19 List
Text List
Table 19-4-1 Example of Text List
Create the screen for setting Text List and place the corresponded
elements and buttons on the graph for editing.
Create the
numeric
entry
element
and
maintained
button
element
Create the
import/exp
ort FileSlot
button
element
19-96
Chapter 19 List
Text List
Table 19-4-1 Example of Text List
Create
character
entry
element
($2000)
Create the character entry element ($2000) on the screen and set
the string length to 25.
Results
19-97
Chapter 19 List
Text List
Table 19-4-1 Example of Text List
19-98
Step 4: Trigger the Open file trigger addr. You can see the content of
FileSlot displayed in the format of text file in the text list.
Chapter 19 List
Following shows the property setting screen when you double click on Text List.
19-99
Chapter 19 List
Text List
Functions
Descriptions
Main
19-100
Chapter 19 List
Main
(9)
(1)
(10)
(2)
(11)
(3)
(12)
(4)
(13)
(14)
(5)
(6)
(15)
(7)
(16)
(8)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
No.
Property
(1)
Selected
Item
Function
19-101
Chapter 19 List
No.
(2)
19-102
Property
Actual
Item
Number
Function
Chapter 19 List
No.
(3)
Property
Current
Page
Function
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
current page number.
19-104
Chapter 19 List
No.
(4)
Property
Total Page
Function
This shows the total page when FileSlot is displayed as a text file.
19-105
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
(5)
FileSlot ID
FileSlot ID
(6)
19-106
PLC
Register
Constant
Open File
Triggering
Address
(7)
Internal
Memory
Save File
Triggering
Address
When this bit is On, the edited result will be saved in the specified
FileSlotID address. Then, the flag will be off automatically.
If the specified FileSlotID is 0 or does not exist, it is unable to trigger
this bit.
It supports controller address (Bit) and the address of internal
register (Bit).
Revision June, 2015
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
When reading and editing the text file, the code of Action Status
Address will be displayed in this address.
See the descriptions as below:
Code
(8)
Action
Status
Address
Name
Normal
10
11
12
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
(9)
19-108
Invisible
Address
13
14
Element is invisible
15
When there is more than one Action Status, it only shows the code
with bigger number. For example, when the file content exceeds the
max. line number (code: 10) and includes the illegal character
(code: 15), [Action Status Address] will only show 15.
It supports controller address (Word) and the address of internal
register (Word).
When this bit is On, the element is hidden and [Action Status
Address] shows 14. When this bit is Off, the element is visible.
Chapter 19 List
No.
(10)
Property
PageUp
Triggering
Address
Function
When this bit is On, it will switch to the previous page. Then, the flag
is Off automatically.
If the [Current page] is the first page, it will remain at the first page
when this bit is On.
If this bit is Off and the [Current page] is the third page, the [Current
screen] will switch to the second page when this bit is On.
19-109
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
19-110
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
(11)
When this bit is On, it will switch to the next page. Then, the flag is
Off automatically.
If the [Current page] is the [Total page], it will remain at the last
page when this bit is On.
If this bit is Off and the [Current page] is the second page, the
[Current screen] will switch to the third page when this bit is On.
PageDown
Triggering
Address
19-111
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
(12)
19-112
Previous
Item
Triggering
Address
When this bit is On, it will select the previous item. Then, the flag is
Off automatically.
If the [Selected item] is the first item, it will remain at the first item
when this bit is On.
If this bit is Off and the [Selected item] is the fourth one, it will select
the third item when this bit is On.
Revision June, 2015
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
19-113
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
(13)
19-114
When this bit is On, it will select the next item. Then, the flag is Off
automatically.
If the [Selected item] is the [Actual item number], it will remain at the
last item when this bit is On.
If this bit is Off and the [Selected item] is the third one, it will select
the fourth item when this bit is On.
Next Item
Triggering
Address
Chapter 19 List
No.
(14)
Property
Touch
Protection
Address
Function
When this bit is On, the element is untouchable and [Action status
address] will show 13. When this bit is Off, the element becomes
touchable.
It supports controller address (Bit) and the address of internal
register (Bit).
19-115
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
Specify the selected item via [SelItem set address] and turn on the
bit of [SelItem Triggering Address], then the element will display the
selected item.
SelItem
Set
Address
(15)
SelItem
Triggering
Address
19-116
Chapter 19 List
No.
(16)
Property
Buffer Start
Function
It is the start address that temporary memory saves the data. Users
19-117
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
Address
can insert, add and write the data in temporary memory to the
selected item. Or the user can read data saved in selected item to
the t temporary memory.
It supports controller address (Word) and the address of internal
register (Word).
When this bit is On, the element will insert the [Selected item] to the
address that starts from [Buffer start address] followed by data
of 128 bits (64 words in total).
Before
(17)
Insert
Address
19-118
AFter
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
When this bit is On, the element will add one item right after the
[Selected item] to the address that starts from [Buffer start address]
followed by data of 128 bits (64 words in total).
Before
(18)
After
Add
Address
19-119
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
When this bit is On, the element will save the data of 128 bits (64
words in total) starting from the [Selected item] to [Buffer start
address] and delete [Selected item] in the text list.
Before
(19)
Cut
Address
19-120
After
Chapter 19 List
No.
(20)
Property
Function
When this bit is On, the element will save the data of 128 bits (64
words in total) starting from the [Selected item] to [Buffer start
address]. This will not change the content of the text list.
Read
Address
19-121
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
When this bit is On, the element will write the data of 128 bits (64
words in total) to the [Selected item] starting from [Buffer start
address] and replace the original content saved in [Selected item].
Before
(21)
Write
Address
19-122
After
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
19-123
Chapter 19 List
Appearance
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
No.
Property
(1)
Font size
19-124
Function
It can set up the font size that displayed in the text list.
Chapter 19 List
No.
(2)
(3)
Property
Function
Backgrou
nd color
Set color
(4)
Show line
number
19-125
Chapter 19 List
No.
Property
Function
(5)
Show
frame
(6)
Item
height
19-126
Show frame: NO
This can set the height of one single line. The minimum value is 1
and the maximum is 256.
Chapter 19 List
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
X-value and
Y- value
(2)
Width, Height
Function
19-127
Chapter 20 Frame
Contents
20-1
20-2
20-1
Chapter 20 Frame
Chapter 20 Frame
This chapter mainly describes the detailed settings of frame element provided by DOPSoft.
Frame
Frame
Element
Embedded
SubScreen
Ladder
Monitor
Screen
LeftTop-X LeftTop-Y
color
Color
Color
of
Value
20-2
Chapter 20 Frame
20-3
Chapter 20 Frame
Create
Element of
Embedded
SubScreen
Setup
Memory
Address
20-4
Chapter 20 Frame
Create three numerical entry element ($100, $101, $102) and one
maintained button element ($103.0).
Create 3
numerical
entry
elements
and 1
maintained
button
element.
Create
Subscreen
20-5
Chapter 20 Frame
20-6
Chapter 20 Frame
Change elements position: $100 is set to 100 and $101 is set to 100.
Result
20-7
Chapter 20 Frame
20-8
Chapter 20 Frame
The following is the property setting screen when double clicking the embedded subscreen.
Embedded Subscreen
Function
page
Content Description
Preview
Main
20-9
Chapter 20 Frame
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
No.
Property
(1)
Coordinate X
in upper-left
corner (Left
Top-X)
(2)
Coordinate Y
in upper-left
20-10
Function
Chapter 20 Frame
No.
Property
Function
corner (Left
Top-Y)
(3)
(4)
Embedded
Subscreen
Invisible
Address
The
invisible
address
has not
been set
to On.
The
invisible
address
is set to
On.
Revision June, 2015
20-11
Chapter 20 Frame
No.
Property
Function
20-12
Chapter 20 Frame
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
X value, Y
value
(2)
Width, Height
Function
20-13
Chapter 20 Frame
Following figure is the property setting when double clicking ladder monitor screen.
Content Description
Preview
Main
20-14
Chapter 20 Frame
Create
Element
of
Ladder
Monitor
Screen
Setup
Comm.
Setting.
20-15
Chapter 20 Frame
20-16
Chapter 20 Frame
Edit
Logic
Data
20-17
Chapter 20 Frame
20-18
Chapter 20 Frame
Download the screen to HMC and execute online monitoring in Edit Logic
Data.
Select the displayed monitoring screen and add the device of D1036 and
M1102.
After executing online monitoring, the displayed ladder monitor screen and
edit logic data will be identical.
Result
20-19
Chapter 20 Frame
20-20
Change the value of D1036 to 333. Then, value in ladder monitor screen
and edit logic data will be changed to 333.
Set M1102 to ON. Data in ladder monitor screen and edit logic data will
change M1102 to ON.
Chapter 20 Frame
Click the Menu button on ladder monitor screen. Select Initial Prog0. The
screen shown on HMI will be identical to the one in edit logic data.
20-21
Chapter 20 Frame
20-22
Chapter 20 Frame
Main
(1
(2
(3
No.
Property
(1)
Background
Color
(2)
Foreground
Color
Function
20-23
Chapter 20 Frame
No.
Property
Function
(3)
20-24
Value Color
Chapter 20 Frame
Details
(1)
No.
Property
(1)
Invisible
Address
Function
20-25
Chapter 20 Frame
No.
Property
Function
The
invisible
address
has not
been set
to On.
The
invisible
address
is set to
On.
20-26
Chapter 20 Frame
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
X value, Y
value
(2)
Width, Height
Function
20-27
Contents
21-1 Rhombus/ Right Triangle/ Pentagon/ Pie Chart/ Arc/ Hexagon/ Star Shape/ Triangle/
Hollow Circle/ Stop Circle/ 1/4 Arc ....................................................................................... 4
21-1
Basic Shape
Hexagon
Star Shape
Triangle
Hollow Circle
Stop Circle
1/4 Arc
21-2
Basic
Shape
Line
Color
Rhombus
Right
Triangle
Pentagon
Pie Chart
Arc
Hexagon
Star Shape
Triangle
Hollow
Circle
Stop Circle
1/4 Arc
Style
21-3
1/4 Arc
The DOPSoft software provides the user with the basic shape drawing function. The
properties of each basic shape element are described below.
Rhombus
Double click the Rhombus icon and the following property setting screen appears.
21-4
Rhombus
Function Page
Preview
Content Description
The State and Multi-Language are not available for the Rhombus.
Main
Sets the line color, line size, foreground color, and transparent
color.
Coordinates
21-5
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
No.
Property
(1)
Line Color
(2)
Line Size
21-6
Function
The user can set the color of the line to be displayed.
No.
(3)
(4)
Property
Function
The user can set the foreground color for the element.
Foreground
Color
Transparent
Color
21-7
No.
Property
Function
Transparent
Color: Yes
Transparent
Color: No
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
21-8
Function
Right Triangle
Double click the Right Triangle icon and the following property setting screen appears.
Right Triangle
Function Page
Preview
Main
Coordinates
Content Description
The State and Multi-Language are not available for the Right
Triangle.
Sets the line color, line size, foreground color, transparent color, and
style.
Sets the X-Y coordinates, width and height of the element.
Table 21-1-4 Right Triangle Element Function Page
21-9
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
No.
Property
(1)
Line Color
(2)
Line Size
21-10
Function
The user can set the color of the line to be displayed.
No.
(3)
(4)
Property
Function
The user can set the foreground color for the element.
Foregroun
d Color
Transpare
nt Color
21-11
No.
Property
Function
Transpar
ent
Color:
Yes
Transpar
ent
Color: No
(5)
The Style option supports Standard, Rotation 90, Rotation 180, and
Rotation 270.
Style
Standard
21-12
Rotation 90
Rotation 180
Rotation 270
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
Function
21-13
Pentagon
Double click the Pentagon icon and the following property setting screen appears.
Pentagon
Function Page
Preview
Content Description
The State and Multi-Language are not available for the Pentagon.
Main
Sets the line color, line size, foreground color, and transparent
color.
Coordinates
21-14
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
No.
Property
(1)
Line Color
(2)
Line Size
Function
The user can set the color of the line to be displayed.
21-15
No.
(3)
(4)
21-16
Property
Function
The user can set the foreground color for the element.
Foreground
Color
Transparent
Color
No.
Property
Function
Transparent
Color: Yes
Transparent
Color: No
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
Function
21-17
Pie Chart
Double click the Pie Chart icon and the following property setting screen appears.
Pie Chart
Function Page
Preview
Main
Coordinates
Content Description
The State and Language are not available for the Pie Chart.
Sets the line color, line size, transparent color, Star angle, end
angle, and foreground color.
Sets the X-Y coordinates, width and height of the element.
Table 21-1-6 Pie Chart Element Function Page
21-18
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(6)
(5)
No.
Property
(1)
Line Color
(2)
Line Size
Function
The user can set the color of the line to be displayed.
21-19
No.
Property
Function
(3)
Transparent
Color
Transparent
Color: Yes
Transparent
Color: No
(4)
(5)
21-20
Star Angle
End Angle
The user can use the Star Angle and End Angle to set the opening
angle of the Pie Chart.
No.
Property
Function
(6)
The user can set the foreground color for the element.
Foreground
Color
21-21
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
21-22
Function
Arc
Double click the Arc icon and the following property setting screen appears.
Arc
Function Page
Preview
Main
Coordinates
Content Description
The State and Multi-Language are not available for the Arc.
Sets the line color, line size, transparent color, Star angle, end
angle, and foreground color.
Sets the X-Y coordinates, width and height of the element.
Table 21-1-7 Arc Element Function Page
21-23
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(6)
(5)
No.
Property
(1)
Line Color
(2)
Line Size
21-24
Function
The user can set the color of the line to be displayed.
No.
Property
Function
(3)
Transpare
nt Color
(4)
Star Angle
(5)
The user can use the Star Angle and End Angle to set the opening
angle of the arc.
End Angle
21-25
No.
Property
Function
(6)
21-26
The user can set the foreground color for the element.
Foregroun
d Color
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
Function
21-27
Hexagon
Double click the Hexagon icon and the following property setting screen appears.
Hexagon
Function Page
Preview
Main
Coordinates
Content Description
The State and Multi-Language are not available for the Hexagon.
Sets the line color, line size, foreground color, and transparent color.
Sets the X-Y coordinates, width and height of the element.
Table 21-1-8 Hexagon Element Function Page
21-28
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
No.
Property
(1)
Line Color
(2)
Line Size
Function
The user can set the color of the line to be displayed.
21-29
No.
(3)
(4)
21-30
Property
Function
The user can set the foreground color for the element.
Foreground
Color
Transparent
Color
No.
Property
Function
Transparent
Color: Yes
Transparent
Color: No
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
Function
21-31
Star Shape
Double click the Star Shape icon and the following property setting screen appears.
Star Shape
Function Page
Preview
Content Description
The State and Multi-Language are not available for the Star Shape.
Main
Sets the line color, line size, foreground color and transparent color.
Coordinates
21-32
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
No.
Property
(1)
Line Color
(2)
Line Size
Function
The user can set the color of the line to be displayed.
21-33
No.
(3)
(4)
21-34
Property
Function
The user can set the foreground color for the element.
Foreground
Color
Transparent
Color
No.
Property
Function
Transparent
Color: Yes
Transparent
Color: No
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
Function
21-35
Triangle
Double click the Triangle icon and the following property setting screen appears.
Triangle
Function Page
Preview
Main
Coordinates
Content Description
The State and Multi-Language are not available for the Triangle.
Sets the line color, line size, foreground color and transparent color.
Sets the X-Y coordinates, width and height of the element.
Table 21-1-10 Triangle Element Function Page
21-36
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
No.
Property
(1)
Line Color
(2)
Line Size
Function
The user can set the color of the line to be displayed.
21-37
No.
(3)
(4)
21-38
Property
Function
The user can set the foreground color for the element.
Foreground
Color
Transparent
Color
No.
Property
Function
Transparent
Color: Yes
Transparent
Color: No
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
Function
21-39
Hollow Circle
Double click the Hollow Circle icon and the following property setting screen appears.
Hollow Circle
Function Page
Preview
Main
Coordinates
Content Description
The State and Multi-Language are not available for the Hollow
Circle.
Sets the line color, line size, transparent color, length, and
foreground color.
Sets the X-Y coordinates, width and height of the element.
Table 21-1-11 Hollow Circle Element Function Page
21-40
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
No.
Property
(1)
Line Color
(2)
Line Size
Function
The user can set the color of the line to be displayed.
21-41
No.
(3)
Property
Transpare
nt Color
Function
Transpar
ent
Color:
Yes
Transpar
ent
Color: No
(4)
21-42
Length
No.
Property
Function
(5)
The user can set the foreground color for the element.
Foregroun
d Color
21-43
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
21-44
Function
Stop Circle
Double click the Stop Circle icon and the following property setting screen appears.
Stop Circle
Function Page
Preview
Main
Coordinates
Content Description
The State and Multi-Language are not available for the Stop
Circle.
Sets the line color, line size, transparent color, length, and
foreground color.
Sets the X-Y coordinates, width and height of the element.
Table 21-1-12 Stop Circle Element Function Page
21-45
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
No.
Property
(1)
Line Color
(2)
Line Size
21-46
Function
The user can set the color of the line to be displayed.
No.
(3)
Property
Function
Transpare
nt Color
Transparen
t Color:
Yes
Transparen
t Color: No
(4)
Length
21-47
No.
Property
Function
(5)
21-48
The user can set the foreground color for the element.
Foregroun
d Color
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
Function
21-49
1/4 Arc
Double click the 1/4 Arc icon and the following property setting screen appears.
1/4 Arc
Function Page
Preview
Content Description
The State and Multi-Language are not available for the Rhombus.
Main
Sets the line color, line size, foreground color and transparent
color.
Coordinates
21-50
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
No.
Property
(1)
Line Color
(2)
Line Size
Function
The user can set the color of the line to be displayed.
21-51
No.
(3)
(4)
Property
Function
The user can set the foreground color for the element.
When Yes is selected, the foreground color of the 1/4 Arc element
is transparent and only the border color of the arc part is
displayed. When No is selected, the foreground color of the 1/4
Arc element is completely displayed.
Foreground
Color
Transparent
Color
Transparent
Color: Yes
21-52
No.
Property
Function
Transparent
Color: No
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
Function
21-53
Chapter 22 Drawing
Contents
22-1
22-2
22-3
22-4
22-5
22-6
22-7
Line ........................................................................................................................... 5
Rectangle .................................................................................................................. 9
Circle ....................................................................................................................... 22
Polygon ................................................................................................................... 26
Text ......................................................................................................................... 30
Scale ....................................................................................................................... 37
Table ....................................................................................................................... 43
22-1
Chapter 22 Drawing
Chapter 22 Drawing
This chapter describes the setting of the drawing elements that the DOPSoft software
provides. To create drawing elements, the user needs to enter [Element] [Drawing] and
click the element to be created, or click the toolbar on the utmost left side of the window and
select the drawing element.
22-2
Chapter 22 Drawing
Figure 22-1-2 Drawing Elements on the Utmost Left Side of the Window
Drawing
Circle
Polygon
Text
Scale
Table
22-3
Chapter 22 Drawing
Show
Mark/
Primary
Element
Scale
Line Fillet
Integer
Min.
Data
Foreground
Counts/
Line Color/ Radius/
Place/
Value/
Font
Type/
Drawing
Color/
Secondary
Type Line Invisible
Decimal
Max. Smoothing Data
Transparent
Scale
Width Address
Place
Value
Format
Color
Counts/
Scale
Color/
Style
Line
Rectangle
Circle
Polygon
(Only
has
Invisible
Address)
Text
Scale
Border
Color/
Drawing
Grid
Color
Table
Row
Row
Row
Header
Element
Rows/
Header/ Interlacing/ Interlacing/ Row
Line
Background
Lines
Line
Line
Line
Spacing Spacing
Color
Header Interlacing Header
Interlacing
22-4
Chapter 22 Drawing
22-1 Line
To create a line element, press and hold the left mouse key to define the start point of the
line. Then drag the mouse to the length to be created and release the mouse to define the
end point of the line. When clicking this line, a rectangle frame will appear for the user to
adjust the line easily. The user can change the width, color and style of the line to be
displayed.
Double click the Line icon and the following property setting screen appears.
Line
Function Page
Preview
Main
Coordinates
Content Description
The State and Language are not available for the Line.
Sets the line type, line color, and line width.
Sets the X-Y coordinate, width and height of the element.
Table 22-1-3 Line Element Function Page
22-5
Chapter 22 Drawing
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
Property
(1)
Line Style
(2)
Line Size
22-6
Function
The Line Type allows the user to change the style of the line,
such as a line with an arrow, two arrows or dot(s).
Chapter 22 Drawing
No.
Property
Function
(3)
Line Color
22-7
Chapter 22 Drawing
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
22-8
Function
Chapter 22 Drawing
22-2 Rectangle
In addition to drawing rectangular pictures, the rectangle function enables the user to import
pictures from the picture bank. The invisible address property is added to this function.
When the entire editing screen is covered by the rectangle element and display of the
screen is needed, the user can trigger the invisible address to display the screen behind the
rectangle element.
Refer to the rectangle example in Table 22-2-1.
22-9
Chapter 22 Drawing
Rectangle Example
Table 22-2-1 Rectangle Example
Create any elements on the screen. The user can create the elements
that do not need memory addresses, such as basic shape elements.
Step 1: Create the Rectangle element and set the Invisible Address to
$5555.0.
Step 2: Cover the entire editing screen using the Rectangle element
as shown in the figure below.
Create
Elements
Create
Rectangle
Element
22-10
Chapter 22 Drawing
Rectangle Example
Table 22-2-1 Rectangle Example
Make
Screen
Macro
Action
Execution
Results
22-11
Chapter 22 Drawing
Double click the Rectangle icon and the following property setting screen appears.
Rectangle
Function Page
Preview
Content Description
The State and Language are not available for the Rectangle.
Main
Sets the line color, line width, round radius, foreground color,
transparent color and penetrate.
Picture
Sets the picture bank name, alignment, picture stretch mode, and
transparent color.
Details
Invisible address.
Coordinates
22-12
Chapter 22 Drawing
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
No
.
Property
(1)
Line Color
(2)
Line Width
Function
Chapter 22 Drawing
No
.
Property
Function
(3)
The software draws the rectangle element in clear color if the round
radius is not 0.
The maximum value of the round radius is defined by the minimum
value of the width and height of the element divided by 2.
The user can set the foreground color for the element.
Round
Radius
(4)
Foreground
Color
(5)
Transparen
t Color
22-14
Chapter 22 Drawing
No
.
Property
Function
Transparent
Color: Yes
Transparent
Color: No
(6)
Penetrate
Penetrate
: ON
22-15
Chapter 22 Drawing
No
.
Property
Function
Penetrate
: OFF
22-16
Chapter 22 Drawing
Picture
(1)
(2)
(3)
22-17
Chapter 22 Drawing
No.
Property
(1)
22-18
Function
The default value for Picture Bank Name is None. Users wishing
to select a display picture can select the desired picture in the
built-in picture bank from the pull-down menu.
Picture
Bank
Name
Chapter 22 Drawing
No.
Property
Function
Users can align pictures alignment with the alignment options.
Stretch modes include: Fill, Keep Aspect Ratio, and Actual Size.
Alignment
Fill
In the Fill mode,
the selected picture
will fill up the entire
display area.
(2)
Actual Size
In the Actual Size
mode, the picture
will be displayed in
its original size in
the display area.
Stretch
Mode
(3)
Transpare
nt Color
22-19
Chapter 22 Drawing
Details
(1)
No.
Property
Function
(1)
22-20
Invisible
Address
Chapter 22 Drawing
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
Function
22-21
Chapter 22 Drawing
22-3 Circle
Press and hold the left mouse key to drag a picture frame. It is a circle if the length is equal
to the width or an oval if the length is not equal to the width.
Double click the Circle icon and the following property setting screen appears.
Circle
Function Page
Preview
Main
Coordinates
Content Description
The State and Multi-Language are not available for the Circle.
Sets the line color, line size, Foreground Color, and transparent
color.
Sets the X-Y coordinate, width and height of the element.
Table 22-3-1 Circle Element Function Page
22-22
Chapter 22 Drawing
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
No.
Property
(1)
Line Color
(2)
Line Size
Function
The user can set the color of the line to be displayed.
22-23
Chapter 22 Drawing
No.
(3)
(4)
22-24
Property
Function
The user can set the foreground color for the element.
Foreground
Color
Transparent
Color
Chapter 22 Drawing
No.
Property
Function
Transparent
Color: Yes
Transparent
Color: No
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
Function
22-25
Chapter 22 Drawing
22-4 Polygon
The user can press the left mouse key to define each point of a polygon. When all points
are set up, press the right mouse key to Table the polygon.
Double click the Polygon icon and the following property setting screen appears.
Polygon
Function Page
Preview
Main
Coordinates
Content Description
The State and Language are not available to the Polygon.
Sets the line color, line size, Foreground Color, and
Transparent color.
Sets the X-Y coordinate, width and height of the element.
Table 22-4-1 Polygon Element Function Page
22-26
Chapter 22 Drawing
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
No.
Property
(1)
Line Color
(2)
Line Size
Function
The user can set the color of the line to be displayed.
22-27
Chapter 22 Drawing
No.
(3)
(4)
22-28
Property
Function
The user can set the foreground color for the element.
Foreground
Color
Transparent
Color
Chapter 22 Drawing
No.
Property
Function
Transparent
Color: Yes
Transparent
Color: No
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
Function
22-29
Chapter 22 Drawing
22-5 Text
User could use Text element to input displayed word.
Double click the Text icon and the following property setting screen appears.
Text
Function Page
Preview
Content Description
The State is not available for the Text, but the user can edit
multi-language data.
Main
Text
Sets the content, font, font size, font color, font effects, scaling,
and alignment of the text to be displayed.
Details
Coordinates
22-30
Chapter 22 Drawing
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
No.
(1)
(2)
Property
Function
The user can set the foreground color for the element.
Foregroun
d Color
Transpare
nt Color
22-31
Chapter 22 Drawing
No.
Property
Function
Transpar
ent
Color:
Yes
Transpar
ent
Color: No
(3)
Yes and No are available for selection. When Yes is selected, the
font is smooth without the sawtooth shape. When No is selected,
the font is displayed in sawtooth shape and is not smooth.
Font
Smooth
Smoothing:
Yes
Smoothing:
No
(4)
22-32
Language
When language data are defined, users can edit the properties of
text display from Language.
Chapter 22 Drawing
No.
Property
Function
22-33
Chapter 22 Drawing
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
Property
(1)
Text
(2)
22-34
Text
Properties
Function
Users can input the text to be displayed in the text box.
Chapter 22 Drawing
No.
Property
Function
Multi-Languag Users can add Multi-Language text data from the
Multi-Language Text Page. As shown in the Text Properties
e Text Data
Figure, users can input English text in the English field.
(3)
Details
(1)
No.
Property
Function
(1)
Invisible
Address
22-35
Chapter 22 Drawing
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
22-36
Function
Chapter 22 Drawing
22-6 Scale
The user can use the Scale element to present the curve value of the History Trend Chart.
It provides Primary Scale Counts and Secondary Scale Counts options, and the user can
define the Data Type, Data Format, Min. value and Max. value for the scale element. The
user can also determine whether to show the mark or only show the scale.
Double click the Scale icon and the following property setting screen appears.
Scale
Function Page
Preview
Content Description
The State and Language are not available for the Scale.
Main
Text
Coordinates
22-37
Chapter 22 Drawing
Main
(5)
(1)
(2)
(6)
(3)
(7)
(8)
(4)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
22-38
Function
The Data Type option supports two Tableats: Word and Double Word.
Data Type
Data
Format
Chapter 22 Drawing
No.
Property
Function
(3)
Min.
Value/Max.
Value
The legal range of the min. and max. values is determined by the
settings of the data type, integer place and decimal place. In the
following example, no decimal is set.
Integer Decimal
Data Type Data Tableat
Legal Range
Place Place
4
0
BCD
0~9999
5
0
Word Signed Decimal -3278~32767
Unsigned Decimal 0~65535
BCD
0~99999999
Double
Signed Decimal -2147483648~2147483647
Word
Unsigned Decimal 0~4294697295
(4)
(5)
Integer
Digits
/ Fractional
5
8
10
10
0
0
0
0
The user can set the integer digits and fractional to be displayed.
Yes and No are available for selection. When Yes is selected, the
numeric marks on the scale will be displayed. When No is selected, the
scale is displayed without numeric marks.
Display
Mark
Display Mark:
Yes
22-39
Chapter 22 Drawing
No.
Property
Function
Display Mark:
No
The user can set the primary and secondary scale counts up to 99.
The Style option supports Standard, Rotation 90, Rotation 180 and
Rotation 270. The user can use this option to change the appearance
of the element.
Standard
Rotation 90
Rotation 180 Rotation 270
Main Scale
(6)
Sub Scale
Number
(7)
(8)
22-40
Scale
Color
Style
Chapter 22 Drawing
No.
Property
Function
Text
(1)
No.
Property
(1)
Text
Properties
Function
The user can set the font, size and color of the text to be
displayed.
22-41
Chapter 22 Drawing
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
22-42
Function
Chapter 22 Drawing
22-7 Table
The Table element provides the function same as Office Editor. It allows the user to
increase the number of rows and lines or set the color for the row and line to make the
appearance display more varied.
Double click the Table icon and the following property setting screen appears.
Table
Function Page
Preview
Content Description
The State and Multi-Language are not available to the Table.
Main
Sets the border color, Grid Color, rows, lines, and style.
Sets the row header, line header, row interlacing, line interlacing,
row header interlacing, and line header interlacing.
Sets the row spacing and line spacing.
Text
Coordinates
22-43
Chapter 22 Drawing
Main
(4)
(1)
(5)
(2)
(6)
(7)
(3)
No.
Property
Function
The user can determine whether to display the header on the first
row and what color of the row is to be displayed.
Checked
(1)
Row
Header
Unchecked
22-44
Chapter 22 Drawing
No.
Property
Function
The user can determine whether to display the header on the first
line and what color of the line is to be displayed.
Checked
Column
Header
Unchecked
The user can determine whether to use the row interlacing Tablet
and set the interlacing display color.
Checked
(2)
Row
Interlacing
Unchecked
Column
Interlacing
The user can determine whether to use the line interlacing Tablet
and set the interlacing display color.
22-45
Chapter 22 Drawing
No.
Property
Function
Checked
Unchecked
Checked
Row
Header
Interlacing
Unchecked
Line
Header
Interlacing
22-46
Chapter 22 Drawing
No.
Property
Function
Checked
Unchecked
Before
Adjustment
(3)
Sep. Rows
Evenly
After
Adjustment
22-47
Chapter 22 Drawing
No.
Property
Function
The function is used to adjust the height and make it even
between columns.
Before
Adjustment
After
Adjustment
Sep.
Column
Evenly
(4)
22-48
Border
Color
Users can define the row height. And the sum cannot exceed the
element size.
The user can set the border color for the element.
Chapter 22 Drawing
No.
Property
Function
(5)
(6)
(7)
The user can set the Grid Color for the element.
Grid Color
Numbers of
Rows
Numbers of
Columns
Background
Color
22-49
Chapter 22 Drawing
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
22-50
Function
Chapter 23 Recipe
Contents
23-1
23-2
23-3
23-4
23-5
23-1
Chapter 23 Recipe
Chapter 23 Recipe
This chapter describes the Recipe function that the DOPSoft software provides, the
memory address it occupies and the method to set the recipe. A recipe is comprised of a
number of parameters. In industrial application, different products match their own
parameters and the user can make the products correspond to different recipe parameters
by changing the type of the products. The user can also set and maintain the recipe
parameters. The established recipe form can be uploaded from HMI to PLC, or vice versa.
The Recipe function enables the user to store a large number of numeric parameters in the
HMI memory area. For example, the baking time varies for different types of bread, and
these time variables can be controlled by the HMI Recipe function to reduce the load of the
controller. The register of the controller, thus, can be conserved for more flexible
applications.
Recipe Setup
32 bits Recipe
Enhance Recipe
Recipe
Setup
Retained
Area
Data
Format
Recipe
32 bits
recipe
Enhance
Recipe
23-2
Chapter 23 Recipe
Recipe Register
RCPNO
For the 16 bits Recipe, the size of each recipe register is 16 bits (16 bits = 1 word).
Assuming that the Length is L and the Group is G, the actual recipe counts are L*G =
words.
Revision June, 2015
23-3
Chapter 23 Recipe
NOTE:
The recipe number register does not provide the non-volatile function, and the data in
the register cannot be maintained when HMI is powered off.
Chapter 23 Recipe
Device Type
Accessing Range
Word
RCPn
RCP0~RCP65535
Bit
RCPn
RCP0.0~RCP65535.15
The address accessing range provided by RCP is limited according to the recipe size that
users created. Assume the recipe size is length 3*group 3, then RCP address is range from
RCP0 to RCP11. When creating address of RCP12, a warning message will pop up. Please
see the figure below.
Revision June, 2015
23-5
Chapter 23 Recipe
If the retained area is set to USB Disk or SD Card, the editable size of a 16 bits Recipe is
(L*G) = 4194304. The user can enter [View] [Memory List] to check the 16 bits Recipe
size and capacity.
23-6
Chapter 23 Recipe
If the retained area is set to HMI, the editable size of a 16 bits Recipe is (L*G) = 65536
words, or 64K. Hence, when the currently edited 16 bits Recipes are larger than 64K, a
warning message will appear on the Recipe Setup window to remind the user that the
recipe size has exceeded the allowable limit.
23-7
Chapter 23 Recipe
23-8
Chapter 23 Recipe
Enter [Options] [Recipe] to create 16 bits Recipe data. By setting the recipe, the user can
write a large number of batch data to PLC using the recipe control flag in the control area,
or read the data from PLC to HMI. The recipe can be used for control applications in the
industry. It is very helpful in processing a large number of data.
23-9
Chapter 23 Recipe
Create a numeric element. Set the Write Address to Internal Memory and
select RCPNO as the element type. This element is used for selection of
the recipe group.
Set 16 bits
Recipe
Create
Numeric
Element
23-10
Chapter 23 Recipe
23-11
Chapter 23 Recipe
Step 1: Use the configured recipe size (L*G = 3 x 3) and put it in the
formula L * (G+1) to gain the actually configured RCPs = RCP0~RCP11.
Step 2: Create 12 numeric display elements and set the Read Address to
Internal Memory RCP0 and so on.
Create
Numeric
Display
Element
NOTE:
The RCP0~RCP2 created are the recipe buffers and the actual recipe
data RCPs are RCP3~RCP11. For more information, refer to Figure
23-1-4 16 bits Recipe Buffer Configuration.
23-12
Chapter 23 Recipe
Create 3 numeric display elements D20, D21 and D23 to show the
change of the data when the user reads or writes PLC recipes.
Set the Read Address of the numeric display element to Base_Port's D20.
Create
Numeric
Display
Element
Set
Recipe
Control
Flag in
Control
Block
23-13
Chapter 23 Recipe
23-14
Chapter 23 Recipe
After creation of all elements, perform the compilation and download the
screen data and recipe to HMI.
Create
Permanen
t Numeric
Button
Element
Select a recipe group. The recipe data will be displayed in the created
RCP0~RCP11 with reference to the selected recipe group. The RCP0~RCP2
created are the recipe buffers and the RCPs for the first group of recipe data
are actually RCP3~RCP11.
Execution
Results
Activate the Recipe Write button and the recipe data of the selected group will
Revision June, 2015
23-15
Chapter 23 Recipe
be written to PLC. Activate the Recipe Read button and the recipe data that
were written to the PLC will be read back to HMI with reference to the selected
recipe group. The recipe data will be changed to match the content of the
selected group.
Recipe
Read
Recipe
Write
23-16
Chapter 23 Recipe
Retained
Area
Address
23-17
Chapter 23 Recipe
The Length and Group represent the length and group size that the
user entered. With these values set up, the user can click [Configure]
to create the form.
The Length and Group cannot be set to 0. If any of the values is set to
0, an error message will appear to warn the user.
Length/Group
23-18
Chapter 23 Recipe
23-19
Chapter 23 Recipe
After the Length and Group are set, click the [Configure] button to
generate a form in the blank area with L*G as its size. For example,
with 4 and 3 as the settings for the Length and Group, respectively,
the size of the form is 4 x 3.
NOTE:
Due to the limit of HMI memory, the size of the recipe should not be
greater than 64K (L*G not greater than 65536). Otherwise, the
following warning message will appear:
The user can complete the form with recipe data after the
configuration.
The [Open] function provides CSV and RCP file formats for the user
to import the recipe.
Configure
Open
23-20
Chapter 23 Recipe
The opened and imported recipe file only provides the content of the
recipe data. The address of the recipe does not support loading the
address that was set up previously. If a 32-bit RCP or CSV recipe file
is opened as a 16 bits Recipe, the data loaded will not be displayed
normally.
23-21
Chapter 23 Recipe
23-22
Chapter 23 Recipe
The [Save] function enables the user to save the current 16 bits
Recipe. Like the Open function, the Save function supports CSV and
RCP file formats.
The recipe data that the user saved does not support the recipe
address set up by the Save function.
The [Reset] function is used to empty the configured form. The user
needs to enter the length and group values after the reset for the next
configuration of the form.
Save
Before
Reset
Reset
After
Reset
Clear
The [Clear] function is used to clear the recipe data in the form to 0.
23-23
Chapter 23 Recipe
Before
clear
After
Clear
23-24
Chapter 23 Recipe
The [Print] function is used to output the current recipe data to the
printer and print it out.
After the 16 bits Recipe properties are set up, click [OK] to save the
changes and leave the Recipe Setup window.
When the [OK] button is pressed, the length and group values that the
user entered will be checked again for their change or excess.
If the length or group size exceeds the allowable limit, the following
two messages will appear:
OK
23-25
Chapter 23 Recipe
Cancel
23-26
If the length or group size is inconsistent with the configured form, the
data will also be checked when the OK button is pressed for their
change and the following message will appear:
Click [Cancel] to leave the Recipe Setup window without saving any
change of the data. It has the same effect as pressing the X mark at
the upper right corner of the window.
Chapter 23 Recipe
32 bits recipe has its own registers, which are RCP, RCPNO and RCPG.
RCP
Recipe register
RCPNO
RCPG
RCP and RCPNO are shared with 16 bits recipe, which already mentioned before. The
Revision June, 2015
23-27
Chapter 23 Recipe
NOTE:
The recipe group register does not provide the non-volatile function, and the data in the
register cannot be maintained when HMI is powered off.
23-28
Chapter 23 Recipe
23-29
Chapter 23 Recipe
The recipe number register does not provide the non-volatile function, and the data in
the register cannot be maintained when HMI is powered off.
23-30
Chapter 23 Recipe
23-31
Chapter 23 Recipe
Set 32
bits recipe
23-32
Chapter 23 Recipe
Step 4: Repeat Step 1 to set both Length and Group to 3. The recipe data
are shown below:
Step 5: Repeat Step 1 to set both Length and Group to 3. The recipe data
are shown below:
23-33
Chapter 23 Recipe
Create a numeric element. Set the Write Address to Internal Memory and
select RCPG as the element type. This element is used for selection of the
recipe grouping.
Create a numeric element. Set the Write Address to Internal Memory and
select RCPNO as the Element Type. This element is used for selection of
the recipe number.
Create
Numeric
Element
23-34
Chapter 23 Recipe
23-35
Chapter 23 Recipe
Step 1: Before the numeric display element is created to display the 32-bit
recipe register, the user can use the recipe register formula
[(L*(G+1)-1) }] to gain the number that n in RCPn represents. Put the size
of the recipe (L*G = 3 x 3) in the formula to gain RCPn = RCP0~RCP11.
Step 2: Create 12 numeric display elements and set the Read Address
to Internal Memory RCP0 and so on.
Create
Numeric
Display
Element
NOTE:
The RCP0~RCP2 created are the recipe buffers and the actual recipe
data RCPs are RCP3~RCP11. For more information, refer to Figure
23-2-1 32 bits Recipe Buffer Configuration.
23-36
Chapter 23 Recipe
Create
Numeric
Display
Element
Set the Read Address of the numeric display element to Base_Port D20.
23-37
Chapter 23 Recipe
Create 2 permanent numeric buttons. Set the Write Address to D5 and the
Setting to 2 and 4, respectively, corresponding to Bit 1 and Bit 2 of the
Recipe Control flag D5. This setup is used for read and write of the recipe.
Set
Recipe
Control
Flag in
Control
Block
Create
Permane
nt
Numeric
Button
Element
23-38
Chapter 23 Recipe
23-39
Chapter 23 Recipe
After creation of all elements, perform the compilation and download the
screen data and recipe to HMI.
The recipe grouping is set to 0 by default after the download, indicating that the
data displayed is 16 bits Recipe data. The user must change the setting of the
recipe grouping to 1 to display 32 bits recipe data.
Execution
Results
The recipe data will be displayed in the created RCP0~RCP11 with reference
to the selected recipe grouping. The RCP0~RCP2 created are the recipe
buffers and the RCPs for the first group of recipe data are actually
23-40
Chapter 23 Recipe
RCP3~RCP11.
Activate the Recipe Write button and the recipe data of the selected group will
be written to PLC. Activate the Recipe Read button and the recipe data that
were written to the PLC will be read back to HMI with reference to the selected
recipe group. The recipe data will be changed to match the content of the
selected group.
Recipe
Read
23-41
Chapter 23 Recipe
Recipe
Write
23-42
Chapter 23 Recipe
The
must be clicked to add 32 bits recipe data in order to enter
the 32 Bits Recipe Setup window.
Add
Address
Chapter 23 Recipe
23-44
Chapter 23 Recipe
The user enters the length and group sizes of the recipe
in the Length and Group fields, respectively. The L*G size
of the recipe should not be greater than 50MB.
Length
Group
Data
Format
23-45
Chapter 23 Recipe
23-46
Chapter 23 Recipe
Integer
Digits
Signed Decimal
Unsigned Decimal
Fractiona
l Digits
Floating
23-47
Chapter 23 Recipe
The [Open] function provides CSV and RCP file formats for the user
to import the recipe.
The opened and imported recipe file only provides the content of the
recipe data. The address of the recipe does not support loading the
Open
23-48
Chapter 23 Recipe
address that was set up previously. If a 16-bit RCP or CSV recipe file
is opened as a 32 bits recipe, the data loaded will not be displayed
normally and an error message will appear.
23-49
Chapter 23 Recipe
The [Save] function enables the user to save the current 32 bits
recipe. Unlike the Open function, the Save function only supports
CSV file format.
The recipe data that the user saved does not support the recipe
address set up by the Save function.
The [Setup] function is enabled and operable only when there are
data in the 32 bits recipe. This function enables the user to change
the length and group sizes as well as data format.
Save
Remove
Setup
23-50
Chapter 23 Recipe
23-51
Chapter 23 Recipe
This field is used to enter the recipe address. The user can also use
the Add function to enter and set the address.
The [
This function is used to exit the editing window of the recipe data. The
data will be saved no matter whether they are changed or not. The
recipe address will also be checked for its correctness when pressing
X.
Retained
Area
X on the
Recipe 32
Window
23-52
Chapter 23 Recipe
Element Type
Access Range
Word
*RCPn
RCP0~RCP65535
Note: n
= Word (0-65535)
Address accessing range provided by *RCP is limited according to the recipe size created
by users. Assuming the recipe size is length 3* group 3, then address of RCP is range from
*RCP0 to *RCP11. When creating address *RCP12, a warning message will pop up.
Please see figure below:
23-53
Chapter 23 Recipe
Step2: Create numeric entry element and select the device type as
*RCP, then enter 3 to address.
Step 3: Create numeric entry element and select the device type as
RCP, then enter 3 to address.
Step 4: Create numeric entry element and select the device type as
RCP, then enter 65535 to address.
Step 5: Create Clock macro command *RCP3 = *RCP3 + 1.
Sets16
bits
recipe
Create
Numeric
Entry
Element
23-54
Chapter 23 Recipe
Result
23-55
Chapter 23 Recipe
NOTE
Chapter 23 Recipe
Enhance recipe has its own register, including ENRCP, ENRCPNO, ENRCPG and
*ENRCP.
ENRCP
ENRCPNO
ENRCPG
*ENRCP
23-57
Chapter 23 Recipe
NOTE:
The recipe number register does not provide the non-volatile function, and the data in
the register cannot be maintained when HMI is powered off.
23-58
Chapter 23 Recipe
23-59
Chapter 23 Recipe
NOTE:
The recipe number register does not provide the non-volatile function, and the data in
the register cannot be maintained when HMI is powered off.
23-60
Chapter 23 Recipe
23-61
Chapter 23 Recipe
Click
Setup
Enhance
Recipe
23-62
Chapter 23 Recipe
Step 5: Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 to set length 3 and group 3. The
recipe data is shown as below:
23-63
Chapter 23 Recipe
Step 6: Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 to set length 3 and group 3. The
recipe data is shown as below:
23-64
Chapter 23 Recipe
Create one numeric entry element. Set the Write Address to Internal
Memory. Choose ENRCPG as device type, which is used for selection
of enhance recipe grouping.
Create one numeric entry element. Set the Write Address as Internal
Memory. Choose RCPNO as device type, which is used for selection of
recipe grouping.
Create
Numeric
Entry
Element
23-65
Chapter 23 Recipe
23-66
Chapter 23 Recipe
Create
Numeric
Display
Element
Step 3: Create a numeric display element and set its read address as
ENRCP1 of Internal Memory. Setup its presentation method base on
recipe field 2. Data type is Double Word and memory format is floating.
Then, set the integer digits to 3, fractional to 2.
23-67
Chapter 23 Recipe
Step 4: Create one character display element. Set the Read Address to
ENRCP2 of Internal Memory. Setup its presentation method base on
recipe field 3. And set the string length to 10 (The length of 1 word can
store two bits.)
Step 5: Repeat Step2 ~ Step4 and so on. The display element is range
from ENRCP3 to ENRCP11. Then, setup the memory format.
The following is displayed when the creation is completed.
NOTE:
ENRCP0 ~ ENRCP2 are the buffer areas of recipe. The actual recipe
data is ENRCP3 ~ ENRCP11. Please refer to Figure 23-4-3 Enhance
23-68
Chapter 23 Recipe
23-69
Chapter 23 Recipe
Create a numeric display element. Its read address is D101, data type is
Double Word and memory format is floating. Its integer digits is set to 3
and fractional is 2.
Create a character display element and set the string length to 10.
Create
Numeric
Display
Element
23-70
Chapter 23 Recipe
23-71
Chapter 23 Recipe
Create 2 set constant buttons. Set the Write Address to D8 and the
setting value to 2 and 4, respectively, corresponding to Bit 1 and Bit 2 of
the Enhance Recipe Control flag D8. This setup is used for read and
write of the recipe.
Set Recipe
Control
Flag in
Control
Block
Create Set
Constant
Button
Element
23-72
Chapter 23 Recipe
23-73
Chapter 23 Recipe
After creation of all elements, perform the compilation and download the
screen data and recipe to HMI.
After enhance recipe number is loading into HMI, its default value is 1. To
display different number, users can select different enhance recipe number
according to different demands.
Result
23-74
Chapter 23 Recipe
Activate HMI to PLC button and the recipe data of the selected group will
be written to PLC. Activate PLC to HMI button and the recipe data that
were written to the PLC will be read back to HMI with reference to the
selected enhance recipe group. The recipe data will be changed to match
the content of the selected group.
Recipe
Write
(HMI to
PLC)
23-75
Chapter 23 Recipe
Recipe
Read
(PLC
to HMI)
23-76
Chapter 23 Recipe
Add
Through
Address
Chapter 23 Recipe
23-78
Chapter 23 Recipe
Field
Group
Data
Format
NOTE:
If selecting Char as the data format, the character set as
separator cannot be used as its content. Otherwise, it
might cause data error or fail to import the data.
Read
Length
Chapter 23 Recipe
23-80
Chapter 23 Recipe
Floating
Integer
Digits
Fraction
Open
23-81
Chapter 23 Recipe
23-82
The opened and imported recipe file provides recipe contents only. Its
address does not support 16 or 32 bits recipe. If the CSV file of 16 bits
recipe or 32 bits recipe is opened by enhance recipe, it might be
unable to display recipe data and a pop-up message will prompt to
show error.
Chapter 23 Recipe
23-83
Chapter 23 Recipe
Save As
Delete
Setting
23-84
Only when recipe data exists in enhance recipe, can the user use
Settingto change the content of field, group and data format.
Chapter 23 Recipe
23-85
Chapter 23 Recipe
Set recipe address. Users can self enter recipe address in this field.
Or users can setup address through Add function.
This function stores the data anyway when complete editing recipe
data and will judge if the recipe address is wrong.
The recipe table displays 25 groups of recipe data in one page. Users
can quickly select the recipe group.
first.
Data
Retained
X in
Enhance
Recipe
Window
23-86
Chapter 23 Recipe
23-87
Chapter 23 Recipe
23-88
Chapter 23 Recipe
23-89
Chapter 23 Recipe
Element Type
Access Range
Word
*ENRCPn
ENRCP0~ENRCP65535
Chapter 23 Recipe
Step 1: Create the Enhance Recipe (Fields set to 64 and Groups set to
1024) and set ENRCP3 to 65535.
Step 2: Create numeric entry element and select its memory address as
*ENRCP 3.
Step 3: Create numeric entry element and select its memory address as
ENRCP 3.
Step 4: Create numeric entry element and select its memory address as
ENRCP 65535.
Step 5: Create Clock macro command *ENRCP3 = *ENRCP3+1.
Set
Enhance
Recipe
Create
Numeric
Entry
Element
Result
23-91
Chapter 24 Macro
Contents
24-1 Types of Macros ........................................................................................................ 3
24-1-1 ON Macro/OFF Macro .................................................................................... 5
24-1-2 Before Execute Macro .................................................................................... 6
24-1-3 After Execute Macro ....................................................................................... 7
24-1-4 Screen Open Macro ....................................................................................... 8
24-1-5 Screen Close Macro ..................................................................................... 10
24-1-6 Screen Cycle Macro ..................................................................................... 12
24-1-7 Submacro ..................................................................................................... 15
24-1-8 Initial Macro .................................................................................................. 24
24-1-9 Background Macro ....................................................................................... 26
24-1-10 Clock Macro ................................................................................................. 29
24-2 Macro Editing Window ............................................................................................ 33
24-3 Macro Commands ................................................................................................... 41
24-3-1 Arithmetic Operation ..................................................................................... 48
24-3-2 Logical Operation ......................................................................................... 68
24-3-3 Data Transfer................................................................................................ 78
24-3-4 Data Conversion ........................................................................................... 90
24-3-5 Comparison ................................................................................................ 106
24-3-6 Flow Control ............................................................................................... 161
24-3-7 Bit Settings ................................................................................................. 168
24-3-8 COM Port ................................................................................................... 173
24-3-9 Drawing ...................................................................................................... 202
24-3-10 File Access ................................................................................................. 209
24-3-11 Others......................................................................................................... 219
24-3-12 Industrial Application .................................................................................. 260
24-4 Macro Error Messages .......................................................................................... 267
24-1
Chapter 24 Macro
Chapter 24 Macro
This chapter mainly covers the types of macros and macro commands supported by
DOPSoft and how to configure macro commands.
Macro types:
ON Macro
OFF Macro
Before Execute Macro
After Execute Macro
Screen Open Macro
Type of Macro
DOPSoft provides a list of macro commands for users to perform various operations. They
are grouped based on their natures, including the following categories: Arithmetic, Logical,
Data transfer, Data conversion, Comparison, Flow control, Bit setting, Communication and
Drawing, File Access, and Other macros.
Chapter 24 Macro
Feature
ON Macro
OFF Macro
After users touch the onscreen button element, this macro will be
executed first before all other procedures programmed for this
button element. If the state of the button is not changed by user
touches, then this macro will not be executed (ex. Commands of
external controllers or other macro commands).
Available for all button elements and input elements.
Before Execute
Macro
After users touched the onscreen button element, this macro will
be executed first before all other procedures programmed for this
button element. If the state of the button is not changed by user
touches, then this macro will not be executed (ex. Commands of
external controllers or other macro commands).
Available for all button elements and input elements.
Screen Open
Macro
Screen Close
Macro
Screen Cycle
Macro
After Execute
Macro
Sub Macro
Initial Macro
Background
Macro
Clock Macro
Revision June, 2015
24-3
Chapter 24 Macro
24-4
Chapter 24 Macro
24-5
Chapter 24 Macro
24-6
Chapter 24 Macro
24-7
Chapter 24 Macro
Each screen created within DOPSoft contains a Screen Open Macro and it is executed
each time a screen is opened or switched to another. Other macros or commands are
executed after the Screen Open Macro.
24-8
Chapter 24 Macro
24-9
Chapter 24 Macro
Each screen created within DOPSoft contains a Screen Close Macro and it is executed
each time a screen is closed or switched to another. Other macros or commands are
executed after the Screen Close Macro.
24-10
Chapter 24 Macro
24-11
Chapter 24 Macro
Each screen created within DOPSoft contains a Screen Cycle Macro and it is executed,
based on the preset delay duration, after the Screen Open Macro. Users can double click
on the screen to set the macro cycle delay in the screen properties dialog window. The
delay duration refers to how long it will takes before executing the Screen Cycle Macro
again. The default unit is 100ms.
24-12
Chapter 24 Macro
24-13
Chapter 24 Macro
24-14
Chapter 24 Macro
24-1-7 Sub-macro
The Submacro can be edited by going into [Options] [Submacro].
24-15
Chapter 24 Macro
24-16
Chapter 24 Macro
One Sub-macro supports a maximum of 512 submacros (identified by their number from 1
~ 512). A submacro is similar to a subprogram found in other programming languages.
Users can put repeated functions or procedures into a submacro and call it when necessary.
This not only saves time to write repeated macro codes but is also easier to maintain.
NOTE:
Users can call a submacro by its NO or its alias given by users. The name of a submacro
can be either numerical value, English, or Chinese characters, and a maximum of 64
characters are allowed for the name.
24-17
Chapter 24 Macro
24-18
Chapter 24 Macro
Sub-macro also provides the function of password protection. Users can encrypt each
sub-macro.
When check protection function, users will be asked to enter the password.
If sub-macro (1) has been encrypted, users have to enter the password to decrypt it and
edit sub-macro (1).
24-19
Chapter 24 Macro
To disable the protection function, users will be asked to enter the password that just set for
sub-macro (1).
When the sub-macro is set with protection, functions that would be influenced are shown as
below:
24-20
Chapter 24 Macro
If the protected sub-macro is set with station number for communication, it will be
failed to change the station number.
If the station number of the protected sub-macro is 1, change the default station
number of PLC to 2, and then check the protected sub-macro. You will find that
the station number has to be 1, which is unchangeable.
(1)
If $100 is set in the protected macro, $100 cannot be found when searching the
address.
(2)
(3)
If $100 is set in the protected macro, $100 cannot be replaced by $500 when
executing Replace function.
24-21
Chapter 24 Macro
(4)
(5)
24-22
Assuming that Call command is included in macro, right click to open sub-macro
window. If it is protected, users will be asked to enter the password.
Chapter 24 Macro
Change the Link Name to Link3. In protected sub-macro, Link2 cannot be changed to
Link3.
(6)
24-23
Chapter 24 Macro
The Initial Macro is the first macro to be executed right after the HMI starts up, and hence,
users can write common HMI initial values into this macro.
24-24
Chapter 24 Macro
24-25
Chapter 24 Macro
The Background Macro will be continuously executed during HMI operations. Whether it is
executed one line or several lines at a time (does not stop after the first sequence), this
macro will continue to be executed and repeat from the first line after it reaches the last line.
To define the number of lines to be executed each time, please go to [Options]
[Configuration] to set the [Background macro update cycle] and the maximum number of
lines for each update cycle is 512.
24-26
Chapter 24 Macro
Suppose there are 10 elements created onscreen and 6 macro commands are written
within the Background Macro. If the background macro update cycle is set to 3, then the
flow of the process is shown below:
24-27
Chapter 24 Macro
24-28
Chapter 24 Macro
The Clock Macro will be continuously executed during HMI operations. Unlike the
Background Macro, the Clock Macro will finish executing all commands within the macro
rather than one line or several lines at once. Similar to the Screen Cycle Macro, the Clock
Macro also repeats its executions based on the Clock Macro Delay Time. Users can
configure the delay time by going to [Options] [Configuration] to set the [Clock Macro
Delay Time]. So that each time the Clock Macro is executed, it will wait until the macro
delay time is completely elapsed. The default Clock Macro Delay Time is 100ms and the
maximum time length is 65535ms.
24-29
Chapter 24 Macro
Three levels of priority (high, medium, and low) are also available for users to configure the
priority of the Clock Macro. The order of priority can ensure the accurate delay time of
Clock Macro.
24-30
Chapter 24 Macro
24-31
Chapter 24 Macro
24-32
Chapter 24 Macro
The toolbar within the editing window is also available for users to design and edit macro
commands.
Functions of each icon on the Macro Toolbar are explained in the following table.
Functions of Macro Toolbar Icons
Table 24-2-1 Descriptions of Icons on the Macro Toolbar
Icon
Function
Open
Content Description
Open is equivalent to import. Two file formats are available: txt and mro.
24-33
Chapter 24 Macro
Save
24-34
Save is equivalent to Export, but only the txt file format is supported.
Users can save the edited macro as a backup or for use of other
screens.
Chapter 24 Macro
This function will refresh the updated macro and check if the syntaxes
are correct. If this button is not executed before exiting the current
Macro editing window (click the exit button), the users will be prompted
that the macro being edited has been updated.
Syntax check will be performed after clicking the update button. If there
is a syntax error, then the following error message will pop up.
Cut, Copy and Paste are used the same way as Microsoft Office and
users can also choose to perform these operations through hotkeys
(Cut: Ctrl + X; Copy: Ctrl + C; Paste: Ctrl + V).
Update
Cut
Copy
Paste
Syntax
Check
Revision June, 2015
24-35
Chapter 24 Macro
NOTE:
Syntax Check is not equivalent to compiling macros. Please consider
the compile function to compile.
Macro
Wizard
24-36
The purpose of the wizard is for users to more easily edit and type in
Macro commands and this will also eliminate typos.
Chapter 24 Macro
Previous
Next
Edit
Update
24-37
Chapter 24 Macro
Insert
Delete
Chapter 24 Macro
Double
Word
Signed
Command
Variable
24-39
Chapter 24 Macro
Users can enter memory addresses used in the macro via this function
to prevent address typos.
Input
Address
24-40
Chapter 24 Macro
Description
Addition
Subtraction
Multiplication
Division
Get Reminder
64 bit Multiplication
Repeated Addition
Floating Point
Addition
Floating Poiont
Subtraction
Floating Point
Multiplication
Floating Point
Division
Floating Point
Reminder
Sine Function
Cosine Function
24-41
Chapter 24 Macro
Category
Logical
Function
TAN
COT
SEC
CSC
Expression
Var1 = TAN(Var2) (Signed DW)
Var1 = COT(Var2) (Signed DW)
Var1 = SEC(Var2) (Signed DW)
Var1 = CSC(Var2) (Signed DW)
&&
NOT
<<
>>
MOV
Var1 = Var2
BMOV
FILL
FILLASC
ArrayCopy
Data
transfer
STRCAT
FMOV
Data
conversion
24-42
BCD
Var1 = BCD(Var2)
BIN
Var1 = BIN(Var2)
TODWORD
Var1 = TODWORD(Var2)
TOWORD
TOBYTE
SWAP
XCHG
MAX
MIN
TOHEX
Var1 = TOHEX(Var2)
Description
Tangent Function
Cotangent Function
Secant Function
Cosecant Function
Bitwise OR
Operation
Bitwise AND
Operation
Bitwise XOR
Operation
Bitwise NOT
Operation
SHL(Bitwise
Left-shift Operation)
SHR(Bitwise
Right-shift
Operation)
Data Moving
Operand
Move in Block
Copy Array
Fill in the Block
String to ASCII
Conversion
Connect String
Move floating point
data
Decimal to BCD
Conversion
BCD to Decimal
Conversion
WORD to Double
WORD Conversion
BYTE to Word
Conversion
Word to Byte
Conversion
Swap between high
bit and low bit of
WORD
Data Exchange
Get Maximum value
Get Minimum value
Convert 4 ASCII
characters to a four
digit integer in
hexadecimal format
Revision June, 2015
Chapter 24 Macro
Category
Function
Expression
TOASC
Var1 = TOASC(Var2)
FCNV
ICNV
SPRINTF
Comparison
IFTHEN GOTO
IFTHEN CALL
Revision June, 2015
Description
Convert
hexadecimal
integers into 4
Words ASCII
characters
Conversion of
integer into floating
point value
Conversion from
integer to floating
point value
Format String
If . Goto a certain
label identifier and
continue
subsequent
executions
Macro
24-43
Chapter 24 Macro
Category
Function
Expression
THEN CALL Var3
IF Var1 != Var2
IF != CALL
THEN CALL Var3
IF Var1 > Var2
IF > CALL
THEN CALL Var3
IF >=
IF Var1 >= Var2
CALL
THEN CALL Var3
IF Var1 < Var2
IF < CALL
THEN CALL Var3
IF <=
IF Var1 <= Var2
CALL
THEN CALL Var3
IF (Var1 && Var2)
IF AND ==
== 0 THEN CALL
0 CALL
Var3
IF (Var1 &&
IF AND !=
Var2) != 0 THEN
0 CALL
CALL Var3
IF == ON
IF Var1 == ON
CALL
THEN CALL Var2
IF == OFF
IF Var1 == OFF
CALL
THEN CALL Var2
IF ==
IF Var1 == Var2
IF !=
IF Var1 != Var2
IF >
IF Var1 > Var2
IF >=
IF Var1 >= Var2
IF <
IF Var1 < Var2
IF <=
IF Var1 <= Var2
IF AND ==
IF (Var1 && Var2)
0
== 0
IF AND !=
IF (Var1 &&
0
Var2) != 0
IF == ON
IF Var1 == ON
IF == OFF
IF Var1 == OFF
ELSEIF Var1 ==
ELSEIF ==
Var2
ELSEIF Var1 !=
ELSEIF !=
Var2
ELSEIF Var1 >
ELSEIF >
Var2
ELSEIF Var1 >=
ELSEIF >=
Var2
ELSEIF Var1 <
ELSEIF <
Var2
ELSEIF Var1 <=
ELSEIF <=
Var2
ELSEIF
ELSEIF (Var1 &&
AND == 0
Var2) == 0
ELSEIF
ELSEIF (Var1 &&
AND != 0
Var2) != 0
ELSEIF ==
ELSEIF Var1 ==
CALL
IF
ELSEIF
24-44
Description
If Then Call a
Submacro
Logical Comparison
Logical Comparison
Chapter 24 Macro
Category
Function
ELSE
ENDIF
FCMP
Flow control
Bit setting
GOTO
LABEL
CALL
RET
FOR
NEXT
END
BITON
BITOFF
LABEL Var1
CALL Var1
RET
FOR Var1
NEXT
END
BITON Var1
BITOFF Var1
BITNOT
BITNOT Var1
GETB
INITCOM
Communication
Expression
ON
ON
ELSEIF ==
ELSEIF Var1 ==
OFF
OFF
ELSE
ENDIF
Var1 = FCMP(Var2, Var3)
(Signed DW)
ADDSUM
XORSUM
PUTCHARS
GETCHARS
SELECTCOM
CLEARCOMBUFF
ER
SELECTCOM(Var1)
CLEARCOMBUFFER(Var1,
Var2)
CHRCHKSUM
Var1 = CHRCHKSUM("Var2",
Var3, Var4)
LOCKCOM
UNLOCKCOM
STATIONCHK
STATIONON
STATIONOFF
IPON
Revision June, 2015
Description
Logical Comparison
Logical Comparison
Comparison of
Floating Point Data
Label Identifier for
the current process
to unconditionally
jump to
Label Identifier
Call Sub-macro
Exit Sub-macro
Loop
End Macro
Set Bits to On
Set Bits Off
Set Bits to Inverse
State (ONOFF;
OFFON)
Acquire Bit State
COM Port
Initialization
Checksum
Calculation through
Addition
Checksum
Calculation through
XOR Operation
Output Character
by Com Port
Character
Acquisition through
Com Port
Com Port Selection
Com Port Buffer
Clearance
Calculation of String
Length and
Checksum
Lock Com Port
Unlock Com Port
Check COM Port
Status
Set Station On
Set Station Off
Enable IP Address
24-45
Chapter 24 Macro
Category
Function
IPOFF
IPCHANGE
Drawing
RECTANGLE
LINE
POINT
CIRCLE
FileSlotRead
FileSlotWrite
File Access
FileSlotRemove
FileSlotGetLength
FileSlotExport
FileSlotImport
24-46
Time Tick
Var1 = TIMETICK
GETLASTERROR
Var1 = GETLASTERROR
Comment
Delay
GETSYSTEMTIM
E
SETSYSTEMTIME
#
Delay(Var1)
GETHISTORY
Other
Expression
Var5, Var6)
Var1 = GETSYSTEMTIME
SETSYSTEMTIME(Var1)
Var1 = GETHISTORYVar2,
Var3, Var4, Var5, Var6
EXPORT
EXPORT(Var1)
EXRCP16
IMRCP16
EXRCP32
IMRCP32
EXENRCP
IMENRCP
Description
Disable IP Address
Change PLC IP
address and Port.
Draw Rectangle
Draw Line
Draw Point
Draw Ellipse
Read Files
Write Files
Remove Files
Accessing File
Length
Export Files
Import Files
Acquire System up
duration from
System Startup to
Present
Get Last Error
Value
Make Comment
System Delay
Acquire System
Time
Set System Time
Acquire Historical
Log
Export Report to an
External Device
Export 16 bit
Equation
Import 16 bit
Equation
Export 32 bit
Equation
Import 32 bit
Equation
Export Enhance
Recipe Equation
Import Enhance
Recipe Equation
Revision June, 2015
Chapter 24 Macro
Category
Function
EXHISTORY
Expression
Var1 = EXHISTORY(Var2, Var3,
Var4)
EXALARM
DISKFORMAT
BMPCAPTURE
Var1 = DISKFORMAT(Var2)
Var1 = BMPCAPTURE(Var2)
PLCDOWNLOAD
Var1 = PLCDOWNLOAD(Var2,
Var3, Var4, Var5, Var6)
GetCircleCenter
Var1 = GetCircleCenter(Var2,
Var3)
ECAM
Industrial
Application
Description
Export History Data
Export Alarm
Information
Format Disk
Screen Capture
Via HMI to
download DVP or
ISP file to PLC
Calculate the
Coordinate of Circle
Center
E-Cam Table
24-47
Chapter 24 Macro
+ (Addition)
Expression
Variable
Sum
Var 2
Addend
Var 3
Augend
Expression Explanation
Add Var 2 to Var 3 and save the
result in in Var 1.
NOTE
W: Word
DW: Double Word
Signed: Signed
Number
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
24-48
Constant
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Var 1 is an internal memory address and Var 2 and Var 3 are both constants.
Use addition command for $50 = 67 + 34, it will perform 67 + 34 and put results to $50.
Therefore $50 will display 101.
24-49
Chapter 24 Macro
- (Subtraction)
Expression
Difference
Variable
NOTE
W: Word
DW: Double Word
Signed: Signed
number
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Example
Var 1 is an internal memory address and Var 2 and Var 3 are both constants.
Use subtraction command for $50 = 67 - 34, it will perform 67 - 34 and put
results to $50. Therefore $50 will display 33.
24-50
Chapter 24 Macro
* (Multiplication)
Expression
Product
Variable
NOTE
W : Word
DW : Double
Word
Signed : Signed
number
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Example
Var 1 is an internal memory address and Var 2 and Var 3 are both constants.
Use multiplication command for $50 = 67 * 34, it will perform 67 * 34 and put
results to $50. Therefore $50 will display 2278.
24-51
Chapter 24 Macro
/ (Division)
Expression
Var 1 = Var 2 / Var 3 (W)
Var 1 = Var 2 / Var 3 (DW)
Var 1 = Var 2 / Var 3 (Signed W)
Var 1 = Var 2 / Var 3 (Signed
DW)
Variable
Quotient
Var 2
Dividend
Var 3
Divisor
Expression Explanation
Divide Var 2 by Var 3, and save
the result (Quotient) in Var 1.
NOTE
W: Word
DW: Double Word
Signed: Signed
number
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Var 1 is an internal memory address, and Var 2 and Var 3 are both constants.
Use division command for $50 = 68 / 34, it will perform 68 / 34 and put results
to $50. Therefore $50 will display 2.
24-52
Chapter 24 Macro
% (Get Reminder)
Expression
Var 1 = Var 2 % Var 3 (W)
Var 1 = Var 2 % Var 3 (DW)
Var 1 = Var 2 % Var 3 (Signed W)
Var 1 = Var 2 % Var 3 (Signed
DW)
Variable
Reminder
Var 2
Dividend
Var 3
Divisor
Expression Explanation
Divide Var 2 by Var 3, and save
the result (reminder) in Var 1.
NOTE
W: Word
DW: Double Word
Signed: Signed
number
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Example
Var 1 is an internal memory address, and Var 2 and Var 3 are both constants.
Use get reminder command for $50 = 67 % 34, it will perform 67 % 34 and put
results to $50. Therefore $50 will display 33.
24-53
Chapter 24 Macro
Variable
NOTE
Product
W : Word
DW : Double
Var 3
Multiplicand
Word
Expression Explanation
Signed : Signed
Multiply Var 2 and Var 3, and number
save the result in Var 1.
Var 2
Multiplier
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Example
Var 1 is an internal memory address, and Var 2 and Var 3 are both constants.
If checked Double Word, please also set data type of element for Double
Word.
Use MUL64 command for $50 =MUL64( 67 , 34), it will perform MUL64( 67 ,
34) and put results to $50. Therefore $50 will display 2278.
24-54
Chapter 24 Macro
Result of repeated
addition
Var 2
Starting address
NOTE
Length of repeated
Var 3 addition to be performed W : Word
since the first item
DW : Double
Word
Expression Explanation
Repeatedly add from Var 2 to
later variables (until length
specified in Var 3), and save the
result in Var 1.
Note: Repeated addition is performed with a rate of 2 bits from the starting address if
selecting Double World; repeated addition is performed with a rate of 1 bit from the starting
address if selecting Word.
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Example
Var 1 and Var 2 are both internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
Please tick the Double Word box.
Add up the values contained within the memory address of $0 forward for a length of
5 with an interval of 2 in between, and variables added: $0, $2, $4, $6 and $8.
24-55
Chapter 24 Macro
24-56
Chapter 24 Macro
Sum
Var 2
Addend
Var 3
Augend
Expression Explanation
Multiply Var 2 and Var 3, and
save and the result in Var 1.
Variable
NOTE
DW : Double
Word
Signed : Signed
number
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Example
Var 1 is an internal memory address, and Var 2 and Var 3 are both constants.
Use FADD command for $50 = FADD (67.5, 34.9), it will perform FADD (67.5,
34.9) and put results to $50. Therefore $50 will display 102.4.
24-57
Chapter 24 Macro
Difference
Var 2
Subtrahend
Var 3
Minuend
Expression Explanation
Subtract Var 2 from Var 3
and save the result in Var 1.
Variable
NOTE
DW : Double Word
Signed : Signed
number
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Example
Var 1 is an internal memory address, and Var 2 and Var 3 are constants.
Use FSUB command for $50 = FSUB (67.5, 34.9), it will perform FSUB (67.5,
34.9) and put results to $50. Therefore $50 will display 32.6.
24-58
Chapter 24 Macro
Product
Var 2
Multiplier
Var 3
Multiplicand
Expression Explanation
Multiply Var 2 and Var 3 and
save the result in Var 1.
Variable
NOTE
DW : Double Word
Signed : Signed
number
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Constant
Example
Var 1 is an internal memory address, Var 2 and Var 3 are both constants.
Use FMUL command for $50 = FMUL (67.5, 34.9), it will perform FMUL (67.5,
34.9) and put results to $50. Therefore $50 will display 2455.75.
24-59
Chapter 24 Macro
Variable
Quotient
Var 2
Dividend
Var 3
Divisor
Expression Explanation
Divide Var 2 by Var 3, and
save the result (Quotient) in
Var 1.
NOTE
DW : Double Word
Signed : Signed
number
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Example
Var 1 is an internal memory address, Var 2 and Var 3 are both constants.
Use FDIV command for $50 = FDIV (67.5, 34.9), it will perform FDIV (67.5,
34.9) and put results to $50. Therefore $50 will display 1.934.
24-60
Chapter 24 Macro
Variable
Reminder
Var 2
Dividend
Var 3
Divisor
Expression Explanation
Divide Var 2 by Var 3, and
save the result (reminder) in
Var 1.
NOTE
DW : Double Word
Signed : Signed
number
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Example
Use FMOD command for $50 = FMOD (67.5, 34.9), it will perform FMOD
(67.5, 34.9) and put results to $50. Therefore $50 will display 32.6.
24-61
Chapter 24 Macro
Var 1
Sine
Var 2
Expression Explanation
Perform the sine function
operation on Var 2, and store the
remainder in Var 1.
NOTE
DW : Double Word
Signed : Signed
number
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
Var 1
Var 2
PLC Register
Constant
Example
Use SIN command for $50 = SIN (67), it will perform SIN (67) and put results
to $50. Therefore $50 will display 0.921.
24-62
Chapter 24 Macro
Var 1
Cosine
Var 2
Expression Explanation
Perform the cosine function
operation on Var 2, and store the
remainder in Var 1.
NOTE
DW : Double Word
Signed : Signed
number
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
Var 1
Var 2
PLC Register
Constant
Example
Use COS command for $50 = COS (67), it will perform COS (67) and put
results to $50. Therefore $50 will display 0.391.
24-63
Chapter 24 Macro
Var 1
Tangent
Var 2
Expression Explanation
Perform the tangent function
operation on Var 2, and store the
remainder in Var 1.
NOTE
DW : Double Word
Signed : Signed
number
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
Var 1
Var 2
PLC Register
Constant
Example
Use TAN command for $50 = TAN (67), it will perform TAN (67) and put results
to $50. Therefore $50 will display 2.356.
24-64
Chapter 24 Macro
Cotangent
Var 2
Expression Explanation
Perform the cotangent function
operation on Var 2, and store the
remainder in Var 1.
NOTE
DW : Double Word
Signed : Signed
number
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
Var 1
Var 2
PLC Register
Constant
Example
Use COT command for $50 = COT (67), it will perform COT (67) and put
results to $50. Therefore $50 will display 0.424.
24-65
Chapter 24 Macro
Var 1
Secant
Var 2
Expression Explanation
Perform the secant function
operation on Var 2, and store
the remainder in Var 1.
NOTE
DW : Double Word
Signed : Signed
number
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
Var 1
Var 2
PLC Register
Constant
Example
Use SEC command for $50 = SEC (67), it will perform SEC (67) and put
results to $50. Therefore $50 will display 2.559.
24-66
Chapter 24 Macro
Var 1
Cosecant
Var 2
Expression Explanation
Perform the cosecant function
operation on Var 2, and store
the remainder in Var 1.
NOTE
DW : Double Word
Signed : Signed
number
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
Var 1
Var 2
PLC Register
Constant
Example
Use CSC command for $50 = CSC (67), it will perform CSC (67) and put
results to $50. Therefore $50 will display 1.086.
24-67
Chapter 24 Macro
| (Bitwise OR Operation)
Bitwise OR Operation characteristic
Operator
Result
0 OR 0
0 OR 1
1 OR 0
1 OR 1
Expression
Var 1
Result of OR
operation
Var 2
Logical operand
Var 3
Logical operand
Expression Explanation
NOTE
W : Word
DW : Double Word
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
24-68
Constant
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Var 1 is an internal memory address, and Var 2 and Var 3 are both constants.
This command will transfer values for Var 2 and Var 3 to binary like 2 = 0010, 3
= 0011, and then bitwise OR operator with 0010 and 0011. After bitwise OR
operator to get the result is 0011 and equals to 3.
24-69
Chapter 24 Macro
Result
0 OR 0
0 OR 1
1 OR 0
1 OR 1
Expression
Var 1
Var 2
Logical Operand
Var 3
Logical Operand
Expression Explanation
NOTE
W : Word
DW : Double Word
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
24-70
Constant
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Var 1 is an internal memory address, and Var 2 and Var 3 are both constants.
This command will transfer values for Var 2 and Var 3 to binary like 2 = 0010, 3
= 0011, and then bitwise AND operator with 0010 and 0011. After bitwise AND
operator to get the result is 0010 and equals to 2.
24-71
Chapter 24 Macro
Result
0 OR 0
0 OR 1
1 OR 0
1 OR 1
Expression
Var 1
Result of Bitwise
XOR operation
Var 2
Logical Operand
Var 3
Logical Operand
Expression Explanation
NOTE
W : Word
DW : Double Word
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
24-72
Constant
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Var 1 is an internal memory address, and Var 2 and Var 3 are both constants.
This command will transfer values for Var 2 and Var 3 to binary like 2 = 0010, 3
= 0011, and then bitwise XOR operator with 0010 and 0011. After bitwise XOR
operator to get the result is 0001 and equals to 1.
24-73
Chapter 24 Macro
Result
NOT 0
NOT 1
Expression
Variable
Result of Bitwise
NOT Operation
Var 2
Logical Operand
Expression Explanation
Perform the Bitwise NOT
operation on Var 2 and save the
result in Var 1.
W : Word
DW : Double Word
Signed : Signed
number
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Var 1
Var 2
24-74
NOTE
Constant
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Var 1 is an internal memory address, and Var 2 is a constant.
24-75
Chapter 24 Macro
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Expression Explanation
NOTE
W : Word
DW : Double Word
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Example
Var 1 and Var 2 are both internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
24-76
Chapter 24 Macro
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Expression Explanation
NOTE
W : Word
DW : Double Word
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Example
Var 1 and Var 2 are both internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
24-77
Chapter 24 Macro
Context
Variable
Var 1
Destination
Address
Var 2
Source Data
Expression Explanation
Copy source data contained in Var 2
to Var 1, and data contained in Var 2
will not change.
W : Word
DW : Double Word
Signed : Signed
number
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Var 1
Var 2
24-78
NOTE
Constant
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Use MOV command for $50 = $67, it will perform move with input value at $67
to $50. If input value is 34 at $67, therefore $50 will display 34.
24-79
Chapter 24 Macro
Var 1
Destination Address
Var 2
Var 3
NOTE
W : Word
Expression Explanation
Bulk-copy the entire block with the range
specified in Var 3 from Var 2 to Var 1.
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Constant
Example
Var 1 and Var 2 are both internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
It will perform move 3 data length from $67 to $50. Therefore when input value
at $67, $68, $69 will move data to $50, $51, $52.
24-80
Chapter 24 Macro
24-81
Chapter 24 Macro
NOTE
Returned Value
Var 1
Failure
Success
Var 2
Target Address
Var 3
Var 4
Source Address
Var 5
Var 6
Moving Length
(unit: WORD)
Expression Explanation
Variable
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Var 4
Var 5
Var 6
24-82
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
String
Constant
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Address
$0
$1
Offset
$2
$3
$4
$5
+0
+1
+2
+3
$6
$19
$20
$21
$22
$24
$24
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
$25
$26
Copy the offset amount (4, the representative address is $24) specified by source address ($20)
to the offset amount (3, the representative address is $5) specified by target address $2. See the
figure below:
24-83
Chapter 24 Macro
Variable
Var 1
Destination Address
of the Source Data
Var 2
Source value
Var 3
Length
Expression Explanation
NOTE
W : Word
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
24-84
Constant
Example
Var 1 is an internal memory address, and Var 2 and Var 3 are both constants.
Input value at $67 and will fill the value for 3 data length from $50, $51 and
$52.
Chapter 24 Macro
24-85
Chapter 24 Macro
Destination address
for the string
Var 2
String
Expression Explanation
NOTE
W : Word
Variable
Var 1
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
String
Var 2
Example
24-86
Chapter 24 Macro
NOTE
Returned Value
Var 1
Failure
Success
Var 2
Target address
Var 3
Source address
Var 4
Variable
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Var 4
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
24-87
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Var 1 is an internal memory address, Var 2 and Var 3 are strings and Var 4 is a
constant.
Create the numeric entry element and set the address to $50. Also, create the
character entry element with the address of $100 and $200.
Then, please enter the following values.
24-88
Chapter 24 Macro
Variable
Var 1
Destination
Address
Var 2
Source data
address
Expression Explanation
Copy floating point source
data contained in Var 2 to Var
1, and the floating point
contained in Var 2 will not
change.
NOTE
DW : Double Word
Signed : Signed
number
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Var 1
Var 2
Constant
Example
Put 67.5 floating data to $50, therefore $50 will display 67.5.
24-89
Chapter 24 Macro
Variable
Var 2
Expression Explanation
W : Word
Convert decimal data stored
DW : Double Word
in Var 2 into BCD data and
save the converted data in Var
1.
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
Var 1
Var 2
24-90
Var 1
NOTE
PLC Register
Constant
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Transfer Unsigned Decimal format with $67 to BCD format with $50.
24-91
Chapter 24 Macro
Var 2
Expression Explanation
Variable
Var 1
NOTE
W : Word
Convert BCD data stored in
DW : Double Word
Var 2 into decimal data and
save the converted data in Var
1.
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
Var 1
Var 2
PLC Register
Constant
Example
Transfer BCD format with $67 to Unsigned Decimal format with $50.
24-92
Chapter 24 Macro
Variable
Var 1
Var 2
NOTE
Expression Explanation
Convert Word data stored in Var W : Word
2 into Double Word data and
save the converted data in Var
1.
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
Var 1
Var 2
PLC Register
Constant
Example
Convert the Word data originally stored in $67 into Double Word data and
store it in $50. Since the converted data is a Double Word data, it actually
takes up two addresses from $50 to $51.
24-93
Chapter 24 Macro
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Length
Expression Explanation
NOTE
W : Word
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
24-94
PLC Register
Constant
Example
Var 1 and Var 2 are internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
Convert the 4 consecutive bytes in $67 into the word type and save them into
$50.
Both $50 and $67 are set to the Hex data type.
If $67 = AB67H and $68 = 9A62H, then after conversion using the TOWORD
command, then the result is: $50 = 67H, $51 = ABH, $52 = 62H and $53 =
9AH.
Chapter 24 Macro
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Length
Expression Explanation
Convert Word data (number of
word is Var 3) from low-byte of
Var 2 to Byte data (discard
high-byte of Var 2) and store
the result in Var 1.
NOTE
W : Word
* Please note that the first and last byte of the converted WORD will be exchanged.
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
PLC Register
Constant
Example
Var 1 and Var 2 are internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
Convert the 4 consecutive words in $67 into the byte type and save them into $50.
Both $50 and $67 are set to the Hex data type.
If $67 = 12H, $68 = 76H, $69 = 24H and $70 = ABH, then after conversion using
the TOBYTE command, the result is: $50 = 7612H$51 = AB24H.
24-95
Chapter 24 Macro
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Length
NOTE
W : Word
Expression Explanation
Swap between the high-byte and
low-byte of Var 2 until the Var 2 + Var 3
item, and store the result in the starting
position of Var 1 forward.
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
24-96
PLC Register
Constant
Example
Var 1 and Var 2 are internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
Swap between the high-byte and low-byte of value stored in $67 and save the
swapped result in $50.
Both $50 and $67 are set to the Hex data type.
If 67 = 5612H and $68 = B724H, then after executing the SWAP command to
swap the high-byte and low-byte of values stored within $67 and save them
into $50 and $51, the result will be $50=1256H, $51 = 24B7H.
Chapter 24 Macro
Var 1
Starting Address of
the Destination Data
Var 2
Starting Address of
the Source Data
Var 3
Length
Expression Explanation
NOTE
W : Word
DW : Double Word
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
PLC Register
Constant
Example
Var 1 and Var 2 are internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
24-97
Chapter 24 Macro
Variable
Maximum value
Var 2
Variable 1
Var 3
Variable 2
Expression Explanation
Get the maximum value
between Var 2 and Var 3 and
store the result in Var 1.
NOTE
W : Word
DW : Double
Word
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Example
Var 1 is an internal memory addresses, and Var 2 and Var 3 are constants.
Maximize (67, 34) and put the maximum value to $50. Therefore $50 will display 67.
24-98
Chapter 24 Macro
Variable
Minimum Value
Var 2
Variable1
Var 3
Variable2
Expression Explanation
Get the minimum value
between Var 2 and Var 3 and
store the result in Var 1.
NOTE
W : Word
DW : Double
Word
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Example
Var 1 is an internal memory address and Var 2 and Var 3 are both constants.
Minimize (67, 34) and put the minimum value to $50. Therefore $50 will display 34.
24-99
Chapter 24 Macro
Var 1
Hexadecimal
value
Var 2
Starting ASCII
Address
Expression Explanation
NOTE
W : Word
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
Var 1
Var 2
PLC Register
Constant
Example
Convert the ASCII characters of $67 (4 WORDS) to the HEX value and store
the result in $50.
Both $50 and $67 are set to the Hex data type.
If $67 = 31H, $68 = 32H, $69 = 33H and $70 = 34H, then after using the
TOHEX command to convert the ASCII characters stored in these four
variables into HEX data type and store them in $50, then the result is: $50 =
1244H.
24-100
Chapter 24 Macro
Var 1
ASCII Value
Var 2
Starting
hexadecimal
address
Expression Explanation
NOTE
W : Word
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
Var 1
Var 2
PLC Register
Constant
Example
Convert the HEX values of $67 into ASCII characters (4 WORDS) and store
the result in $50.
Both $50 and $67 are set to the Hex data type.
If $67 = 1244H, then after using the TOASC command to convert the HEX
value stored in $67 into ASCII characters and stored in these four variables
into $50, $51, $52 and $53, then the result is: $50 = 31H, $51 = 32H, $52 =
33H, $53 = 34H.
24-101
Chapter 24 Macro
Var 1
Floating point
value
Var 2
Integer value
Expression Explanation
Convert the value in Var 2
(integer) to floating point value
and store in Var 1.
Variable
NOTE
DW : Double
Word
Signed : Signed
number
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
Var 1
Var 2
PLC Register
Constant
Example
Convert $67 (integer value) into the floating point value and save it in $50.
$50 is set to floating point data type and the integer to Double Word data type.
The result is $50 = 67.0.
24-102
Chapter 24 Macro
Var 1
Integer value
Var 2
Floating point
value
Expression Explanation
Convert the value in Var 2
(floating point value) into an
integer and store it in Var 1.
Variable
NOTE
DW : Double
Word
Signed : Signed
number
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
Var 1
Var 2
PLC Register
Constant
Example
Convert 67.3 (floating point value) into the integer and save it in $50.
$50 is set to Unsigned Decimal and the integer to Word data type.
The result is $50 = 67.
24-103
Chapter 24 Macro
NOTE
Returned Value
Var 1
Var 1 = SPRINTF (Var 2,
"%u", Var 4) (DW)
Var 1 = SPRINTF (Var 2,
"%u", Var 4, , Var 24)
(DW) (Note 2)
Failure
Success
Var 2
Var 3
Var 4
Value 1
Var 24
Value 20
DW = Double
Word
Expression Explanation
Fill in the string content then the target
address according to Var 2
Note 1: The supported string formats are shown as below:
%dsigned integer
%uunsigned integer
%cASCII character
%xvalue in hexadecimal
Note 2: It supports up to 20 variables
Note 3: The fill in number should be identical with the value number.
Memory Usage
Variable
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Var 4
Var 24
24-104
Internal
Memory
PLC Register
String
Constant
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Create numeric entry element: $1, $2, $3, $4. Then, enter the value which shown
as below:
$1 = 68 (represents D in ASCII code)
$2 = 2012
$3 = 12
$4 = 21
Create character entry element and set its address to $100. After execution, the
screen will show as below:
24-105
Chapter 24 Macro
24-3-5 Comparison
Comparison is performed with such commands as IfThen Goto, IfThen Call, If and
Elseif and they are detailed below.
NOTE
24-106
Chapter 24 Macro
IFTHEN GOTO (If . Goto a certain label identifier and continue subsequent
executions)
There are twelve commands in the category of IfThen Goto Macro, and they are
introduced below.
(1) IF ==
Expression
What Variables
Represent
Var 1
Condition 1
Var 2
Condition 2
IF Var 1 == Var 2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var 3 (W)
Label
Var 3
IF Var 1 == Var 2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var 3
identifier
(DW)
Expression
IF Var 1 == Var 2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var 3
Explanation
(Signed W)
If condition 1 equals
IF Var 1 == Var 2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var 3
condition 2 then
(Signed DW)
GOTO and execute
Label Var 3.
Variable
NOTE
W : Word
DW : Double
Word
Signed : Signed
number
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
24-107
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Var 1 and Var 2 are both internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
If $50 equals $67 (value comparison), then execute LABEL1 ($100 = 200);
otherwise, execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(2) IF !=
Expression
24-108
What Variables
Represent
Var 1
Condition 1
Var 2
Condition 2
Var 3
Label
identifier
Expression
Explanation
If condition 1 does
not equal to condition
2 then GOTO and
execute Label Var 3.
NOTE
W : Word
DW : Double
Word
Signed :
Signed number
Chapter 24 Macro
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Example
Var 1 and Var 2 are both internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
If $50 does not equal to $67 (value comparison), then execute LABEL1 ($100
= 200); otherwise, execute $100 = $100 + 1.
24-109
Chapter 24 Macro
(3) IF >
What Variables
Represent
Expression
Variable
NOTE
Var 1
Condition 1
Var 2
Condition 2
Var 3
Label
identifier
Expression
Explanation
If condition 1 is larger
than condition 2 then
GOTO and execute
Label Var 3.
W : Word
DW : Double
Word
Signed :
Signed
number
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Example
24-110
Var 1 and Var 2 are both internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
Chapter 24 Macro
If $50 is larger than $67 (value comparison), then execute LABEL1 ($100 =
200); otherwise, execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(4) IF >=
Expression
What Variables
Represent
Var 1
Condition 1
Var 2
Condition 2
Label
IF Var 1 >= Var 2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var 3 (W)
Var 3
identifier
IF Var 1 >= Var 2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var 3 (DW)
Expression
IF Var 1 >= Var 2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var 3
Explanation
(Signed W)
If condition 1 is larger
IF Var 1 >= Var 2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var 3
than or equals to
(Signed DW)
condition 2 then
GOTO and execute
Label Var 3.
Variable
NOTE
W : Word
DW : Double
Word
Signed :
Signed
number
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
24-111
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Var 1 and Var 2 are both internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
(5) IF <
Expression
24-112
What Variables
Represent
Var 1
Condition 1
Var 2
Condition 2
Label
Var 3
identifier
Expression
Explanation
If condition 1 is
smaller than
condition 2 then
GOTO and execute
Label Var 3.
NOTE
W : Word
DW : Double
Word
Signed :
Signed number
Chapter 24 Macro
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Example
Var 1 and Var 2 are both internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
If $50 is smaller than $67 (value comparison), then execute LABEL1 ($100 =
200); otherwise, execute $100 = $100 + 1.
24-113
Chapter 24 Macro
(6) IF <=
What Variables
Represent
Expression
Var 1
NOTE
Condition 1
Var 2
Condition 2
IF Var 1 <= Var 2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var 3 (W)
Label
IF Var 1 <= Var 2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var 3
Var 3
identifier
(DW)
Expression
IF Var 1 <= Var 2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var 3
Explanation
(Signed W)
If condition 1 is smaller
IF Var 1 <= Var 2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var 3
than or equals to
(Signed DW)
condition 2 then GOTO
and execute Label Var 3.
Variable
W : Word
DW : Double
Word
Signed :
Signed
number
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Example
24-114
Var 1 and Var 2 are both internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
Chapter 24 Macro
(7) IF AND == 0
Expression
Condition 1
Var 2
Condition 2
Var 3
Label identifier
IF (Var 1 && Var 2) == 0 THEN GOTO
Expression Explanation
LABEL Var 3 (W)
If the result of Bitwise AND
IF (Var 1 && Var 2) == 0 THEN GOTO
Operation between condition
LABEL Var 3 (DW)
1 equals condition 2 is 0, then
GOTO and execute Label Var
3.
Variable
NOTE
W : Word
DW : Double Word
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Example
Var 1 and Var 2 are both internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
24-115
Chapter 24 Macro
If the result of Bitwise AND operation between $50 and $67 is 0, then execute
LABEL1 ($100 = 200); otherwise, execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(8) IF AND != 0
Expression
Variable
Var 1
Condition 1
Var 2
Condition 2
Var 3
Label identifier
Expression Explanation
If the result of Bitwise AND
Operation between condition
1 equals condition 2 does not
equal to 0, then GOTO and
execute Label Var 3.
NOTE
W : Word
DW : Double Word
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
24-116
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Var 1 and Var 2 are both internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
If the result of Bitwise AND operation between $50 and $67 does not equal to
0, then execute LABEL1 ($100 = 200); otherwise, execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(9) IF == ON
Expression
Condition 1
Var 2
Label identifier
Expression Explanation
If condition 1 is ON, then
GOTO and execute LABEL
Var 2.
NOTE
W : Word
24-117
Chapter 24 Macro
Variable
Var 1
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 2
Example
If $50.0 is ON, then execute LABEL1 ($100 = 200); otherwise, execute $100 =
$100 + 1.
(10) IF == OFF
Expression
24-118
Condition 1
Var 2
Label identifier
Expression Explanation
If condition 1 is OFF, then
GOTO and execute LABEL
Var 2.
NOTE
W : Word
Chapter 24 Macro
Memory Usage
Variable
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Example
If $50.0 is OFF, then execute LABEL1 ($100 = 200); otherwise, execute $100
= $100 + 1.
(11) IFB == ON
Expression
Condition 1
Var 2
Label identifier
Expression Explanation
NOTE
W : Word
* in the command IFB == ON, the Bit address of Var 1 can support the external PLC
Register.
Revision June, 2015
24-119
Chapter 24 Macro
Variable
Var 1
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 2
Example
Condition 1
Var 2
Label identifier
Expression Explanation
If condition 1 is OFF, then
GOTO and execute LABEL
Var 2.
NOTE
W : Word
* in the command IFB == ON, the Bit address of Var 1 can support the external PLC
Register.
24-120
Chapter 24 Macro
Variable
Var 1
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 2
Example
24-121
Chapter 24 Macro
There are 10 commands in the category of IfThen Call Macro, and they are
introduced below.
(1) IF ==
Expression
IF Var 1 == Var 2 THEN CALL Var 3 (W)
IF Var 1 == Var 2 THEN CALL Var 3 (DW)
IF Var 1 == Var 2 THEN CALL Var 3
(Signed W)
IF Var 1 == Var 2 THEN CALL Var 3
(Signed DW)
Variable
What Variables
Represent
Var 1
Condition 1
Var 2
Condition 2
NOTE
W : Word
Var 3
Label identifier DW : Double
Expression Explanation Word
Signed : Signed
If condition 1 equals to
condition 2, then call Var 3 number
(a sub-macro label).
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
24-122
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Var 1 and Var 2 are internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
If $50.0 equals to $67 (value comparison), then call the submacro labeled 1
($100 = 200); otherwise, execute $100 = $100 + 1.
24-123
Chapter 24 Macro
(2) IF !=
Expression
IF Var 1 != Var 2 THEN CALL Var 3 (W)
IF Var 1 != Var 2 THEN CALL Var 3 (DW)
IF Var 1 != Var 2 THEN CALL Var 3
(Signed W)
IF Var 1 != Var 2 THEN CALL Var 3
(Signed DW)
Variable
NOTE
W : Word
DW : Double
Word
Signed :
Signed number
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
24-124
Example
Var 1 and Var 2 are internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
Chapter 24 Macro
If $50.0 does not equal to $67 (value comparison), then call the submacro
labeled 1 ($100 = 200); otherwise, execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(3) IF >
Expression
IF Var 1 > Var 2 THEN CALL Var 3 (W)
IF Var 1 > Var 2 THEN CALL Var 3 (DW)
IF Var 1 > Var 2 THEN CALL Var 3
(Signed W)
IF Var 1 > Var 2 THEN CALL Var 3
(Signed DW)
Variable
Condition 1
Var 2
Condition 2
Var 3
Label identifier
Expression Explanation
If condition 1 is larger than
condition 2, then call Var 3 (a
sub-macro label).
NOTE
W : Word
DW : Double
Word
Signed :
Signed number
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Example
Var 1 and Var 2 are internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
24-125
Chapter 24 Macro
If $50.0 is larger than $67 (value comparison), then call the submacro labeled
1 ($100 = 200); otherwise, execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(4) IF >=
Expression
Variable
What Variables
Represent
Var 1
Condition 1
Var 2
Condition 2
Var 3
Label identifier
NOTE
W : Word
DW : Double
Expression Explanation
Word
If condition is larger or
Signed : Signed
equals to condition 2, then
number
call Var 3 (a sub-macro
label).
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
24-126
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Var 1 and Var 2 are internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
If $50 is larger than or equals to $67 (value comparison), then call the
submacro labeled 1 ($100 = 200); otherwise, execute $100 = $100 + 1.
24-127
Chapter 24 Macro
(5) IF <
Expression
IF Var 1 < Var 2 THEN CALL Var 3 (W)
IF Var 1 < Var 2 THEN CALL Var 3 (DW)
IF Var 1 < Var 2 THEN CALL Var 3
(Signed W)
IF Var 1 < Var 2 THEN CALL Var 3
(Signed DW)
Variable
Condition 1
Var 2
Condition 2
NOTE
W : Word
Var 3
Label identifier DW : Double
Expression Explanation Word
If condition 1 is smaller than Signed : Signed
condition 2, then call Var 3 number
(a sub-macro label).
Memory Usage
Var 1
Internal Memory
Var 2
PLC Register
Constant
Var 3
Example
24-128
Var 1 and Var 2 are internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
Chapter 24 Macro
If $50 is smaller than $67 (value comparison), then call the submacro labeled
1 ($100 = 200); otherwise, execute $100 = $100 + 1.
24-129
Chapter 24 Macro
(6) IF <=
Expression
Variable
NOTE
W : Word
DW : Double
Word
Signed :
Signed number
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
24-130
Example
Var 1 and Var 2 are internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
Chapter 24 Macro
If $50 is smaller than or equals to $67 (value comparison), then call the
submacro labeled 1 ($100 = 200); otherwise, execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(7) IF AND == 0
Expression
Variable
Var 1
Condition 1
Var 2
Condition 2
Var 3
Label identifier
Expression Explanation
If the result of Bitwise AND
Operation between condition 1 and
condition 2 is 0, then call the
submacro labeled with Var 3.
NOTE
W : Word
DW : Double
Word
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Example
Var 1 and Var 2 are both internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
24-131
Chapter 24 Macro
If the result of Bitwise AND operation between $50 and $67 is 0, then call the
submacro labeled 1 ($100 = 200); otherwise, execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(8) IF AND != 0
Expression
Variable
Var 1
Condition 1
Var 2
Condition 2
Var 3
Label identifier
Expression Explanation
If the result of Bitwise AND
Operation between condition
1 and condition 2 is not 0,
then call the submacro
labeled with Var 3.
NOTE
W : Word
DW : Double Word
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
24-132
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Var 1 and Var 2 are both internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
If the result of Bitwise AND operation between $50 and $67 is not 0, then call
the submacro labeled 1 ($100 = 200); otherwise, execute $100 = $100 + 1.
24-133
Chapter 24 Macro
(9) IF == ON
Expression
Variable
Var 1
Condition 1
Var 2
Label identifier
Expression Explanation
If condition 1 is ON, then call
the submacro labeled with Var
2.
NOTE
W : Word
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 2
Example
24-134
Chapter 24 Macro
If $50.0 is ON, then call the submacro labeled 1 ($100 = 200); otherwise,
execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(10) IF == OFF
Expression
Condition 1
Var 2
Label identifier
Expression Explanation
NOTE
W : Word
Variable
Var 1
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 2
Example
24-135
Chapter 24 Macro
24-136
If $50.0 is OFF, then call the submacro labeled 1 ($100 = 200); otherwise,
execute $100 = $100 + 1.
Chapter 24 Macro
IF(If)
There are 10 commands in the category of If Macro, and they are introduced below.
(1) IF ==
Expression
Var 1
NOTE
Condition 1
W : Word
Var 2
Condition 2
DW : Double
Word
Expression Explanation
If condition 1 equals to condition 2, Signed : Signed
number
then execute
*ENDIF is required at end of the IF Macro, or error messages will pop up during compile.
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Example
Var 1 and Var 2 are both internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
24-137
Chapter 24 Macro
If $50 equals to $67 (value comparison), then execute $100 = $100+1; if $50
is larger or smaller than $67, then do not execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(2) IF !=
Expression
Var 1
NOTE
Condition 1
W : Word
Var 2
Condition 2
DW : Double
Word
Expression Explanation
If condition 1 does not equal to Signed : Signed
number
condition 2, then execute
*ENDIF is required at end of the IF Macro, or error messages will pop up during compile.
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
24-138
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Var 1 and Var 2 are both internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
If $50 does not equal to $67 (value comparison), then execute $100 = $100+1;
otherwise, do not execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(3) IF >
Expression
Var 1
Condition 1
Var 2
Condition 2
Expression Explanation
If condition 1 is larger than
condition 2, then execute
NOTE
W : Word
DW : Double Word
Signed : Signed
number
*ENDIF is required at end of the IF Macro, or error messages will pop up during compile.
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
24-139
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Var 1 and Var 2 are both internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
If $50 is larger than $67 (value comparison), then execute $100 = $100+1;
otherwise, do not execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(4) IF >=
Expression
Var 1
Condition 1
Var 2
Condition 2
Expression Explanation
If condition 1 is larger than or
equals to condition 2, then
execute
NOTE
W : Word
DW : Double Word
Signed : Signed
number
*ENDIF is required at end of the IF Macro, or error messages will pop up during compile.
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
24-140
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Var 1 and Var 2 are both internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
If $50 is larger than or equal to $67 (value comparison), then execute $100 =
$100+1; otherwise, do not execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(5) IF <
Expression
Var 1
Condition 1
Var 2
Condition 2
Expression Explanation
If condition 1 is smaller than
condition 2, then execute
NOTE
W : Word
DW : Double Word
Signed : Signed
number
*ENDIF is required at end of the IF Macro, or error messages will pop up during compile.
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
24-141
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Var 1 and Var 2 are both internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
If $50 is smaller than $67 (value comparison), then execute $100 = $100+1;
otherwise, do not execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(6) IF <=
Expression
Var 1
Condition 1
Var 2
Condition 2
Expression Explanation
If condition 1 is smaller than or
equals to condition 2, then
execute
NOTE
W : Word
DW : Double Word
Signed : Signed
number
*ENDIF is required at end of the IF Macro, or error messages will pop up during compile.
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
24-142
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Var 1 and Var 2 are both internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
If $50 is smaller than or equals to $67 (value comparison), then execute $100
= $100+1; otherwise, do not execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(7) IF AND == 0
Expression
Variable
Var 1
Condition 1
Var 2
Condition 2
Expression Explanation
If the result of Bitwise AND
Operation between condition 1 and
condition 2 is 0, then execute ...
NOTE
W : Word
DW : Double Word
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
24-143
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
If the result of Bitwise AND Operation between $50 and $67 is 0, then execute
$100 = $100+1; otherwise, do not execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(8) IF AND != 0
Expression
Variable
Var 1
Condition 1
Var 2
Condition 2
Expression Explanation
If the result of Bitwise AND
Operation between condition 1 and
condition 2 is not 0, then execute ...
NOTE
W : Word
DW : Double Word
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
24-144
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
If the result of Bitwise AND Operation between $50 and $67 is not 0, then
execute $100 = $100+1; otherwise, do not execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(9) IF == ON
Expression
Condition 1
Expression Explanation
IF Var 1 == ON (W)
NOTE
W : Word
Variable
Var 1
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
24-145
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
If $50.0 is ON, then execute $100 = $100 + 1; otherwise, do not execute $100
= $100 + 1.
(10) IF == OFF
Expression
Condition 1
Expression Explanation
NOTE
W : Word
Variable
Var 1
24-146
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
If $50.0 is OFF, then execute $100 = $100 + 1; otherwise, do not execute $100
= $100 + 1.
24-147
Chapter 24 Macro
ELSEIF (Else)
There are 10 commands in the category of ELSEIF Macro, and they are introduced
below:
(1) ELSEIF ==
Expression
Var 1
Condition 1
ELSEIF Var 1 == Var 2 (W)
Var 2
Condition 2
ELSEIF Var 1 == Var 2 (DW)
Expression Explanation
ELSEIF Var 1 == Var 2 (Signed W)
Or else, if condition 1 equals to
ELSEIF Var 1 == Var 2 (Signed DW)
condition 2, then execute
NOTE
W : Word
DW : Double
Word
Signed : Signed
number
*IFENDIF is required to pair up with ELSEIF Macro commands, or error messages will
pop up during compile.
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Example
24-148
Chapter 24 Macro
If $50 does not equal to $67 (value comparison), then execute $200 = $200+1;
otherwise, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(2) ELSEIF !=
Expression
Var 1
Condition 1
Var 2
Condition 2
Expression Explanation
Or else, if condition 1 does not
equal to condition 2, then
execute
NOTE
W : Word
DW : Double
Word
Signed : Signed
number
*IFENDIF is required to pair up with the ELSEIF Macro commands, or error messages will
pop up during compile.
Memory Usage
Variable
Internal Memory
Var 1
Var 2
PLC Register
Constant
24-149
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
NOTE
Condition 1
Var 2
Condition 2
ELSEIF Var 1 > Var 2 (W)
ELSEIF Var 1 > Var 2 (DW)
Expression Explanation
ELSEIF Var 1 > Var 2 (Signed W)
Or else, if condition 1 is
ELSEIF Var 1 > Var 2 (Signed DW) larger than condition 2, then
execute
W : Word
DW : Double Word
Signed : Signed
number
*IFENDIF is required to pair up with the ELSEIF Macro commands, or error messages will
pop up during compile.
Variable
Memory Usage
Var 1
Internal Memory
Var 2
24-150
PLC Register
Constant
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
If $50 equals to $67 (value comparison), then execute $200 = $200+1; or else if $50
is larger than $67, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
NOTE
Condition 1
Var 2
Condition 2
ELSEIF Var 1 >= Var 2 (W)
ELSEIF Var 1 >= Var 2 (DW)
Expression Explanation
ELSEIF Var 1 >= Var 2 (Signed W)
Or else, if condition 1 is
ELSEIF Var 1 >= Var 2 (Signed DW) larger than or equals to
condition 2, then execute
W : Word
DW : Double Word
Signed : Signed
number
*IFENDIF is required to pair up with the ELSEIF Macro commands, or error messages will
pop up during compile.
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
24-151
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
If $50 is smaller than $67 (value comparison), then execute $200 = $200+1;
otherwise, execute $100 = $100 + 1.
NOTE
Condition 1
Var 2
Condition 2
ELSEIF Var 1 < Var 2 (W)
ELSEIF Var 1 < Var 2 (DW)
Expression Explanation
ELSEIF Var 1 < Var 2 (Signed W) Or else, if condition 1 is
ELSEIF Var 1 < Var 2 (Signed DW) smaller than condition 2,
then execute
W : Word
DW : Double Word
Signed : Signed
number
*IFENDIF is required to pair up with the ELSEIF Macro commands, or error messages will
pop up during compile.
24-152
Chapter 24 Macro
Memory Usage
Variable
Var 1
Internal Memory
Var 2
PLC Register
Constant
Example
If $50 is larger than or equals to $67 (value comparison), then execute $200 =
$200+1; or else if $50 is larger than $67, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
NOTE
Condition 1
Var 2
Condition 2
ELSEIF Var 1 <= Var 2 (W)
ELSEIF Var 1 <= Var 2 (DW)
Expression Explanation
ELSEIF Var 1 <= Var 2 (Signed W)
Or else, if condition 1 is
ELSEIF Var 1 <= Var 2 (Signed DW) smaller than or equals to
condition 2, then execute
W : Word
DW : Double Word
Signed : Signed
number
*IFENDIF is required to pair up with the ELSEIF Macro commands, or error messages will
pop up during compile.
Revision June, 2015
24-153
Chapter 24 Macro
Variable
Memory Usage
Var 1
Internal Memory
Var 2
PLC Register
Constant
Example
If $50 is larger than $67 (value comparison), then execute $200 = $200+1;
otherwise, execute $100 = $100 + 1.
24-154
Condition 1
Var 2
Condition 2
NOTE
Expression Explanation
W : Word
Or else, if the result of Bitwise
DW : Double Word
AND Operation between
condition 1 and condition 2 is
0, then execute
Revision June, 2015
Chapter 24 Macro
Memory Usage
Variable
Var 1
Internal Memory
Var 2
PLC Register
Constant
Example
If the result of Bitwise AND Operation between $50 and $67 is not 0, then
execute $200 = $200+1; otherwise, execute $100 = $100 + 1.
Condition 1
Var 2
Condition 2
Expression Explanation
ELSEIF (Var 1 && Var 2) != 0 (W)
Or else, if the result of Bitwise
ELSEIF (Var 1 && Var 2) != 0 (DW)
AND Operation between
condition 1 and condition 2 is not
0, then execute
Revision June, 2015
NOTE
W : Word
DW : Double Word
24-155
Chapter 24 Macro
Variable
Memory Usage
Var 1
Internal Memory
Var 2
PLC Register
Constant
Example
If the result of Bitwise AND Operation between $50 and $67 is 0, then execute
$200 = $200+1; otherwise, execute $100 = $100 +1.
(9) ELSEIF == ON
Expression
24-156
NOTE
Condition 1
Expression Explanation
Or else, if condition 1 is ON, then
execute
W : Word
Chapter 24 Macro
Variable
Var 1
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
If $50.0 is OFF, then execute $200 = $200 + 1; if $50.0 is ON, then execute
$100 = $100 + 1.
Variable
Var 1
NOTE
Condition 1
Expression Explanation
Or else, if condition 1 is OFF, then
execute
W : Word
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
24-157
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Var 1 is the internal memory address.
If $50.0 is ON, then execute $200 = $200 + 1; if $50.0 is OFF, then execute
$100 = $100 + 1.
ELSE
The Else command is used to execute other procedures when either the If or Elseif
statement is not true. Else needs to pair up with If and Endif, or error messages will pop up
during compile.
ENDIF
ENDIF is primarily used to pair up with commands such as If, Else, and Eseif
24-158
Chapter 24 Macro
NOTE
Returned the
compared result.
Var 1
Var 1 = FCMP(Var 2, Var 3) (Signed
DW)
>
<
Var 2
Condition 1
Var 3
Condition 2
DW : Double Word
Signed : Signed
number
Expression Explanation
Compare Var 2 and Var 3
and save the result in Var 1.
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Example
Var 1 is an internal memory address, and Var 2 and Var 3 are constants.
24-159
Chapter 24 Macro
24-160
Compare with Var 2 and Var 3 value, and return value of 0, 1, 2. Due to 67.5 is
greater than 34.9, so return value for 1. The $50 will display value for 1.
Chapter 24 Macro
GOTO LABEL (label identifier for the current process to unconditionally jump to)
Expression
Expression Explanation
NOTE
W : Word
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Example
24-161
Chapter 24 Macro
Directly jump to Label 1 and the expression marked by Label 1 is $100 = $100
+ 1.
Expression Explanation
NOTE
W : Word
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Example
24-162
Chapter 24 Macro
Sub-macro ID (1~512)
Expression Explanation
NOTE
W : Word
* Var 1 supports both Chinese and English names, but in such case, please manually enter
the alias of the macro. The macro wizard only supports a submacro ID.
Variable
Var 1
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Example
24-163
Chapter 24 Macro
RET
Expression Explanation
Exit a submacro and return back to the
next line right after a sub-macro.
NOTE
RET needs to be at the last
line of a submacro and
needs to pair up with the
Call command.
Example
24-164
Chapter 24 Macro
NOTE
Number of loops
Expression Explanation
W : Word
Expression Explanation
NEXT
NOTE
Variable
Var 1
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
24-165
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Var 1 is a constant.
For 4 means to execute the statement $100 = $100 + 1 four times and
hence, the result is 4.
END
24-166
Expression Explanation
End a macro.
NOTE
If END command is used in a
submacro, it indicates the program
will not execute the next statement
within the macro that the submacro
belongs to.
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
If the END command is at the end of a submacro, it indicates the program will
not execute the next statement within the macro the submacro belongs to.
24-167
Chapter 24 Macro
Variable
Var 1
NOTE
Expression Explanation
Set the nth bit to ON (N as denoted by
Var 1).
W : Word
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Example
Set $50 to be the variable to set the bit and data type to be binary. When
24-168
Chapter 24 Macro
executing BITON $50.5, then the fifth bit will be set to ON.
Variable
Var 1
NOTE
Expression Explanation
Set the nth bit to OFF (N as denoted by
Var 1).
W : Word
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Example
Set $50 to be the variable to set the bit and data type to be binary. When
executing BITOFF $50.5, then the fifth bit will be set to OFF.
24-169
Chapter 24 Macro
NOTE
Expression Explanation
BITNOT Var 1 (W)
Variable
Var 1
W : Word
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Example
Set $50 to be the variable to set the bit and data type to be binary. When
executing BITNOT $50.5, then the fifth bit will be set from ON to OFF.
24-170
Chapter 24 Macro
Variable
NOTE
Expression Explanation
th
W : Word
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Var 1
Var 2
Constant
Example
Set $50 to be the variable to set the bit and data type to be binary.
Set $50.0 and $67.0 to be the ON button. When executing $50.0 = GETB
24-171
Chapter 24 Macro
$67.0 and push the $67.0 button, then $50.0 will be triggered to be ON.
24-172
Chapter 24 Macro
NOTE
Returned result
Var 1
0 : Failure
1 : Successful
Var 2
Com Port
Var 3
Interface
Var 4
Data Bit
Var 5
Parity
Var 6
Stop Bit
Var 7
Baud Rate
Var 8
Flow Control
W : Word
Expression Explanation
Initialize com ports, open com
ports, set the protocol (Var 2 ~
Var 8) and return the result of
initialization back to Var 1.
24-173
Chapter 24 Macro
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Parameter Setup
Variable
Var 2
Var 3
Var 4
Var 5
Var 6
Var 7
24-174
Parameter
Com Port
Interface
Data Bit
Parity
Stop Bit
Baud Rate
Parameter Details
Corresponding Codes
COM 1
COM 2
COM 3
RS242
RS422
RS485
7 Bits
8 Bits
None
Old
Even
1 Bits
2 Bits
300
600
900
1200
2400
4800
9600
14400
19200
28800
38400
10
57600
11
115200
12
Revision June, 2015
Chapter 24 Macro
Var 8
Flow Control
No Flow Control
Example
Var 1 is an internal memory address
24-175
Chapter 24 Macro
24-176
Chapter 24 Macro
Checksum
Var 2
Starting address of
the source data
Var 3
Data length
NOTE
Expression Explanation
Var 1 = ADDSUM (Var 2, Var 3) (W) Calculate the checksum using
addition. Var1 stores the
calculated checksum value, Var2
stores the starting address for
data to be calculated and Var3
stores the length of data.
W : Word
* the checksum value calculated through ADDSUM is based on BYTE. If the data length is
6, it must be divided by 2 for the correct length is 3.
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
PLC Register
Constant
Example
Var 1 and var 2 are internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
After addition, the three consecutive bytes (6 / 2 = 3), starting from the address
stored in $67, will be stored in $50.
The expression means $67 + $68 + $69 = $50.
24-177
Chapter 24 Macro
Checksum
Var 2
Starting Address of
the Source Data
Var 3
Data Length
NOTE
Expression Explanation
Var 1 = XORSUM (Var 2, Var 3) (W)
W : Word
*the checksum value calculated through XORSUM is based on BYTE. If the data length is
6, it must be divided by 2 for the correct length is 3.
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
24-178
PLC Register
Constant
Example
Var 1 and var 2 are internal memory addresses, and Var 3 is a constant.
After XOR operations, the three consecutive bytes (6 / 2 = 3), starting from the
address stored in $67, will be stored in $50.
The expression means $67 + $68 + $69 = $50.
Revision June, 2015
Chapter 24 Macro
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Var 4
Example
Var 1 and var 2 are internal memory addresses, and Var 3 and Var 4 are
constants.
24-179
Chapter 24 Macro
Save inputted characters from $67 to $50 along with relevant parameters (12
consecutive characters; transmission duration: 500; and returned value: 0 or
1).
NOTE
Returned result
Var 1
Failure
Successful
Var 2
Var 3
Data length
Var 4
Duration of data
transmission
W : Word
Expression Explanation
Send in data (including starting address
stored in Var 2, data length specified in Var 3,
and required transmission duration saved in
Var 4) via selected communication ports and
save the returned value in Var 1.
*GETCHARS much be paired up with INITCOM and SELECTCOM.
*Var 3 is Byte format.
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Var 4
24-180
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Var 1 and var 2 are internal memory addresses, and Var 3 and Var 4 are
constants.
Save received characters from $100 to $51 along with relevant parameters
(12 consecutive characters; transmission duration: 500; and returned value: 0
or 1).
24-181
Chapter 24 Macro
COM 1
COM 2
COM 3
NOTE
Expression Explanation
SELECTCOM (Var 1) (W)
W : Word
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Example
24-182
Chapter 24 Macro
COM 2
COM 3
Receiving
buffer
Transmitting
buffer
Var 1
Var 2
NOTE
W : Word
Expression Explanation
Clear the buffer for the Nth Com
Port (N as denoted by Var 1).
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Example
24-183
Chapter 24 Macro
NOTE
Var 1
String length
Var 2
Inputted string
Var 3
Var 4
1 Byte
Format to display
the checksum
1
W : Word
2 Bytes
(Word)
Expression Explanation
Calculate the string length and checksum and
save them in Var 1
* the string length for string stored in Var 1 will be different based on the format set in Var 4.
* if the inputted string is 345 and Var 4 is set to 2, then the Var 1 string length will be 5; or
else if Var 4 is set to 1, then the Var 1 string length will be 4. (based on BYTE)
Memory Usage
Variable
Internal
Memory
Var 1
Var 4
24-184
String
Constant
Var 2
Var 3
PLC Register
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Example 1:
Example 2:
24-185
Chapter 24 Macro
24-186
Chapter 24 Macro
NOTE
Returned result
Var 1
Var 2
Failure
Successful
COM 1
COM 2
COM 3
Var 3
Expression Explanation
W : Word
COM 1
COM 2
COM 3
Expression Explanation
Unlock Com Port
* If Lockcom is set to continuously wait without limit (or Var 3 = 0), it indicates that the
Lockcom will be executed twice within the same macro and this will cause the HMI to
become unresponsive.
* When the communication commands are used in different macros, such as Screen Cycle
Macro, Clock Macro, Background Macro, Run Pre-action/Post-action Macro (ON/OFF
Macro) and Screen Open/Close Macro, the different macros may have interferences and
cause error results. The solution to this issue is to add the LOCKCOM and UNLOCKCOM
commands before and after communication commands, and this is to ensure that
communication will not be interrupted for other purposes and preserve integrity of
transmitted messages.
Memory Usage (LOCKCOM)
Variable
Internal Memory
Var 1
PLC Register
Constant
Var 2
Var 3
Variable
Var 1
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
24-187
Chapter 24 Macro
Followings are the examples describe the situations when properly applying, improperly
applying and misapplying LOCKCOM / UNLOCKCOM macro command.
Example of Applying LOCKCOM / UNLOCKCOM (correctly use)
Background
Macro
Screen Cycle
Macro
On
Macro
$50 = LOCKCOM(0,500)
$50 = LOCKCOM(0,500)
$50 = LOCKCOM(0,500)
UNLOCKCOM(0)
UNLOCKCOM(0)
UNLOCKCOM(0)
Screen Cycle
Macro
$50 = LOCKCOM(0,500)
On
Macro
UNLOCKCOM(0)
Assuming that COM port is locked in Background Macro and is used to transmit data,
24-188
Chapter 24 Macro
but COM Port cannot be unlocked in On Macro. This means commands to lock and
unlock COM Port cannot be separated.
Example
Var 1 is an internal memory address, and Var 2 and Var 3 can only be
Constant
24-189
Chapter 24 Macro
NOTE
Returned Value
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Failure
Success
COM 1
COM 2
COM 3
WWord
Station number
Expression Explanation
It can help to check the
communication of COM.
Note 1: This command can assess parameters in internal memory but it will not influence
the communication.
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
24-190
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Var 1 is the internal memory and Var 2 and Var 3 are constants.
When executing this macro, if the communication between COM2 and station
128 of PLC is normal, then the returned value will be $50 = 1. However, if the
communication is abnormal, the returned value will be $50 = 0.
24-191
Chapter 24 Macro
Var 2
STATIONON (Var 1, Var 2) (W)
NOTE
COM 1
COM 2
COM 3
Station ID
W : Word
Expression Explanation
Enable the Nth Com Port of Kth station and
so that HMI can communicate with the
controller of the Kth station (Nth: denoted in
Var 1; Kth: denoted in Var 2)
* The STATIONON macro command cannot be used when the Comm. Interrupt XXX times
then ignore box is ticked [Options] [Communication Setting].
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
24-192
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Var 1 and Var 2 are constants and open Com 1 of Station #1.
COM 1
COM 2
COM 3
Var 2
STATIONOFF (Var 1, Var 2) (W)
NOTE
Station ID
Expression Explanation
th
W : Word
th
24-193
Chapter 24 Macro
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Example
24-194
Var 1 and Var 2 are constants and open Com 1 of Station #1.
Chapter 24 Macro
NOTE
Returned Value
Var 1
Failure
Success
Var 2
IP1
Var 3
IP2
Var 4
IP3
Var 5
IP4
Var 6
Port
WWord
Expression Explanation
Activate IP Var 2, Var 3, Var 4, Var 5
and Port Var 6. Then, HMI can
communicate with the controller.
Note 1Var 6 cannot be used. When it is not using, all Port under this IP will be activated.
Note 2IPON macro cannot be used with Communication Interrupt under Option
Communication Setting.
24-195
Chapter 24 Macro
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Var 4
Var 5
Var 6
Example
If not using Var 6, then $100 = IPON (192, 168, 0, 1). To enable all port in IP
192.168.0.1.
24-196
Chapter 24 Macro
NOTE
Returned Value
Var 1
Failure
Success
Var 2
IP1
Var 3
IP2
Var 4
IP3
Var 5
IP4
Var 6
Port
WWord
Expression Explanation
Close IP Var 2, Var 3, Var 4, Var 5 and
Port Var 6. Then, HMI will be unable to
communicate with the controller of that
station.
Note 1: Var 6 is not necessary. When it is not using, all Ports under the IP will be closed.
Note 2: IPOFF macro cannot be used with Communication Interrupt under Option
Communication Setting.
24-197
Chapter 24 Macro
Variables
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Var 4
Var 5
Var 6
Example Description
If not use Var 6, $100 = IPOFF (192, 168, 0, 1), close all ports in IP
192.168.0.1.
24-198
Chapter 24 Macro
NOTE
Returned Value
Var 1
Failure
Success
Var 2
Link No
Var 3
IP1
Var 4
IP2
Var 5
IP3
Var 6
IP4
Var 7
Port
W: Word
Expression Explanation
Change the IP setting of PLC,
Var3.Var4.Var5.Var6 and Port Var7 so
that HMI can change the Link
information and re-connect to another
PLC.
Note 1: Link No. starts from zero.
24-199
Chapter 24 Macro
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Var 4
Var 5
Var 6
Var 7
Example
24-200
Chapter 24 Macro
24-201
Chapter 24 Macro
24-3-9 Drawing
HMI supports a list of drawing commands, including Rectangle, Line, Point and Circle for
users to draw different graphics. They are detailed below.
NOTE
Var 1
upper-left
X-coordinate
Var 1 + 1
upper-left
Y-coordinate
Var 1 + 2
Var 1 + 3
Var 1 + 4
W : Word
Expression Explanation
Continuous addresses to draw a
rectangle.
Variable
Var 1
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Example
24-202
Chapter 24 Macro
24-203
Chapter 24 Macro
NOTE
Var 1
Starting X-coordinate
Var 1 + 1
Starting Y-coordinate
Var 1 + 2
Ending X-coordinate
Var 1 + 3
Ending Y-coordinate
Var 1 + 4
Var 1 + 5
W : Word
Expression Explanation
Continuous addresses to draw a
line.
Variable
Var 1
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Example
24-204
Chapter 24 Macro
24-205
Chapter 24 Macro
Var 1
X-coordinate
Var 1 + 1
Y-coordinate
Var 1 + 2
NOTE
W : Word
Expression Explanation
Continuous addresses to draw a
point.
Variable
Var 1
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Example
24-206
Chapter 24 Macro
Var 1
X-coordinate of the
center of the ellipse
Var 1 + 1
Y-coordinate of the
center of the ellipse
Var 1 + 2
Var 1 + 3
Var 1 + 4
NOTE
W : Word
Expression Explanation
Continuous addresses to draw a
point.
Variable
Var 1
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Example
24-207
Chapter 24 Macro
24-208
Chapter 24 Macro
NOTE
Returned Value
Var 1
Failure
Success
Var 2
FileSlot ID
Var 3
Target Address
Var 4
Var 5
WWord
Expression Explanation
Read FileSlot content of Var 2, whose starting
address is specified by Var 4 and data length
specified by Var 5 to the target address which is
specified by Var 3. Then, return the value to Var
1.
Note: If the specified FileSlot file does not exist, please use FileSlotWrite command to create
the file first.
Variables
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Var 4
Var 5
24-209
Chapter 24 Macro
NOTE
Returned Value
Var 1
Failure
Success
Var 2
FileSlot ID
Var 3
Source Address
Var 4
Var 5
WWord
Expression Explanation
Read Var 5 Word starting from Var 3 and regard
Var 4 as start address to write FileSlot of Var 2.
Then, return the result to Var 1.
Variables
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Var 4
Var 5
24-210
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Use FileSlotWrite to create the file. Then, use FileSlotRead to access the
data. See the descriptions below:
Step 1: Enter OptionFile Manage to setup FileSlot.
Step 3: Compile the screen and download it to HMI. Regard $1000 as start address
to edit 10 Words. Set $101 to 1, $102 to 0 and $104 to 10. When FileSlotWrite is
triggered, data of $1000 ~ $1009 will be written into the FileSlot whose ID is 1 and
start to write from address 0.
Revision June, 2015
24-211
Chapter 24 Macro
Step 4: Reset the data of $1000 ~ $1009 to 0. Set $104 to 8. When FileSlotRead is
triggered, the FileSlot whose ID is 1 will be written into $1000 ~ $1007 from the 8th
Word starting with the 0th address.
24-212
Chapter 24 Macro
NOTE
Returned Value
Var 1
Var 1 = FileSlotRemove (Var 2) (W)
Failure
Success
Var 2
WWord
FileSlot ID
Expression Explanation
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
Var 1
Var 2
PLC Register
Constant
Example
Var 1 is internal memory and Var 2 is the constant. Remove FileSlot whose ID
is 1 (Var 2) and save the returned value in $100 (Var 1).
24-213
Chapter 24 Macro
NOTE
Returned Value
Var 1
Var 1 = FileSlotGetLength (Var
2, Var 3) (W)
Failure
Success
1
WWord
Var 2
FileSlot ID
Var 3
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Example
24-214
Var 1 and Var 3 are internal memory and Var 2 is constant. Acquire the length
of FileSlot whose ID is 1 (Var2) and save it in $106. Then, save the returned
value in $100 (Var 1). If the FileSlot length is 10 Words, the value returned to
$106 is 20 (BYTE).
Chapter 24 Macro
NOTE
Returned Value
Var 1
Failure
Success
Var 2
Var 1 = FileSlotExport (Var 2, Var
3, Var 4, Var 5) (W)
Var 3
Var 4
Var 5
FileSlot ID
File
USB Disk
2
Export
SD Card
3
Device
Exported File Name
WWord
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Var 4
Var 5
Example
Var 1, Var 4 and Var 5 are internal memory while Var 2 and Var 3 are
constants. Export FileSlot ID 1 (Var 2) to USB Disk (Var 3), the length of file
name is 2 (Var 5) and its file name is Slot (Var 4). Then, save the returned
value in $100 (Var 1).
24-215
Chapter 24 Macro
24-216
Chapter 24 Macro
NOTE
Returned Value
Var 1
Failure
Success
Var 2
Var 1 = FileSlotImport (Var 2, Var
3, Var 4, Var 5) (W)
Var 3
FileSlot ID
File Import
Device
USB Disk
SD Card
Var 4
Var 5
WWord
Expression Explanation
Import the file names Var 4 from external
storage device Var 3 to FileSlot of Var 2.
Then, return the result to Var 1.
Variables
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Var 4
Var 5
Example
Var 1, Var 4 and Var 5 are internal memory while Var 2 and Var 3 are
constants. Import the file named Slot (Var 4) with file name length as 2 (Var 5)
from USB Disks (Var 3) to FileSlot ID 1 (Var 2). Then, save the returned value
in $100 (Var 1).
24-217
Chapter 24 Macro
24-218
Chapter 24 Macro
24-3-11 Others
Others macro commands include TIME TICK, Comment, Delay, GETSYSTEMTIME
SETSYSTEMTIME, EXPORT, EXRCP, IMRCP, EXENRCP, IMENRCP. Users can acquire
system setup time, import and export equations with these commands and they are
detailed below.
NOTE
W : Word
DW : Double
Calculate system up duration from system
Word
startup time to present and save it in Var 1
(in ms).
Expression Explanation
24-219
Chapter 24 Macro
Variable
Var 1
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Example
24-220
Var 1 is an internal memory address and save the system up duration in $50.
Chapter 24 Macro
NOTE
Var 1
Expression Explanation
W : Word
DW : Double
Word
Signed : Signed
number
Variable
Var 1
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Example
Var 1 is an internal memory address and save the last error value in $50.
24-221
Chapter 24 Macro
#Var 1 (W)
NOTE
Expression Explanation
W : Word
Variable
Var 1
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Example
24-222
Chapter 24 Macro
NOTE
Expression Explanation
Set the system to delay for a
W : Word
duration(in ms) specified in Var 1
before executing the next
command
* Since the HMI is a multiplexer system, a default system delay may occur. If this command
is set, then the delay duration will become longer due to multiplexing operations and the
condition that setting the time forward will not happen.
* Please note that long delay duration may cause the HMI to respond slowly.
* When executing this command, the HMI will suspend all current operations and resume
them after the delay duration is over.
Variable
Var 1
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Example
24-223
Chapter 24 Macro
Var 1
Year
Var 1 + 1
Month
Var 1 + 2
Day
Var 1 + 3
Week
Var 1 + 4
Hour
Var 1 + 5
Minute
Var 1 + 6
Second
NOTE
W : Word
Expression Explanation
Acquire system time with 7 address
(in Words) from Var 1 to Var 7.
Memory Usage
Variable
Internal Memory
Var 1
PLC Register
Constant
Example
24-224
Var 1 is an internal memory address and save the current system time to $50
~ $57.
Chapter 24 Macro
Var 1
Year
Var 1 + 1
Month
Var 1 + 2
Day
Var 1 + 3
Week
Var 1 + 4
Hour
Var 1 + 5
Minute
Var 1 + 6
Second
NOTE
W : Word
Expression Explanation
Set system time with 7 address (in
Words) from Var 1 to Var 7.
Variable
Var 1
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Example
Var 1 is an internal memory address. Set and save the current system time to
$50 ~ $57.
24-225
Chapter 24 Macro
24-226
Chapter 24 Macro
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Var 4
Var 5
Var 6
Data
Type
Data
Time
Data and
Time
NOTE
W : Word
Expression Explanation
Acquire historical log.
* it is recommended to set Var 1, Var 3 and Var 4 as Double Word. If using consecutive
addresses in Word, then data may be overwritten and result may be affected.
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Var 4
Var 5
Var 6
Example
Var 1 and Var 5 are an internal memory addresses, and Var 2, Var 3, Var 4 and
Var 6 are constants. Set the ID for the history buffer as 1(Var 2), sample 10
records (Var 3) starting from the 5th record (Var 2), Set the data type to 2 (Var
6), including time and data, and save it to consecutive addresses of $100 (Var
5) and save the data length into $50 (Var 1).
24-227
Chapter 24 Macro
24-228
Set $1000 as the record accessing address for sampling history buffers.
Chapter 24 Macro
Device to
export a report
NOTE
SD Card
USB Disk
Printer
Expression Explanation
W : Word
Variable
Var 1
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
24-229
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
NOTE
Returned Value
Var 1
Failure
Successful
Var 2
Var 3
Storage device
the equation is
exported to
SD Card
USB Disk
W : Word
Expression Explanation
Export and save 16 bit (or 32 bit)
equations to Var 3 and save the returned
result to Var 1.
Note: The exported file is saving to root in the storage device.
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
24-230
Constant
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
The below example illustrates how to export a 16 bit equation and for a 32 bit
equation, the exporting steps are the same.
Export a 16 bit equation to a USB Disk and file name is tina.
Step 1: go to equation setup dialog box to set up an equation [Options]
[Equation].
Step 3: enter into the button and create an ON Macro shown below. Put the tina
string into $100 and export the data to a USB Disk, using the command EXRCP16,
and name the file tina.
Step 4: edit the elements within the editing area and download the equation to the
HMI. Trigger the $5.0 button and then $50 will display 1, indicating it is successful
Revision June, 2015
24-231
Chapter 24 Macro
NOTE
Returned Value
Var 1
Var 2
Var 1 = IMRCP16 (Var 2, Var 3) (W)
Var 1 = IMRCP32 (Var 2, Var 3) (W)
Var 3
Failure
Successful
SD Card
USB
Disk
W : Word
Expression Explanation
From Var 3 to import 16 bit (or 32 bit)
equations and returned result to Var 1.
24-232
Chapter 24 Macro
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Constant
Example
The below example illustrates how to import a 16 bit equation, and for a 32 bit
equation, the importing steps are the same.
Import a 16 bit equation to a USB Disk and file name is quaqua.
Step 1: Modify and save the equation to the USB Disk.
Step 2: create a maintained button ($5.0), variable ($50), and addresses for storing
equations RCP0~RCP11.
24-233
Chapter 24 Macro
Step 3: enter into the button and create an ON Macro shown below. Put the
quaqua string into $100 and import the data to a USB Disk, using the command
IMRCP16.
Step 4: edit the elements within the editing area and download the equation to the
HMI. Trigger the $5.0 button and then $50 will display 1, indicating it is successful
and import the 16 bit equation to the HMI. The equation data will replaced by the
quaqua equation just imported.
24-234
Chapter 24 Macro
24-235
Chapter 24 Macro
NOTE
Returned Value
Var 1
Var 2
Var 1 = EXENRCP (Var 2, Var 3) (W)
Var 3
Failure
Successful
USB Disk
SD Card
W : Word
Expression Explanation
Export and save 16 bit (or 32 bit)
equations to Var 3 and save the returned
result to Var 1.
Note: The exported file is saving to root in the storage device.
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
24-236
Constant
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Export the enhance recipe data to USB Disk and name it as tina.
Step 1: EnterOptionEnhance Recipe to setup enhance recipe data.
Step 2: Create momentary button ($5.0) and numeric entry element ($50).
Step 4: Compile the screen and download the recipe data to HMI. When $5.0
button is triggered, $50 will display 1, which means the enhance recipe is exported
successfully. Then, export the enhance recipe data to USB Disk.
24-237
Chapter 24 Macro
Note: Please refer to the followings for the definition of each field.
Format
Definition of
DOPSoft
BCD
Signed Decimal
Unsign Decimal
Hexdecimal
Binary
Floating
Char
24-238
Chapter 24 Macro
NOTE
Returned Value
Var 1
Var 2
Var 1 = IMENRCP (Var 2, Var 3) (W)
Var 3
Failure
Successful
USB Disk
SD Card
W : Word
Expression Explanation
From Var 3 to import enhance recipe
equations and returned result to Var 1.
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Constant
24-239
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Import the enhance recipe data from USB Disk to HMI and its file name is
quaqua.
Step 1: Refer to the following figure that uses EXCEL to create recipe file. Its file
name is quaqua.csv and is saved in USB Disk.
Step 2: Create momentary button ($5.0), numeric entry element ($50) and recipe
address RCP0 ~ RCP11.
Step 3: Enter Screen of Momentary Button to edit On macro. Please see as below.
Place quaqua to $100 and import the enhance recipe data from USB Disk.
24-240
Chapter 24 Macro
Step 4: Compile the screen and download recipe data to HMI. When $5.0 button is
triggered, $50 will display 1, which means the enhance recipe is imported
successfully. Then, import the enhance recipe data to HMI. The data will be
changed as the one of quaqua recipe data.
24-241
Chapter 24 Macro
NOTE
Returned Value
Var 1
Failure
Success
Var 2
Var 3
Var 4
External
USB Disk
Storage
SD Card
Device
Expression Explanation
2
3
Variables
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Var 4
24-242
String
Constant
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Step 1: Setup three historical buffer areas. See the setting below:
(1) Historical Buffer Area 1: Set Address to1000, Data Length to 10 and check Export
CSV file.
(2) Historical Buffer Area 2: Set Address to1100, Data Length to 5 and check Export CSV
file.
24-243
Chapter 24 Macro
(3) Historical Buffer Area 3: Set Address to1200, Data Length to 1 and check Export CSV
file.
Step 3: Create character entry element and set its address as $580, string length as 5.
Step 4: Create 3 numeric entry elements and set their address as $500, $591 and $501.
24-244
Chapter 24 Macro
Step 5: Create maintained button element, set the address to $100.0 and add On Macro.
Step 8: Remove USB. And the exported files are shown as below:
24-245
Chapter 24 Macro
24-246
Chapter 24 Macro
NOTE
Returned Value
Var 1
Var 2
Var 1 = EXALARM (Var 2,
Var 3)
Var 3
Failure
Success
2
3
Variables
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
String
Constant
24-247
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Step 1: The setting of Alarm is shown as below. The Address is set as $900. Please check
CSV Format.
Step 2: Create maintained element for triggering alarms. The address is set as $900.0, $900.1,
$900.2, $900.3 and $900.4 in sequence.
Step 3: Create Historical Alarm Table to show the current historical alarms.
24-248
Chapter 24 Macro
Step 4: Create character entry element and set its address as $580 and string length as 5.
Step 5: Create two numeric entry elements and set their address as $500 and $591, respectively.
Step 6: Create maintained button element and set its address as $100.1. Then, add On Macro.
24-249
Chapter 24 Macro
Line 4: Add_year, month, day and _Alarm to three words of equipment nameto form
a serial string and specify $510 as start address.
Line 6: Export the historical alarm to the specified external device and file name.
Step 7: Download the editing screen to HMI and insert USB Disk to the port of HMI.
Step 8: Trigger the alarm and enter ABC as the equipment name on the screen. Select 2
for external storage device, which means USB is applying.
Step 10: Remove USB. And the file exported from USB will be shown as below:
24-250
Chapter 24 Macro
NOTE
Var 1
Returned
Value
Successful
Failure
Var 2
External
storage device
SD Card
USB Disk
W : Word
Expression Explanation
Select the desired device to be formatted as
specified in Var 2 and save the returned value
in Var 1.
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Var 1
Var 2
Constant
Example
Var 1 is an internal memory address and Var 2 is a constant. Format the USB
Disk and save the returned value in $100.
24-251
Chapter 24 Macro
NOTE
Var 1
Returned
Value
Successful
Failure
SD Card
Var 2
External
storage
device
USB Disk
W : Word
Expression Explanation
Save the snapshot into the device specified
in Var 2 and the returned value to Var 1.
* Use BMPCAPTURE to export file is save as .bmp format.
* Export path is under the root and save folder as named for currently year, month and date,
save file as named for Hour, minute and second.
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Var 1
Var 2
Constant
Example
24-252
Chapter 24 Macro
PLCDOWNLOAD
Command
Var 2
Var 3
Var 1 = PLCDOWNLOAD (Var
2, Var 3, Var 4, Var 5, Var 6) (W)
Var 4
Var 5
Var 6
Return Value
NOTE
Failed
Success
COM1
COM2
COM3
COM Port
SD Card
USB Disk
PLC Password
Expression Explanation
Variable
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Var 4
Var 5
Var 6
Constant
24-253
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
Please save downloaded ISP file to USB Disk or SD card then return value to
$0.
Var 4 means PLC file name. So it has to use another command FILLASCand
set file name string to some address.
Var 6 means PLC Password, and it has to set password by WPL or ISP
software. After setting, it could use Character Entry element to input password
and download PLC file to PLC.
WPL Password setting
24-254
Chapter 24 Macro
24-255
Chapter 24 Macro
24-256
Chapter 24 Macro
NOTE
Returned Value
Var 1
Failure
Success
Var 2
Var 3
DW = Double
Word
Expression Explanation
Enter the three coordinates to calculate circle
center coordinate (Note 3)
Note 1: Enter the calculated three coordinates:
Set 3 points as P1(x1, y1), P2(x2, y2) and P3(x3, y3). Each point has the length of DW.
Assume that Var2 is $100, then:
x1: LOW WORD is saved in $100 and HIGH WORD is saved in $101.
y1: LOW WORD is saved in $102 and HIGH WORD is saved in $103
x2: LOW WORD is saved in $104 and HIGH WORD is saved in $105
y2: LOW WORD is saved in $106 and HIGH WORD is saved in $107
x3: LOW WORD is saved in $108 and HIGH WORD is saved in $109
y3: LOW WORD is saved in $110 and HIGH WORD is saved in $111
Note 2: Circle center coordinate that is complete calculation:
Assume the coordinate of circle center is P4 (x4, y4) and each point has the length of DW. If
Var3 is $200, then:
x4: LOW WORD is saved in $200 and HIGH WORD is saved in $201
y4: LOW WORD is saved in $202 and HIGH WORD is saved in $203
Note 3Calculation formula:
x = x/
y = y/
Among them, = 2(xa - xb) * (yc - yb) - 2(ya - yb) * (xc - xb)
x = (yc - yb) * (xa + ya - xb - yb) - (ya - yb) * (xc + yc - xb - yb)
y = (xa - xb) * (xc + yc - xb - yb) - (xc - xb) * (xa + ya - xb - yb)
24-257
Chapter 24 Macro
Variables
Memory Usage
Internal Memory
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
PLC Register
Constant
Example
Example:
$1 = GetCircleCenter ($100, $200)
24-258
Chapter 24 Macro
24-259
Chapter 24 Macro
ECAM
Expression
Var 3
Var 4
Var 5
Returned Value
Address of E-Cam curve
algorithm mode
Start address of E-Cam
parameter input
Start address of E-Cam
curve output
Address of E-Cam curve
output
NOTE
DWDouble Word
Memory Usage
Variables
Var 1
Var 2
Var 3
Var 4
Var 5
Internal Memory
PLC Register
Constant
Chapter 24 Macro
Causes
No error
Input degree exceeds the range, reduce the degree of synchronous area or
S-curve area
Cutting length exceeds the suggested range. Please enter the recommended
cutting length (L) or speed compensation rate.
10
11
12
13
14
Printer machine
Chapter 24 Macro
Printer Machine
n+6
n+8
n+10
n+12
n+14
n+16
n+18
n+20
n+22
n+2
n+4
n+6
n+8
n+10
n+12
n+14
n+16
Unit: mm x 100
n+18
n+20
n+22
n+2
n+4
Knife number
n+6
n+8
n+10
n+16
n+18
n+12
n+14
24-262
Unit: mm x 100
Chapter 24 Macro
n+20
n+22
n+24
24-263
Chapter 24 Macro
Example
1. Create a momentary button and set its address as $0.0. Write $10000 = ECAM(1,
$200, $400, $300) in On Macro.
Var2 = 1. It indicates that this macro command calculate the E-Cam curve for
rotary shear-adjustable sealing zone.
Parameters that is required by macro algorithm starting from $200 use 12 Double
Words (= 24 Words) and take $200-$223 as the memory address.
$200 E-Cam area number, P5_82_MIN ~ P5_82_MAX
$202 Reduction ratio (numerator) (nGA)
$204 Reduction ratio (denominator) (nGB)
$206 Knife number (nKnife)
$208 Knife diameter (d1) Unit: mm x 100
$210 Cutting length (L) Unit: mm x 100
$212 Speed compensation, (dVcp) -50.00% ~ 50.00% x 100
$214 Angle in acceleration area (ns2) Unit: degree
$216 Angle in synchronous area (ns3) Unit: degree
$218 Angle in S-Curve area (nsS) Unit: degree
$220 E-gear ratio (numerator) (P1-44)
24-264
Chapter 24 Macro
E-CAM Macro
Address
Var4
$400
Var5
$300
Var1
$10000
3. Create one E-cam sketch element. See below for its address setting:
E-CAM Sketch Element
E-CAM Macro
Address
Var4
$400
Var5
$300
Var1
$10000
4. Create 12 numeric entry elements on the screen. Unit is Double Word. See
below for its address setting:
$200 E-Cam area number, P5_82_MIN ~ P5_82_MAX
$202 Reduction ratio (numerator) (nGA)
$204 Reduction ratio (denominator) (nGB)
$206 Knife number (nKnife)
$208 Knife diameter (d1) Unit: mm x 100
$210 Cutting length (L) Unit: mm x 100
$212 Speed compensation, (dVcp) -50.00% ~ 50.00% x 100
$214 Angle in acceleration area (ns2) Unit: degree
$216 Angle in synchronous area (ns3) Unit: degree
$218 Angle in S-Curve area (nsS) Unit: degree
$220 E-gear ratio (numerator) (P1-44)
$222 E-gear ratio (denominator) (P1-45)
5. When downloading to HMI, please fill in the following value in sequence:
$200 500
$202 35
Revision June, 2015
24-265
Chapter 24 Macro
$204 99
$206 1
$208 60000
$210 200000
$212 0
$214 60
$216 30
$218 100
$220 128
$222 10
6. Press momentary button $0.0. The E-cam curve will be generated as below:
24-266
Chapter 24 Macro
Number name
-100
-101
Recursion occurred
Trouble shooting
There is no such LABEL required by the
GOTO command
This error message indicates that recursion
has occurred, and errors of this sort mostly
happen in sub-macros. The reason is that a
sub-macro is called by itself within the same
sub-macro, either directly or indirectly.
Basically, the recursion technique can not be
used within a submacro, but if this is
unavoidable, please consider Goto or For
(infinite loop) instead.
-102
-103
-104
24-267
Chapter 24 Macro
-105
-106
Repeated LABEL
-107
-11
24-268
Number name
GOTO error
Stack overflow
Trouble shooting
This message means that there is a GOTO
error for the macro that is currently being
executed.
This message indicates that the stack for the
macro currently executed is full. This may be
caused by using too many sub-macros or
executing multiple macros at the same time.
This message is a mechanism avoiding
memory insufficiency.
Revision June, 2015
Chapter 24 Macro
Empty Sub-macro
-15
Divisor is 0
-16
-17
-18
-19
-20
-21
-12
-13
-14
24-269
Chapter 24 Macro
-24
INITIAL ERROR
-24
-25
-26
-27
-28
-29
-30
-31
Export error
-32
-33
Print error
-34
-35
Password error
-36
24-270
Chapter 24 Macro
-37
-38
Syntax error
-39
Connection failed or no
response
Explanation about PLC file error includes DVP and ISP file format.
-40
-41
-42
-43
-44
-45
-46
-47
-48
-49
-50
24-271
Chapter 25 Multi-language
Contents
25-1 Multi-language Setup ................................................................................................ 2
25-1
Chapter 25 Multi-language
Chapter 25 Multi-language
This chapter describes the multi-languages that the DOPSoft software provides and how to
use the multi-language function.
The multi-language function supports up to 32 languages and all these languages can be
set up individually. The multi-language setup example is described below.
25-2
Chapter 25 Multi-language
Multi-language Setup
Table 25-1-1 Multi-language Setup
The user can click the button on the right side to add a new
language.
Add
Delete
Modify
Language
Name
25-3
Chapter 25 Multi-language
Multi-language Setup
Table 25-1-1 Multi-language Setup
Setting
Enable
25-4
Chapter 25 Multi-language
Multi-language Setup
Table 25-1-1 Multi-language Setup
Default font style provides users customize the font name and
font size to apply to all elements.
When users only choose one of two options, the result only
suitable for after apply and after that create new element.
When users choose both options, the result suitable for already
existed elements and new elements.
Default
Font
Style
NOTE
Only could input text element suitable for apply font name and
font size function.
25-5
Chapter 25 Multi-language
Multi-language Example
Multi-language Example
Table 25-1-2 Multi-language Example
Create an increment button and set the Write Address to $13. Set the other
required parameters.
Step1
Step2
Step3
25-6
Chapter 25 Multi-language
Multi-language Example
Table 25-1-2 Multi-language Example
Step4
Enter the Chinese and English texts to be displayed in the [Text] page.
After executing the increment button, make the following Macro action.
Create a static text. Enter the Chinese and English texts to be displayed in
the [Text] page.
25-7
Chapter 25 Multi-language
Multi-language Example
Table 25-1-2 Multi-language Example
Step5
25-8
Chapter 25 Multi-language
Multi-language Example
Table 25-1-2 Multi-language Example
After the download, click the ROC button to switch the language to English.
The static text changes to Delta.
Before
Switch
Step6
After
Switch
25-9
Contents
26-1
26-2
26-3
26-4
26-5
26-1
The print function provides the [Continuous Printing] option, but it is available only when the
printer to be used has been selected, and applicable only to the sampling element, alarm
display element and curve element (excl. chart element). When the current screen is
printed out and the data recorded in the element are not completly sampled on the screen,
the user can use this option to print the rest of the data continuously until the sampling is
completed.
26-2
26-3
The screen specified by the Goto Screen should not be the print screen.
Cannot change to the print screen via goto screen or control area command.
The print screen should not be the default screen.
The print screen should not be the base screen.
The print screen should not be the sub-screen.
The print screen should not be the screen saver screen.
The print typesetting provides [Print All] and [Custom Print] options.
With the [Print All] option selected, all 4 screen that the user dragged to the Print
Screen on the right side for printing will be printed out. Historical data can also be
printed out using this option. The user can select the screen to be printed, set the
layout of the screen or delete the screen not to be printed.
26-4
With the [Custom Print] option selected, the user can specify the screen to be printed.
For this, the user can set the Read Address of Screen and the height (Height), width
(Width), the X coordinate of the start point (Left) and the Y coordinate of the start point
(Top) within the print range. This option can be used in conjunction with the print flag in
the control area and the Report List button.
26-5
26-6
The user can enter the screen number in the Read Address of Screen field. It
is set up individually on the screen to be printed. When 0 is entered, all
screens set up in the Screen Print will be printed out. This address can be
used in conjunction with the print flag in the contol area.
Read
Address
of Screen
Left
Top
Width
Height
Set the X coordinate of the start point within the print range.
Set the Y coordinate of the start point within the print range.
Set the width within the print range.
Set the height within the print range.
Table 26-1-1 Custom Print Setting Screen
26-7
Create a new project. Select EPSON LQ-300+II as the printer and add 3 new
screens.
Create a history trend chart on the second screen and set the Continuous
Printing to Yes.
Step1
26-8
Step2
Create a chart element and three numeric elements on the third screen.
Enter [Options] [Print Typesetting] to drag the second and third screens to
the Print Screen window on the right side. Click OK to leave the Screen Print
Setup screen.
26-9
Create a Report List button and select Printer as the output device.
Execute Compile, connect to the EPSON LQ-300+II printer and download the
screen to HMI.
After the download, click the Report List button to print out the Screen Print
Setup screen you set up previously. It takes more time for HMI to print out the
data if many pages are to be printed or there are many sampling data set for
printing.
Step3
Step4
Step5
26-10
26-11
If the user did not select any printer, the Hard Copy Region in the [Screen Properties] will
show Disable and the setting function in this region is not available to the user.
26-12
26-13
Create a new project. Select EPSON LQ-300+II as the printer and add 1 new
screen.
Click the blank area on the screen to enter [Screen Properties]. Set this
screen to [General View Screen] and set the print range in the Hard Copy
Region.
Step1
Step2
26-14
Create a Report List button and select Printer as the output device.
Execute compile, connect to the EPSON LQ-300+II printer and download the
screen to HMI.
After the download, click the Report List button to print out the content
displayed on the current screen.
Step3
Step4
Step5
26-15
At the Slave end, the user only needs to enter [Options] [Configuration] [Print] and
select PictBridge to connect to the printer that supports the PictBridge driver.
26-16
26-17
B07E415
B07S515
B07PS515
B07E515
B08S515
B08E515
B10S411
B10S511
B10E515
B10PE515
B10S615
B10E615
B10VS511
B04S211
B05S100
B05S101
B07S201
B07S211
26-18
print
DOPSoft allows users to use the external devices, such as USB Drive or SD Card as the
output device. When applying this function, the HMI will output the data as the figure file
and store it in the USB Drive or SD Card.
In HMI setting, please go to [Options] [Configuration] [Print] to select UsbWriter so
that the USB Drive will be regarded as the output device. Select SdWriter to regard SD
Card as the output device.
26-19
Create a Report list element on the screen and select [Printer] for Report Device.
When you print the data, the HMI will generate .bmp files, see as below. The HMI will name
the filename according to the time it prints. Please note that the printing time is determined
by the external device. Do not remove the external device when the printing is not
complete.
26-20
Code definition
Reason
Troubleshooting
ERROR_PRINT_PORT
Printer Port error
-3
ERROR_MEMORY_NULL
Memory allocation error
-4
ERROR_USB
Printer has
Printer cannot print with malfunctioned to
some error
occur cannot print.
-2
-5
ERROR_USB_NOT_SELECT
Printer open failed
-6
ERROR_USB_PAPER
Printer cannot print without Printer has no paper.
paper
-7
-8
ERROR_USB_OPEN
Fail to open USB
When it starts
printing, it is failed to
open USB.
-9
ERROR_USB_CLOSE
USB close failed
ERROR_NOT_OK
Printer did not initial
-11
26-21
-14
26-22
PRINTER ERROR
Printing error
error message.
print.
Contents
27-1 Electronic Cam (E-CAM) Elements ........................................................................... 5
27-1-1 E-CAM Curve ................................................................................................. 5
27-1-2 E-CAM Table .................................................................................................. 7
27-1-3 E-CAM Simulator............................................................................................ 9
27-1-4 E-CAM Download Button.............................................................................. 10
27-1-5 E-CAM Cubic Curve Creation (Manually Table Filling Creation)................... 13
27-2 Using Macro to Create an E-CAM Curve ................................................................ 25
27-1
Indirect Printing
Rotary Shear cos Compensation
27-2
After opening the Element Tool, select the Element Bank and enter into the E-CAM folder
which provides the available E-CAM elements. After entering into the E-CAM folder, there
are several E-CAM elements can be used to create an E-CAM table and curve.
27-3
NOTE
The data length of E-CAM macros and the related E-CAM elements use the Double
Word format.
DOPSoft simulator can not do the simulation of E-CAM macros and the related E-CAM
elements. The users must download the macros and elements into the HMI and perform
the simulation on HMI.
27-4
Double-click the E-CAM curve element item to call out the following Element
Properties page. There are three addresses needed to be set: Read Buffer Address,
Read Size Address and Read Start Address.
27-5
27-6
The data of these three addresses should be the same as the addresses of E-CAM
macros or E-CAM Cubic Curve Element (Manually Table Filling Creation Element).
Please refer to the following table:
E-CAM Curve Element
E-CAM Macro
Var4
Var5
Var1
The function of this element is used to display the E-CAM curve in table format.
Double-click the E-CAM Table Element item to call out the following Element
Properties page. There are three addresses needed to be set: Read Buffer Address,
Read Size Address and Read Start Address.
27-7
The data of these three addresses should be the same as the addresses of E-CAM
macros or E-CAM Cubic Curve Element (Manually Table Filling Creation Element).
Please refer to the following table:
27-8
E-CAM Macro
Var4
Var5
Var1
The function of this element is used to simulate the circuit of the E-CAM curve.
Double-click the E-CAM Simulator Element item to call out the following Element
Properties page. There are three addresses needed to be set: Read Buffer Address,
Read Size Address and Read Start Address.
27-9
The data of these three addresses should be the same as the addresses of E-CAM
macros or E-CAM Cubic Curve Element (Manually Table Filling Creation Element).
Please refer to the following table:
E-CAM Macro
Var4
Var5
Var1
The function of this element is used to download the E-CAM curve made by DOPSoft
to ASDA-A2 servo system.
Double-click the E-CAM Simulator Element item to call out the following Element
Properties page. There are three addresses needed to be set: Read Buffer Address,
Read Size Address, Read Start Address, Station Number and COM port.
27-10
The data of Read Buffer Address, Read Size Address and Read Start Address these
three addresses should be the same as the addresses of E-CAM macros or E-CAM
Cubic Curve Element (Manually Table Filling Creation Element). Please refer to the
following table:
E-CAM Macro
Var4
Var5
Var1
27-11
The Station Number is used to configure the station number of ASDA-A2 servo drive.
The COM port is used to configure the COM port for the communication between HMI
and ASDA-A2 servo drive.
Before using E-CAM download button, please configure and complete the associated
communication parameters first. Please note that the connected COM port between
HMI and ASDA-A2 servo drive must be the same as the COM port in the DOPSoft
communication setting properties page. For example, if the connected COM port is
COM2, the COM port in the DOPSoft communication setting properties page must be
selected as COM2 as well.
Figure 27-1-4-3 Communication Setting Properties Page of E-CAM Download Button Element
27-12
Creation)
DOPSoft provides the function of E-CAM Cubic Curve Creation and allows the users to
create an E-CAM cubic curve manually. This is a very useful tool to make an E-Cam
cubic curve quickly. However, when using this function to create an E-CAM curve, the
E-CAM cubic curve data (*.ecm) cannot be saved in the DOPSoft. The external
storage device such as SD card or USB disk is required for saving the E-CAM cubic
curve data.
27-13
Double-click the E-CAM Cubic Curve Creation Element item to call out the following
Element Properties page. There are three addresses needed to be set: Read Buffer
Address, Read Size Address and Read Start Address.
Figure 27-1-5-2 E-CAM Cubic Curve Creation Element Main Properties Page
No.
(1)
27-14
Property
File Management
Button
(2)
(3)
File Manager
(4)
Function
New: Add a new file
Load: Load a file
Save: Save a file
Save As: Save a file as a new file
Delete: Delete a file
Up: Move column up
Down: Move column down
Add Filed: Add a column
Delete Filed: Delete a column
Output: Output the curve
27-15
Example:
1. Create an E-CAM cubic curve creation element on Screen 1 and set the relevant
parameters as follows:
E-CAM Cubic Curve Creation
Address
Element
$400
Read Buffer Address
Read Size Address
$300
$10000
2.
Add a Screen 2.
3.
Create an E-CAM curve element on Screen 2 and set the relevant parameters as
follows:
E-CAM Curve Element
Address
$400
Read Buffer Address
4.
$300
$10000
Create an E-CAM simulator element on Screen 2 and set the relevant parameters as
follows:
E-CAM Simulator Element
Address
$400
$300
$10000
5.
Create a Goto Screen button on Screen 2. Setting its function is to switch to Screen 1.
6.
Create a Goto Screen button on Screen 1. Setting its function is to switch to Screen 2.
7.
Download the screen to HMI. Then, connect a SD card or USB disk to the HMI. In this
example, a USB disk is connected.
8.
Press the E-CAM element to open the element function page and press New to
create a new file.
27-16
9.
10. Use Add Field or Delete Field to add or delete a column of the data.
27-17
11. The degree of E-CAM curve can be set in the column of Theta.
27-18
13. In the column of Type, there are three types of E-CAM cubic curve: Const. Speed,
Const. Acc. and Cubic Curve for selection.
27-19
14. If Const. Acc. is selected, the degree N1(start degree) is required and must be set. If
Cubic Curve is selected, the degree N1 (start degree) and the degree N2 (end degree)
are required and must be set.
27-20
15. Complete the necessary parameters and settings according to the required conditions,
and then press Output button.
16. The HMI will ask if the users want to output the data or not. After pressing YES, the
system will start to output the data and plan an E-CAM cubic curve.
27-21
17. After all the data has been output and calculated, a successful message will appear on
the screen.
27-22
18. Press the Goto button and press the E-CAM curve element and E-CAM simulator
element to display the generated E-CAM curve.
19. If there is no problem, go to previous page and press Save As to save the file.
The users can use the system default file name or define the file name by themselves.
Revision June, 2015
27-23
When saving the file, it is no need to input the extension file name. The HMI will add the
extension file name, i.e. DELTA.ecm automatically after the file is saved.
27-24
DOPSoft also provides E-CAM Marco function for creating an E-CAM curve. Please refer to
the descriptions in the following section.
Var 3
Var 4
Var 5
Returned result
Address of E-CAM curve
algorithm mode
Starting address of
E-CAM parameter input
Starting address of
E-CAM curve output
Address of E-CAM curve
output length
NOTE
DWDouble Word
Memory Usage
Variable
Var 1
Internal Memory
Constant
Var 2
Var 3
PLC Register
27-25
Var 4
Var 5
Explanation of ECAM
Error Reason
No error
Input degree exceeds the allowable range. Please reduce the degree of
zero speed zone or S-Curve area.
10
11
12
13
14
Indirect Printing
E-CAM Curve
Creation Method
Rotary Shear
Adjustable Sealing
Zone
Input
Address
n
n+2
n+4
n+6
n+8
n+10
n+20
n+22
n
n+2
n+4
n+6
n+8
n+10
n+12
n+14
n+16
n+18
n+20
n+22
n+24
n+12
n+14
n+16
n+18
n+20
n+22
Indirect Printing
n
n+2
n+4
n+6
n+8
n+10
n+12
n+14
n+16
n+18
Parameters
27-27
Example:
1. Create a Maintained button which address is set to $0.0 and create an ON macro
command as shown as: $10000 = ECAM(1, $200, $400, $300)
Var 2 = 1. It indicates that this macro command calculate the E-CAM curve for Rotary
Shear Adjustable Sealing Zone.
27-28
The parameters required by this macro command starts from address $200. 12 Double
Word (24 Word) are used. The memory addresses can be used are $200 ~ $223.
$200
$202
$204
$206
$208
$210
$212
$214
$216
$218
$220
$222
The parameters of the calculated E-CAM curve will be output from the address that starts
from $400. Max. occupied address is $1841.
ASDA-A2 provides up to 721 items for one single E-Cam curve. One item occupies one
Double Word. Total 721 x 2 =1442 Word will be occupied. The memory address can be
used are $400 ~ $1841.
The actual E-CAM curve will be output to $300.
2. Create an E-CAM curve element on the screen and set the relevant parameters as
follows:
Read Buffer Address
E-CAM Macro
Var4
Address
$400
Var5
$300
Var1
$10000
3. Create an E-CAM simulator element on the screen and set the relevant parameters as
follows:
E-CAM Simulator
Element
E-CAM Macro
Address
Var4
$400
Var5
$300
Var1
$10000
27-29
4. Create 12 numeric input elements on the screen and set the data length format as
Double Word. Then, set the parameters of addresses as follows:
$200
$202
$204
$206
$208
$210
$212
$214
$216
$218
$220
$222
5. After downloading the above address settings into HMI, enter the following value into
each address in order.
$200
500
$202
35
$204
99
$206
$208
60000
$210
200000
$212
$214
60
$216
30
$218
100
$220
128
$222
10
6. Press Maintained button which address is set to $0.0 and the following E-CAM curve
will be generated on the screen.
27-30
27-31
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Contents
28-1
G-CODE (10MC) ................................................................................................. 33
28-1-1 G-CODE (10MC) File Management ............................................................. 33
28-1-2 G-CODE (10MC) Download ......................................................................... 43
28-1-3 Error Code of 10MC ..................................................................................... 56
28-2
G-CODE (20MC) ................................................................................................. 57
28-2-1 G-CODE (20MC) File Management ............................................................. 57
28-2-2 G-CODE (20MC) Download ......................................................................... 66
28-3
G-CODE (20PM) ................................................................................................. 77
28-3-1 G-CODE (20PM) File Management .............................................................. 77
28-3-2 G-CODE (20PM) Download ......................................................................... 86
28-4
G-Code Keypad ................................................................................................... 95
28-1
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Elements
This section tells users the way to download G-CODE and its connection method.
Following lists the related information of G-CODE:
HMI: DOP-B07PS415 and DOP-B07PS515 models.
PLC controller: Delta PM RTU, Delta 10MC ASCII and Delta AH Series
PLC(Modbus).
Format supported by G-Code file: NC file, FGC file and TXT file.
Supported version of HMI firmware: Firmware 3.0090.
Supported version of PLC firmware: All versions.
NOTE:
The file management element does not support non-G-Code filename extensions
(.exe/.pdf/.csv/.dps/.jpg/.bmp/.mp3./dat) and cannot display the file content.
The maximum size of the editing file for the G-Code file management element is 500K.
Files over 500K can be displayed by G-Code file management but cannot be edited.
G-Code file management element can open the file which is smaller than 10MB.
However, it cannot open nor display the file that exceeds 10MB.
When opening the G-Code file name is named in Chinese, the displaying will be
gibberish. It can be read by G-Code file management element, but cannot be saved.
The NC/FGC/TXT file cannot be opened by G-Code file management if the file contains
illegal ASCII. (The legal ASCII code is 0x20~0x7E.)
G-Code element does not support element rotation.
As long as the G-Code file can be displayed by the file management element, it can be
downloaded to the system.
G-CODE Download
G-CODE Keypad
28-2
Chapter 28 G-CODE
G-CODE Download
G-CODE Keypad
G-CODE Download
G-CODE Keypad
Table 28-1-1 G-CODE Element
When users select model B07PS415 or B07PS515, the screen will show as below. Please
right click the mouse and check Element Tool.
Then, go to Element Bank and select G-CODE file folder. You will see the supported
elements.
Revision June, 2015
28-3
Chapter 28 G-CODE
28-4
Chapter 28 G-CODE
10MC
Before HMI connects to 10MC, the communication format of PLC module has to
be set first. Then, it set the format of motion control module. Please set the
communication format of PLC module first. Then set the format for motion control
module.
WPLSoft is mainly used to set the communication format of PLC
module.
Open WPLSoft and edit Ladder program that shows below. Set the
communication format of COM1 and COM2 to 115200, 7, E, 1 and station
number 1.
PLC
Settin
g
Then, select RS232 as the type. Users can select [Auto-detect] to detect PLC
28-5
Chapter 28 G-CODE
communication protocol. If the screen shows the result, it means the system
is connected to the PLC.
28-6
Chapter 28 G-CODE
28-7
Chapter 28 G-CODE
28-8
If users wish to change IP address, please wait for the search result and click
on [Setup]. Then, enter the default password [0000].
Chapter 28 G-CODE
28-9
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Now, users can monitor Ladder via the function of [Online Monitor].
From the following figure, you can see the value of D6515 is set to 576. Since 576
(in decimal format) is transferred to binary format, the communication format
becomes 115200, 7, E, 1. Users can change the value to 512 (with
communication format of 9600, 7, E, 1) or use other value to change the format.
Please refer to Delta_DVP-MC_O_TC_20120817.pdf (P.262) for further
information of communication format setting.
28-10
Chapter 28 G-CODE
HMI
Settin
g
28-11
Chapter 28 G-CODE
28-12
Chapter 28 G-CODE
ISPSoft
ISPSoft is used to set AH500. Here we use AH500 CPU510-EN as the
example.
Setting of Mini USB Cable
Open ISPSoft first, then COMMGR. Add one Driver and name it as
Driver1.
Select USB (Virtual COM) for its Type.
When your PC has the device driver, select COM 9 as COM Port.
When the setting is complete, click on OK.
PLC
Settin
g
28-13
Chapter 28 G-CODE
28-14
Chapter 28 G-CODE
28-15
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Then, you can switch to COM Port to set the baud rate. Please note
that, 20MC can only apply RTU mode of communication.
In this example, the RTU communication format is set as RS485,
115200, 8, 1, E and the station number is 1.
28-16
Chapter 28 G-CODE
PMSoft
PMSoft is used to set the communication format of 20MC.
Before using Mini USB Cable to communicate with 20MC, please install
CP210x_VCP_Win_XP_S2K3_Vista_7.exe from the following
path C:\Program Files (x86)\Delta Industrial Automation\PMSoft
Revision June, 2015
28-17
Chapter 28 G-CODE
2.08\drivers\CP210x_VCP_Win_XP_S2K3_Vista_7.
28-18
Chapter 28 G-CODE
28-19
Chapter 28 G-CODE
28-20
Chapter 28 G-CODE
When the connection is built, change the baud rate via the Ladder
programming. Then, download the ladder program and re-power on AH500.
Please refer to the related document for setting communication parameters.
28-21
Chapter 28 G-CODE
28-22
Return to PMSoft and create a new project. Please select [AH20MC-5A] for
PLC type.
Chapter 28 G-CODE
28-23
Chapter 28 G-CODE
If you wish to change the Ethernet IP, please refer to the following document
for further information.
P.504 of DELTA_IA-PLC_AH500_MCMdM_EN_20141201.pdf.
28-24
Chapter 28 G-CODE
28-25
Chapter 28 G-CODE
HMI
Settin
g
28-26
Chapter 28 G-CODE
If you use 20MC Ethernet communication, please set the Transfer mode to
[Direct Mode].
Note: If you choose Ethernet, please change your PLC model to B10PE515.
Then, select Element Bank in Element Tool and go to G-CODE (20MC) file
folder to create the file management element and file download buttons.
Please compile and download the screen to the HMI.
28-27
Chapter 28 G-CODE
NOTE:
28-28
Regardless of the transfer mode you chose, ByPass or Direct Mode, make
sure the Micro SD card is inserted when downloading the G-Code file.
Otherwise, CRC check error message will appear and shows download
failure.
Chapter 28 G-CODE
20PM
1
2
2.4 Then, check [Apply PEP Setting] and enter the password (4 ~ 8
characters).
Revision June, 2015
28-29
Chapter 28 G-CODE
28-30
Chapter 28 G-CODE
HMI
Settin
g
Select Element Bank in Element Tool and go to G-CODE (20PM) file folder to
create file management element and file download buttons.
28-31
Chapter 28 G-CODE
28-32
Chapter 28 G-CODE
NOTE:
1. If you download 10MC file in File mode, it can only transmit the syntax starting with N or
G. Other than that, other syntax will be skipped by the HMI.
2. If you download 10MC file in Step mode, only the G-Code content starting with N will be
transmitted. Thus, it is not suggested to transmit G-Code file that is not starting with N or
G. Or transmission error might occur.
28-33
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Following is the property setting screen of G-Code (10MC) file management element.
28-34
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Content Description
It sets the button height, button width, button color, station number and
COM port.
Text
It sets the displayed text/font/size/color/format/scale/alignment.
Coordinates It sets the X-Y coordinate, width and height of the element.
Property Window of G-Code(10MC) File Management
Start bit
It sets the start bit for G-Code file download.
Pause bit
It sets the pause bit for G-Code file download.
Main
28-35
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Figure 28-1-5 G-Code (10MC) File Management Element Main Properties Page
28-36
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
Property
(1)
Button Width
Description
Setup the button width in toolbar
The default value is 55.
Width is 55
Width is 70
(2)
Button Height
Height is 70
(3)
Button Color
Button color
Button color
(4)
Station
Number
(5)
COM Port
28-37
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
Property
Description
Set
communica
tion
parameter
28-38
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Property Window
No.
Property
(1)
Start Bit
(2)
Pause Bit
Description
It sets the Bit address of Start bit.
This bit is valid only when the file download mode is File. It is
used to enable G-Code file download.
It provides controller and internal memory address.
This bit and the bit in file download button should be set
individually. When the start bit in file management element is
$0.0 and the start bit in file download button is $0.0, users need
to individually create the address for these two bits to control the
activation of G-Code download.
It sets the Bit address of Pause bit.
This bit is valid only when the file download mode is File. It is
used to stop G-Code file download.
It provides controller and internal memory address.
This bit and the bit in file download button should be set
individually. When the pause bit in the file management element
is $1.0 and the pause bit in file download button is $3.0, users
need to individually create the address for these two bits to
deactivate G-Code download.
28-39
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
28-40
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
Property
(1)
Text
(2)
Text
related
property
(3)
Description
Users can enter the text message in text box.
The related property for users to set includes text font, text size,
text color, scaling of the text, alignment method and
bold/italic/underline. Please refer to the above figure.
Edit the
text in
multiple
languages
28-41
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
X- and YValue
Description
X coordinates in upper-left corner and Y coordinates in
upper-left corner
(2)
Width, Height
28-42
Chapter 28 G-CODE
28-43
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Content Description
It sets element style, foreground color, station number, COM port and
download mode.
Text
It sets the text/font/size/color/format/scale/alignment.
It sets picture bank name, alignment, stretch mode and transparent
Picture
color.
Coordinates It sets the X-Y coordinate, width and height of the element.
Property Window of G-Code(10MC) File Download
Start bit
It sets the start bit for G-Code file download.
Pause bit
It sets the pause bit for G-Code file download.
Main
28-44
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Main
(3)
(1)
(2)
(4)
(5)
28-45
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
Property
(1)
Element Type
(2)
Foreground
Color
(3)
Station
Number
Description
Element type is divided into Standard, Raised and Sunken. Users
can change the appearance of the element via this setting.
Standard
Raised
Sunken
COM
setting for
G-Code file
download
element
(4)
COM Port
Setup
module
parameter
(5)
28-46
Download
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
Property
Mode
Description
If you select 10MC controller, you can choose File or Step as the
download mode. When using File mode, assuming G-Code file
has 10 lines, the file will be entirely sent at a time. When using
Step mode, the file will be sent by 10 times, one line for a time.
28-47
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Property Window
No.
Property
(1)
Start bit
(2)
28-48
Pause bit
Description
It sets the Bit address of Start bit.
This bit is valid only when the file download mode is File. It is
used to enable G-Code file download.
It provides controller and internal memory address.
This bit and the bit in file download button should be set
individually. When the start bit in file management element is
$0.0 and the start bit in file download button is $0.0, users need
to individually create the address for these two bits to control the
activation of G-Code download.
It sets the Bit address of Pause bit.
This bit is valid only when the file download mode is File. It is
used to stop G-Code file download.
It provides controller and internal memory address.
This bit and the bit in file download button should be set
individually. When the pause bit in file management element is
$1.0 and the pause bit in file download button is $3.0, users need
to individually create the address for these two bits to deactivate
G-Code download.
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
(1)
Property
Text
Function Description
Users can enter the text message in text box.
28-49
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
Property
(2)
Text
related
property
(3)
28-50
Edit
multilingual
text
Function Description
The text related property includes text font, size, color, scaling,
alignment type and bold/italic/underline. Please refer to the above
figure for its setting.
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Picture
(1)
(2)
(3)
28-51
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
Property
(1)
Function Description
The default name of picture bank is none. If users desire to set up the
picture display, please use the built-in picture bank from the
drop-down list to select the picture.
Picture
Bank Name
28-52
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
Property
Function Description
It sets the alignment type through this selection.
Alignment
(Hori.
/Vert.)
The stretch mode is divided into Whole, Keep Aspect Ratio and Actual
Size.
Whole
Keep Aspect Ratio
Actual Size
Regardless the size
The displayed figure
The figure will fill in
of the element, the
will be scaling
the whole displayed
figure will be
according to the
area.
displayed with its
aspect ratio.
actual size.
If users check Process the picture of all states, it means the setting
will be applied to all so that users do not have to set each figure
individually.
This function can specify any color in the picture as transparent color.
(2)
Stretch
Mode
(3)
Transparent
Color
28-53
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
28-54
Property
Function Description
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
X- and Yvalue
Function Description
X coordinates in upper-left corner and Y coordinates in
upper-left corner.
(2)
Width and
Height
28-55
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Definition
00
01
Success
04
Invalid Command
05
Overtime
06
07
Device busy
08
28-56
Causes
The applied function code
is not 7A.
The function code is
incorrect. For example,
only the station number
and function code or
function code is not 7A.
This error occurs when
PLC software is
downloading the program.
Corrective Action
Check if the function
code is correct.
Chapter 28 G-CODE
NOTE:
Regardless of the transfer mode you chose, ByPass or Direct Mode, make sure the
Micro SD card is inserted when downloading the G-Code file. Otherwise, CRC check
error message will appear and shows download failure.
28-57
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Double click G-Code (20MC) file management element and the property setting screen will
be shown as below:
28-58
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Content Description
It sets button height, button width, button color, station number, COM port
and transfer mode.
Text
It sets the text/font/size/color/format/scale/alignment.
Coordinates It sets the X-Y coordinate, width and height of the element.
Main
28-59
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Figure 28-2-3 G-Code (20MC) file management element main property setting screen
28-60
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
(1)
(2)
Property
Function Description
It sets the button width on toolbar.
The default setting is 55 and the maximum is 100.
Button width
Button Width
is 55
Button width
is 70
It sets the button height on toolbar.
The default setting is 50 and the maximum is 100.
Button height
Button Height
is 50
Button height
is 70
(3)
Button Color
(4)
(5)
Station
Number
COM Port
COM Port
setting of
G-Code file
download
element.
28-61
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
Property
Function Description
Set
communica
tion
parameter
(6)
When you select ByPass as the transfer mode, you should set
BID and SID number. BID number is Rack No. and SID number
is Slot No. When the physical Slot No. is 0, the setting in the
software should be 1.
Transfer
mode
28-62
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
(1)
Property
Text
Function Description
Users can enter the text message in the text box.
28-63
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
Property
(2)
Text
related
property
(3)
28-64
Function Description
The text related property includes text font, size, color, scaling,
alignment type and bold/italic/underline. Please refer to the
above figure for its setting.
Edit
multilingual
text
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
X- and Yvalue
Function Description
X coordinates in upper-left corner and Y coordinates in
upper-left corner.
(2)
Width and
Height
28-65
Chapter 28 G-CODE
28-66
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Content Description
It sets element style, foreground color, station number, COM port and
transfer mode.
Text
It sets the text/font/size/color/format/scale/alignment.
It sets picture bank name, alignment, stretch mode and transparent
Picture
color.
Coordinates It sets the X-Y coordinate, width and height of the element.
Main
28-67
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Main
(3)
(1)
(2)
(4)
(5)
28-68
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
Property
(1)
Element style
(2)
Foreground
color
(3)
Station
number
Function Description
Element type is divided into Standard, Raised and Sunken. Users
can change the appearance of the element via this setting.
Standard
Raised
Sunken
COM
setting for
G-Code file
download
element
(4)
COM Port
Set
communica
tion
parameter
28-69
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
Property
(5)
When you select ByPass as the transfer mode, you should set
BID and SID number. BID number is Rack No. and SID number
is Slot No. When the physical Slot No. is 0, the setting in the
software should be 1.
Transfer
mode
28-70
Function Description
The transfer mode of G-Code (20MC) file management element
can be ByPass Mode and Direct Mode.
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
Property
(1)
Text
(2)
Text
related
Function Description
Users can enter the text message in the text box.
The text related property includes text font, size, color, scaling,
28-71
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
Property
property
Function Description
alignment type and bold/italic/underline. Please refer to the
above figure for its setting.
(3)
28-72
Edit
multilingual
text
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Picture
(1)
(2)
(3)
28-73
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
Property
(1)
28-74
Function Description
The default name of picture bank is none. If users desire to set up the
picture display, please use the built-in picture bank from the
drop-down list to select the picture.
Picture
bank name
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
Property
Function Description
It sets the alignment type through this selection.
Alignment
(Hori.
/Vert.)
The stretch mode is divided into Whole, Keep Aspect Ratio and Actual
Size.
Whole
Keep Aspect Ratio
Actual Size
Regardless the size
The displayed figure
The figure will fill in
of the element, the
will be scaling
the whole displayed
figure will be
according to the
area.
displayed with its
aspect ratio.
actual size.
If users check Process the picture of all states, it means the setting
will be applied to all so that users do not have to set each figure
individually.
This function can specify any color in the picture as transparent color.
(2)
Stretch
Mode
(3)
Transparent
Color
28-75
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
X- and Yvalue
Function Description
X coordinates in upper-left corner and Y coordinates in
upper-left corner.
(2)
Width and
Height
28-76
Chapter 28 G-CODE
28-77
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Double click the G-Code (20PM) file management element and the property setting screen
will be shown as below:
28-78
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Content Description
It sets button height, button width, button color, station number, COM port
and transfer mode.
Text
It sets the text/font/size/color/format/scale/alignment.
Coordinates It sets the X-Y coordinate, width and height of the element.
Main
28-79
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Figure 28-3-3 G-Code (20PM) file management element main property setting screen
28-80
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
Property
(1)
Function Description
It sets the button width on toolbar.
The default setting is 55 and the maximum is 100.
Button width
is 55
Button Width
Button width
is 70
(2)
Button Height
Button height
is 50
Button height
is 70
(3)
Button Color
Button color
Button color
(4)
Station
Number
(5)
COM Port
28-81
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
Property
Function Description
Set
communica
tion
parameter
28-82
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
Property
(1)
Function Description
Users can enter the text message in the text box.
Text
28-83
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
Property
(2)
Text
related
property
(3)
28-84
Function Description
The text related property includes text font, size, color, scaling,
alignment type and bold/italic/underline. Please refer to the
above figure for its setting.
If adding data in multiple languages, go to this page for editing.
See the figure below. Users can edit the text in another language
in column of Language2.
Edit
multilingual
text
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
X- and Yvalue
Function Description
X coordinates in upper-left corner and Y coordinates in
upper-left corner.
(2)
Width and
Height
28-85
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Content Description
It sets element style, foreground color, station number, COM port and
transfer mode.
It sets the text/font/size/color/format/scale/alignment.
Picture
It sets picture bank name, alignment, stretch mode, transparent color.
Coordinates It sets the X-Y coordinate, width and height of the element.
Table 28-2-2 Functional page of G-Code (20PM) file download
28-86
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Main
(3)
(1)
(2)
(4)
Figure 28-3-7 G-Code (20PM) file download element main property setting screen
28-87
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
Property
(1)
Element style
(2)
Foreground
color
(3)
Station
number
Function Description
Element style is divided into Standard, Raised and Sunken.
Users can change the appearance of the element via this setting.
Standard
Raised
Sunken
(4)
COM Port
Set
communica
tion
parameter
28-88
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
Property
(1)
Text
(2)
Text
related
Function Description
Users can enter the text message in the text box.
The text related property includes text font, size, color, scaling,
alignment type and bold/italic/underline. Please refer to the
28-89
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
Property
property
Function Description
above figure for its setting.
(3)
28-90
Edit
multilingual
text
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Picture
(1)
(2)
(3)
28-91
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
Property
(1)
28-92
Function Description
The default name of picture bank is none. If users desire to set up the
picture display, please use the built-in picture bank from the
drop-down list to select the picture.
Picture
bank name
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
Property
Function Description
It sets the alignment type through this selection.
Alignment
(Hori.
/Vert.)
The stretch mode is divided into Whole, Keep Aspect Ratio and Actual
Size.
Whole
Keep Aspect Ratio
Actual Size
Regardless the size
The displayed figure
The figure will fill in
of the element, the
will be scaling
the whole displayed
figure will be
according to the
area.
displayed with its
aspect ratio.
actual size.
If users check Process the picture of all states, it means the setting
will be applied to all so that users do not have to set each figure
individually.
This function can specify any color in the picture as transparent color.
(2)
Stretch
Mode
(3)
Transparent
Color
28-93
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
X- and Yvalue
Function Description
X coordinates in upper-left corner and Y coordinates in
upper-left corner.
(2)
Width and
Height
28-94
Chapter 28 G-CODE
28-95
Chapter 28 G-CODE
G-Code keypad element has two kinds of property settings, one is the rectangle element
below the keypad and the other one is the font setting element displayed on the keypad.
Double click the G-Code keypad element (rectangle) and the property setting screen will be
shown as below:
28-96
Chapter 28 G-CODE
28-97
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
28-98
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
(1)
(2)
Property
Function Description
Users can define the line color.
Line color
Line size
(3)
Round radius
(4)
Foreground
color
28-99
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
(5)
Property
Function Description
Transparent
Transparent:
Yes
Transparent:
No
(6)
Penetrate
This function allows the user to click the element that overlapped
with the rectangle.
Please refer to the following example. Users need to create one
numeric entry element first. Then, create a rectangle element
which will be placed above the numeric element.
Penetrate:
ON
28-100
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
Property
Function Description
Penetrate:
OFF
28-101
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Picture
(1)
(2)
(3)
28-102
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
Property
(1)
Function Description
The default name of picture bank is none. If users desire to set up
the picture display, please use the built-in picture bank from the
drop-down list to select the picture.
Picture
bank
name
28-103
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
Property
Function Description
It sets the alignment type through this selection.
Alignmen
t (Hori.
/Vert.)
(2)
The stretch mode is divided into Whole, Keep Aspect Ratio and
Actual Size.
Whole
Keep Aspect Ratio
Actual Size
Regardless the size
The displayed
The figure will fill in
of the element, the
figure will be
the whole displayed
figure will be
scaling according to
area.
displayed with its
the aspect ratio.
actual size.
Stretch
Mode
the broom, the orange part will be identical to the foreground color.
(3)
28-104
Transpar
ent Color
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Details
(1)
No.
Property
(1)
Function Description
When this bit is on, the button element will be hidden and its
function will be invalid.
Invisible
address
28-105
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Double click the G-Code keypad and the setting screen will be shown as below:
G-Code Keypad
Function
Content Description
Page
Main
It sets element style, foreground color, display, and mode.
Text
It sets the text/font/size/color/format/scale/alignment.
It sets picture bank name, alignment (Hori/Ver.), stretch mode, and
Picture
transparent color.
Table 28-4-2 Functional page of G-Code keypad
28-106
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Main
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
Figure 28-4-7 G-Code keypad (1) element main property setting screen
No.
Property
(1)
Function Description
When users click on one small block on the keypad (1) element, it
will display the value of the block that you just selected.
Display
28-107
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
Property
(2)
Mode
Function Description
We provide 15 modes, including [ESC], [ENT], [CLR], [DEL],
[BKSP], [Home], [End], [Insert], [Page Up], [Page Down], [Left],
[Right], [Up], [Down] and [ASCII] for users to define the block.
[ESC]: It means to cancel the text entry; if the keypad element
is placed on subscreen, the subscreen will be closed when
you press ESC.
[ENT]: it means to enter.
[CLR]: it means to clear the whole string.
[DEL]: it means to delete one character.
[BKSP]: it means to delete one character. (backspace).
[Home]: it means the cursor will move to the beginning of the
row.
[End]: it means the cursor will move to the end of the row.
[Insert]: it is the toggle key of inserting and replacing
characters.
[Page Up]: it means to go to the previous page.
[Page Down]: it means to go to the next page.
[Left]: it means the cursor will move to the left.
[Right]: it means the cursor will move to the right.
[Up]: it means the cursor will move to the previous row.
[Down]: it means the cursor will move to the next row.
[ASCII]: it means users can enter the specified character
code.
The Style option provides Standard and Raised for selection. This
setting allows the user to change the appearance of the element.
Standard
(3)
Style
(4)
Foreground
color
28-108
Raised
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
Property
Function Description
28-109
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Text
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
Property
(1)
(2)
(3)
28-110
Function Description
Users can enter the text message in the text box.
Text
As long as the element allows users to enter the text, you can
firstly select the element and then press the space key to edit the
text.
The text related property includes text font, size, color, scaling,
alignment type and bold/italic/underline. Please refer to the above
figure for its setting.
Edit
multilingual
text
Text
related
property
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
Property
Function Description
Language. See the figure below. Users can enter the text in
English in English field.
28-111
Chapter 28 G-CODE
Picture
(1)
(2)
(3)
28-112
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
Property
(1)
Function Description
The default name of picture bank is none. If users desire to set
up the picture display, please use the built-in picture bank from
the drop-down list to select the picture.
Picture bank
name
28-113
Chapter 28 G-CODE
No.
Property
Function Description
It sets the alignment type through this selection.
Alignment
(Hori. /Vert.)
The stretch mode is divided into Whole, Keep Aspect Ratio and
Actual Size.
Whole
Keep Aspect Ratio
Actual Size
Regardless the size
The displayed
The figure will fill in
of the element, the
figure will be
the whole displayed
figure will be
scaling according to
area.
displayed with its
the aspect ratio.
actual size.
(2)
Stretch
Mode
(3)
28-114
Transparent
Color
Contents
29-1 Password Setting........................................... .............................................................. 5
29-2 Video.............................................................. ............................................................ 10
29-3 Web Monitor.............................................. ................................................................. 32
29-3-1
29-3-2
HMI Setting................................................................................................... 32
Web page Setting ......................................................................................... 34
PrnServer ..................................................................................................... 84
HMISetting.................................................................................................... 88
29-1
When you choose [Ethernet] as the download method, please go to system screen and set
DHCP toOFF. Then, manually set the HMIs IP address. Otherwise, the HMI might be
unable to be searched by the software and cause download error.
29-3
W series HMIs provide two LAN ports for users to upload/download screens/recipes,
acquire firmware serial number and recover the default value via the Internet. According to
different applications, users also can configure two ports in two network segments.
USB upload/download function is invalid in series HMIs. If the Ethernet IP address has
not been initialized on account of HMIs abnormal status or the screen file cannot be
opened, please go to the system directory [System setting] [Network] and click on the
[Refresh] button on the right-upper corner. Then, the HMI will be able to acquire the IP
address and upload/download screens.
See the followings for the descriptions of W series HMI functions.
29-4
In the same permission level, it cannot have two identical account names. But users
can use the same password for different accounts.
The identical account name can be used in different levels. For example, the account
name in level 0 is 123, users can still set the account name to 123 in level 1.
The account and password can be set up to 24 characters.
The account and password will only show capital letters.
Level 0
Level1 ~ 7
Level8
29-5
29-6
When users are in the same permission level and wish to add the same account, the HMI
will show a message of Account Duplicate!.
29-7
Users can change the password and account information by pressing the button of
[Password table].
29-8
Users also can go to the system screen and select [System setting] [Password] to
change the password and accountinformation.
29-9
29-2 Video
W series HMIs provide a media player that enables users to play and maintain the demo
videos. Each operator can therefore effectively complete their tasks. This function also can
be used to introduce the standard operation procedure so that it can create a learning
environment for users.
Users can directly select the video file that is going to be played or assign different videos
according to the value in the Word register.
DOP-W127B and DOP-W157B have built-in front speakers and can connect external
speakers. Users can adjust the sound generator for the external speakers and the switch of
built-in speakers in [Volume] which can be found in the system directory.
NOTE:
29-10
29-11
29-12
29-13
See the followings for detailed description of [Video list output setting], [Control address]
and [Play list].
Video List Output Setting
Table 29-2-1 Video list output setting
29-14
Add
29-15
Select an added video and you can choose to delete one of the
files from the list.
When you desire to delete multiple files, please select the file by
using the SHIFT key + the left key on the mouse or the Ctrl key
+the left key on the mouse. Then, click on delete to delete the file
that you just selected.
Delete
29-16
The following figure shows the video list after the selected files
are deleted.
Export
29-17
29-18
Save
location
The save location can be USB or SD. Users can change the save
location. The default setting is SD.
ID
29-19
Video
Name
When the file is added to the video list, its name will be named as
Video. And the first video will be named as Video001, then
Video002, Video003 and so on.
This displays the address of the file after it is added to the list.
The source of the video can be changed.
Source
29-20
Control Address
Table 29-2-2 Control Address
The control address can only set as Word format to play or stop the
video.
It can be a controller address or an internal memory address.
NOTE:
If the control address is set to $200, it can also be set to the
maintained button of $200.0 so that when users press the button of
$200.0 can play the video and release to stop.
Control Address
Play
Stop
Controller
Address
D100 = 1
D100 = 0
D200 = 1
D200 = 0
$200 = 1
$200 = 0
(Link1@D100)
(EtherLink1@D200)
Internal Memory
Address
($200)
29-21
Play List
Table 29-2-3 Play List
The play list includes two functions,Add into the play item
play item
29-22
Play List
Table 29-2-3 Play List
Add
Delet
e
Users can delete the unnecessary video from the play list.
Below shows the play list after the first file is deleted.
Befor
e
After
Revision June, 2015
29-23
Play List
Table 29-2-3 Play List
Accessing
Method
(Mode)
29-24
Play List
Table 29-2-3 Play List
be 2.
The name will be Video and a number starting from 001 (Video name
+ number), such as Video001 for the first one, Video002 for the
second, Video003 for the third and so on.
Regardless the mode (either File or Address) you use, when selecting
Repeat to play the video, the video in the list will be played from the
beginning to the end over and over. It will not stop until the stop
element is triggered.
Name
Repeat
29-25
Following is the example for describing the setting method when playing the video.
Exmaple of video play
Table 29-2-4 Example of video play
Video lists
output
setting
Set the [Save location] to [USB].
Click [Export].
29-26
Then, set the resolution to 640X480 and select the storage device for
the exported file.
29-27
29-28
Create the
Maintained
Button
(Button for
playing the
video)
29-29
Create the
numeric
entry
element
Edit and
Download
the screen
Operate
the HMI
EtherLink2_1}1@D10 = 2
29-30
{Link2}1@D20 = 6
{EtherLink2_1}1@D5 = 1
29-31
Go to Realtime Monitor Settings, and you will find that multiple data formats are
provided.The supported data format includes BCD, Signed Decimal, Unsigned Decimal,
29-32
Hex, Floating and Char. Each format can set the length which determines the unit, Word or
Double Word. Users can select Word or Bit as the Address. It supports internal memory
address and external PLC address.
29-33
Step2: Click on Next. Enter the password and click on Next again.
Step 3: Select the Internet connection type. We usually choose DHCP. Then, click on
Finish.
Step 4: When the setting is complete, the screen will be shown as below.
Step 5: Make sure the function of Realtime Monitor Setting is enabled and the address is
set. Then, enter http://[HMIIP]/RemoteMon/ on web browser. You will see the following
page. Please enter the password for Network application to log on.
Step 6: Then, you can see the realtime monitoring address set in the software.
29-35
Step 7: Click on the Write button of each monitoring address under Action field.
Step 8: Enter the write-in value and click on the Write button. The value you just entered will
be written to the monitoring I/O address. The web page will be updated after the refresh
time.
29-36
29-4 VNC
VNC (Virtual Network Computing) is the software that users can apply to remotely monitor
and operate W series HMIs. Through the Internet, this software can transmit the action of
keypad and mouse and the real-time screen.
29-37
Or you can go to [System Setting] [Network App] under system directory, set [VNC] to
on, complete password setting and select LAN1, LAN2 or All for VNC connection.
29-38
When the above settings are complete, please compile and download all screens to the
HMI.
29-39
PC Software
Web Browser
29-4-2-1 PC Software
29-4-2-1-1
Software installation
29-40
29-41
Select VNC Server location. If you do not change the location, please click [Next].
Select VNC Viewer location. If you do not change the location, please click [Next].
29-42
Users can determine whether to create a VNC Viewer desktop icon. And click [Next].
Please check Add an exception to the firewall for VNC Server and click [Next].
29-43
29-44
29-4-2-1-2
Please open VNC Viewer, complete the following settings and select [Connect].
VNC Server: Please enter VNC Server IP Address and its communication
port for connection. The IP Address is HMIs IP Address. The communication
port is the one that can be set from [Options] [Configuration] [Network
Application] in DOPSoft. In this example, HMIs IP Address is 192.168.123.26
and the communication port is 5900. If the communication port for software
connection is changed to 5902, then when you use VNC Viewer, the
connection port has to be changed to 5902 as well.
Encryption: Please select [Let VNC Server choose].
When the connection is successfully built, the following window will pop up as the
reminder that notifies users the connection address is unencrypted. If you want to
ignore this message, just click [Dont warn me about this again] and click [Continue]
to continue VNC Viewer connection.
29-45
If it cannot build the connection, it means the IP Address does not exist or the VNC
network connection is not enabled. Then, the following warning message will pop
up.
When it is successfully connected, it will require users to enter the password for
HMI and VNC Viewer connection. Please enter the VNC password for Network
application which is introduced in 29-3-1. The default setting is 12345678.
Entering the wrong password, the following message will pop up.
When the password is authenticated, you can start to remotely operate the
HMI via VNC Viewer.
29-47
Do not set the communication port to 5800. If you do so, the following message will
pop up and ask you to change it.
If JAVA version is above 1.7.0_45 and HMI firmware version below 3.0073, please
follow as below instruction to set JAVA configuration.
Step2. In [Security] page, click [Edit Site List] to add exception site list.
29-48
29-49
Step3. For example, input HMI IP address and port like [http://192.168.123.148:5800]
and then click [Add].
Step4. Click [Continue] to accept location, after click continue, the address should
appear as following shown on the windows, click [OK] to finish setting.
29-50
29-51
Step5. Change your java.policy file in the following path: C:\Program Files
(x86)\Java\jre1.8.0_65\lib\security\. Then, insert the string of [permission
java.security.AllPermission;] before }; in the end of this file.
If JAVA version is above 1.7.0_45 and HMI firmware version is 3.0073 or higher,
please follow as below instruction to set JAVA configuration.
29-52
Step2. In [Genernal] Page, click Setting and delete the temporary file.
29-53
Step3. After delete temporary file, please disable [keep temporary files on my computer]
option, and then click [OK] to finish the setting.
29-54
Step4. In [Security] page, click [Manage Certificates], choose Certificate type as [Signer
CA] and clicke [Import], select name as HMIVNC.csr file. After import certificate file,
click [Close] and return to Security page, click [OK].
29-55
29-56
Step8. After connected, it will display Security Warning windows, please click [Run].
29-57
Step8. The VNC viewer will ask for connection, click [OK].
29-58
Step9. Enter Password with default setting like 12345678, and then press Enter to
remote HMI.
29-59
Step1: Please open your browser. In this example, we use Google Chrome as the browser.
Use Google Chrome browser to open chrome web store in the following web address:
https://chrome.google.com/webstore/category/apps
Then, please enter VNC search and download the app that shows below.
Click + ADD TO CHROME and the screen will be shown as below. Please click Add app.
You will be unable to open the webpage when entering the wrong IP Address.
29-60
Please activate VNC Viewer application and enter the HMIs IP and Port in Address.
Here we enter 192.168.123.66:5900 as the example. 192.168.123.66:5900 is the HMIs IP
address. 5900 is the communicaiton port for DOPSoft. It can be set by [Options] >
Configuration] > [Network]. If your software communication port is changed to 5902, when
applying VNC Viewer for connection, you have to change your communication port to 5902.
29-61
Step2: Please enter the VNC password for connecting with HMI. This password is the one
for setting VNC network application. The default setting is 12345678.
Ifyou enter the wrong password, the following message will pop up.
29-63
Step3: Enter the correct password and you can operate the HMI on webpage.
29-64
To use Android Smart Device, please go to Google Play store to download VNC
Viewer Appand complete the setting with the following instructions.
29-65
Step3: When the setting is complete, the screen will be shown as below. Please click
[Connect].
29-66
29-67
When entering the wrong IP Address, it will show the following message.
29-68
Step4: Users will be required to enter the password for connecting to the HMI. This
password is identical to the one for setting VNC network application. The default setting
is 12345678.
Figure 29-4-20 VNC Viewer APP enter the password for connection
29-69
If entering the wrong password, the following message will pop up.
29-70
29-71
To use iOS Smart Device, please go to App Store to download VNC Viewer App and
complete the setting with the following instructions.
29-72
29-73
Step3: When the setting is complete, the screen will be shown as below. Please click
[Connect].
29-74
Then, the following message will pop up. Please click [Connect] to continue the setting.
29-75
Step4: Users will be required to enter the password for connecting to the HMI. This
password is identical to the one for setting VNC network application. The default setting is
12345678. Click [Done] to complete the setting.
Users will be asked to enter the password again if entering the wrong one.
29-76
Figure 29-4-28 The HMI screen monitored via VNC Viewer APP (iOS)
29-77
Step6:Clicking [X] on bottom right corner will disconnect the connection between HMI
and VNC.
29-78
and the following window will pop up. Users can enter
2. Now you can see VNC Viewer is remotely controlling two HMIs.
29-79
Save the
connection
setting
1. Click on
29-80
Users also can save multiple connection settings. Please see the
figure below.
Revision June, 2015
29-81
You only need to open VNC Address Book and select the IP Address
for connection next time.
Disconnect
the
connection
Click on
connection.
needed.
Full Screen
Connection
Information
29-83
29-5 e-Printer
With e-Printer function, users can print from HMI without connecting to a physical printer,
which saves the space and brings convenience. See the e-Printer framework below:
The function of e-Printer can be mainly divided into two parts. Following will firstly introduce
PrnServer and then describe the setting of HMI and ePrinter so that users can print on the
Internet.
29-5-1 PrnServer
PrnServer is an executable file (.exe). Users can print the file via the Internet by executing
PrnServer.
PrnServer is located at C:\Program Files (x86)\Delta Industrial Automation\DOPSoft
2.00.04\PrnServer.exe on PC.
29-84
29-85
Connection
Disconnection
Printer
Setting
29-86
Exit
Description
About
29-87
29-5-2 HMISetting
This section describes how to set ePrinter function in HMI screen and print out the file by
HMI.
Create a project
Please select W105B and set Printer as ePrinter.
29-88
29-89
Print
Go to [Options] [Configuration] [Print] and select [Ethernet]. Then, fill in IP address
and port number.
IP Address: This address is the one for enabling PrnServer.Users can use ipconfig in
Command Prompt and check PCs IP address, which is 192.168.123.68 in this
example.
NOTE:
29-90
This IP address should share the identical network segment with HMIs.
Port: 85 is the default connecting port of the printer.It is also the connecting port in
PrnServer.
29-91
29-92
29-93
NOTE:
29-94
Multi-Language Input
Table 29-6-1 Example of multi-language input
Read
memory
address
$555
Multi-Lang
Settings
Result
29-95
Multi-Language Input
Table 29-6-1 Example of multi-language input
29-96
Press
Long press
Multi-Language Input
Table 29-6-1 Example of multi-language input
29-97
Multi-Language Input
Table 29-6-1 Example of multi-language input
29-98
Double-click Multi-Lang Input to display the Multi-Lang Input Properties screen as shown
below.
Multi-Language Input
Function
Page
Preview
Content Description
The selections of state and language areunavailable.
Main
It sets theread address, write address, read offset address, write offset
address, elements style, border color, background color and string
length.
Text
Details
It sets input mode, interlock state, interlock address, trigger type, trigger,
invisible address, user security level, set low security and display
asterisk (*).
29-99
Main
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
No.
Property
Write
Address
(1)
Read
Address
(2)
(3)
29-100
Write
Offset
Address
Read
Offset
Address
String
Length
Function
No.
Property
Function
(4)
(5)
(6)
Style
Raised
Sunken
Transparent
Border
Color
Backgrou
nd Color
29-101
Text
(1)
No.
Property
(1)
Text
Properties
29-102
Function
It can set text properties, including font type, font size, font
color, and text alignment.
Details
(3)
(1)
(2)
(4)
(5)
(6)
No.
Property
Function
User
Security
Level
(1)
Set Low
Security
This function sets the security of pressing the element. To use this
function, users have to have the set level or higher user security.
Once you set the users security level, when pressing the element, a
pop-up window for entering the password will appear and confirm if
the password is correct. (Password can be changed via password
table. Please refer to 29-1 for Password Setting).
29-103
No.
Property
Function
If YES is selected for Set Low Security, the HMI automatically sets the
security to the lowest level every time when users input the password.
When users activate the element again, they will be requested to input
the password that corresponded to the element again.
(2)
Display
Asterisks
(*)
(3)
Input
Mode
(4)
InterLock
State
29-104
No.
Property
Function
2.
InterLock
Address
29-105
There are two trigger types, trigger before writing and trigger after
writing.
Behavior when
triggering
Trigger
Type
The triggering function can only set the triggering address to On.
Users have to set it off.
See below for the flow chart of
See below for the flow chart of
Trigger before writing:
Trigger after writing:
(5)
Trigger
(6)
29-106
When the invisible address is set to On, the button element will be
hidden and its setting function will be inactivated.
Invisible
Address
29-107
Coordinates
(1)
(2)
No.
Property
(1)
X-value and
Y-value
(2)
Width and
Height
29-108
Function
Sets the upper left X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of elements.
Macro
29-109
No.
Property
Function
The running process of the Before Execute Macro and the After ExecuteMacro
are shown as below:
(1)
When users touch the button element, the HMI will firstly run
the commands in the macro and then execute the button
action.
If the button state is not changed by means of touching button
(using external controller commands or other macros), HMI will
not run the corresponding macro commands.
Before
Execute
Macro
After Execute
Macro
29-110
Please refer to Table 29-7-1 for the descriptions of auto log out
29-111
Step1
Step2
29-112
Step3
29-113
Step3
29-114
Result
Step1
Step2
29-115
Step3
29-116
Step3
Result
29-117
The custom keypad has to be built by dragging the element from Element Tool. Please right
click the mouse on the place highlighted in the following figure to make sure the element
tool is checked.
Please click [Element tool] [Keypad-Templet] and you will see 16 types of keypad
provided by the software.
KP (1): Decimal keypad (Two kinds in total and two different sizes for each kind
<Big/Small>)
KP (2): Hexadecimal keypad (Two kinds in total and two different sizes for each kind
<Big/Small>)
KP (3): ASCII keypad (Two kinds in total and two different sizes for each kind
<Big/Small>)
EASCII: Extended ASCII (One kind and two different sizes<Big/Small>)
KP_Swedish: Swedish keypad (One kind and two different sizes<Big/Small>)
29-118
When enabling this function, if you drag any of the keypads when the keypad element has
not been completely downloaded, the following message will pop up.
29-119
The software provides a complete keypad style. Users also can select the customized
keypad which is in [Cust-Keypad].
With the cust-keypad element, users can replace one provided by the software. Ungroup
the keypad element and drag the element from cust-keypad to the keypad. See the figure
below.
29-120
29-121
If you wish to add a new screen, please select [Keypad Screen] for the Screen Type.
Double click the screen to enter Screen Properties and change the screen to [Keypad
Screen].
29-122
The custom keypad can work with global keypad setting. Firstly, users need to set the
screen as Keypad Screen. Then, create the keypad style and apply the keypad style to all
keypad elements. Please refer to CH02 2-2-8-9 Global keypad setting for further
information.
29-123
NOTE:
29-124
Custom Keypad
Table 29-8-1 Custom Keypad
Step1
29-125
29-126
Step2
element.
Step3
29-128
Use custom
keypad
29-129
Step4
29-130
Result
29-131
Select the screen that you wish to delete from [Screen Manager] and right click the
mouse to delete.
Change the screen to Screen or Sub Screen todelete the keypad screen.
29-132
Click on OK, the screen will show the keypad lists for users to change.
29-133
29-134
Keypad Lists
Table 29-8-2 Keypad Lists
Users can select the system keypad executed in one specific element,
the custom keypad or not to change the current setting.
Description
Action
No action
Use system
keypad
Use custom
keypad
29-135
Custom
Keypad
Select All
29-136
Convert
selected as
No action
System Keypad
Custom Keypad
29-137
Change
OK
This function will convert the selected element and action with the
original one.
When enabling this function, please click on OK. Otherwise, this
function might be invalid.
Clicking OK, it will apply the setting to the corresponding element and
global keypad.
Click [X] or [Cancel] to close the window and the setting will not be
changed.
After converting, the HMI will ask if users are sure to delete the screen. Select [Yes] to
delete the screen; select [No] the screen will be remained and cancel or transfer the
referable link of the original element.
29-138
Figure 29-8-16 Determine whether you are going to delete the screen or not
Select [Yes] to delete the screen; select [No] the screen will be remained.
If you change this screen to main or sub screen, no warning message will show. It will
directly change to the one that users set.
29-139
Contents
A-1
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-5
A-1
A-2
FigureA-1-1 Press the Top Right Corner to Leave the System Screen
A-3
The user can click the icon on the screen to access corresponding function options.
The model with auxiliary keys, such as DOP-B07S201 and DOP-B07S211, allows the
user to press physical keys to operate the system screen.
Enter the
Contrast
Contrast Adjustment
System Setup
Display Panel
Bright
Brightness Adjustment
Gamma
LCD Gamma Adjustment
Date/Time
A-4
Date
Time
System Time Setup
Alarm Clock
Alarm Clock Setup
(Currently Not Enabled)
Delay
Touch Panel Delay Setup
Touch Panel
Force
Touch Panel Force Setup
Calibrate
Touch Panel Calibration
Network
HMI Name
DHCP
IP
IP Address Setup
Mask
Gateway
Gateway Setup
MAC
COM 1
COM Port
COM 2
COM 3
Revision June, 2015
Volume
Buzzer
HMI Key Tone and Buzzer
Volume Adjustment
Password
Level 0 ~ Level 7 Password Table Setup
A Password Is Needed for Password Table
Setup
MISC.
File Management
A-6
Touch Cursor
Energy Saving
Enable Time
Energy Saving %
Default Language
Multi-Language ID
Selection
BD LED Function
Mode
Startup Screen
USBCommMode
Formatting
Multi-Window File
Normal
Firmware Update
Encrypt
Encryption of Screen
Data and Setup of Copy
Times
COM 1 or COM 2 in the
Normal Mode Must Be
Selected for
Upload/Download
Screen Data.
COM 1
COM 2
Upload/Download
Bypass
Mode 1
COM 1 COM 2
Mode 2
COM 1 COM 3
Mode 3
COM 2 COM 1
Transmission
Upload
Upload/Download of
DVP Files Used in PLC.
Download
System Data
Display of HMI Data, Including Firmware Version, Model, Battery
Capacity, Memory Space, CPU Rate, Test Data, Current Time, PLC
Driver in Use and Connection to External Storage.
HMI Doctor
Revision June, 2015
Blue
Green
Green Screen Test
Red
Red Screen Test
Black
Black Screen Test
White
White Screen Test
Network
Network Test
(Currently Not Enabled)
Color
Color Saturation Test
USB
USB Test
ADC
A-8
ADC Test
Revision June, 2015
Buzzer / LED
Buzzer / LED Test
Draw a Line
Touch Panel Line Drawing Test
A-9
A-10
Display Panel
FigureA-2-2Display Panel
Display Panel
Gamma
A-11
Default
Up
Down
Left
Right
Exit
Date/Time
FigureA-2-3Date/Time
Set the date and time (year, month, day, hour, minute, second) for the HMI system.
Date
Date/Time
Time
Alarm Clock
Set the alarm clock time
(Currently Not Enabled)
A-12
Up
Down
Left
Right
Exit
Touch Panel
FigureA-2-4Touch Panel
Set the touch panel, including the delay time, press force and calibration
Set the touch panel delay time.
Set the HMI processing delay time for touch and
Delay
movement of messages. Move the slider right to
reduce the delay time for quicker movement. Move the
slider left to increase the delay time for slower
movement.
Touch Panel
Set the touch force for the panel.
Force
Move the slider left to reduce the force. HMI will
recognize lower force and the touch operation
becomes easier. Move the slider right to increase the
force. HMI will recognize the higher force and the touch
operation becomes more difficult.
Calibrate the touch panel.
Calibrate
Follow the instructions and touch the center of
to
conduct five-point calibration of the HMI touch panel. A
significant deviation may be brought about to the touch
panel if the user touches a point far away from the
A-13
Calibration 2
Calibration 3
Calibration 4
Calibration 5
Default
A-14
Up
Down
Left
Right
Exit
Network
FigureA-2-5Network
The Network option is only available when the Ethernet function is provided. The user
can use this option to set DHCP, IP, Mask and Gateway.
The user can enter [Options] [Communication Setting]
[Ethernet] [Local Host] to change the following settings for
the network in the System Setup mode.
Network
HMI Name
Revision June, 2015
IP
Mask
Gateway
MAC
Net PSWD
eRemote/eServer
Enable
A-16
Port
FigureA-2-6Port
COM 1
Port
COM 2
COM 3
Default
Up
Down
Left
Right
Exit
A-17
Sound
FigureA-2-7Sound
A-18
Buzzer
Default
Up
Down
Left
Right
Exit
Password
FigureA-2-8Password
A-19
Set Level
Password
Left
A-20
Right
OK
Exit
MISC.
FigureA-2-9MISC.
MISC.
Default
Language
BD LED
Function Mode
LED function
mode is not
enabled
LED flashes
only for
communication
LED flashes
only for
processing of
Disk IO
LED flashes
Disable
Comm.(Communication)
Disk IO
Network
A-21
Startup Screen
USBCOMMMO
DE
A-22
Default
Up
Down
Left
Right
Exit
File Management
A-23
File format, copy, select multiple startup screens, firmware update, encrypt.
Formatting
Copy File
File Management
Multi-Window
File
Firmware
Update
Encrypt
Left
Right
OK
Exit
Formatting
The formatting function is used to format internal and external devices, including HMI, USB,
CF and SD. This option is not enabled before inserting the USB, CF or SD in HMI. After
selection of the device to be formatted, the user needs to enter the password and the
device will be formatted after the password is verified.
A-24
A-25
Copy File
A file can be selected and copied from the device in the source directory to the device in the
destination directory.
The Copy File function can be used in conjunction with the Encrypt function. This function
enables the user to set the copy times for a file. When an encrypted file is copied more than
the setting value of the copy times, the system will inform the user to ensure the security of
the file. Refer to Encrypt for more information.
Up
Down
OK
Left
Right
Copy
Exit
NOTE
If the screen file in the source directory is password protected, HMI will
ask for a password. The user must enter the password for the screen file
of the source directory to perform the copy function.
Multi-Window File
This function enables the user to select the preferred startup screen file. The user only
needs to enter the password to access the startup screen setup function.
A-27
A-28
Up
Down
ENTER
Exit
NOTE
If the user turns on the machine and cannot find the existing startup
directory, HMI will open the internal screen file instead of changing the
path to the startup directory. When the user turns on the machine the
next time and finds the startup directory again, he can use it for startup of
the machine.
Firmware Update
This function enables the user to perform firmware update using an external disk (USB Disk
or SD Card).
Step 1
Select an external disk (USB Disk or SD Card) for making the memory
A-29
Step2
When the memory data are made successfully,a message appears for
confirmation.
Step3
Step4
Step5
A-30
is not
Select the source of the firmware to be updated. The firmware version after the
update will be displayed on the screen. Confirm the version and click "UPDATE"
to update the firmware.
Step6
Step7
A-31
Step8
Press OK" to restart HMI and finish the firmware update operation.
OK
Up
Down
Update
Exit
Encrypt
This function enables the user to encrypt the screen data file and set the maximum copy
times. It provides the user with a secure and flexible file protection mechanism.
A-32
Step 1
Step2
Use the edited screen to make memory data. Click [File][Make Ext.
Memory Data]and select an external disk (USB Disk or SD Card).
A-33
Select an external disk (USB Disk or SD Card) for making the memory
data and click OK.
When the memory data are made successfully, a message appears for
confirmation.
Step3
Step4
A-34
Enter the HMI system screen and select System Setting" File
Manager "File Encrypt". If the File Encrypt icon
shown in the File Manager, press
is not
Step5
Step6
Step7
A-35
After setting the copy times for a file, it cannot be copied any more
when the Copy Counter counts to 0.
Set a password for the copy, and this copy password will be requested
every time when the user copies a file.
Step8
Step9
A-36
Step10
Step11
Step1
After the encryption, the user can use the Copy File function to verify the
effectiveness of the copy times setting.
Enter the HMI system screen and select System Setting File
Manager Copy File".
A-37
A window appears to ask for the password. Enter the copy password to
copy the file.
Step2
Step3
A-38
The rest of the copy times will be displayed after the copy is performed.
The encrypted file cannot be copied any more when the copy times
count to 0.
Step4
Step5
A-39
OK
A-40
Up
Down
Encrypt
Exit
A-3 Upload/Download
Standard Mode
Set the COM Port to the DOPSoft protocol setting and wait for the DOPSoft to send the
command and packet for upload/download. If the PC COM Port of the software is used for
download ([Options] [Environment]) in the Standard mode, the user needs to enter the
system screen to select [Upload/Download] [Standard Mode]. The user also needs to
select COM 1 or COM 2 and wait for upload/download of the screen and recipe data. Refer
to Chapter 2, Section 2-2-8-8 Environment for more information.
A-41
A-42
COM 1 upload/download
Standard Mode
COM 1
COM 2
Left
Right
OK
Exit
A-43
Bypass Mode
With HMI as an intermediary, it will transmit the data from the source port to the destination
port.
A-44
Bypass Mode
13
21
Left
Right
OK
Exit
Transfer Mode
The Transfer mode is used to upload/download PLC DVP files that HMI uses.
A-45
After the DVP file needed is found, the user can upload it from PLC or download a file from
an external storage to PLC.
Transfer Mode
Upload
Download
A-46
Select the external storage device, TINA.DVP and click to download it. Then, the file will be
downloaded to thePLC.
A-47
Upload DVP file from PLC to SD card (the external storage device)
Select theDVP file from PLC communication port and click on Upload. The file will be
uploaded to SD card.
Upload the encrypting file, ISP from PLC to SD card (the external storage device)
Click Upload. A prompt message will pop up and ask users to enter the password.
A-48
If entering the correct password, the file will be successfully uploaded to SD card.
A-49
A-50
NOTE
The file name in the PLC to be uploaded or downloaded using this function
must be DVP-xxx.dvp. (xxx is a number between 000 and 999.)
When downloading PLC file, project password, sub-program password, POU
password, PLCpassword (note)is required by HMI.
When downloadingPLC file, program IDand PLC ID are both required. Also,
their ID has to be identical so can the users download the file. Or, both have
no ID to download the file. (When only one of them has ID, the file is not
allowed to be downloaded.)
When uploading the file, HMI will ask PLC ID andPLC password. Others such
as project password, sub-program password and POU password will be
deleted by HMI. When PLC has PLC password, the password will be
regarded as the project password during the uploading process.
For example, assuming that PLC password is set to 1234 and project
password is set to 5678 andHMI needs PLC password when uploading
the file, PLC password will be regarded as project password when
opening the file. That is to say, both PLC password and project password
will be 1234.
When applying the project edited by ISPSoft, please compile it before
downloading it to PLC. Otherwise, error message of "IL code size is
mismatch" will pop up.
If a PLC DVP file is to be uploaded as a new file, select New.." from the
window on the right side and press Upload.
The Transmission mode only support *.dvp upload/download. It does not
support the upload or download of subroutine/Ladder graphic code/SFC
graph/device name comment/row comment/non-volatile data/Label
structure/Symbol structure
Note: PLC password is the password set in System Security Setting
Password function of WPL and ISP software.
A-51
See the table below for the supported function of each version:
PLC Series
PLC
Limit login
password
attempts
Password
for
subroutine
Password for
PLC ID and
project
Program ID
(should be set in
Editing Software)
ES/EC/EC3
V8.20 (above)
V8.20(above)
V8.20(above)
SS
EX
V8.20(above)
V8.20(above)
V8.20(above)
SA
SX
V3.00(above)
V3.00(above)
V3.00(above)
SC
EH
EH2
V1.40(above)
V1.40(above)
V1.40(above)
SV
V1.40(above)
V1.40(above)
V1.40(above)
ES2/EX2
SS2
SA2
SX2
SE
MC
EH3
SV2
A-52
It is supported by
WPLSoft V2.20
and
ISPSoft V1.60
(above)
Password for
AH Series
PLC
Limit login
password
attempts
Password
for
subroutine
PLC ID and
Program ID
project
(should be set
in Editing
Software)
AHCPU510-EN
AHCPU510-RS2
AHCPU520-EN
It is supported
AHCPU520-RS2
by ISPSoft
AHCPU530-EN
AHCPU530-RS2
Upload
Download
Up
Down
Left
Right
OK
Exit
A-53
After switching the page, the user can see the HMI PLC Driver and external storage
information.
A-54
Next page
Exit
A-55
A-56
Right
OK
Exit
A-57
A-58
Network Test
The network test function is currently not enabled.
USB Test
The user only needs to connect the USB Host and Slave ends to HMI to perform the test
function. The USB Test Successful! message appears to confirm the completion of the
test, or the USB Test Fails! message appears to confirm the failure of the test.
A-59
A-60
ADC Test
The ADC test function is mainly used to test the touch force, touch XY and the voltage,
battery and temperature of the system.
Buzzer/LED Test
The Buzzer/LED test function is used to test the normal operation of the buzzer and
speaker as well as the function of the red/blue/green LED indicators.
Revision June, 2015
A-61
Draw a Line
This function is used to make sure there is no deviation between the start point to draw the
line and the actual display position on the screen. If the deviation is significant, the touch
panel must be re-calibrated.
Keys
The Keys test function is used to check the normal operation of the auxiliary keys for the
B07S201 and B07S211 models. After entering the test screen, press the auxiliary keys
A-62
and the corresponding keys on the screen will show UP DOWN. If there is no
response in spite of pressing the key, this hard key might be in a damaged state.
A-63
Appendix B Multi-Drop
Contents
B-1
Multi-Drop Example................................................................................................... 4
B-1
Appendix B Multi-Drop
Appendix B Multi-Drop
This chapter describes the multi-drop structure and limits as well as the multi-drop setup
steps.
The multi-drop concept refers to the connection of multiple HMIs to one or more PLCs.
When the Host HMI connects to a device, all Client HMIs can create a virtual connection on
the network. Hence, the user can operate a physical device using a single HMI in the
multi-drop mode. Up to 12 links are available in the multi-drop structure, and every added
port indicates a link. For example, if only one COM Port (using one PLC) is used, up to 12
HMIs can be connected. Assuming that each COM Port connects to one PLC (using three
PLCs), up to four HMIs can be connected. Refer to the figure below.
B-2
Appendix B Multi-Drop
The concept and limit of the multi-drop structure are described above. The setup and
operation in the multi-drop structure will be described below.
The multi-drop mode is not supported if Delta DVP Q-Link is selected for the controller.
B-3
Appendix B Multi-Drop
B-4
Appendix B Multi-Drop
HMI-HOST Setup
Create a project. Set the Controller to Delta DVP PLC" and select HOST for the
multi-drop mode.
B-5
Appendix B Multi-Drop
Create a numeric element on the editing screen and set the Write Address to "D100".
B-6
Appendix B Multi-Drop
Create a numeric display element and set the Read Address to "D200".
After the editing is completed, execute compile and download the screen the HMI.
B-7
Appendix B Multi-Drop
HMI-Client 1 Setup
Create a project. Set the Controller to Delta DVP PLC" and select Client for the
multi-drop mode. Enter 172.16.190.100 in the IP Address field. This is the HMI-HOST IP
address.
B-8
Appendix B Multi-Drop
B-9
Appendix B Multi-Drop
Create a numeric element on the editing screen and set the Write Address to "D200".
Create a numeric display element and set the Read Address to "D100".
After the editing is completed, execute compile and download the screen to the HMI.
B-10
Appendix B Multi-Drop
HMI-Client 2 Setup
Create a project. Set the Controller to Delta DVP PLC" and select Client for the
multi-drop mode. Enter 172.16.190.100 in the IP Address field. This is the HMI-HOST IP
address.
B-11
Appendix B Multi-Drop
Appendix B Multi-Drop
Create a numeric element on the editing screen and set the Write Address to "D200".
Create a numeric display element and set the Read Address to "D100".
After the editing is completed, execute compile and download the screen to the HMI.
After HMI-HOST, HMI-Client1 and HMI-Client2 are set up and downloaded to HMI, the user
can use any HMI to operate PLC. If D200 is used to input 36 in HMI-Client1, Both the D200
addresses of the HMI-HOST and HMI-Client2 will show 36. If D100 is used to input 99 in
HMI-HOST, both the D100 address of the HMI-Client1 and HMI-Client2 will show 99.
B-13
Appendix C Communication
Error Messages
If a communication error is detected, a corresponding error message will be shown on HMI
screen (Figure C-1-1). This chapter describes the meanings of communication error
messages displayed on HMI screen.
C-1
When HMI cannot communicate with the controller, to help debug, please refer to the
following table for the meanings of communication error codes and its corresponding error
messages.
Error Code
0x02
0x03
Reason
Trouble Shooting
Unknown
Noise Interference
Stronger anti-noise
interference
equipment, screened
from transfer cable.
NoResponse
0x05
0x06
CommandError
0x07
AddressError
0x08
ValueError
0x09
C-2
Communication Error
Messages
Controller busy
Read
error
PLC
Error Code
Communication Error
Messages
0x0A
NoCTS
Reason
Trouble Shooting
HMIStationNumberError
HMI station
error
PLCStationNumberError
UARTCommunicateFail
HMI
bottom
layer Please be sure COM
occur communication Port
could
use
error. COM Port did normally or not, or
not open or HMI work simplified
HMI
too busy to cause loading. For example,
COM Port abnormal delete ALARM or
situation.
MACRO command.
0x1A
RTCSYNCError
0x1B
Receive Error
0x0E
0x0F
0x10
MPI communication error codes are for Siemenss controllers such as S7-300 (Direct MPI)
series, S7-300 (Without PC Adaptor) series and S7-200 series. If the communication is
failed when connecting to Siemenss controllers, please refer to the following Table C-1-2 to
identify the error messages.
C-3
Error Code
Communication Error
Messages
Reason
Trouble Shooting
0x11
MPI_IDLE
(It is suitable for S7 300
- without PC adaptor,
S7 300 - Direct MPI or
S7-200)
0x12
MPI_SN_COLLID
(It is suitable for S7 300
- without PC adaptor,
S7 300 - Direct MPI or
S7-200)
0x14
MPI_NO_SC
(It is suitable for S7 300
- without PC adaptor,
S7 300 - Direct MPI or
S7-200)
0x18
MPINoResponse
The error message is
(It is suitable for S7 300 special for Siemens
C-4
or defective contact.
0x0B
NoResource
(Applicable for S7 300 - Siemens PLC error Simplified PLC
without PC adaptor, S7 message. It is PLC program, reduce
300 - Direct MPI and
loading too heavy.
loading.
S7-200)
0x0C
NoService
(Applicable for S7 300 - Siemens PLC error
without PC adaptor, S7 message. It is PLC
300 - Direct MPI and
loading too heavy.
S7-200)
Simplified PLC
program, reduce
loading.
0x3F
Read Error
(It is suitable for S7 300
- without PC adaptor,
S7 300 - Direct MPI or
S7-200)
C-5
Error Code
0x1F
Communication Error
Messages
Reason
Trouble Shooting
PLC must be
in Monitor Mode then
it could accept data
write command. This
error message only
have one time, due to
when HMI find out
Mode error, it will
change PLC mode to
Monitor mode
automatically.
Table C-1-3 Communication Error Code and Message for Omrons Controller
C-6
Appendix D
Write and Read Offset Address
This chapter describes the method of writing and reading offset address. The offset
address enables users to flexibly read and write the memory address without downloading
the screen again.
After setting the offset address:
Actual write-in address: write memory address + value that you write into the offset address
element [Data type].
Actual read-out address: read memory address + value that you read from the offset
address element [Data type].
If you have set up the write offset address but not the read offset address, the read offset
address will be regarded as the same as the write offset address.
NOTE:
Value in offset address has to be unsigned, which ranges from 0 to 65535.
If the button element does not have [Data Type] selection, its data type is Bit. Data type
for [Character display] and [Character entry] element is Word, not [String length].
Elements that can set writing memory address can set writing offset address. The read
offset address applies the same rule. Please refer to the following table for
writing/reading offset address which can be set by all elements.
D-1
Element
Button
Offset Address
Set
Write
Read
Reset
Momentary
Maintained
Multistate
Set Value
Set Constant
Increment
Decrement
Meter (1)(2)(3)
Bar
Pie (1)(2)(3)(4)
Graph
Display
Input
Analog
D-2
Differential
Display
Pipe (1)(2)(6)(7)
Indicator
List
Normal
Multistate indicator
Value range
indicator
Simple indicator
Numeric display
Character display
Prestored message
display
Moving sign
State graphic
Animated
Dynamic line
Dynamic rectangle
Dynamic ellipse
Numeric entry
Character entry
Barcode entry
Slider
ComboBox
ListBox
Users can select the internal memory or controller register as the Write / Read memory
address for elements. Curretnly, only data size of Word is supported. For example,
Revision June, 2015
C200 C255 in Deltas DVP PLC is not supported because its data size is Double
Word.
Memory Usage
Variable
Internal
Memory
PLC Register
Write Offset
Address
Read Offset
Address
Constant
D-3
Create the
Numeric
Entry
Element
Create the
Data
Display
Element
Step 1: Create three numeric entry elements and set the writing address
to $100, $200 and $300 respectively.
Step 1: Create five data display elements with the data type as Word
and set the address ranging from $1000 to $1004 in sequence.
Step 2: Create five data display elements with the data type as Double
Word and set the address ranging from $2000 to $2004 in sequence.
Step 1: Create five maintained button elements and set the address
ranging from $3000.0 to $3000.4 in sequence.
Step 1: Create one numeric entry element with the data type as Word
and set the address to $1000 and write offset to $100.
Step 2: Create one numeric entry element with the data type as Double
Word and set the Write address to $2000 and Write offset to $200.
Step 3: Create one maintained button element and set the Write address
to $3000.0 and Write offset to $300.
Create the
Maintained
Button
Setup
Offset
Address
D-4
When the Write offset address $100 is 0, the actual writing address of
numeric entry element is $1000.
Download
the Screen
to HMI
Result
when the
Data Type
is Word
D-5
D-6
When the Write offset address $200, the actual writing address of
numeric entry element is $2000.
Result
when the
Data Type
is Double
Word
D-7
When the Write offset address $300 is 0, the actual writing address of
maintained button element is $3000.0.
Result
when the
Data Type
is Bit
D-8
Appendix E DirectLink
Contents
E-1
E-1
Appendix E DirectLink
Appendix E DirectLink
Users can use Delta WPLSoft or Delta ISPSoft software to download / upload or monitor
the executing program of Delta PLC via the HMI.
DirectLink
PLC
RS232/RS485
USB/Ethernet
PC
(WPLSoft)
(ISPSoft)
HMI
NOTE:
DirectLink does not support the download function of PLC ES/EC2/EC3, but it supports
the upload function and online monitoring.
If you wish to apply DirectLink CDC Mode, the HMI firmware version has to be 3.0090,
V2.41 for WPLSoft and V2.05 for ISPSoft.
E-2
Appendix E DirectLink
communication between the HMI and Delta PLC works properly via RS232/RS485.
Your personal computer shall connect to the HMI via USB Cable.
Go to system directory > [System setting] > [MISC.] and set USBCommMode to 1.
Open Delta WPLSoft software, go to [Options] > [Communication Setting] dialog box.
Select [DirectLink(USB)] as the connection type and set Station Address the same as
the PLCs. The station address is set to 1 in this example.
E-3
Appendix E DirectLink
E-4
When the communication is ok, users can online monitor the PLC or upload /
download files.
Revision June, 2015
Appendix E DirectLink
E-5
Appendix E DirectLink
Before applying DirectLink, please make sure the communication between the HMI
and Delta PLC works properly via RS232/RS485. Your personal computer shall
connect to the HMI via USB Cable.
Go to the system directory > [System setting] > [MISC.] and set USBCommMode to 2.
Open Delta WPLSoft software, go to [Options] > [Communication Setting] dialog box.
Appendix E DirectLink
Please set the station address the same as the PLCs. It is set to 1 in this
example.
E-7
Appendix E DirectLink
E-8
When the communication is ok, users can online monitor the PLC or upload /
Revision June, 2015
Appendix E DirectLink
download files.
E-9
Appendix E DirectLink
Before applying DirectLink, please make sure the communication between the HMI
and Delta PLC works properly via RS232/RS485. Your personal computer and the HMI
shall share the same Ethernet address.
Open Delta WPLSoft software and go to [Options] > [Communication Setting] dialog
box.
Please select [DirectLink (Ethernet)] as the connection type and specify the HMIs IP
address. 192.168.123.103 is the IP address in this example.
E-10
Appendix E DirectLink
Search the module by entering the specified IP address. Users shall firstly enter
the HMIs IP address, 192.168.123.103 for example. Then, click OK.
E-11
Appendix E DirectLink
E-12
Appendix E DirectLink
When the communication is ok, click on the searched HMI before proceeding to
online monitor the PLC or upload / download files.
E-13
Appendix E DirectLink
E-14
Before applying DirectLink, please make sure the communication between the HMI
and Delta PLC works properly via RS232/RS485. Your personal computer shall
connect to the HMI via USB Cable.
Go to the system directory > [System setting] > [MISC.] and set USBCommMode to 1.
Enable COMMGR and click on [Add] before enabling Delta ISPSoft software.
Select [DirectLink (USB)] as the connection type and check [USB/Disk Mode] as the
HMI USB Mode.
Appendix E DirectLink
Open Delta ISPSoft software and go to [Tools] > [Communication Settings] dialog box.
E-15
Appendix E DirectLink
E-16
When the setting is complete, please go to [PLC] > [System Information] to check
if communication is established successfully.
Appendix E DirectLink
When the communication is ok, users can online monitor the PLC or upload /
download files.
E-17
Appendix E DirectLink
Before applying DirectLink, please make sure the communication between the HMI
and Delta PLC works properly via RS232/RS485. Your personal computer shall
connect to the HMI via USB Cable.
Go to the system directory > [System setting] > [MISC.] and set USBCommMode to 2.
Enabling COMMGR and click on [Add] before enabling Delta ISPSoft software.
Select [DirectLink (USB)] as the connection type, set [CDC Mode] as the HMI USB
mode and set COM Port to COM3, which can be found in Computer Management.
E-18
Appendix E DirectLink
Open Delta ISPSoft software and go to [Tools] > [Communication Settings] dialog box.
E-19
Appendix E DirectLink
E-20
When the setting is complete, please go to [PLC] > [System Information] to check
if communication is successful.
Appendix E DirectLink
When the communication is ok, users can online monitor the PLC or upload /
download files.
E-21
Appendix E DirectLink
E-22
Before applying DirectLink, please make sure the communication between the HMI
and Delta PLC works properly via RS232/RS485. Your personal computer and the HMI
shall share the same Ethernet address.
Enable CMMGR and click [Add] before opening Delta ISPSoft software.
Select [DirectLink (Ethernet)] as the connection type. Then, select Search or Add the
HMIs IP address that you wish to connect. Here we enter 192.168.123.26 as the
example.
Appendix E DirectLink
Open Delta ISPSoft software and enter [Tools] > [Communication Settings] dialog box.
E-23
Appendix E DirectLink
E-24
When the setting is complete, go to [PLC] > [System Information] to check if the
communication is successful.
Appendix E DirectLink
When the communication is ok, users can online monitor the PLC or upload /
download files.
E-25